IN  MEMORIAM- 
BERNARD  MOSES 


(/  -J  -^ 


ITALIAN 


L     I 
>         • 


CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR.. 


y[jj^./r         kAMAJUlL    ^'^S^-^-iMLU>^^ 


By   L.   B,   CUORE. -^-a'  -^  -. 


FIFTH  EDITION,  REVISED 


BOSTON: 
8.  R.  URBINO,  14  BROMFIELD  STREET. 

NEW  YORK: 
LEYPOLDT  &   HOLT ;    F.  W.  CIIRISTERN. 

1870. 


B€RNARD  MOSES 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1864,  by 

S.   R.    URBINO, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  District  of  Massachusetts. 


Presswork  by  John  Wilson  and  Son. 


'  ) 


rJ 


PREFACE. 


This  Grammar,  based  on  that  of  Robello  and  others, 
claims  to  be  all  that  is  necessary  for  the  study  of  the 
elements  of  the  Italian  lano^uas^e. 

Great  pains  have  been  taken  to  present  the  verbs  in  a 
clear,  concise  manner  ;  and  though,  for  the  sake  of  easy 
comparison,  they  are  placed  at  the  end  of  the  book,  the 
student  is  requested  to  study  a  part  of  them  with  every 
lesson. 

It  is  hoped  that  this  little  work  will  fill  the  place  for 
which  it  is  intended. 

THE   AUTHOR. 


7749M 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


Paob 

Italian  Gramimar 1 

CHAPTER  I. 

Pronunciation 1 

Etyimology 15 

CHAPTER  n. 
The  Article c    .    .     16 

CHAPTER  m. 
Union  of  the  Articles  and  Prepositions 21 

CHAPTER  IV. 
The  Noun 26 

CHAPTER  V. 
The  Plural  of  ITouns  and  Adjectives 32 

CHAPTER  VI. 
The  Cases  of  Nouns 40 

CHAPTER  Vn. 
Pronouns 46 

CHAPTER  Vin. 
Pronouns:   Personal  and  Conjunctive 65 

[y] 


Vi  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  IX.  PAOB 

The  Adjective 61 

CHAPTER  X. 
Adjectives  :   their  Compahatives »    •      67 

CHAPTER  XI. 
The  Adjectives  :   Superlatives •      72 

CHAPTER  Xn. 

AUGMENTATIVES   AND   DiMHSfUTIVES 76 

CHAPTER  Xm. 
The  Numeral  Adjectives •    •    •    •      82 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Relatr^e  Pronouns 89 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Possessive  Adjective  Pronouns .    •    •      96 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Demonstrative  Adjective  Pronouns 103 

CHAPTER  XVII.     • 
Indefinite  Adjective  Pronouns •"•••109 

CHAPTER  XVHL 
Indefinite  Adjective  Pronouns  (continued) 115 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
The  Prepositions,  Bi,  A,  Da 121 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  viJ 

CHAPTER  XX.  r^oH 

The  Prepositions  Con,  In,  Per 129 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

The  PREPOgiTiONS  (continued) 135 

CHAPTER  XXn. 

The  Verbs  Essere  and  Avtre 141 

CHAPTER  XXm. 

The  Verbs  aj^td  their  Syntax 146 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

The  Verb:   The  Subjunctive  Mood 153 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

The  Infinitive,  Gerund,  Present  and  Past  Participles  159 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

The  Verbs  Anddre,  Bare,  Fare,  and  Stare 166 

CHAPTER  XXVn. 

Adverbs 171 

CHAPTER  XXVm. 

Conjunctions  and  Interjections 179 

VERBS. 

Auxiliary  Verbs 186 

Regular  Verbs 188 

Irregular  Verbs 214 

Defective  Verbs 246 

Proverbs 259 

Idioms » 263 

voc^vbulary 266 

Index 275 


•     •    t       •■  • 


ITALIAN   GRAMMAR. 


Italian  Gramihar  teaches  the  principles  of  the  ItaHan 
language.     These  relate,  — 

1.  To  its  written  characters  ; 

2.  To  its  pronunciation  ; 

3.  To  the  classification  and  derivation  of  its  words ; 

4.  To  the  construction  of  its  sentences ; 

5.  To  its  versification. 

The  first  part  is  called  Orthography  ;  the  second, 
Orthoepy  ;  the  third,  Etymology  ;  the  fourth.  Syntax  ; 
and  the  fifth.  Prosody. 


CHAPTER  I. 

PEONUNCIATION. 

The  Italian  alphabet  consists  of  twenty-two  letters  :  — 

A,  a ;  B,  b  ;  C,  c ;  D,  d  ;  E,  e  ;  F,  f ;  G,  g ;  H,  h  ;  I,  i ;  J,  j  ; 
L,  1;  M,  m;  N,  n ;  O,  o;  P,  p;  Q,  q;  R,  r;  S,  s ;  T,  t;  U,  u  ; 
V,  V  ;  Z,  z. 

The  letters  Jc,  iv,  x,  and  y,  sometimes  occur,  but  only 
in  words  derived  from  foreign  sources. 

SOUNDS    OF    THE    ITALIAN    LETTERS. 

In  Italian,  every  vowel  must  be  distinctly  sounded. 
The  five  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o,  7i,  are  thus  pronounced  :  — 

1 


2 


IT^O^IAN    GKAIVIMAR. 


SOUNDS    OF   THE   VOWELS. 


A,  as 

E,  as 

I,  as 

O,  as 

U,  as 


a 

ee 

o 

ou 


in  father ; 
in  made ; 
in  eel; 
in  Rome ; 
in  sowp. 


REMAllKS. 


E  has  two  different  sounds,  —  open  and  close  : 

E  close,  as  in  grey,  pain  : 
Tema,  fear. 
Venti,  twenty. 
Mela,  apple. 


E  open,  as  in  mate,  name  : 
T'ema,  subject. 
Venti,  winds. 
Avena,  oats. 


O  has  likewise  two  sounds,  —  open  and  close  : 


0  open,  as  in  cord  : 
Botta,  blow. 
Rosa,  rose. 


0  close,  as  in  bone  : 
Botte,  cask. 
Ora.  hour. 


To  become  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  open  and 
close  sounds  of  E  and  O,  three  things  are  especially 
necessary:    1.  Practice ;    2.  Peactice  ;    3.  PRACTICE. 


sounds  of  the  consonants. 


The  greater  portion  of  the   consonants  in  the  Italian 
language  are  pronounced  as  in  English, 
are  the  exceptions  :  — 


The  following 


c  and  ff  before  e 
of  speech.     It  is 


C,  which  takes  the  sound  of  ch   before  i  or  e:   otherwise  it 

sounds  like  k. 
H,  which  is  used  only  to  harden  the  sound  of 

and  ^,  and  to  distinguish  different  parts 

never  sounded. 
J    sounds  like  ee. 
Q   is  never  used  without  u,  and  is  sounded  like  q  in  the  English 

word  quire. 
R,  which  is  sounded  as  if  rolled  on  the  point  of 
Z,   which  is  sounded  like  ts  and  ds. 
L,  M,  N,  and  R  are  liquids,  or  semivowels. 


the  tongue. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


COMPOUND  SOUNDS. 


Ch  i 

sounds 

Gh 

» 

Gn 

jj 

Gli 

5) 

Sci 

)) 

SCE 

J) 

SCH 

?) 

like  k  in  English. 

hard  as  in  English. 

like  71  in  the  word  onion. 

like  //  in  the  word  William. 

like  SHE. 

like  SHA. 

like  SK. 

Cc,  followed  by  the  vowels  e,  i,  is  pronounced  like  tch  in  the 
English  word  match. 

Gg,  followed  by  e,  «',  sounds  like  dg  in  the  word  lodge. 


The  exact  sound  of  the  letters  can  be  obtained  only  by 
hearing  good  pronunciation,  and  by  repeating  after  the 
teacher,  as  almost  every  language  has  some  sounds  which 
can  only  be  learned   by  practising  with  an  experienced 
teacher. 

But,  as  an  Italian  teacher  is  not  always  to  be  found,  we 
shall  endeavor  to  give  a  few  concise  and  practical  rules, 
by  which  the  student  may  make  himself  familiar  with  the 
language  of  Dante,  Alfieri,  Boccaccio,  Ariosto,  Tasso, 
Petrarca,  MafFei,  Manz6ni,  and  a  host  of  other  writers, 
whose  works  will  never  cease  to  form  part  of  the  belles 
lettres  of  every  country. 

Diphthongs,  as  we  understand  them  in  English,  do  not 
exist  in  Italian.  Dr.  Bachi,  in  his  excellent  Grammar, 
speaks  gf  diphthongs  and  triphthongs,  by  which  he  means 
such  a  blending  of  the  vowels  that  each  is  but  faintly 
lieard. 

The  apostrophe  (')  indicates  that  a  vowel  is  omitted ; 
as,  Voro,  instead  of  lo  dro,  the  gold ;  deW  dnhna,  instead 
of  della  dnima,  of  the  soul  ;   &c. 

The_^ra\'e_accent  (')  i^s  jused  on  the  last  vowels  of 
some  words  ;  as,  cittd  (formerly  cittade)  :  or  as  a  termina- 
tion which  must  be  pronounced  sharply;  as,  avrd,  amoy 
resso. 


ITALIAN   GRAMMAR. 


EXERCISE   IN   PRONUNCIATION. 

A Casa,  musica,  danza. 

A Felicita,  dara,  sara. 

E  (close) Bene,  pedone. 

E  (open) Tema,  pena,  erba. 

J Principj,  proverbj,  compendj. 

I Inimico,  clbo,  ripieno. 

O  (close) Corso,  amore,  fonte. 

O  (open) Povero,  tolto,  popolo. 

U Duo,  tiio,  siio. 

Ce Cento,  cece,  fellce. 

Ci Pacifico,  dieci,  cibo. 

Ch Chiodo,  chi,  che. 

Ga,  Go,  Gu  ....  Gamba,  pago,  gusto. 

Ge,  Gi Germano,  digito,  legione. 

Gn Campagna,  magnetico. 

Gli  (liquid)    ....  Figlio,  figlia,  gli,  meglio. 

S  (strong) Santo,  studio,  senso. 

S  (soft) Guisa,  casa,  cosa. 

ScA,  Sco,  Scu    .     .     .  Scabro,  scolare,  scuola. 

ScE,  Sci Scena,  scinto,  fascia. 

Zz  {z  like  ts)       ...  Nozze,  fazzoletto. 

Zz  {z  like  ds)      .     .     .  Azzurro,  mezzo. 

REMARKS. 

Double  consonants  must  be  very  flistinctly  pronounced, 
thus:  im?nenso,  im-ynen-so ;  innocente,  in-7io-cente ;  &Q.. 

Jivery  syllable  must  contain  a  vowel,  and  cannQt^cceiye 
more  than  one  consonant  afler  it  in  the  same  syllable, 
but  may  be  preceded  by  one,  two,  or  three.  All  Italian 
words  end  with  a  vowel,  except  z'Z,  the ;  con^  witli ;  non, 
not ;  per^  for ;  and  a  few  others.  The  final  vowel  is, 
however,  very  often  dropped  for  euphony. 

READING    EXERCISE    IN   PRONUNCIATION. 

To  impress  the  following  exercise  on  the  memory  of      k 
the  pupil,  many  English  words  are  omitted.      The   pupil 
is  required  to  fill  them  up  :   this  can  be  done  with  the  help 
of  the  dictionary. 


PEONUNCIATION.  5 

LA    FANCIULLA    DI   BUON     i'nDOLE. 
THE   GIP.L  OF   GOOD   DISPOSITION. 

La  Marchesa  Giulia  andava  in  carrettella   a    far  visita   alia 
The  went  little  carriage  to  make  to  the 

sorella    die    stiiva    in    villa,  e    aveva    con    se    solamente    una 
sister       who       was  country,  and    had       with   her  only  a 

cameriera     e  uno  staffiere.    Una  ruota  della  carrettella  si  riippe, 
chambermaid  and  a       footman.  wheel  of  the   ^^   ''        :^       broke, 

e    benche    per    budna    sorte    non    rimanesse    ferito      nessuno, 
although      by        good      fortune  remained     wounded      no  one, 

bisogno  scendere,  e      adattarsi      di     andare  a  piedi  ad  un 

it  was  necessary  to  descend       (adapt)  prepare  to  go     on   foot 

villaggio   lontano    di      li    quasi     tre     miglia.        La   Marchesa 

distant     from  there  almost    three      miles. 

mando  innanzi  il  servitore  per   fare      avvisare    un    carrozziere 
sent        before    the     servant      for  to  make  to  give  notice       carriage-maker 

clie      venisse    ad  accomodare  la  carrettella ;   il  cocchiere  rimase 
which  should  come  mend  coachman    stayed 

con    i    cavc411i,  e  la  signora  prese  a  braccio  la  cameriera,  e  si 

with  the    horses  lady        took  arm 


avvio. 


set  forward. 

Era   sul  mezzogiorno,  e  il  sole  dava  lore   molta  noja ; 

It  was  mid-day  sun    gave  to  them  much  inconvenience; 

dimodoche  la  signora,  non  avvezza  a  camminare  a  piedi,     presto 
so  that  accustomed  walk  on  foot    vciy  soon 

presto  si  stracco,  e  per   riposarsi    ebbe  ad   uscir   di  stnida,   ed 
was  tired         for      to  repose       had  leave  street 

entnire  in  un  prato   dove     erano    delle  querce.    La    si    mise    a 
enter  meadow  where  there  were  of  the     oaks.     There  she  put  herself 

sedere    all'  ombra   sotto  uno    di    quegli    alberi,    e    guardo    con 
sit      to  the    shade      under    one      of      those         trees  observed 

piacere  il  bel  prospetto    die    le  era  dinanzi.     A  un  tratto  clla 
pleasure         fine      prospect     which  her  was      before.  all  at  once        she 

vide  passar   pel    prato  una    ragazzina    con  un  fjistt'llo  di  legna 
saw    to  pass  through  little  girl  faggot     of    wood 


m  capo, 
ou  head. 


1» 


6  ITALIAN    GRAMIVIAR. 

Ragazzina  piu     bella      di   quella   non  era  mai    passata  sott' 
Girl        more  beautiful   than     that  was    ever  before 

occhio  alia  Marchesa.    Le  sue  carni  parevano  latte  e  r6se,  i  suoi 
eye  her   cheeks      appeared     milk       roses        her 

grand'  occhi  celesti  erano  pieni  di  dolcezza,  e  sotto  una    pezzuola 
great      eyes       blue      were       full  sweetness      under         handkerchief 

di    cotone   giallo,  annodata  intorno   al   capo,    venivan    fuori    le 
cambric    yellow,         tied  about     the    head,         came  out 

ciocche  de'  suoi  biondi  capelli,  e  davan  grazia    vieppiu     a  quella 
tufts  fair         hair  gave      grace     much  more  that 

bella   fisonomia.       La    signora    non    aveva    figli,    e     se      ne 

had      children        herself  of  it 

addolorava.     A  veder  dunque  quella  cara  fanciullina,  non     pote 
grieved.  see         then  dear  girl  was  able 

a  meno  d'invidiarelamadresiia;  e  disse  alia  cameriera  di  andare 
at   least         to  envy  said  *        go 

a  chiamar  la  bambina  e  condurgliela.    Questa  si  avvicino  con  un 
call  child  conduct  her  to  her.  advanced 

contegno    modesto    ma    franco,     poso     il  suo   fastello,   fece    un 
countenance  but  put  down  made 

inchino  alia  Marchesa,  e    le    domando    se   avea    qualcosa    da 
bow  to  her      asked         if  she  had  something      to 

comandarle.       Niente,  rispose  la  dama  ;  voglio  soltanto   parlare 
command  of  her.    Nothing,   answered         lady ;       I  wish       only         to  speak 

un  po'  con  te :     mettiti    a  sedere  qui  sulF  erba,  e  prima  di  tutto 
little         thee :  put  thyself  sit       here  grass        before  all 

dimmi  come  tu      ti      chiami  ?       Rosa   Liici,  al   comando   suo. 
tell  me    how  thou  thyself    callest?  at  3^our. 

II  babbo  e  la  mamma    li    hai     vivi  ?    II  mio  babbo  e  morto  ch'  e 
papa  them  hast  thou  alive  ?     my  is    dead 

un  pezzo ;  la  mia  mamma  ha  me  sola  e  si  sta  qui  in  un  villaggio 

has         alone  is    here 

vicino.     M'  immagino  che  non  siate  molto  feli'ci.     Oh,  perche  ? 
near.  I  imagine  maybe    very     happy.  why? 

Noi      ci      vogliamo  bene,  e  siamo  contente.     Ma     mi       pare 
We  ourselves       wish  well  are  to  me  it  seems 

che  voi  siete  molto  povere  ! 

you    are      very        poor! 

Noi        ci        guadagniamo   il    pane   con    le    nostre     fatiche: 
We  to  ourselves  gain  the   bread  the      our  labors: 


PRONUNCIATION.  7 

abbiamo  delle  galline   che   ci  fanno  le  uova ;  e  la  mia  mamma 

we  have      some      hens     which         make  eggs 

oggi    e  andata   al    paese  a    venderle,  ed  i  quattrini  si  serbano 
to-day  is      gone    to  the  country       to  sell  them        the     money  serves 

per  la  pigione  di  casa.     E  in  che  lavorate  voi  per  guadagnarvi 
rent  house.  work       you  gain 

da  mangiare  ?     Nell'   estate  noi  andiamo  a  sarchiare,  e  dopo  la 
to  eat  ?  In  the  summer  we  go         to        weed  after 

mietitiira  andiamo   a   spigolare.       Ma   se  durate   tanta    fatica, 
harvest  glean.  But     if    endure  so  much  fatigue, 

mangiate   male   e   andate   mal  vestite,  come  potete  voi  essere 
you  eat       badly  go  ill      dressed,      how         can      you        be 

contente  ?      Noi    a    tutte    queste    cose   non       ci         pensiamo 
We    (of      all  these      things    not    ourselves        think 

nemmeno ;    quando   s'    ha  fame   si   ringrazia  Iddio  di  avere  di 
at  all ;  when     one  has  hunger  one     thanks         God  to  have  of 

che  satollarsi,  e   ogni  cosa  par  buona.      Se  noi  non  abbiamo 
what      satisfy  every  thing  seems    good.  If     we     not         have 

vestiti  belli,  siarao  pure  coperte  e  decenti ;      sono  solamente  i 
clothes     fine      we  are       yet     covered  are  only 

})igri  che  vanno  sempre  strappati  e  siidici ;   la  mamma  pensa  a 
lazy     who       go         always        ragged  dirty  thinks 

rassettare  le  nostre  robicciole,  ed  io    gia    comincio  ad  aiutarla. 
to  repair  our  clothes  I  already     begin  to  help  her. 

Rosa,  vuoi  venir  meco    a   quel  villaggio  ?    Volontieri :  tanto  la 
wilt      come  with  me  to     that  Willingly        whilst 

mia  mamma  fino  a    stassera    non    torna;    ma     bisogna     che 
until        this  evening  returns  it  is  necessary 

intanto     io  porti  a  casa  mia  questo  fastello.     E  se  lo  comprassi 
meanwhile        carry       house    my  if    it    should  buy 

.0  ?     Allora   poi !    ma    costa  sei    soldi,  veh !     Eccoti    sei   soldi 
I?  Then  but     costs     six     cents,    hum!      Behold 

(I'ispose  la  Marchesa  alzandosi),  posa  li    il  tuo  fastello,    e  vieni 

rising,  put  there  como 

con  noi.    Ma  s'  ella  1'  ha  comprato,     bisogna      ch'  io  gliclo  porti 
But  if  you  have  it     bought,      it  is  necessary  tliat    I         it        carry 

(e    voleva     ripigliarlo),     ma  la  Marchesa  glielo  impedi,  e  prcse 

she  wished  to  take  it  again  prevented       took 

ia  via  del  villaggio,  dove  arrivata,  entro  in  un  albergo  {hotel) 
way  where  entered 

d'  apparenza  assai  decente. 
appearance   enough 


8  ITALI^^   GKAJiOIAR. 

Lo   staffiere   venne   a    dirle    clie    per     accomodare    la    sua 
The    footman       came         to  tell  her  mend 

carrozza  gli  bisognavano  cinque  ore.      La  Marchesa  ordino   il 
needed  five     hours.       -  ordered 

pranzo,  V  ostessa  la  condiisse  in  una  stanza  pulita  ove  essa  entro 
dinner  hostess         conducted  room      clean  where  she   entered 

insieme  con  le  altre  due;    diede  poi  segretamente  degll   ordini 
together  other    two;       gave    then         secretly  of  the     orders 

alia  cameriera  che    usci    per  eseguirli.     In  questo  frattempo  la 

went  out  execute.  meanwhile 

Marchesa  continuo  a  parlare   con  Rosina,  e  si  trovo   contenta 

to  speak  found 

sempre  piu  del  candore  delle  sue  risposte,  e  sopratiitto  della  sua 
always    more  candor  her     answers  above  all 

tenerezza  per  la  propria  madre. 
tenderness  own 

La  cameriera  torno  carica  de'  vestiti  che  aveva  comprati  nel 
returned  laden  clothes  she  had     bought 

villaggio;    spoglio,  per  drdine  della   padrona,  la   picclna,  e  le 
imdressed,    by      order  mistress  little  one 

mlse  indosso  una  camicia  di   cotone,  un  sottanino  ricaraato,  e 
put     upon  her  shirt  cambric  petticoat     embroidered 

una  vestina   di   seta  color  verde    chiaro,  con   un  ornamento  di 
govra  silk  green       light  ornament 

merletti   color  di  rosa ;   poi  le  acconcio  i  capelli,  colle  trecce  le 
lace  then  dressed  hair  braids 

formo  una  specie  di  corona  sul  capo,  e  vi  pose  una  ghirlanda  di 
formed  sort  crown  head  put  garland 

fiori.       Rosa   dapprima   faceva   la  ritrosa,   e    si   vergognava   a 
flowers.  at  first  made  shy  was  ashamed 

vedersi  vestire   da  signora ;  ma  poi,    siccome    era    di  naturale 
to  see      to  dress  '  then,         as         she  was  by 

molto  compiacente,  si  sottomise  a  tutto.      Quando    fu     assettata 
very       complaisant  submitted  all.  When   she  was  fitted  out 

per  bene,  la  Marchesa  la  condiisse  davanti  alio  specchio,  e        le 

fully  her  conducted      before      her       mirror    and  to  her 

disse   che     si         guardasse.      La  picclna  si  guardo  sott'  occhio 
said      that  herself  she  should  look  at.         little  one       regarded 

n^llo  specchio,  sorrise     ed     arrosi. 

smiled     and  blushed. 


PRONUNCIATION.  9 


V 


Che   ne       dici       eh!   disse  la  Marchesa ;    non  ci      a^resti 
What  to  it  sayest  thou  -would  have 

gusto  di  star  sempre  vestita  in  questo   modo?     Si;  ma  come  si 
taste  to  be  always     dressed  manner?     Yes  how 

pu6  con  questi  abiti  andar  a  tagliar  1'  erba  e  sarchiare  ?    Vedi,  se 
can  clothes  to  go  cut  grass         to  weed  ?  See      if 

tu  fossi  la  mia  figliuola,  com'  io  lo  desidererei,  tu  non  faticheresti 
thou  wert  daughter      as      I    it    should  desire  fatigue  thyself 

piu    in   questo    modo ;     tu    impareresti   a   leggere,  scrivere,   e 
more  shouldst  learn  to  read  write 

cantare ;    e      ti    rimarrebbe  anche  tempo  per  divertirti ;   io  ti 
to  sing  to  thee  would  remain     even       time  to  amuse 

menerei  a  spasso  in  carrozza,  e   ti      farei      giocare   in   tante 

would  lead  would  make  to  amuse       so  many 

maniere.         A  me,  la  mia  mamma  ha  detto  sempre  che  Dio       sa 
manners  (ways).  To  me  has   said     always    that  God  knows 

quel  che     fa.        Dio  ha  voluto  che  ella    fosse    Marchesa,  ed  io 
what  he  does.  wished  you  should  be 

lina   contadina,    ma  io  preghero  Dio  di    darle    una  figliolina,  ed 

will  pray  to  give  you 

ella  e  tanto  buona  che  il  signore  la      fara      contenta. 
vou  are    so  lord     you  will  make 

La   signora    Giulia  non  si  saziava  di  accarezzare  Rosina: 

satisfied  to  caress 

faceva   ammirare  alia  cameriera  la  gentilezza  dei  suoi  modi,  le 
she  made     admire  gentleness 

grazie  della  persona ;   e  questa,  per  far  la  corte  alia  padrona  la 

she  to  please        the  her 

lodava   anche  piii   di  lei,  e  la  Rosina  ascoltava  queste  Iddi  tutta 
praise  than  she  heard 

confusa.      Vennero  ad  avvisare  che  il   pranzo  era   all'  ordine: 
They  came  inform  dinner     was  ready 

la  Marchesa  passo  in  una  piccola   sala   con  Rosa  per  mano,  e  la 
passed        into  a    little     parlor  hand        he 

fece     mettere   a   sedere   a   tavola    accanto    a  se.     La  povera 
caused     to  put  sit  table      at  the  side 

fanciuUina    si   vergognava    talmente,   che    quasi   piangeva   ma 

bashful  so  almost      to  weep 

vedendosi  trattatta  con  tanta  bonta,  comincio  a  rassiciirarsi  un 
seeing  herself  treated  kindness      began  re-assure 

poco. 


10  ITALIAN    GllAIUMAR. 

La   minestra    le    parve    si   buona,   che   ne    maiigio    assai; 
soup       to  her  seemed  of  it    she  eat      enough 

e  il    lesso  c.lie  venne  dopo,    le    parve  una  vivanda  sqnisita ;  e  si 
boiled  meat  came     after  to  her  seemed  food        exquisite 

sazio     afFatto ;    dimodoche,  quando  vennero  in  tavola  gli  altri 
satiated  so  that  when  came  the   other 

piatti  per  quanto  la  Signora  la  pregasse,  non  pote  piu  mangiare. 

dishes  begged  was  able  to  eat. 

11  Vino  poi  non    vi    fu   modo  di  farglielo  bere ;    appena  Y  ebbe 
wine  then  there  was  to  make   to  drink;     hardly         had 

ella  assaggiato    si  riscosse,  e  chiese  che  per  carita  le      dessero 
she        tasted  shuddered  asked  for  charity  her  should  give 

deir  acqua.     Allorche  ella  vide  venire  le  frutta  e  i  dolci,  mando 
When  saw   to  come  fruit  sweets    uttered 

un  grido   di   sorpresa.      Un   altro   pranzo !    eh !      Ella  poteva 
cry  surprise.  dinner  could 

chiamare  tiitti  i   ragazzi   del  villaggio,    v'  era   da  sfaraarli  tiitti 
call  children  there  was         to  satisfy 

Ebbene   Rosa,   se   tu     viioi    venire   a    star   con   me,  tu    sarai 
Well  if   thou  wishest  to  come  to  be  shalt  be 

trattata   tutti   i  giorni  come  oggi,  e  anche  meglio.      Per  me, 

treated  days         as       to-day  even       better. 

Signora    mia,      farei      tutto     per     compiacerla;     ma    egli    e 
I  would  do  to  please  j'ou 

impossibile  ch'  io     lasci      la  mia  mamma,  che  non  ha  altro  che 
should  leave  has  other  than 

me  per  ajutarla  e  vegliarla    quand'  e  malata.      Io  paghero  una 
to  help  her    to  care  for  her   when  sick.  will  pay 

donna   perche   la  serva.     Si,  ma  qu^sta  donna  non   le      vorra 
woman         for        her  serve  (that  she  may  serve  her).  would  wish 

bene    come    io    gliene    voglio    e    la     servira     solamente   per 
well         as  to  her        wish  her  would  serve         only 

guadagnare.     La  mia  mamma  ha   preso    ciira  di  me  quand'  io 
to  gain.  taken      care 

era  piccina;  ora  ch'  io  sono  grande,  non  voglio  abbandonarla ; 

I  wish 

quando  ella   sara   vecchia,  io  lavorero  per    darle    da  mangiare 
will  be       old  will  work  to  give  her  to  eat 

edme  ella  faceva  per  me  quando  io  non  mi  poteva  guadagnare  il 
as  did  was  able        to  gain       the 


PRONUNCIATION.  11 

pdne.      La  Marchesa  era  intenerita    dai    sentimenti   di  questa 
bread.  affected     by  the 

fanciulla,  e  non  ebbe  piu  il   coraggio  d'  insistere :  le  permise  di 

had  permitted 

riprendere  la  sua  vesticciola,  e  tornar  dalla  mamma,  die  doveva 
to  take  again  dress  return  ought 

cominciare  ad  essere  in  pensiero  per  l^i.     Innanzi  di    lasciarla 
to  begin        to        be  thought      for  her.         Before         allowing  her 

partire,      1'  abbraccio,   ed   empi  le  sue  tasche  di  quei  pasticcini 
to  depart,   she  embraced  her  filled  pockets  cakes 

e  di  quelle  pastine  che  essa  non  aveva  neppure  assaggiate. 
that       pastry  had       not  even  tasted. 

La  Rosina    pareva    un  uccelletto  scappato  dalle  mani  di  un 
appeared  like  a         bird  escaped  hands 

ragdzzo  che  lo  volesse  ingabbiare :  aveva  pr^so  i  suoi       zoccoli 
boy       who  it     wished       •  to  cage :         she  had  taken  wooden  shoes 

in  mano,  e  cosi  scalza  correva  tanto  lesta,  che  la   cameriera,  a 
hand  so  barefooted     ran  so     quickly  to 

cui   la  marchesa  aveva  comandato  di  tenerle  dietro,     duro  fatica 
whom  keep  found  it  difficult 

a  non  la  perder  di  vista.     Essa   nonostante    arrive  al  casolare 
her   to  lose  from  sight.  notwithstanding  arrived  house 

quasi   subito   dopo    Rosa,   la     trovo     nelle    braccie   della   sua 
soon       after  her  she  found   in  the        arms 

mamma,  alia   quale   ella   raccontava  che  una  bella  signora  la 

related 

Toleva      condurre      con   se,  promettendole    vestiti    belli  e  tre 
wished        to  take  her       with  her,       promising  her       clothes      fine       three 

pranzi  ogni  giorno.      lo  nondimeno  son  venuta   via  (aggiungeva 
dinners  every     day.  nevertheless    am       come  added 

^lla),  perche  sebbene  io  voglia  bene  a  quella  signora,  la*  non  e 
although  wish      well 

poi  la  mia  mamma, 
then 

La  cameriera  disse  a  quella  contadina  che  dlla  sua  padr6na 

told 

era    piaciuto    tanto    il   buon   cuore   della   Rosina,  che   voleva 
pleased  wished 

•  La  for  eWa,  she. 


12  ITALIAN   GRAMMAE. 

assicurarle      una  pensione  di  dugento  franchi,  e  al  suo  ritorno 

to  secure  to  her  two  hundred  francs  return 

dlla  citta  ne  avr^bbe  segnato  il  contratto :   le  lascio  1'  indirlzzo, 

would  have    to  sign  she  left  her        direction 

e  le  raccomando  di  venirla  a  vedere  la  domenica  prossima,  e 
advised  to  come  to  see  Sunday  next 

menar   con   se  la  Rosina.     La  donna  glielo  promise, 
to  bring  with  her  it  to  her  promised. 

La  Marchesa  Giiilia,  benche  non  fosse   avvezza     a      sentirsi 

although  accustomed    to  hear  herself 

contradire,  sicc6me  d'  altra   parte  411a  era  generosa  e  di  cuor 
contradicted,         on  other     hand  heart 

buono  riconobbe  che  non  avea  potesta  di  disporre  di  Rosa  contro 
recognized  power  dispose  against 

il  suo  volere,  ne  di  obbligarla  a  preferir  lei  alia  propria  madre ; 
will,      nor  oblige  her  to  prefer  her     to     her  own 

percio    si  determino  a  farle  in  altro   modo  tiitto  quel  bene  ch' 
therefore  determined  another  manner     all        the     good 

ella  poteva.     Accolse      dunque  le  contadine  con  m61ta  alFabilita, 
she      could.    She  approached    then 

e  ddpo  cb'  ella  ebbe  parlato  con  la  madre,  non  si  maraviglio  piu 

after  had     spoken  was  astonished 

delle  qualita  buone  della  figliudla.     Quella  donna  in   fatti  4ra 

daughter.         That         lady  fact     was 

tutta  probita  e  delicatezza :  contenta  del  suo  state,  non  invidiava 
all  delicacy  state  .      envy 

niente  i  riccbi,  i  quali  diceva  essa,  son  pur  sottop(5sti,  come  tutti 
any  one       rich  who       said        she     are  exposed 

gli  altri  uomini,  dlle  malattie  ed  ai  dispiaceri,  e  dovrdnno  rendere 

diseases   and  to  misfortunes  ought       to  render 

un  gran  conto  delle  loro  ricchezze,  dove  non  se  ne  servano  in 

account  riches       where  serve  (use)  for 

bene. 

good. 

La    Marcbesa   fece   alia   Rosina    il  regalo   che     le    aveva 
made  present  for  her  she  had 

destindto,  ed  erano  ire  vaccherelle,  le  quali  ella  fece  consegndre 

three    young  cows  which   she  made    to  consign 

jlUa  madre  perche  le  conducesse  con  se :  ed  aggiunse,       essere 

should  conduct  added    to  be  (it  was) 


PRONUNCLVTION.  13 

6U0  desidei'io   che   la  piccina  non   antlasse  piu  a  lavorare  alia 
her        desire  should  go  work 

campagna,  ma  badasse  soltanto  a  vendere  il  latte  e  le  uova. 
country  should  care     only  to  sell  milk  eggs. 

Siccome  poi,  diss'  ella,  non  deve  Rosina  star  mai  disoccupata, 
But       then,  said  ought  to  he   ever      unoccupied, 

andra  alia  scuola  del  vostro  villaggio,  il  restante  dclla  giornata 
shall  go  school  day 

lo  passera  da  una  maestra  che  le  insegnera  a   far  la   trina :  alle 
pass  teacher  her  will  teach         to  make      lace 

spese   che  occorreranno  per  la  sua  istruzione   pensero  io.     Rosa 
expense  shall  incur  I  will  think. 

e  la  sua  md,dre  volevano  ringraziare  la  Signora,  ma  vinte  dalle 

wished  to  thank 

lacrime  non  poterono  articolare  parola. 

tears  were  able  word. 

Questo  'benefizio  non  poteva  essere  fatto  a  persone  piu  degne : 

was  able  made        any  one  more  worthy 

r  educazione  sviluppo  nella  fanciullina  tutte  le  buone  qualita 
developed 

che  tralucevano  in  lei   fin   dall'  infanzia.     Un  anno  dopo  ella 
shone  her  from  A       year     after 

porto     in  regalo  alia  Marchesa  una  trIna  lavorata  con  somma 
carried  present  lace         made 

finezza  ed  era  tanta  da  guarnire  un  vestito.     La  Marchesa  seppe 
enough  to  trim  dress.  knew 

che    quella    famiglia,     resa     da    lei    agiata,    risparmiava    per 

rendered  saved 

• 

soccorrere  i  bisogndsi,  e  spiava  tutte  le  occasioni  per  beneficare. 
succor  needy  spied  (watched) 

Rosa    era    entrata    appena    ne'  quindici    anni,    quando    la 

entered      scarcely  fifteenth       year 

Marchesa    cadde    in  una  gravissima  malattia:    suo  marito  era 
fell       in  very  serious      sickness  husband 

in  viaggio :  e  non  aveva     altro    che  la  sua  gente  di  servizio  che 

absent  she  had  no  others  than  people  service    who 

r  assistesse.    Lo  seppe  Rosina,  e  subito,  lasciando  una  sua  vicina 
her  could  assist.  knew  left  neighbor 

a    giuirdia  della   casa  e   delle   vaccherelle,    parti    per    la   citta 
guard  cows,        she  set  out 

2 


14  ITALIAN   GRAlVniAR. 

insi^me   colla   mamma.      Arrivate   che   furono,   andarono    alia 
together     with  Arrived       they      were,        they  went 

camera  della  Marchesa.    Essa  era  fuori  di    se,      ne  riconosc^va 
chamber  She     was  out  of  her  mind,  neither  recognized 

alcuno ;  e  da  quelle  stato  di  delirio,  cadeva  poi  in  un  profondo 

no  one  fell 

letargo  che  pareva  morta.    Tiitta  la  gente  di  casa  era  costernata, 
appeared    dead.  people  confounded 

la   cameriera,  sommamente  affeziooata   alia   sua   padrdna,  non 

greatly  attached 

sapeva  far  altro  che  piangere,  e  non  era  buona  a  nulla.     La 
knew     to  do  than      to  weep  she  was  for  nothing. 

buona   Liici   fece     rizfare      accanto  al  letto  della  signora  un 
made  to  be  placed  by  the  side  bed 

letticciuolo :   ed  ella  e  Rosina  vegliavano  la  signora  dna  notte 
little  bed  watched 

per  una. 

I  medici  s'  intendevano  con  loro  per  la  ciira  dell'  ammalata ; 

depended      upon  them  care  sick  (lady) 

e  tutto  era  adempito  con  la  massima  puntualita.     In  capo  a  nove 
fulfilled  greatest  At  the  end  of  nine 

giorni  la  malattia  piglio  buona  piega :  la  Marchesa  ritorno  in  se  e 
days  took  turn  recovered 

conobbe.  quanto  doveva  alio  zelo  e  all'  affetto  delle  sue  amorose 
knew  owed  loving 

assistenti.     La  povera  Rosina  era  scolorita  dalle  inquietezze  e 

pale 

ddlle  nottate      perdute ;       ma  i  suoi  occhi  abbattuti  ripigliarono 

nights  lost  (sleepless  nights)  languid         took  again 

la  loro  vivacita  appena  ella  comincio  a  sperare  nella  guarigione 
as  soon  as  began  hope  cure 

della  sua  benefattrice.      Ella  con  le  sue  premure    rese    meno 

cares      rendered 

spiacevole  alia  signora   il   tempo   della   convalescenza ;    ora  le 

disagreeable  now 

legg(^va  un  bel  libro,  ora  le  raccontava  qualche  fatto  interessante 
read  then  related  fact 

accaduto  nel  suo  villaggio :  voleva  anche  pensare  a         vegliarla, 
happened  wished-— also  -  to  take  care  of  her 


ETOIOLOGY.  15 

ne  permetteva   che   altri   le   facesse   i   brodi   e   preparasse    le 

others      should  make     broths 

medicine.      In  questo  tempo  il  marito  della  Marchesa  torno, 

returned 

ed  essa,  ritornata  in  perfetta  salute,  gli  mostro  quanto  doveva  a 
returned  health  showed  she  owed 

Roslna  ed  alia  madre  di  lei,  e  gli  disse  clie  oramai  non  le       dava 

now  gave (had) 

piu   il   cuore   di   separarsi   da  loro.      Concertarono  dimque  di 
heart  They  agreed  then 

mettere    la    Liici    alia   direzione   della    casa,   sicuri    che    non 

put  sure 

potevano  affidarla  meglio:    la  figlia  poi  non  doveva  aver  altro 
were  able  should     have 

titolo  che  di  compagna  ed  arnica  della  Marchesa.     Voi  vi  potete 

can 

figurdre,  figliuoli  miei,  quanto  volontieri    accettarono  esse  tale 
children  they  accepted 

proposizione. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

PARTS    OF  SPEECH. 

There  are  nine  parts  of  speech  in  the  Italian  language  : 
—  1.  The  Article;  2.  The  Noun;  3.  The  Adjec- 
tive; 4.  The  Pronoun  ;  5.  The  Verb  ;  6.  The  Ad- 
verb ;  7.  The  Preposition;  8.  The  Conjunction; 
9.  The  Interjection. 

The  first  five  are  variable  ;  the  four  last,  invariable. 

The  change  which  the  first  four  undergo  by  means  of 
terminations  is  called  declension :  it  refers  to  gender, 
number,  and  case. 

There  are  two  genders  in  Italian,  —  the^ masculine  and 
the  feminine. 

There  are  also  two  numbers, — the  singular  and  the 
plural :  and  five  cases,  expressing  the  different  relations 
of  words  to  each  other ;  namely,  the  nominative,  genitive, 
cjative,  accusative,  and  ablative. 


16  ITALIAN   GEAMMAR. 

The  nominative  case,  or  the  subject,  answers  to  the 
question  who?  or  what?  as.  Who  is  reading?    The  hoy. 

The  genitive  or  possessive  case  answers  to  the  question 
whose?  QY  of  which?  as,  Whose  book?    The  hoifs  book. 

The  dative  answers  to  the  question  to  whom?  as,  To 
whom  shall  I  give  it?     To  the  hoy. 

The  accusative  or  objective  case  marks  the  object  of 
an  action,  and  answers  to  the  question  wliom  ?  or  what  ? 
as.  Whom  or  what  do  you  see?  I  see  the  hoy,  the 
house. 

The  ablative  answers  to  the  question  from  or  by  whom  ? 
as,  From  whom  did  you  receive  it?     From  my  father? 


CHAPTER  n. 

THE   ARTICLE— L'  ARTICOLO. 
MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

La  domenica  sento  la  messa .     On  Sunday  I  attend  (the)  mass.* 
Il  lunedl  spmdo  IL  dandro    .     On  Monday  I  spend  the  money. 
Il  martedl  viene  la  serva      .     The  servant  comes  on  Tuesday. 
Il  mercoledi  stiro  la  hiancheria  On  Wednesday  I  iron  the  linen. 
Il  giovedX  pdgo  il  cameriere .     On  Thursday  I  pay  the  domestic. 
Il  venerdi  riscuoto  l'  entrdte .     On  Friday  I  receive  the  rent. 
It.  sdbato  aspetto  il  sdrto  .     .     I  expect  ^/ie  tailor  on  (the)  Sat- 

urday.f 

The  article  is  used  much  more  frequently  in _ Italian 
than  m  iiinglisJi. 

There  are  two  articles,  —  Definite  and  Indefinite.  J 
The    Definite    has    several   variations    for   the    sake    of 


eu 


iphony. 


*  In  the  translation  of  the  Italian  examples,  -words  which  cannot  be  expressed  are 
inserted  within  marks  of  parenthesis. 

t  The  pupil  is  requested  to  commit  to  memory  the  Italian  words  occurring  in  Rules 
or  Examples,  as  their  meaning  will  be  seldom  repeated.  The  conjugation  of  the  verbs 
will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

X  The  indefinite  article,  tot,  loio,  ^tna^  a  or  an,  will  be  treated  of  in  a  subsequent 
."■bapter.     (See  chapter  on  Nximeral  Adjectives.) 


THE    ARTICLE.  17 


DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 


Singular,  ^7,  lo^*  masculine  ;  Ig^  feminine. 

Plural,      e,  gli  (/^'),t  masculine ;  J^  feminine. 

REMARKS. 

I.  The   article   ii,  plural   i,   is   most   generally  used 


as, 


II  tempermo,     i  temperini ;       il  sigillo,  i  sigilU. 
The  penknife,  the  penknives ;  the  seal,   the  seals.J 

II.  The  article  lo,  plural  gli,  is  2)laced,  —  1st,  Before 
'  nouns  beginning  with  s  followed  by  another  consonant ; 
as,  — 

Lo  specchio,  gli  specchi ;    lo  spirito,  gli  spiriti. 

The  mirror,  the  mirrors ;  the  spirit,  the  spirits. 

2d,  Before  nouns  commencing  with  a  vow^el,  eliding 
the  0,  aria  replacing  it  by  an  apostrophe ;  as,  — 

X'  occhio,  gli  bcchi  ;  V  amico,      gli  amici. 
The  ej^e,   the  eyes ;   the  friend,  the  friends. 

in.  Thejvord  del,  gods,  takes  the  article  ^li.  We 
say,  II  Dio  di  Ahrdnio,  gli  del  del  paganesimo ;  the  God 
of  Abraham,  the  gods  of  the  heathen. 

lY.  Xo,  or  ^7,  is  written  before  masculine  nouns  com- 
mencing  with_g^;  as,  Lo  zio,  or  il  zio,  the  uncle  ;  and  after 
the'preposition  pe?- :  Per  lo  ai6re,  or  per  il  cu6re,  for  the 
heart.  But,  in  speaking,  il  is  generally  used,  excej^t  in 
the  phrases  ^jer  lo  piu,  at  most ;  per  lo  meno,  at  least. 

V.  La  before  a  feminine  noun  takes  le  in  the  plural ; 
as, —  "^ 

La  fenna,  le  penne  ;    la  stanza,  le  stdnze. 
The  pen,    the  pens  ;   the  room,  the  rooms. 

*  The  Italians  haye  taken  the  articles  il  and  lo  from  the  first  and  last  syllable  of  thq 
ablative  Latin  lil'o.     In  their  use,  euphony  alone  is  consulted  :   lo  I'lbro,  lo  ■padre^  il  tihro\ 

ilpadre. 

t  We  find  //,  plural  of  77,  in  classical  works,  especially  in  poetry  ;  but  modoni  writers 
Qse  i  in  preference. 

t  The  article  is  given  with  every  noun,  so  that  the  pupil  may  learn  the  gender  of  the 
noun. 

2* 


18  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

The  a  of  la  is  elided  before  a  vowel,  and  replaced  by 
an  aj[)Ostrophe.     It,  however,  takes  le  in  the  plural;  as,  — 

X'  isola,        le  isole  ;  V  dnima,     le  dnime. 

The  island,  the  islands ;   the  soul,     the  souls. 

VI.  The  ai^ticle  il  may  ioseJt]le_^  if  preceded  by  the 
words  cAe7^r<z,  fra^  e;  as^  TraH  si  e  Hno,  between  yes  and 
n^     Such  elision  is  mostly  confined  to  poetry. 

VII.  The  article  ^li  loses  the  i  before  a  noun  commenc- 
in^with  i;  as,  67'  infermi,  the  infirm. 

VIII.  The  article  Ic  loses  the  e  before  a  noun  be^'in- 
nm^jwitli_£/as,  Z/'  elemdsine,  the  alms  ;  /'  erbe,  the  herbs. 
The  above  rules  are  purely  euphonic. 

IX.  As  there  are  only  two  o-enders  in  Italian,  Ensrlish 
neuter  nouns  take  the  gender  of  the  noun  into  Avhich  they 
arejtranslated ;  and  the  article  naturally  takes  the  gender 

of  the  noun  to  which  it  belongs.  '^ 

«  — — — —    ■' ^ — &— 

X.  They  say  in  Italian,  Vddo  in  chiesa^  in  strdda^  etc., 
I  go  to  church,  into  the  street,  etc.  ;  and  do  not  use  the 
article,  because  tlie  church  or  street  is  not  designated. 
Eut,  in  Vddo  nella  chiesa  di  San  Carlo ^  vddo  iieJla  strdda 
dove  stdte  di  casa^ — I  go  into  St.  Charles'  Church,  I  am 
going  into  the  street  where  you  dwell, — the  article  is  used 
because  the  church  and  street  are  defined. 

XL  ^,  likewise,  they  say,  Vddo  in  cdsa^  in  cdmcrn,  a 
letto^  in  cncina;  because  it  is  understood  that  the  person 
speaks  ot  Ins  own  house,  room,  bed,  kitehpT^  ;  which 
nouns  are  defined  by  the  circumstances. 

/  XII.  It  is  necessary  to  use  the  article  in  such  sentences 
ks  the  following,  where  the  signification  of  the  noun  is 
limited  :  — 

Vddo  —  I  am  going  — 

nella  cdsa  di  mia  mddre  .     .     ,  into  my  mother's  house. 

(nella  camera  di  mw  padre    .     .  into  my  father's  chamber. 

nel  lelto  di  sua  fratello     ...  in  liis  brother's  bed. 

neUa  cucina  del  vicino     ...  in  the  neighbor's  kitchen. 


THE    ARTICLE.  19 

XIII.  There  are  cases  in  which  the  article  ma^be  used 
or  not :   as, — 

Auddcia,  fortuna,  e  virtv,  gli     Boldness,    fortune,    and    merit 
d'ettem  trono  e  ipotenza ;    or,         gave    him    the    sceptre    and 
U  auddcia^  la  fortiina,  e  la         the  power. 
virtu,  gli  dettero  it  trono  e  la 
'potenza. 

In  the  first  case,  the  nouns  are  considered  independently, 
without  any  subsequent  idea :  in  the  second  case,  the 
article  limits  the  signification  of  the  noun  by  something 
relative  to  each  noun  understood ;   thus  :  — 

i'  auddcia  che  spiego  in  bgni  The  boldness  which  he  mani- 
impresa^  la  fortuna  che  lo  fested  in  all  his  enterprises, 
secondo,  la  virtu  che  lo  dis-  the  fortune  wliich  favored 
tmse,  gli  dettero  il  trono  della  him,  the  merit  which  dis- 
nazione  e  la  potenza  sovrdna,*         tinguished  him,  gave  him  the 

throne  of  the  nation  and  the 
sovereign  power. 

XIV.  The  nouns  Mr.,  Mrs.,  Miss,  take  the  article,  thus  : 
il  &ign6re^  il  Signdr  dottore^  la  iSig-rK^ra,  let  SigiK^ra 
principessa,  la  Slgnorina.  These  words  do  not  take 
an  article  when  they  are  addressed  to  the  person  to  whom 
t^e  are  speaking.  The  word  Signe^rn  loses  tlie  final  e 
before  a  masculine  noun. 

XY.  Pro^ijcr    nouns    do    not    take    the    article ;  f     as, 

*  "When  several  nouns  come  together  before  or  after  the  verb,  and  the  article  is  used 
)r  omitted  before  the  first  of  them,  this  article  must  be  repeated  or  omitted  before  evory 
3ther  noun  in  the  sentence. 

t  Names  of  kingdoms,  provinces,  mountains,  and  rivers,  take  the  article  or  not, 
according  to  the  extent  of  their  signification  ;  as,  Z,'  Italia  c  bclla,  Italy  is  beautiful ; 
Stdva  in  Italia,  he  was  in  Italy. 

Names  of  cities  and  villages,  vmless  qualified  by  an  adjective,  are  used  without  the 
article.     The  same  rule  applies  to  the  names  of  a  few  islands:  Malta,  Cipro,  CnHn,  etc. 

The  names  of  abstract  substances,  and  those  of  gems,  metals,  etc.,  when  used  in  a  ge- 
neric sense,  require  the  article  before  them  :  as,  U  oro  e  le  pdrle,  e  i  Jior  vermigli  e  bidnchi, 
;he  gold  and  the  pearls,  and  the  red  and  white  flowers. 

A  noun  preceded  by  an  adjective  takes  the  article  before  the  adjective ;  as,  II  gran 
'nile,  the  great  evil ;    Il  gran  pt-ccdto,  the  great  sin. 

All  words  used  as  nouns  require  the  article  before  them  ;  as,  II  helln,  il  biiono,  the 
beautiful,  the  good;  Soti  ccrta  del  si,  1  am  certain  of  the  affirmative ;  Ciascunn  rispdse 
li  no.  every  one  answered  in  the  negative  ;  II  suo  parldre  mi  pidce,  his  conversation 
ileases  me. 

When  a  noun  is  used  in  an  Indeterminate  .sense,  the  article  is  omitted  ;  as,  Nan  u6m. 
i/imo  gid  fill,  now  I  am  not  a  man,  formerly  I  was  a  man. 


20  ITALIAN   GRAMMAE. 

Michelangelo,  Raffaello.  But  it  is  generally  placed  before 
family  names,  particularly  of  illustrious  or  renowned  per- 
sons, both  male  and  female;  as,  II  Buojiardtti,  il  Sdnzio, 
la  Mardtti  (the  poetess). 

XYI.  Possessive  adjectives  generally  take  the  article  ; 
as,  II  mio,  il  tuo,  il  sao^  lanSstra.,  la  vostra^  etc.,  my,  thy, 
his,  our,  your,  etc.     Possessive  pronouns  always  do. 

XVII.  Verbs  in  the  infinitive  mood,  and  adverbs,  take 
the  article  when  they  are  used  substantively  ;  as,  — 

II  halldre  mi  secca  ;     Non  so  ne  il  quando  ne  il  come. 
It  tires  me  to  dance ;  I  know  neither  when  nor  bow. 

READING   LESSON. 

L'  araore  e  la  morte  fdnno  eguali  i    re    ed    i  pastori. 
Love   and        deatli     make     equal       kings  and      shepherds. 

La  gloria  e  il  solo  bene  cbe  possa  tentare  gli  upmini. 

Glory   is       only    good  which  is  able  (can)  to  tempt  men. 

II  tempo,  cbe  fortifica  1'  amicizia,  indebolisce  1'  amore. 
Time  fortifies        friendship,      weakens 

Le  calunnie  sono  come  le  ferite  cbe  lasciano  sempre  la  margmu. 
Calumnies    are      like         wounds  leave        always  scar. 

La  paura  governa  il  mondo.  , 

Fear      governs  world- 

La  prudenza  e  la  guida  e  la  padr6na  della  vita  umana. 

Prudence  guide  mistress  life  2  human.i 

EXERCISE    UPON   THE    ARTICLES. 

(The)  fortune    loves  (the)     youth. 
^       fortuna(f.)  ama  .       gioventu  (f.). 

The  scholar     cnltivates  (the)  memory. 

scolare(m.)    coltiva  memoria  (f.). 

Tbe  servant  (f )  puts  out  the  light. 

serva  smorza  liime  (m.). 

Tbe  evening  I  study  the  lesson. 

sdra(f.)       studio  lezione  (f.). 

The  shoemaker    brings  the  shoes, 
jtj         calzolaio(m.)  porta  scarpe  (f.). 


UNION    OF    ARTICLES   AND    PREPOSITIONS. 


21 


WORDS. 


II  pane, 
La  came, 
II  vino, 
Le  friitta, 
Le  mele. 
II  fratello, 
La  pera. 
La  pesca, 
11  fico, 
II  padre, 
Lihro, 


the  bread, 
the  meat, 
the  Avine. 
the  fruits, 
the  apples, 
the  brother, 
the  pear, 
the  peach, 
the  fig. 
tlie  father, 
book.     aS?,  yes. 


lo  ho, 
Til  lidi, 
Egli  ha, 
Ella  ha, 
Non  ho. 
Ho  io  ? 
Hdi  tu  ? 
Ha  egW? 
Ha  ella  ? 
Non  ho  io 
Che,  wliat. 


I  have, 
thou  hast, 
he  has. 
she  has. 
I  liave  not. 
have  I? 
hast  tliou  ? 
has  he  ? 
has  she? 
have  I  not? 
CJd,  who. 


CONVERSATION. 


Ho  io  la  penna  ? 

Hdi  tu  il  temperino  ? 

Che  hd  mio  Jratello? 
^  Ha  lo  zio  del  Signore  il  lihro  ? 
"  Che  spendi  tu  ?  .      , 

Chi  ha  co7}iprdfo  la  cdsa  ?  /rcicucc  II  Signor  dottore. 

Che  cdsa  ha  egli  comprdto  ?    ■      La  cdsa  di  tmo  pddre. 

Che  ha  la  Signbra  ?  Ella  ha  lo  specchio, 

Chi  aspetto  il  Lunedi  ?  Asp'etto  il  sdrto. 

Che  camera  hai  ?  Ho  la  cucina. 


Si,  tu  hdi  la  penna. 
No,  non  ho  il  temperino. 
II  fratello  vostro  ha  la  cdrta. 
No,  egli  non  ha  il  libra. 
Spendo  il  dandro. 


CHAPTER  III. 

UNION  OF  THE  ARTICLES  AND  PREPOSITIONS. 


K 


MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


T  gibrni  dell  A  settimdna 
Le  sfagibni  dell'  dnno  . 
Nelle  strdde  della  citta  . 
II  lapis  e  SULLA  tdvola,  . 
Sidmo  nel  cubr  della  stdte 
La  penna  e  i^el  calamdio 
B(dldt£  CON  li:  ragdzze  . 
Lcggo  corjLi  occhidli 


The  clays  of  the  week. 
The  seasons  of  the  year. 
In  the  streets  of  the  city. 
The  pencil  is  upon  the  table. 
We  are  in  midsummer. 
The  pen  is  in  the  inkstand. 
Dance  witlt.  the  girls. 
I  read  with  {the)  spectacles. 


22 


ITALIAN"    GEAMMAR. 


UNION    OF    THE    ARTICLES    AND    PREPOSITIONS. 

§  I.  IfjLhe_ article  is  used  with  one  of  the  prepositions, 
di,  of  or  for;  a,  to  or  at;  da,  from  or  by;  in,  in; 
CG7l,^Yith.;  sii,  upon,  —  the  two  monosyllables  are  joined 
for  euphon^ 


Remark. — In  connecting  the  preposition  with  the  ar- 
ticle, di  is  changed  into  de,  in  into  ne,  cun  into  co. 

§  II.   1st,  Contraction  of  the  article  lo,  and  its  plural 
gli,  with  a  noun  :  — 

SINGULAR. 


XjO   ,    , 

.  sperpero, 
sperpero, 

the  havoc. 

Dilo    . 

.      DELLO 

of  the  havoc. 

Alo      . 

.      ALLO 

sperpero, 

to  the  havoc. 

Da  lo    . 

.      DALLO 

sperpero, 

by  the  havoc. 

In  lo 

.       NELLO 

sperpero. 

in  the  havoc. 

Con'lo  . 

.       COLLO 

sperpero. 

with  the  havoc. 

Su  lo    . 

.       SULLO 

sperpero. 

upon  the  havoc. 

plural. 

Gli  .    . 

•             •             •             • 

sperperi, 

the  havocs. 

Di  gli  . 

.      DEGLI 

sperperi, 

of  the  havocs. 

A  gli    . 

.      AGLI 

sperperi, 

to  the  havocs. 

Da  gli  . 

.      DAGLI 

sperperi. 

from  or  by  the  havocs. 

In  gli    . 

.      NEGLI 

sperperi, 

in  the  havocs. 

Con  gli 

.       COGLI 

sperperi. 

with  the  havocs. 

Su  gli  . 

.       SUGLI 

sperperi, 

upon  the  havocs. 

This  i 

irticle,  before  a  vowel 

,  is  written  delV,  alV 

delV  dmic 

:o,  of  the  friend. 

Lo    .     . 

.       .  x>        . 

amico. 

the  friend. 

Di  lo    . 

.     dell' 

amico. 

of  the  friend. 

Alo      . 

.     all' 

amico. 

to  the  friend. 

Da  lo    . 

.     dale' 

amico, 

from  the  friend. 

In  lo 

.     nell' 

amico. 

in  the  friend. 

Con  lo  . 

.     coll' 

amico. 

with  the  friend. 

Su  lo     . 

.     sull' 

amico, 

upon  the  friend. 

Before  nouns  in  the  plural  commencing  with  an  i,  we 
write  degV,  cugV,  dagV ,  etc.  ;  as,  CogV  infelici,  with  the 
unhappy. 


UNION    OF   ARTICLES   AND   riiErOSIilOXS. 


23 


§  III.   2d,  Contraction  of  the  article  il,  and  its  plural  i 


11  .     . 

Dl  il  . 
A  il  . 
Da  il , 
In  il  . 
Con  il 
Sit  il  . 


DEL 

AL 

DAL 

NEL 
COL 
SUL 


SINGULAR. 

fazsolkto,  the  pocket-handkerchief. 

fazzolkto,  of  the  pocket-handkerchief 

fazzolkto,  to  the  pocket-handkerchief. 

fazzoJetto,  from  or  by  the  pocket-handk. 

fazzolkto,  in  the  pocket-handkerchief. 

fazzolkto,  with  the  pocket-handkerchief. 

fazzolkto,  upon  the  pocket-handkerchief. 


Di  i   . 

A  i  , 
Da  i  . 

In  i  . 
Con  i . 
Su  i    . 


DEI  or  DE 

Ai  or  a' 
DAI  or  da' 

NEI  or  ne' 
COI  or  CO' 
sui  or  su' 


fazzolkti, 
fazzolkti, 
fazzolkti, 
fazzolkti, 
fazzolkti, 
fazzolkti, 
fazzolkti. 


PLURAL. 

the  handkerchiefs, 
of  the  handkerchiefs, 
to  the  handkerchiefs, 
from  the  handkerchiefs, 
in  the  handkerchiefs, 
with  the  handkerchiefs, 
upon  the  handkerchiefs. 


§  IV.  3d,  Contraction  of  the  article  la,  and  its  plural  It 

SINGULAR. 


La, 

Di  la 

A  la 
Da  la 
In  la 

Con  la 
Su  la 


DELLA 

ALLA 

DALLA 

NELLA 
COLLA 
SULLA 


saccoccia, 
saccoccia, 
saccoccia, 
saccoccia, 
saccoccia, 
saccoccia, 
saccoccia, 


the  pocket, 
of  the  pocket, 
to  the  pocket, 
from  the  pocket, 
in  the  pocket, 
with  the  pocket, 
upon  the  pocket. 


Before  a  vowel,  write  delV,  aW,  dalP,  neU\  etc. 

PLURAL. 


Le  . 

Dile 
Ale 
Da  le 
In  le 

Con  le 
Su^le 


DELLE 

ALLE 

DALLE 

NELLE 

COLLE 

SULLE 


saccbcce,  the  pockets. 

saccbcce,  of  the  pockets. 

saccbcce,  to  the  pockets. 

saccbcce,  from  or  by  the  pockets. 

saccbcce,  in  the  pockets. 

saccbcce,  with  the  pockets. 

saccbcce,  upon  the  })Ockets. 


Before  nouns  commencing  with  e,  write  dcW ,  alV ,  daU\ 
etc. 


24 


ITALIAN   GRA3IMAR. 


§  V.  The  contraction  of  co7i  and  of  su  with  the  articles 
loo  gli-,  la-,  and  Ze.  is  used  at  discretion.  We  can  say,  Con 
lo  studio^  con  la  j)e7ina,  or  cdllo  studio,  colla  penna,  —  with 
the  study,  with  the  pen,  —  according  to  the  harmony  of 
the  phrase.  Instead  of  su,  we  can  say  sopra  with  all  the 
articles,  writing  them  separately ;  as,  Sul  tetto,  or  sopra 
il  tetto ;  sulla  tdvola,  or  sop'a  la  tdvola,  —  upon  the  roof, 
upon  the  table. 

§  VI.  The  preposition  pei'  may  be  united  with  the  arti;:- 
cles_z7  and  i,  thus;  pel,  plural  pei^  or pe[.  In  speaking, 
we  say,  ordinarily,  per  il,  to  avoid  affectation. 

The  pupil  is  required  to  supply  the  prepositions  and 
articles  in  the  following  declensions  :  — 


//  giardmo,  the  garden. 

„  of  the  garden. 

„  to  the  garden. 

from  the  garden. 


» 


I giardmi,     the  gardens. 


» 


of  the  gardens, 
to  the  gardens, 
from  the  gardens. 


Lo  sptrito, 


the  spirit, 
of  the  spirit, 
to  the  spirit, 
from  the  spirit. 


Gil  spiriti,     the  spirits. 

of  the  spirits, 
to  the  spirits, 
from  the  spirits. 


X'  dlbero, 


99 

n 

9} 


the  tree, 
of  the  tree, 
to  the  tree, 
from  the  tree. 


Gli  dlberi, 


the  trees, 
of  the  trees, 
to  the  trees, 
from  the  trees. 


La  rosa, 


the  rose, 
of  the  rose, 
to  the  rose, 
from  the  rose. 


Le  rose, 


the  roses, 
of  the  roses, 
to  the  roses, 
from  the  roses. 


X'  anima, 


n 

J) 


the  soul, 
of  the  soul, 
to  the  soul, 
from  the  soul. 


Le  dnime, 


» 


the  souls. 
of  the  souls, 
to  the  souls, 
from  the  souls. 


UNION    OF   ARTICLES   AND   rilEPOSITIONS.  25 


READING   LESSON. 

Andiamo  nolle  stracle  della  citta.     La  donna  e  partita.     Non 
Let  us  go  streets  city.  woman  is  departed.      Not  2 

andate  colla  cameriera.     Prendo  la  chiave  della   camera.     La 
go  1  chambermaid.        I  take  key  room. 

primavera  della  vita.    Ella  mori  nel  fior  degli  anni.    Non  dormite 

spring-time  life.        Slie    died         flower  years.      Not  2     sleep  i 

air  aria  aperta.      II    gdtto   e   nella    camera   del   padrone.      II 
air         open.  cat  master. 

lapis  non  e   siilla  tavola.     Leggo  con  le  ragazze.     II  calam{iio 
pencil    not    is  table.  I  read  girls.  inkstand 

e  sulla  tavola.     La  cliiave  e  nell'  iiscio.    Si    va  alia  caccia  nell' 

door.      One  goes  chase 

autunno.     La  penna  e  nel  calamaio  siilla  tavola.      La  vita  e 
autumn. 

breve,  e  1'  arte  e  liinga.    La  moderazione  genera  la  felicita.    L'  oro 

short  long.  generates     happiness.         gold 

governa  il  mondo.     La  verita  produce  1'  odio.    L'  udmo  propone, 
governs  world.  truth     produces      hatred.  man     proposes 

6  Dio  dispone.     La  voce,  gli  occlii,  il  cdrpo,  1'  anima  delF  uomo. 
God    disposes.  voice  eyes  body  soul 

La  voce  del  popolo  e  la  voce  di  Dio.         1/^^  */v|ui((,\  l^.w     'x^^ 
people 

EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

Italy  is    the    garden    of   Europe.       The    passions    are   the 

Italia  i/      /C        giardino     ?       Europa.  6--£o        passioni     sono      ^  '-^ 

elements  of  life.     The  voice  of  the  people  is  the  voice  of  God. 
element!  vita.       -\:<  ,     voce     cUJ^       popolo   L     j'jl,   uirCe^    /^.  Dfo. 

The  whip  (is)  for  the  horse,  the  halter  for  the  ass,  and  the  stick 

frusta  (f.)       <LtJ^'      cavallo  cav^zza  asino  c       ;       bastone 

for  the  shoulders   of  the  insolent    (one).     (The)   pride  is  the 

spalle  impertinonte.  supcrbia 

daughter  of  (the)  ignorance.     An  ancient  phiIoso|)her  said,  that 
ffglia  ignoranza.         Un      anti'co^  fihjsoCoi       iisse,    che 

(the)  pride    breakfasts  with  (the)  abundance,  dines  with  (the) 

orgoglio  fa  colazione  abbondanza,    pranza 

poverty,  and  sups  with  (tlie)  shame, 
poverta  cena  vergogna. 

3 


26 


ITALIAN    GRA^kOIAIt. 


lo  sono, 

I  am. 

Til  sei, 

thou  art. 

Egli  e, 

lie  is. 

Noi  sidmo,       we  are. 
Voi  sicte,  you  are. 

Eglino  sono,    they  are. 


CONVERSATION. 


Che  £qsa  avete  ? 

Dov'  e  ? 

Son'  10  jpovero  (poor)  ? 

Cosa  e  r Italia  ? 

Hdi  tu  la,  penna  del  vicino  ? 

Qual  lihro  (book)  hdi  ? 

Ha  SIM  padre  un  cavdllo  ?  , , 

Che  cosa  ho  10 '^       '^^'^' 

Sei  tu  jilosofo  ? 

Hdi  tu  il  mio  tempermo  ? 

Siete  il  mio  ainico  ? 

Nan  liai  un  (a)  giardmo  ? 


;,.  /«'t«1    <l     *<^X.^ 


Ho  il  fazzoletto.  . 

Nella  mia  saccoccia.    ^^^<="-tXr 
Tu  non  sei  povero,  sei  ricco. 
U  Italia  e  il  giardino  delV  Europa 
No,  Signbre,  mwfratello  I*  ha. 
Ho  il  libra  del  sdrto. 
Non  ha  un  cavdllo,  ha  un  dsino. 
Tu  hdi  il  hasione  di  mio  fratello.  V-o^ 
Non  sono  Jilosofo.  ^ 

No,  e  sopra  la  tdvola. 
Sono  il  vostro  (your)  amico. 
Si,  ho   un   giardino  ed  (and)  un 
cavdllo. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE    NOUN*  — IL    NOME. 


< 


MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


n  TIMORE  di  Dio     .      .      . 
La  CUPOLA  di  San  Pietro 

II  DUOMO  di  FiRENZE 

/fiori  della  primavera  . 
//  COLORE  della  ROSA  .     . 

//  CAMMINETTO  della  CAMERA 


The  fear  of  God. 
The  cupola  of  St.  Peter. 
The  cathedral  of  Florence. 
The  flowers  of  spring. 
The  color  of  the  rose. 
The  small  mantelpiece  of  the 
chamber. 


*  There  are  some  words  in  the  Italian  language  which  paint  so  well  the  character  cf  the 
nation,  that  it  is  impossible  to  reproduce  them  in  any  other  language  by  words  strictly 
analogous.  For  example,  the  words  sfogo^  smdnia^  piint'iglio^  faria,  orgasmo,  cstro^  sbuf- 
fdre,  etc.,  representing  ideas  which  are  conceived  only  under  a  burning  sky,  cannot  be 
exactly  rendered  in  the  calm  and  misty  Northern  languages.  Being  purel}'  euphonic, 
the  rules,  on  the  article  maj'  be  utterly  disregarded  whenever  euphony  requires  it.  The 
same  may  also  be  said  respecting  the  elision  and  contraction  of  words. 


THE    GENDER    OF   NOUNS. 


27 


La  CARTA  e  nel  cassetting 
11  pozzo  e  nel  corti'le    .     . 
Lo  STUDIO  e  un  gqdimentq 
Gli  ANNI  fiiggono  rdpidi  .     . 
La  MiNESTRA  e  fredda      .     . 
L'qzio  e  il  padre  di  ogni  vizio, 


The  paper  is  in  the  drawer. 
The  well  is  in  the  yard. 
Study  is  a  pleasure. 
Years  fly  rapidly. 
The  soup  is  cold. 
Idleness  is  the  father  of  all 
vices. 


THE    GENDER    OF   NOUNS. 


There  are  only  two  genders  in  the  Italian  lanffua<ye,  — 
the  masculine  and  the  feminine. 

I.  All  nouns  belono;  either  to  the  masculine  or  feminine 
gender. 

II.  youns  endino'  in  a  are  feminine.     Those  express- 
inty  dignity,  and  professions  of  men,  such  as  il  papa,  the 


pope, 


and  the 


S 


followmg, 


derived  from  the   Greek,   are 


masculine  :  — 

Anagrdmma, 

Andiema, 

Assioma, 

Glhna, 

Diadema^ 

Dilemma, 

Diploma, 

Dogma, 

Drdmma, 

DmUema, 

Enigma, 

Dpigrdmma, 

Fantdsma^ 


anagram. 

anathema. 

axiom. 

climate. 

diadem. 

dilemma. 

diploma. 

dogma. 

drachm. 

emblem. 

enigma. 

epigram. 

spectre. 


Idioma, 

idiom. 

Pianeta, 

planet. 

Po'ema, 

poem. 

Prisma, 

prism. 

Prohlema, 

problem. 

Frogrdm7na, 

j)rogramme. 

Scisma, 

schism. 

Sistema, 

system. 

Sofisma, 

sophism. 

iStemma, 

coat  of  arras. 

Strataghnma 

,  stratagem. 

Tema, 

theme. 

Teorema. 

theorem. 

III.  Of  the  nouns  ending  in  e,  some  are  masculine,  and 
others  feminine.  As  no  positive  rules  can  be  given  to 
indicate  their  gender,  recourse  must  be  had  to  the  diction- 
ary. 

IV.  Amono;  the  nouns  ending  in  c,  some  are  of  both 
genders;*  as, — 


*  Snpie  masculine  nouns  ending  in  e  take  a  different  termination  for  the  feniiuiue 
as,  re^resmn.'  "  '  ~ 


28  ITALl:^    GRAJVOIAn. 


Il  or  LA  carcere,  the  prison. 

Il  or  LA  ceiiere,^  the  cinders. 

Il  or  LA  fine,  the  end. 

Il  or  LA  folgore,  the  thunder. 

Il  or  LA  fonte,  the  fountain. 

Il  or  LA  fr67ite,'\  the  forehead. 


Il  or  LA  gregge,     the  flock. 
Il  or  LA  fiine,       the  cord. 
Il  or  LA  lepre,        the  hare. 
Il  or  LA  mdrgine,  the  margin. 
Il  or  LA  serpe,       the  serpent. 
Il  or  LA  tigre,        the  tiger. 


Y.  There  are  some  nouns  endino;  in  a  which  can_end 
in  e,  without  chano'ino:  the  jj^ender  ;  as,  Z/'  drina  or  Z'  dnne, 
arms  (heraldic)  ;   la  sorta,  or  la  sdrte,  destiny. 

VI.  Very  few  nouns  terminate  in  i,  as  this  letter  is 
generally  the  characteristic  sia^n  of  the  pluraj.  Of  these 
few,  some  are  masculine,  and  some  are  feminine  ;  as,  — 


MASCULINE. 


77  cavadenti,    the  dentist. 
//  lai'ctceci,       the  dunce. 
II  Tamigi,       the  Thames. 


FEMININE. 


La  metropoU,  the  metropolis. 
La  sintdssi,      the  syntax. 
La  tesi,  the  thesis. 


Remark.  —  The  noun  dl,  day,  and  its  compound^  ;  as, 
Buondi,  good-day;  mezzodi,  noon;  oggidi,  now-a-days; 
Lu7iedl,  Monday;  Martedi,  Tuesday,  etc.,  —  are  all  mas- 
culine. So  are  likewise  nouns  of  dignity ;  as,  Ball, 
bailiff;  pdri,  peer;   guardasigiUi,  keeper  of  the  seals. 

YII.  Nouns  endino'  jn  o  are  of  the  masculine  gender, 
except  fa  mdno,  hand;  and  the  words  whose  ending 
dgine  is  contracted  to   dgo  ;  as,  imyndgo  for  immdgine. 

Eco,  echo,  is  of  either  gender. 

Remark.  —  Several  nouns  of  animate  heino's.  endijQg  in 
o,  change  o  into  a  for_the  feminine  ;  as,  II  randcchio,  m.,  la 


rakdcc/na,  i\ ,  frog  ;  il  gdtto,  m.,  la  gdtta,  f. ,  cat ;  cavdllo, 
horse  ;  cavdlla,  mare ;  colomho,  coldmha,  dove,  etc. 

VIII.  The  following  nouns  ending^  in  o  become  femi- 
nine  by  changing  the  o  into  a:t  — 

*  II  ccnere  is  used  only  in  poetry.  « 

t  La  fronte  is  more  usea  than  il  fronte. 
I       %  Fanr.iiMn.  or  ragazzo^  is  said  ot  a  cliild  who  has  not  yet  reached  the  age  of  adoles-j 
Icence.    Fanciidla  and  ragazza,  on  the  contrary,  are  used  for  a  person  of  marriageable  age  ;> 
(the  fii'st  particularly  being  employed  to  indicate  unmarried  women  in  general, if  young,      f 

Obs.  —  Lapis,  pencil ;  rlbes,  currants ;   chermes,  cochineal,  and  a  few  foreign  uouns, 
end  with  a  consonant. 


THE    GENDEll   OF   iNOUNS.  29 


II  casdto,        the  family  name. 
//  canestro,     the  basket. 
II  cioccoldto,  the  chocolate. 
II  frutto,*      the  fruit. 
//  leg7io,^        the  wood. 
11  mattino,      the  mornino;. 


//  nuvolo,  tlie  cloud. 

X'  omhrello,  the  umbrella. 

X'  orecchio^  the  ear. 

//  ranbcchio,  the  frosf. 

i>o  scritto^  the  writinn;. 

//  soffitto,  the  ceiling. 


Feminine :  La  casdta,  la  canestra,  la  fruUa,  la  legna,  etc. 

IX.  The  names  of  fruit-trees,  ending  in  o,  become  femi- 
nine by  changino-  o  into  a :  and  then  they  serve  to  express 
the  fruit.     Ex. :  — 

II  pesco,  the  peach-tree  ;    La  pesca,  the  peach. 
//  melo,   the  apple-tree  ;     La  mela,  the  apple. 

The  words  fico,  p6mo,  ardncio,  fig-tree  and  fig,  apple- 
tree  and  apple,  orange-tree  and  orange,  are  an  exception. 

X.  Very  few  nouns  end  in  u.  These  are  alwjvys 
marked  with  a  <j,'rave  accent,  and  are  of  the  feminine  o-en- 

p . , 2 _ -Q 

der;    as.  La  gioventu,   the  youth;  la  grit,  the  crane,- — 
except  Peril,  m.,  Peru,  Behebu,  Belzebub. 


GENERAL    REMARKS. 

All  words  ending  in  ore,  of  which  there  are  a  great  num 
ber,  arc  masculine  without  any  exception.     Those  endino^ 
in  zione  or  sione  are  feminine  without  any  exception. 

]Nouns  ending;  in  ^e,  le,  me,  re,  se,  are  s^enerally  mascu- 
line ;  as, — 


Rege,  king. 

Vidle,  path. 

Fiiime,       river. 


Cuore,       heart. 
Arnesej      utensil. 


*  Of  the  words  friitlo^  legno,  and  scntto,  which  are  masculine,  and  become  feminine 
by  changing:  the  o  into  a,  it  must  be  observed  tlaat  il  friitto  is  the  fruit  in  general,  properly 
and  figuratively  ;  while  la  friuta  or  Le  friuta  means  the  dessert.  L'-i^no  means  tlie  wooda, 
and  la  Irgna  is  the  wood  to  burn.     Scr'Uto  is  a  writing ;  aud  la  scr'itla,  a  contract. 

Some  names  of  animate  beings  denote  the  femininc.l/y  u,  dilfereut  word ;  as,  Udmo,  man  • 
ddnna,  woman  ;  loro,  bull ;  vdcca,  cow. 

3* 


30  ITALIAN   GKAMJVIAR. 

Nouns  eiidino'  in  he,  ce,  ^e,  te,  ve,  ie,  ine,  one,  nte,  are 
generally  feminine ;  as,  -^ 


Plehe,  people. 

Siepe,  hedge. 

Chiave,  key. 

Foce,  entry. 

Immdgine,  image. 

Ragiorie,  reason. 

Pace,  peace. 


Arte,  art. 

Mente,  mind. 

fSerie,  series. 

Incudine,  anvil. 

Cicatrice,  scar. 

Legione,  lesson. 

Crbce,  cross. 


Nouns  ending  in  ^^  if  not  of  Greek  derivation,  are 
masculine.  Those  of  Greek  derivation  are  feminine,  ex- 
cepl^  Genesi  and  Apocalissi,  which  may  be  masculine 
whenineaning  the  sacred  books  bearing'  that  title. 


Analisi,  analysis. 
Genesi,  Genesis. 
Crisi,  crisis. 


Enfasi,       emphasis. 
Tesi,  thesis. 

Sintdssi,     syntax. 


READING   LESSON. 

11  rispetto  per  le  donne  e  1'  indizio  piu  siciiro  dell'  incivilimento 

respect  women        indication  most    sure  civilization 

di  un  popolo.     La  schiavitu  e  la  vergogna  degli  uomini.     L'  eta 

slavery  shame  men.  age 

e  il  sonno  insegnano  all'  uomo  la  stnida  della  morte.         Bisogna 
sleep         teach  death.    It  is  necessary 

veder  V  Italia  nella  prhnp^vera  e  n^Ua  state  per  poter  meglio 
to  see  ^*V*^^  smumer        to  be  able  better 

ffiudicare  della  serenita  del  suo  cielo  e  della  calma  del  mare  che 
to  judge  sky  sea 

la  circonda.     L'  arte  di  regnare  e  la  massima  di  tutte  le  arti. 

it  2  surrounds.i  art  to  reign  greatest  all 

La   memoria  dei   benefizij  e  il  debito  della  gratitiidine.      Noi 
memor}-  benefits  debt  We 

vediamo  il  lam])o  prima  di  sentire  lo  scoppio  del  fiilmine.    II 

see  lightning  before  to  hear  burst  thunder. 

filosofo  cerca  la  sua  felicita  nello  studio  della  natura. 
seeks 


THE    GENDER    OF   NOUNS. 


•'  1 


EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 


(The)  Study  is    useful    to  tjie  health  of  the  body.       (The) 

jj,         studio       vantaggioso  >/{  4-     salute  corpo. 

Hatred  is  the  want  of  vengeance.       The  loss  of  liberty  is  the 


£.      odio    i-  bisogno  ^       vend(^'tta.  -6*/ pdrdita .'     liberta 

greatest  of  misfortunes.  The  philosopher  seeks  his  happiness 
prfma                 disgrazie.  /tc         filosofo  c^rca  r-     felicita 

In    the    study   of    (the)  nature.       (The)     Innocence    of    life 

->t<X>      ciUvCtvv    -;.X.v'~^'     natiira.  innocenza  >    vfta 

takes   away  the   fear  of  death.       (The)   Tears   are   tl>e   tacit 

toglie  spav(?nto  . 


lagrime 


tacito  2 


language  of  grief, 
linguaggioi        dolore. 

Datemi  dell'  oro  e  dell'  argento.     L'  aria  della  mattina  e  un 
Give  me  gold  silver.  air  morning 

balsamo   nella  primavera.      Non  e  arrivato  oggi  il  padre  del 
balm  spring.  Not 

Signor  Duca? 


arrived     to-day 


Noi  ahhiamo,         we  have. 
Voi  avete,  you  have. 

J^glino  hdnno,  m.,  they  have. 
Elleno  hdnno,  f.,    they  have. 


Abhidmo  noi  ? 
Avete  voi  ? 
Hdnno  eglino  ? 
Hdnno  elleno'^ 


have  we  ? 
have  you  ? 
have  they  ? 
have  they? 


CONVERSATION. 


Ohe  avke  nel  canestro  ?  Ho  deW  uova  net  mio  canestro. 

QuaV  e  ilnome  della  lavanddia^    H  suo  nbme  e  Gatarma. 
ivke  veduto  (seen)  il  cavdllo  ?       lo  V  (it)  ho  veduto. 


2 

Dove  ? 

Ahbldmo  noi  sigilli  ?  SxoJii 

Dove  sono  inerti  gli  uomini  ? 

A  vete  veduto  la  carta  ? 

(yJd  e  quesC  (this)  Italidno'^ 

Chi  e  nel  giardino  ? 

Chi  e  questa  ragdzza'^ 

Avete  veduta  la  mia  cdsa  ? 

La  cdsa  nella  strdda  del  Re  ? 


Nella  strdda. 
Voi  71071  avete  sigilli,  avete  cdrta, 
Dove  il  siiolo  e  molto  feriile. 
St,  e  nel  cassettino. 
E  il  cameriere  del  medico. 
II  cavadenti. 
E  mia  sorella. 
Qiidle  cdsa  ? 
No,  Slg7i6ra,  non  V  ho  veduta. 


Avete  frutta  nel vostro giardino'^    No,  ma  (but)  ahhidmo  un  pesco 

ed  un  7?ielo   die  7ie  dardnno 
r  d)ino  ventiu'o 


32  ITALIAN    GRAIOIAK. 


/  CHAPTER  V. 

THE  PLURAL  OF  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES. 

t 

Adjectives  agree  in  g^ender  and  number  with  the  nouns 
tliey  qualify. 

After  having  learned  the  rules  upon  the  formation  of 
the  plural ,  the  scholar  will  do  well  to  change  all  the  plural 
nouns  of  the  following  exercise  into  the  singular. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

I ciechi  hdnno  hiioiiY.  orecchi^,  The  blind  have  good  ears. 

Le  lenzuolA  sono  piditE,  The  sheets  are  clean. 

Le  bellE  antichit\  di  Roma,  The  beautiful  antiquities  of  Rome. 

Le  hotteglm  sono  sotto  ai-porlici,  The  shops  are  under  the  porticos. 

X'  ardtro  fa  i  solchi  jjrofondi,  The  plough  makes  deep  furrows. 

J^cco  due  pdiA.  di  stivah,  Here  are  two  pairs  of  boots. 

I fungln  ndscono  nei  hoschi,  Mushrooms  grow  in  the  woods. 

Mi  dolgono  le  calcdgnx,^*  My  heels  pain  me. 

Benejici  sono  i  rdggi  del  sole,  The  rays  of  the  sun  are  beneficent. 

3Iipidce  il giuoco  d'egli  scdcchi,  I  like  the  play  of  chess. 

Le  pioggE  ristorano  la  terra,  The  rains  refresh  the  earth. 

Altri  tempi,  dltri  costumi,  Other  times,  other  manners. 

Imalvdgi  non  sono  felici,  The  wicked  are  not  happy. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

I.  The  greater  proportion  of  nouns  and  adjectives  in 
Italian,  whatever  be  their  gender,  form  their  plural  by 
changing  tiie  last  letter  into  i;    as, — 

MASC.   SINGULAR.  MASC.   PLURAL. 

//  poeta  celehre,  the  celebrated  poet.       I poeti  celehj^i. 

II  letto  morhido,  the  soft  bed.  Il'etti  morhidi. 

II  mdre  hurrascoso,     the  stormy  sea.  Imdri  hurrascbsi. 

FEM.  FEM. 

Lapassione  infelice,    the  unhappy  passion.     Le  piassibni  infelici. 
La  mdno  debole,  the  feeble  hand.  Le  mdni  d'eboli. 

*  The  letter  %  indicates  an  idiomatic  phrase. 


PLLTvAL    OF   NOUNS   AND   ADJECTIVES.  33 

The  following  are  exceptions  :  — 

n.  Feminine  nouns  and  adjectives  endinp-  in  the  singu- 
lar in  tf,  make  their  plural  in  ef  as, — 

La  Scarpa  stretta,        the  narrow  shoe.  Le  scdrpe  strette. 

La  bella  donna,  the  handsome  woman.         Le  belle  dbnne, 

m.  The  nouns  ending  in  2,  in  ie,  in  an  accented  vowel, 
and  the  monosyllables,  do  not  changejtheir  termination  in 
the  plutali  ^^•>  ^^  crisi,  the  crisis ;  le  crisi,  the  crises  :  la 
citld,  the  city ;  le  cittd,  the  cities  :  il  re,  the  king ;  i  re, 
the  kings  ;   etc. 

IV.  Nouns  are  also  invariable  when  they  immediately 
follow  the  ordinal  numbers  twenty-one,  thirty-one,  etc.  ; 
as,  Ventuno  sciido,  twenty-one  crowns  ;  trcntimo  dolldro, 
thirty- one  dollars.  But  the  noun  takes  the  plural  when 
placed  before  the  number ;  as,  ScUdi  ventuno,  dolldri 
trentimo. 

Y.  The  words  addio,  adieu  ;  Idro^  their,  are  invariable  ; 
as,  Gli  addio,  i  Idro  amici. 


EUPHONIC   RULES. 

YI.  All  the  nouns,  masculine  or  feminine,  ending  in 
m  or  ga,  insert  an  h  in  the  plural  to  preserve  the  hard 
sound  of  the  c  or  a:   as,  — 

II  mondrca,  the  monarch  ;         i  monarchi,  the  monarchs. 
La  mdnica,  the  sleeve  ;  le  mdniche,   the  sleeves. 

La  Strega,     the  sorcerer ;  le  streghe,      the  sorcerers. 

YII.  Nouns  of  two  syllables,  ending  in  co  or  go,  tal^ 
an  h  in  the  plural ;   as,  — 

II  bosco,      the  wood ;  ^  bdscki,      tlie  woods. 

//  Idgo,       the  lake ;  i  Idghi,        the  lakes. 

Except  pdrco,  greco,  mdgo,  —  pig,  Greek,  magician, 
—  which  make,  in  the  plural,  2^drci,  greci,  mdgi.  / 


34 


ITALIAN   GR.\j\niAR. 


VIII.  Nouns  of  more  than  two  syllables,  ending  in  cc 
or  go,  also  take  an  h,  when  these  terniiii-itions  are  preceded 
by  one  or  more  consonants  ;  as,  — 

U  albergo,  the  hotel.  -         Gil  alheryhi. 

n  rinfresco,        the  refreshment.  I rinfreschi. 

IX.  Nouns  ending  in  co  or  go,  preceded  by  a  vowejj* 
form  their  plural  in  ci  ov^gij  as,  — 

11  medico,      the  physician ;      i  medici,        the  physicians. 
Lo  spdrago,   the  asparagus  ;     gli  sparagi,   the  asparagus. 

X.  Exception.  —  Several  nouns  talve  an  lb  in  the  plu- 
ral, though  preceded  by  a  vowel ;  as.  Audio  go,  analogous  ; 
antico,  ancient ;  decdlogo,  decalogue ;  demagdgo,  dema- 
gogue ;    etc. 

XI.  Nouns  ending  in  io  lose  the  final  o  in  all  cases 
where  this  termination  is  j)receded_by  a  vowel,  or  by  two 
or  three  consonants  forming  a  syllable  with  io  ;  as,  — 


Fornaio, 

Gnoio, 

Fascia, 

Mdschio, 

Artiglio, 

Astuccio, 

Vidggio, 


baker ; 
leather  ; 
bundle ; 
boy ; 
claw ; 
case ; 
voyage ; 


forndi, 

ciioi, 

fdsci, 

nidscM, 

artigli, 

astucci, 

vidggi, 


bakers. 

leathers. 

bundles. 

boys. 

claws. 

cases. 

voyages. 


XII.  The  following  nouns,  although  comprehended  m 
the  above  class,  form  an  exception ^  by  changing  the  io  final 
into  j :  — 


will. 

vestibule. 

doubt. 

scratch. 
Improprio,  improper. 
Pdtrio,         of  the  country. 


Arhitrio, 
Atrio, 
Duhhio, 
Grdfjio^ 


Oerchio, 

Doppio, 

Prajprio, 

Secchio, 

So^,  ^ 

Spicchio, 


circle. 

double. 

proper. 

milk-pail. 

a  blow. 

a  clove  of  garlic. 


*  Mend'ico,  beggar;   eqii'ivoco,  eqiiivoke;  dialogo,  dmlogne;  apdZogo,  apologue, — are 
written  with  or  witliout  the  h:  as,  Mendici  or  ynendicln.  beggars. 

Obs. — Some  nouns  in   the   singular  in   ere  also  end  in  ero ;    as,    II  pensicre,  the 
thought ;  il  pensiero  :  il  destricre,  the  steed  ;  il  destricro :  lo  scolire.  the  scholar  ;  lo  scolaro : 
it  cdnsole,  the  consul;    il  cdnsolo.     When  said  of  bones  cleared  from  the  table,  osso, 
bone,  makes  dssi ;  when  of  a  skeleton,  it  makes  ossa.     File,  thread,  makes /"j/a,  threads 
Fill  is  used  when  speaking  of  the  edge  of  cutting  instruments. 


PLURAL    OF   NOUNS   AND   ADJECTIVES. 


Si 


These  nouns  make,  in  the  plural,  arbitrj,  dtrj,  cerchjf 
doppj,  etc. 

XIII.  This  same  termination,  io,  is  changed  into  j 
whenever  it  is  preceded  by  a  single  con.-^oiiaut,  or  two 
consonants  not  formino;  one  syllable ;   as, — 

Giudicio^  judgment;  giudicj,  judgments. 
Principio,  beginning;  principj,  beginnings. 
Proverhio^     proverb ;  proverbj,     proverbs. 

XIV.  Except  the  following  nouns,  which  make  their 
plural  by  dropping  the  final  o,  because  the  i  is  used  in  the 
singular  only  to  soften  the  sound  of  the  c  or  g  :  — 

Pi^egio, 
Grigio, 
Indugio, 


ease. 


orange, 
kiss. 


Agio,  _ 
Ardncio, 
JBdcio, 

Barhogio,     dotard. 
'  ^g{o,  gray. 

Cctcio,  cheese. 

Cencioj         rag. 
Disdgio,       disquiet. 


Malvagio, 

Paldgio, 

Pertugio, 

Pregio, 

Soi^cio, 


ornament. 

gray. 

delay. 

wicked. 

palace. 

hole. 

merit. 

mouse. 


Plural :   Agi,  ardnci,  bdci,  cenci,  etc. 

XV.  The  termination  io,  in  the  syllable  quio,  changes 
int^_£;  as,  — 

Ossequio,     respect;  osseqiij,     respects. 

Deliquio,    fainting-fit;         deliqvj,     fainting-fits. 

XVI.  If.  however,  the  a^lient  falls  on  the  i  of  the  sylla- 
ble zo,  then  JO  jj  changed  into  ii  for  the  plural,  ajid  the 
sound  is  a  little  longer  tlian  ;';  as, — 

-rj. .'    ,.'        ..'    /.'  y  pious,  uncle,  native,  brook. 
Ptt,  zti,   naht,  rii,  )  ^ 

XVII.  Proper  nouns  ending  in  io  likewise  take  ii  iq 
the  ])lural ;  *  as, — 

IDdrii  imhii  IGdudii    h  Darius,  Tiberius,  Claudius. 


* 

as  proper 


In  Thilian,  lis  in  otlier  liingn.a{i;cs,  some  nouns  are  vised  only  in  the  sin.i^ular  number; 
per  names;  and  the  words  ^sro/e,  offspring;  ??zane,  morning  ;  ro6a,  luggage  ;  rosol'ia^ 


36  ITALIAN    GRAMIMAR. 

XVIII.  The  terminations  cia  and  gia  drop  the  i  of  the 
plural  in  the  words  in  which  this  letter  is  but  slightly  pro- 
nounced.; as,  — 

Z,a  coscia,  the  thigh ;  le  cosce,  the  thighs. 
La  spidggia,  the  shore ;  le  spidgge,  the  shores. 
La  cdccia,         the  chase ;         le  cdcce,        the  chases. 

XIX.  But  in  the  words  proviJicia,  cirieo^ia ,  franchigia , 
province,  cherries,  immunities,  and  some  others,  the  i  is 
retained  in  the  plural,  because,  being  distinctly  pronounced 
in  the  singular,  it  is  necessary  that  it  should  Ije  heard  in 
the  plural ;  as,  Proftncic,  ciriegie,  franchigie,  etc. 

XX.  We  must  also  preserve  the  i  of  cia  and  of  gia 
when  it  is  accented,  and  the  accent  must  be  strongly 
marked HBy  the  voice;    as,  — 

La  hugia,  the  lie ;  le  hugie,  the  lies. 

La  farmacia,     the  pharmacy  ;        le  farmacie,     the  pharmacies. 


IRREGULAR    PLURALS. 

XXI.   The  few  nouns  which  have  irregular  plurals  are : 


man ;  uomini,     men. 


oxen. 


Womo, 

LBue,  ox ;  buoi 

y\I6glie,  wife;  mogli,       wives. 

vRfille,  thousand ;  onila^         thousands. 

^L)io,  God ;  dei,  gods. 

XXH.  The  possessive  adjective  pronouns  mio.  tuo,  s^. 
my,  thy,  his,  make  miei,  tudi,  su6i,  in  the  plural ;  and  tlie 
adjectives  tale  or  cotdle,  such,  and  qudle,  which,  are  in 
the  plural  tali  or  tdi^  cotcili,  or  cotdi,  qudli  or  qtiai, 

XXIII.  The  following  nouns  form  their  plural  in  a, 
and  become  feminine  :  — 


measles.  And  some  are  used  only  in  the  plural;  as,  Icalzoni,  the  trowsers;  le  rent,  the 
kidnej'S  ;  i  dolci,  the  sweetmeats  ;  le  forbid,  the  scissors  ;  i  invert,  the  victuals  ;  le  tenebre, 
darkness.  Some  nouns  have  a  different  signification  in  the  plural ;  as,  II  ccppo,  the  trunk 
c-f  a  tree  ;  i  c&ppi,  the  fetters  :  il  fcrro,  the  iron  ;  i  firri,  the  fetters  :  la  gcnte,  the  people ; 
le  gcnti,  the  nations  •   la  grcizia,  the  favor ;  le  grdzie,  the  thanks. 


PLUR^VL    OF    NOUNS    AND    ADJECTIVES. 


37 


Un  miglidio, 
Tin  centinaio, 
Un  uovo, 
Un  miglio, 
Un  pdio, 
Uno  stdio, 
j  Un  moggio, 


a  thousand. 
a  hundred. 
an  e^:":. 
a  mile, 
a  pair, 
a  bushel. 
a  bushel. 


Le  miglidia. 
Le  centindia, 
Le  uova. 
Le  miglia. 
Le  pdia. 
Le  stdia. 
Le  moggia. 


XXIV.  The  followino^  masculine  nouns  have  a  mascU" 
line  plural  in  ?*,  and  a  feminine  plural  in  a.  The  last  is 
more  frequently  used. 


\V  anello, 
II  hrdccio, 
^11  hudello, 
'  LI  ccdcdgno, 
LI  castello, 
)Ll  ciglio, 
LI  coltello, 
LI  corno, 
LI  dito, 
LI  filo^ 
\Ll  memhro, 
LI  7nuro, 
L'  osso, 
II  porno, 
II  quadreUo, 


the  ring, 
the  arm. 
the  intestine, 
the  heel, 
the  castle, 
the  eyebrow, 
the  knife, 
the  horn, 
the  finger, 
the  thread, 
the  member, 
the  wall, 
the  bone, 
the  apple, 
the  dart. 


LI  fondamento, 
II  fridtOj 
II  fuso, 
LI  gesfo, 
LI  ginocchiOf 
LI  gomito, 
LI  grido, 
II  Idhhro, 
II  legno, 
LI  lenzuolo, 
II  riso, 
LI  sdcco, 
Lo  strido, 
LI  vesiigio, 
LI  vestimento, 


the  base, 
the  fruit, 
the  spindle, 
the  gesture, 
the  knee, 
the  elbow, 
the  cry. 
the  lip. 
the  wood, 
the  sheet, 
the  laugjh. 
the  sack, 
the  cry. 
the  vestige, 
the  garment. 


Remark.  —  Coma,  in  the  plural,  sio^nifies  horns  ;  cdr- 
m,  instruments  i^esta,  exploits ;  ^esti,  gestures  ;  gdmiia, 
elbows;  gomiti^GwhiU'.  mem6ra,  members  of  the  body  ; 
memhri,  members  of  an  assembly^  mtiray  rampartsx JMil> 
walls . 


READING    LESSON. 

Presso   i   Romani,   i   soldati    erano    agricoltori,  e   le    casiite 
Among  houses -J 

illustri  conservavano  sempre  i  cognomi  dei  friitti  e  dei  legumi 
illustrious!   preserved  always         surnames  pulse 

che   venivano,  a   preferenza,   coltivati   dai   loro   anten;iti ;    t^i 
came  (were)  ancestors 


38  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

furono  i  Lentuli,  i  Fabii,  i  Pisoni.     I  regdli  pMcano  non  solo  gli 

presents  appease  only 

uomini  ma  pur  anco  gli  dei.     I  pittori   antichi  non  usavano  nelle 

even  painters  2  ancient  i  used 

lore  pittnre  che  quattro  colori.     Le  dohne  sono  fatte  per  essere 
pictures  four        colors.  women  rnade  to  be 

le  compagne  e  non  le  schiave  degli  uomini.     Un  parroco  disse 
companions  slaves  curate      said 

alia  predica,  la  Domenica  delle  palme :  lo  vi  avverto,  fratelli,  die 
sermon  Palm:      I  you 2  inform  1 

per  isfuggire  la   calca,      confessero   Lunedi  i  bugiardi,  Martedi 
to  avoid  confusion,  I  shall  confess  liars 

gli   avari,  Mercoledi  i  mormoratori,   Giovedi  i  ladri,  Venerdi 
avaricious  slanderers  thieves 

i  discoli,  e  Sabato  gli  ubbriaclii.        Non  si  sa  s'egli  ebbe  molti 
libertines  '  drunkards.      "We  do  not  know  had 

penitenti.     I  fanciulli  ed  i  pazzi  si  figurano  che  venti  franchi  e 

fools  imagine  francs 

venti  anni  abbiano  a  durar  sempre.     Ho  veduto  le  dssa  di  tre 
years       have  last       always. 

giovani  elefanti. 

EXERCISE 
ON   THE   FORMATION    OP   THE   PLURAL    OF   NOUNS. 

\_Tlie  singular  only  is  given.'] 

The  face  comprehends  the  forehead,  the  eyebrows,  the  eyelids 
volte      eompr^nde  palp^bre 

the  nose,  the  lips,  the  mouth,  the  cheeks,  the  chin,  and  the  ears. 

f.  mdnto 

X 

(The)    childi'en   ought    to    obey  their   parents,   scholars    their 

fanciullo    d^bbono     ubbidire  genitore 

teachers,  and  citizens  (to)  the  laws.      When  we  read  certain 
maestro  cittacfefno  l<^gge.      Quando     si  l(^ggono    c^rti 

historians,  we  may  say  that  the  human  species  is  composed 

stdrico,        si  dir^bbe   h  umana     specie    (consists  of)  consfste 

of    only       two  or  three  hundreds  of  individuals  decorated  with 
soltanto     di  due  o       tre  individuo         decorato 

the  title  of  emperors,  kings,  popes,  generals,  and  ministers.     Men 
tltolo         imperatore  ministro. 


PLURAI.    OF   NOUNS   AND   ADJECTIVES.  39 

are   generally  idle  in  countries  where   the  soil  is  very  lertile. 

sono    per  lo  piu   in^rte  pa^se  dove  suolo        molto    fertile. 

(The)  stars,  (the)  animals,  and  even  plants  were  (enumerated) 
astro  animale  anche  fiirono       annoverate 

among       the  Egyptian  divinities.     The  walls  of  Thebes  were 

fra  le        egiziane  Tebe 

raised     by  the  simple  sound  of  the  harp ;  the  walls  of  the  city 
fabbricate  semplice    suono  c^tra 

of  Jericho   fell   down,  on  the   contrary,  at  the  sound  of  (the) 
J^rico  caddero,  in  v^ce 

trumpet.      The  large  sacks  are  filled  with  grain.      My  sisters 
corno.  empiuto  grano. 

have  some  silver  spoons, 
alcuno  arg^nto 

JVoi  sidmo,         we  are. 
Voi  slete,  you  are. 

J^glino  sono,       they  are. 

CONVERSATION. 

Chi  e  questa  donna  ?  ±jla  madre  del  poeta  celebre, 

Avete  veduto  il  re  ?  Abhidmo  veduto  il  re. 

E  egli  Fr anche  ?  No,  e  Tedesco  (German). 

Sono  i  poeti  felwi  (happy)  ?  Generalmente  non  sono  felwi. 

Che  hdnno  i  ciechi'^  I ciechi  hdnno  huone  orecchie 

Dove  ndscono  i  funahi  ?  '^fUiUot'tfKXtj  I  funghi  ndscono  nei  hoschi. 

Qiidnti  cineJli  avete  ?  /vmU*^^  Ne  ho  due. 

Mangidte  friitti  ?  Si,  qudndo  sono  maturi. 

Qudnti  (how  many)  gibrni  fa 
una  settimdna  ?  Sette. 

Come  si  chidmano  ?     (How  are        Domenica,  Lunedl,  Ifartedi^ 
they  called  ?)  Mercoledl,  Giovedi,  Venerdi, 

Sdhato. 

Ed  i  mesi  qudnti  sono  ?  Dodici. 

Come  si  chidmano  ?  Genndjo,     Fehhrdjo,     Mdrzo, 

Apiile,  Mdggio,  Giugno, 
LugJio,  Agosto,  Setteuthre, 
Ottohre,  Novembre,  Decern- 
hre. 

E  le  stagioni  (seasons)  ?  Sono  qudttro :  Primavevd,  Es- 

tdte  0  (or)  Stdte,  Antunno, 
Inverno  o  Verno. 


40  ITALIAN    GRAIklMAR. 


/ 

tL  CHAPTER  yi. 


THE  CASES  OF  NOUNS. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE    UPON    THE    USE    OF    DI,  A^   DA. 

VI  pidce  la  citta  di  Parigi  ?  Does  the  city  of  Paris  please  you  ? 

II  fitto  DELLE  case  e  cdro,  The  rent  of  the  houses  is  dear. 

VI  dico  die  non  ho  dandri,  I  tell  you  that  I  have  no  money. 

Spoleto  non  e  lontdno  da  Roma,  Spoleto  is  not  far  from  Rome. 

Voglio  scrivere  delle  Uttere,  I  wish  to  write  some  letters. 

lo  non  voglio  hrj£he^  I  do  not  wish  cares. 

Voi  non  avete  fratelU,  You  have  no  brothers. 

Z'  uo7no  Vive  delle  sue  fatiche,  Man  lives  by  (of)  his  labors. 

lo  non  temo  puntp  di  voi,  I  do  not  fear  you  at  all. 

Ecco  un  diziondrio  da  tdsca,  Here  is  a  pocket  dictionary. 

UAribsto  e  ilpittore  dell  A  na-  Ariosto  is  the  painter  of  nature. 

tura, 

Z'  occhio  del  padrone  inqrdssg'  The  eye  of  the  master  fattens 

il  cavdllo,  ^        the  horse. 

Mi  e,  sorella  dal  Igip  del  pddre,  She  is  a  sister  on  my  father's 

e  non  dal  cqMq  della  md-       side,  but  not  on  the  side  of 

dre,  my  mother. 

Egli  ha  posto  della  polvere  da  He  has  put  (some)  gunpowder 
f^UiAJkJ^scjnoppo  in  una  scdtola  da       in  a  tobacco-box. 

tobacco, 

The  several  relations  of  the  Italian  nmiTia  ^rp  expressed 
by  the  prepositions  di,  of;  a^  tox  da.  from,  or  by.  The 
nominative  and  obiective  are  distinguished  by  the  place 
they  occupy  in  the  sentence. 

1.  The  nominative  denotes  the  relation  of  a  subject  to 
a  finite  verb  ;    as,  Maria  dma,  Mary  loves. 

2.  The  genitive  denotes  origin,  possession,  and  other  re- 
lations, which  in  English  are  expressed  by  the  preposition 
of,  or  by  the  possessive  case  ;  as,  I  libri  di  "into  fratello, 
my  brother's  books. 


THE    CASES    OF   NOUNS.  41 

3.  The  dative  denotes  that  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is, 
oris  done;  as,  JEgli  mi  ddva  il  libro,  he  gave  me  the 
book. 

4.  The  accusative  is  either  the  object  of  an  active  verb 
or  of  certain  prepositions,  or  the  subject  of  an  infinitive. 

5.  The  vocative  is  the  form  applied  to  the  name  of  any 
object  addressed. 

6.  The  ablative  denotes  privation  and  other  relations, 
expressed  in  English  by  the  prepositions  with,  from,  in^ 
or  by. 

Proper_nouns  are  varied  with  the  prepositions  only ; 
common  nouns,  with  the  preposition  and  article^. 

Variation  of  the  proper  noun  Boston :  — 

Nominative Boston,  Boston. 

Relation  of  Possession      .  Di  Boston,  of  Boston. 

„       „   Attribution    .  A  Boston,  to  Boston. 

„       „    Derivation     .  Da  Boston,  from  (or  by)  Boston. 

Accusative Boston,  Boston. 

Variation  of  a  common  noun  in  the  plural :  — 

Nominative Ilihri,  the  books. 

Relation  of  Possession      .  Dei  libri,  of  the  books. 

„       „   Attribution    .  Ai  libri,  to  the  books. 

„       „    Derivation     .  Dai  lihri,  from  (or  by)  the  books. 

Accusative I  libri,  the  books. 

I.  Di,  the  sign  of  the  genitive,  is  used,  — 

1st,  When  it  denotes  possession ;  as,  La  cctsa  di  mio 
pddre,  my  father's  house  ;  di  chi  e  questo  cappello  ? 
whose  hat  is  this?  e  del  servitSre,  it  is  the  servant's. 

2d,  Whg^n  the  noun  or  verb  that  follows  di  expresses  a 
quality,  limitation,  or  modification  of  the  noun  that  pre- 
cedes_it ;  as,  Qucchidio  d'  argento,  a  silver  spoon;  e 
tempo  di  pranzdre,  it  is  dinner-time. 

II.  The  preposition  di,  with  or  without  the  definite 
article,  translates  the  words  some  ^nSTany  when  they  do 
not_express  a  determinate  quantity^  of  a  certain  thing ; 
as, —  / 


42  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

Dcitemi  del  pane,  Give  me  some  bread. 

Non  hevete  di  quel  vino.  Do  not  drink  any  of  that  wine. 

III.  If  some  and  any  have  the  signification  of  a  .f&w, 
various,  certain,  a  little,  &>q..,  they  are  rendered  in  Italian 
h^qualche  before  a  singular  noun  ;„  by  tin  poco  di^  or  tin 
po'  di,  before  a  collective  noun ;  and  by  certi,  divcrsij, 
alcuni,  and  vdrii,  or  their  feminine  form,  before  pjui'al 
nouns,  according  to  their  gender;    as, — 

Ho  pranzato  con  qualche  amico,     I  have  dined  with  some  friend 

or  con  alcuni  amici,  or  friends. 

Prendete  un  poco  di  vmo.  Take  some  wine. 

IV.  ^^en  there  is  only  a  simple  designation  of  the 
object,  without  any  idea  of  quantity,  —  that  Fs  to  say, 
when  the  word  some  or  any  is  omitted  in  English,  — 
generally  no  article  is  used  in  Italian. 

Bevete  vino  o  hirra'^  Do  you  drink  wine  or  beer? 

Chi  ha  dandri  ha  amici.  He  who  has  money  has  friends. 

V.  The  preposition  di  is  often  used  after  words  requir- 
ing a  diit'erent  preposition,  and  after  verbs  requiring  a 
direct  object.  In  such  cases,  the  word  that  governs  di  is 
understood,  and  the  phrase  is  elliptical,  as  may  be  seen  in 
tlie  following  sentences  :  — 

Temere  del  popolo,  for  temere  To  fear  the  anger  of  the  peo- 

LO  SDEGNO  del  popolo,  pie. 

Saper  di  musica,  di  algebra,  etc.,  To  know  a  little  music,  alge- 

for  sap  ere  UN  Poco  di,  etc.  bra,  etc. 

YI.  Sometimes,  especially  in  familiar  conversation,  the 
preposition  di  takes  the  place  of  the  article  il  or  lo  before 
an  infinitive,  which,  being  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  does 
not  come  at  the  beginnino;  of  it ;  as,  — 

E  facile  DI  studidre,  di  parldre.     It  is  easy  to  study,  to  speak, 
for   e  fdcile    lo    studidre,  IL 
parldre. 

When  the  preposition  di  is  thus  substituted  for  the  arti- 
cle, the  phrase  is  elliptical,  and  stands  for  JS  fdcile 
l'azione  di  studidre.  ~~~ 


4 


THE    CASES    OF   NOUNS.  43 

YII.  It  is  verj  common  in  Italian  to  use  di  instead  of 
da  whenever  euphony  requires  it,  particularly  if  the  defi- 
nite article  can  be  omitted  after  the  preposition^  This, 
however,  is  never  done  unless  fu6ri,  via,  or  some  such 
word  requh'ing  di,  is  easily  understood.    Thus  they  say  :  — 

Venire  di  casa ;  that  is,  fuori        To  come  out  of  the  house. 
or  via  di  casa  for  ddlla  casa, 
or  da  casa. 

VIII.  The  preposition  di  is  also  frequently  translated 
after  verbs  l3y/b/%  meaning  on  account  of',  by  in,  when 
it  does  not  signify  within  ;  by  icith^  not  expressing  the 
idea  of  company  or  union  /   and  occasionally  by  on. 

Ella  vesfe  di  nero,  She  dresses  in  black. 

JVon  mi  biasi7ndte  di  questo,     '  Do  not  blame  me  for  this. 

Furono  provveduti  di   tutto,  or  They  were  provided  luith  every 

d'  ogni  cosa,  thing. 

Tl  bambino  fu  nutrito  di  Idtte,  The  child  was  fed  on  milk. 

IX.  ^,  or  ad,  the  sign  of  the  dative,  expresses  direc- 
tion or  aspiration  towards  some  object,  and  corresponds 
to  the  prepositionT  to, 

Andidmo  a  Ndpoli,  Let  us  go  to  Naples. 

Scinvete  ad  un  amico.  Write  to  a  friend. 

X.  The  preposition  A  is  also  translated  in,  for,  from, 
and  of  after  a  verb,  when  it  represents  an  action  done 
against,  towards,  or  to  the  damage  of  a  person ;  the  direct 
object  of  such  a  verb  being  easily  understood  ;  *  as, — 

Non  pdsso   credere   a   quel   che  I  cannot  believe  in  what  you 

dite,  say. 

Pensdte  a  lui  e  provvedete  ai  suoi  Think  of  him,  and  provide  for 

bisogni,  his  wants. 

XI.  JDa,  the  sign  ofjhe_ablative,  expresses  derivation, 
separation,  or  dependence,  and  corresponds  principally  to 
the  preposition  from,  which  In  most  cases  is  translated; 
as,  — 

*  Remark. —The  expressions,  little  BT  little^  two  BY  two,  etc.,  are  rendered  in  Ital 
ian,  poco  A  poco^  due  A  due,  etc. 


44  ITALIAN    GRAMVIAE. 

Da  un  giorno  alV  ctltro,  From  one  day  to  another. 

Noji  dipendo  da  nessuno,  I  do  not  depend  on  any  one. 

XII.  Z)a  is  used  before  a  noun  which  indicates  use, 
employment,  or  the  destination  of  a  thing; ;  as ,  — 

Cavdllo  da  sella,       saddle-horse. 
Carta  da  Uttere,       letter-paper. 

Xm.  The  English  prepositions  at  and  with,  meaning 
"  at  the  house  of;"  and  by,  either  expressing  the  relation 
between  a  passive  verb  and  its  subject,  or  conveying  the 
idea  of  solitude  and  exclusion, — are  translated  by  da, 

Sta  DA  mio  padre.  He  lives  at  my  father's. 

Lo  fara  da  se,  He  will  do  it  by  himself. 

XIV.  Li]ce_  and  as^  when  thev  signify^ in  the  manner 
of,"  "as  it  becomes,"  and  followed  by  a  noun  used  in  an 
indefinite  sense,  are  generally  rendered  by  da;  as, — 

Portdtevi  da  udmo,  Bear  yourself  like  a  man. 

Fdtela  da  padrone,  Act  as  a  master. 

Xz^e,  followed  by  the  pronouns  himself,  herself,  our- 
setves,  etc.,  is  thus  translated  in  Italian:  Like  himself,  DA 
quel  che  e,  or  DA  queW  u6mo  cK  egli  e,  etc. 

READING    LESSON. 

Molte  commediole,  compdste  dall'  Ariosto  che  le  recitava  in 

Many    little  comedies,    composed   •  them    recited 

compagnia  de'  sudi  fratelli  e  delle  siie  sorelle,  fiirono  il  preludio 

brothers  his     sisters,       were  prelude 

delle  immortali  sue  dpere.     Finalmente  V  elegante  orazidne,  che 

his    works. 

pronuncio        intdrno   alle   regole   che   si   deggiono  seguire,  ed 
he  pronounced  concerning  rules  one        ought        to  follow 

intdrno  alio  scdpo  che  ogniin  propdrre  si  debbe  nei  prdpri  stiidi, 
scope  every  one  proposes         ought  own 

fece  condscere  alia  citta  di  Ferrara,  sua  patria,  ch'  essa  allevava 
made     to  know  country  reared 


THE    CASES    OF   NOUNS.  15 

un  genio,  il  quale     avrcbbela    illustmta;  ed  il  padre  siio  god(';va 

genius  who    -would  have  (her)  enjoyed 

in     segreto     della     consolazidne    d'  iidire    da'  suoi  coiicittadini 

hearing  fellow-citizens 

proporre  il  pioprio  figliuolo  ai  loro,  come  un  modello  da  imitarsi. 
to  propose  own  son  as  model  imitate. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Ill  Italy  there  are  immense  plains,  majestic  rivers,  very 
high  mountains,  lakes,  cascades,  forests,  volcanoes,  and  beauty  in 
all  varieties. 

2.  A  lady,  speaking  of  a  preacher  whom  she  had  heard  from 
a  great  distance,  said,  "  He  spoke  to  me  with*  his  hand,  and.  1 
listened  with^  my  eyes." 

3.  It  is  difficult  to  satisfy  every  one's  desire  in  (the)  great 
enterprises. 

4.  May  God  send  us  good  princes,  and  may  the  devil  not  give 
them  the  fancy  of  wishing  to  be  heroes ! 

5.  (The)  hypocrites  cover  themselves  with  the  mask  of  (the) 
devotion. 

6.  Never  leave  flowers  in  a  sleeping-chamber. 

7.  The  greater  part  of  (the)  men  live  like  crazy  people,  and 
die  like  fools. 

8.  One  of  the  miseries  of  the  rich  is  to  be  always  deceived. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  There  are,  vi  sono ;  immense  \Aams,  pianura  stermindta; 
majestic  rivers,  Jiume  maestoso. 

2.  A  lady,  una  Signora ;  speaking,  parldndo ;  a  preacher 
whom  she  had  heard,  un  predicatbre  cli  ella  avea  inteso  ;  far  off, 
inolto  distdnte ;  said,  disse ;  he  has  spoken  to  me,  egli  mi  ha 
parldto  (with  the  hands)  ;  I  have  listened  to  him,  lo  V  ho  aS' 
coUdto  (with  the  eyes). 

3.  Great  enterprises,  grdnd^  impresa ;  it  is  difficult,  e  cb&a 
difficile  ;  to  satisfy,  secondare  ;  desire,  desiderio  ;  all,  tutti. 

4.  May  God  send  us,  Dio  ci  mdndi ;  good  prince,  huono 
principe ;    devil,  didvolo  ;  not  give  them,  non  d'la  loro, 

6.  Cover  themselves,  si  c6p7^ono. 

6.  Never  leave,  non  lascidte  jndi. 

7.  Live,  vivono  ;  die,  mubiono. 

8.  Always  deceived,  sempre  inganndti. 


46 


ITALIAN    GRAMaiAR. 


Dove  ?     where  ? 
Che  ?        what  ? 


a^? 


who? 


Sovente,     often. 


CONVERSATION. 


Dove  era  la  Signora  ? 


Molto  distdnte  dal  predicatore. 


Con  che  si  coprono  gV  ipocriti  ?      Colla  mdschera  delta  divozione.  /hO: 


Qudnti  sensi  avete  ? 

Come  si  ckidmano  ? 

Ahhidmo  del  vino  ? 

E  tempo  di  pranzdre  ? 

Che  cdne  e  quesfo?' 

Che   7'ecitdva  Aribsto   in  com- 

pagn'ia  cZe'  suoi  frateUi  e  delle 

sue  sorelle  2 
Dove  sono  maraviglie  in  bgni 

genere  f 
Che  sono  esse  (tjiey)  ? 


Cinque. 

Udito,  vista,  odordto,  gusto,  tdtto. 

Avete  una  hotte  di  vino. 

lo  ho  pranzdto  con  alciini  amici, 

E  un  cdne  da  cdccia. 

Mblte  commedible,  che  furono  il 

preliidio  delle  immortdli  sue 

op  ere. 
In  Itdlia. 

Fiumi  maestbsi,  cascdte,  selves 

volcdni,  etc. 
Egli  mi  ha  parldto  cblla  mdno. 


Che    disse   una  Sigtibra  dJ  un 

predicatore  ? 
Qiidli  'persbne  sbno  sovente  in- 

ganndte  ? 
Qudli     ubmini     vivono     come     La  maggibr  parte  degli  ubmini. 


Le  persbne  ricche. 


pazzi 


r? 


CHxiPTER    yil. 

PRONOUNS. 

PERSONAL   PRONOUNS   IN   THE   NOMINATIVE. 

lo,  tu,    egli,  esso,       ella,  essa,      nrji,  voi,  eglino  and  essi,  cUeno  and  esse. 


I,      thou,  he,     he  o;-  it,    she,     she  or  it,  we,   you.  they,  m., 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


they,  f. 


Chi  hdtte  ?     Son  lO, 


Who  knocks  ?    It  is  I. 


Se  non  voictc  cantdr  vox,  can-     If  you  do  not  wish  to  sing,  / 

tero  lO,  will  sing. 

Non  duUtdte :  pejiseremo  Noi  ad     Do  not  fear :  we  will  think  of 


ogni  cosa, 


every  thing. 


PRONOUNS. 


47 


Cost  diceva  ancbr  lO, 
Vol  farete  quel  die  vorro  lO, 
lo  voylio  fare  come  fate  voi, 
Non  ci  va  egli,  e  non  ci  andrete 

nemmeno  voi, 
Avete  voi   roha'^     Avete  quat- 

trini  ? 
Che    bella   cosa   il   poter  dire, 

Co7iidndo  lO  ! 
Gli  farete  conoscere  chi  sono  lO 

e  'chi  siete  voi, 
Siete  vol  il  padrone  di  questo 

albergo  ? 
Pqiche  volete  che  dica  lO,  diro 

10, 

Vol  avete  miglior  vista  che  non 
ho  10, 


/  also  said  so. 

Tou  will  do  what  /  wish. 

/  wish  to  do  as  you  do. 

He  will  not  go ;  and  you  will 
not  go  either. 

Have  you  pro[)erty  ?  Have  you 
money  ? 

How  beautiful  it  is  to  say,  / 
command ! 

Let  him  know  Avho  /  am,  and 
who  you  are. 

Are  you  the  master  of  this  ho- 
tel? 

As  you  wish  that  /  say  it,  / 
will  say  it. 

You  have  better  sight  than  L 


PEONOUNS    IN   THE    OBJECTIVE    (CLASS   I.). 

Me,  te,    Kii,    lei,  noi,  vol,  Idro ;    se.* 

iie,     thee,  him,  her,  us,      you,  tiiem  ;  "himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves. 


MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


Che  cosa  volete  da  me  ? 

Ella,  e  fiiQri  di  se  ddlla  rdbbia, 

Or  ora  sono  a  vox, 

Fdtemi  la  jinezza  di  pranzdr 

MECO, 

lo  dmo  il  mio  amico  quanta  me 

STESSO, 

Si,  fate  voi,  io  mi  rimetto  in 

VOI,  mi  confido  in  voi, 
Egli  non  sa  far  niilla  da  SE, 

Lascidte  fare  a  me,  non  dubi- 

tdte, 
Degnate  far  colazibne  con  N(5i, 


What  do  you  wish  of  me  ? 
She  is  beside  hei'self  with  anger. 
I  am  with  you  in  a  moment. 
Do   me    the  pleasure  to  dine 

with  me. 
I  love   my  friend  as  much  as 

myself. 
Yes,  do  what  you  will,  I  agree 

with  you,  I  confide  in  you. 
He  does  not  know  how  to  do 

any  thing  by  himself 
Let  me  do  it:   never  fear  (do 

not  doubt). 
Have  the  kindness  to  breakfas; 

with  us. 


*  These  pronouns  are  called  disjunctive. 


48 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


jEgli  non  domanda  voi, 
Non  dlco  a  voi,  Signor  mio, 
Verrd  co7i  voi  se  volete, 
To  non  voglio  partire  da  VOI, 
Qudnto  avete  sj^eso  per  lei, 


He  does  not  ask  for  you. 
I  do  not  speak  to  you,  deai'  sir. 
I  will  go  with  you,  if  yon  w^ish. 
I  do  not  wish  to  leave  you. 
How  much  have  you  spent  for 
her. 


PRONOUNS*    m   THE    OBJECTIVE    (CLASS   II.). 

Mi.  ti,     gli.  lo 

Me,  thee,  him,  xncl.^  hii 


la. 


Li, 

Them,  m.. 


CI  w  ne,  VI, 
you, 


him  or  it,  her,  ind.,  her  or  it,    us^ 

le,  loro :  si. 

them,  f.,         them,  ind. ;   himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


Voi  VI  siete  dimenticdto  di  me, 
Non  MI  dimenticherb  DI  VOI, 
Gli  e  nolo  un  jiglio, 
Che  male  vi  lio  jdtio  io  ? 
Davvero,  io  non  vi  capiscOy 
Mi  place  la  7nia  libertd,'\ 
Fate  pur  quel  che  vi  pare, 
La  fortuna  (yi_vu6l  bene, 
Vi  raccomdndo  di  far  questo, 
Che  cosa  yi  ha  egli  detto  Di  me  ? 
Potete  dir  loro  che  entrino, 
Io  VI  Idscio,  perche  ho  fretta, 
Ho    scritto   una   lettera   che    mi 


prenu 


comdnda    il    Signor 
Aiutaii    che  ti  aiu- 


Chc     mi 

Tizio"^ 
Dio  dice 

tero, 
Domdni  gli  daro  da  prdnzo 


Mi  ricordo  cid  che  mi  avete  detto, 
Amico,  CI  rivedremo  stasera, 
Ti  accerto  che  non  le  diro  nidla, 


You  have  forgotten  me. 

I  will  not  forget  you. 

A  son  is  born  to  him. 

What  ill  have  I  done  you  ? 

Truly,  I  do  not  understand  yow. 

I  love  my  liberty. 

Do  as  seems  good  to  you. 

Fortune  wishes  us  well. 

1  recommend  you  to  do  this. 

What  has  he  said  to  yon  of  rne  f 

You  can  tell  them  to  come  in. 

I  leave  you,  for  I  am  in  a  hurry. 

I  have  written  a  letter  which 

is  important  to  me. 
What  does  Mr.  Tizio  wish  of 

me? 
God  says,  Help  thyself,  and  I 

will  help  thee. 
T  will  give  hifn  dinner  to-mor- 

ro^\\ 
I    remember   what   you   have 

said  to  me. 
Friend,  we  shall  see  each  other 

this  evening. 
I  assure  you  that  I  shall  say 

nothing  to  her. 


*  These  pronouns  are  called  coDJunctive. 
t  Mi  place,  it  pleases  me. 


PRONOUNS. 


49 


PERSONAL    PRONOUNS   IN   THE   NOMINATIVE. 


I. 


lo, 
Til, 

JEgli,  esso 


a.  essa. 


N6U 
Vol, 

£!c/lino,  essi, 
Elleiio,  esse, 


lo  dor  mo, 
Tii  prdnzi, 
Egli  balla, 
Ella  ride, 
Noi  cantidmo, 
Voi  pens  cite, 
Essi  scrivono, 
Esse  pdrlano, 


I  sleep. 
Thou  dinest. 
He  dances. 
She  laughs. 
We  sing. 


You  think. 
They  write. 
/  ±JUeno,  esse,     j  'i'hey,  f.  ;        Esse  pdjiano,        They  speak. 

Remark,  —  Of  these  pronouns  only  Esso  in  all  its 
forms,  Ndi  and  ^di,  can  be  used  as  o1)jcctive. 

II.  jSj^-Zz,  with  its  feminine  and  plural  forms,  can  only 
be  used  for  persons.  It  translates  the  subiective  pronoun 
U  before  verljs  used  impersonally ;  and  it  is  often,  for 
euphony,  contracted  to  di,  or  e'.  Very  seldom  it  is  ex- 
pressed with  really  impersonal  verbs.  Ex. :  Egli  e  difficile, 
it  is  difficult ;  Pidve  e  tudna,  it  rains  and  thunders. 

III.  Ella  mayjbe  used  to  translate  it  before  the  verbs 
essere,  jpdfere,  e  semhrdre  when  followed  by  a  feminine 
n^urT;  as,  Ella  mi  sembra  disgrdzia  inaudita,  it  seems 
to  me  a  misfortune  unheard  of.  In  every  other  case, 
Esso  and  Essa  with  their  plural  must  be  used.^as  they 
can  represent  both  persons  and  things,  whilst  Egli  and 
Ella  only  represent  persons. 

lY.  The  use  of  gli  for  egli,  of  gli  diW^  egli  for  e^lino^ 
and  of  ia  or  le  for  ella  or  elleno^  is  jusftfiedbj  the_ex- 
ample  of  good  writers,  ancient  and  modern,  and  by  the 
])ractice  of  good  society.  In  addressing  persons,  the 
Tuscans  employ  the  contractions  la  and  le  for  dlla  and 
elleno  in  the  sense  of  you  :  as,  La  7ni  perddni,  I  beg 
your  pardon;  Le  mi  dicano,  (ladies  or  gentlemen), 
tell  me. 

v.  If_the  number  of  the  person  is  sufficiently  indicated, 
cither  by  the  termmation  ot  the  verb,  or  by  any  othcr_cir- 
cumstance,  tlie  subjoctivc  pronoun  is  gcncrally^omittcd. 

5 


50  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

But  when  there  is  antithesis  or  contrast  implied  between 
two  or  more  verbs  in  different  persons,  then  the  pronouns 
representing  the  various  subjects  cannot  be  suppressed. 
Ex. :  JEssa  uscird  e  voi  sta?'ete  in  cdsa,  she  will  go  out 
and  you  will  stay  at  home. 

VI.  The  preceding  rule  must  be  observed  when  the 
stress  of  the  voice  is  to  belaid  on  the  subject  of  a  verb, 
iiT  which  case  the~i3ronoun  is  often  put  after  j/t.  Ex. : 
J^ssa  sola  pud  dir  queste  cose,  or  qiicste  cose  le  pud  dir 
essa,  she  alone  can  say  such  things. 

VII.  Tlic  eni})liasis  often  expressed  in  English  hy  do 
or  did,  and  the  exclusive  meaning  given  to  a  pronouja  Jjy 
the  word  self,  are  rendered  in  Italian,  either  by  merely 
placing  the  subject  after  the  verb,  or  by  the  adjectives 
stesso  and  medesimo,^  Ex. :  Dite  ora  cid  che  pensdte  v6i, 
or  dite  cid  che  voi  stesso  pensdte,  say  now  what  you  do 
tliink  ;  Lo  fard  egli,  or  egli  medesimo  lo  fard,  he  will 
do  it  himself.  This  rule  applies  also  to  nouns,  as  may  be 
seen  in  the  following  examples :  Aspettdte  che  venga  il 
padrSne,  or  che  il  padrone  stesso  venga,  wait  until  the 
master  comes  himself. 

VIII.  The  words  himself^  herself,  itself,  and  themselves^ 
can  always  be  translated  by  stesso  and  medesimol  after  a 
noun  or  a  pronoun,  and  must  agree  with  it  in  8;ender  and 
number.  JbJx. :  iSuo  pddre  stesso  lo  dice,  his  father  him- 
self  says  so.  After  the  verbs  essere  and  par  ere,  the  same 
pronouns  can  be  translated  by  desso,  dessa,  dessi,  aiid 
desse,  according  to  the  gender  of  the  noun  to  which  they 
are  put  in  apposition.  Ex. :  Non  e  piil  desso,  he  is  no 
longer  himself ;  Mi  par  dessa,  it  seems  to  me  it  is  she, 
or  she  herself. 

IX.  In  interrogative  phrases,  implying  the  desire  ainl 
purpose  of  obtaining  information  about  any  thing,  the 
subjective  pronoun  is  either  placed  after  the  verb;  as, 
Anderd  egli  domdni  ?  shall  he  go  to-morrow  ?  —  or  it  is 
suppressed  altogether,  and  the  question  marked  by  the 
inflection  of  the  voice,  which  is  always  very  distinct  in 
Italian.  But  if  the  question  is  put  by  persons  acquainted 
already  with  tlie  fact  inquired  about,  the  pronoun  sliould 


PRONOUNS.  51 

be  expressed  and  placed  before  the  verb.  Ex.  :  EHi 
anderci  domdni  ?  Tutti  lo  aspettano,  he  will  go  to-mor- 
row ?     Every  one  expects  him. 

X.  The  subjective  pronouiis  are  replaced  l)y  the  o23- 
jectiye^  in  the  following  cases:  1.  After  tlie  adverbs 
covie,  siccdme,  and  qndnto^  when  no  verb  follows  them : 
as,  Erano  maliziosi  come  lai,  they  were  malicious  as  he 
was ;  Se  cg-Ii  fosse  come  te,  if  lie  were  like  thee.  2. 
VVhen  they  govern  an  infniitive:  as,  Sapendo  me  dmar  lei, 
knowing  that  I  love  her ;  Udendo  lui  con  gli  dltri  esser 
morto,  hearing  that  he  died  with  the  otliers.  3.  After 
the  verb  esse  re  preceded  by  its  subject :  as,  S'  io  fossi  l{d, 
if  I  were  he  ;  Credeva  che  Pietro  fosse  te,  I  thought 
Peter  was  you. 

XI.  In  addressing,  the  Italians  employ  either  the  second 
person'or  the  third'  Tlie  second  person  singular,  repre-i 
sented  by  Tu,  Thou,  denotes  affection  and  familiarity, 
and  always  implies  that  the  speaker  is  equal  or  superior 
to  tlie  individual  thus  addressed.  Great  love  can  only 
justify  an  inferior  in  using  it  towards  a  superior, — 
children,  for  instance,  towards  their  parents  and  grand- 
parents. The  second  person  plural  corresponds  to  it 
when  several  persons  are  spoken  to  ;  and  it  is  also  used 
generally  with  any  class  of  society,  correcting  its  apparent 
familiarity  with  some  expression  of  respect  when  address-, 
ing  a  person  entitled  to  some  consideration,  as,  foi'  in- 
stance :  Cchne  state,  Signore?  How  do  you  do,  sir? 
Che  mi  commanddte,  Signdra  ?  What  can  I  do  for  youJ 
my  lady  ?"  In  poetry  and  elevated  prose  the  rules  are  the' 
same  as  in  Enoiish. 

o 

s 

XII.  Thejhird  person  singular  is  used  in  addressing 
any  one  that  doe's  not  TjcTong  to  the  low  classes  ;  and  it  is 
expressed  by  the  feminine  pronoun  J5^/fe,  repres-enting  the 
words  Vdstra  Signoria,  or  their  contraction  A^ossignorfa 
(V.S.),  which  would  sound  too  formal  if  used  very  fre- 
quently in  conversation.  The  same  feminine  pronoun 
precedes  the  verb  in  the  third  person  when  the  individual 
addi'cssed  is  entitled  to  be  treated  as  Eccellcnza,  Altrzza, 
Grand^zza,  or  witli  some  other  feminine  word.     IT  many 


52  ITALIAN   GRAMMAR. 

are  to  be  addressed  in  this  way,  the  third  person  plural 
iis  substituted  for  the  singular. 

PERSONAL   PRONOUNS   IN   THE   OBJECTIVE. 

XIII.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  class  may  be  used  as 
direct  or  indirect  regimen  ;  that  is,  they  may  be  governed 
by  the  verb,  or  by  a  preposition,  as  the  following  exam- 
ples will  show :  — 

CerccHe  me  ?  Are  you  looking;  for  me  ? 

PenscHe  a  7ne  ?  Do  you  think  of  rae  ? 

When  the  pronouns  me,  te,  and  se  are  governed  by  tjie 
preposition  con,  they  may  be  prefixed  and  joined  to  it, 
tTmsjijrriicQy  teco,  seco.  JSfosco  and  vdsco,  for  con  ndi  and 
con  vol,  are  now  entirely  left  to  poetry. 

XLY.  The  pronouns  of  the  second  class  are  employed 
either  as  direct  or  indn-ect  regimen  of  the  verb  ;  but  they 
can  never  be  governed  by  a  preposition.  They  serve  to 
conjugate  pronominal  or  reflective  verbs,  and  in  such  case 
mi,  ti  si,  ci,  vi,  si,  mean  respectively  myself,  thyself,  him- 
self; or,  herself,  ourselves,  yourself ;  or,  yourselves  and 
themselves.     Ex. :  — 

lo  mi  ricordo,  I  remember. 

Mi  mando  dei  fori,  He  sent  me  some  flowers. 

TliS-Iironoun  l6ro  belono:s  to  both  classes  ;  it  can  there- 
fore be  used  for  the  direct  or  the  indirect  object,  with 
a  preposition  or  witEbut,  as  the  case  may  require. 

XY.  When  the  objective  pronoun  is  emphatic,  when 
the  preposition  cannot  be  suppressed,  and  when  there  is 
antithesis  between  two  pronouns,  a  proiiomi  of  the  first 
class  must  be  used ;  in  other  cases,  one  of  the  sec.ond 
class  is  to  be  preferred. 


READING    LESSON. 


L'  uomo   scioperato    e   1'  uomo   piu    affaceendato.      Egli  ha 

idle  most        occupied. 

cinquanta  amiei  che  si  crede  in  obbligo  di  coltivare. 

fifty        friends  whose  (friendship)     '^  believes        obliged 


PRONOUNS.  53 

Vi     dira     il  iiome  di  tiitti  i  ricamatori,  di  tutti  gli  spcziuli  dclla 
will  give  (tell)  embroiderers  apothecaries 

citta.     Egli  vi  provvedera  il  sarto,  il  calzolaio,  la  lavandaia ;  se 

will  procure 

siete  ammalato,  condurra  da  voi  un  medico ;    siete    addolorato, 
sick,         will  conduct  afflicted 

egli   non    vi   lascia,    fintantoche    non    vi   abbia    veduto    ridere. 
leaves,  until  have        seen      to  laugh. 

S'  incaricliera  di  tutte  le  vostre  compre,  e  finira  coll'  andare  a 

will  take  charge  purchases    will  finish  going 

letto  stracco  di  aver  lavorato    tanto.     L'  allegrezza  ci  consola  e 
bed       tired  worked      so  much.  joy 

ci  tiene  in  sanita ;  le  cure  vane  ci  opprimono,  distiirbano  1'  animo 
keeps  health  cares  oppress 

nostro  e  ci  traggono  tosto  nella  tomba. 
drag      quickly 


EXERCISE   FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  When  Paulus  Emilius  repudiated  Papiria,  his  wife,  some 
persons  were  astonished  that  he  should  separate  himself  from  so 
modest  and  so  handsome  a  w^oman ;  but  Emilius,  showing  them 
his  shoe,  said,  "  You  see  that  it  is  well  made,  but  none  of  you 
know  where  it  hurts  me." 

2.  It  was  reported  to  Frederick  the  Great,  that  some  one  had 
spoken  ill  of  him.  He  asked  if  this  person  had  a  hundred 
thousand  men.  He  was  answered,  "No."  —  "Ah!  well,"  added 
the  kino-,  "  I  can  do  nothinsj  with  him :  if  he  had  a  hundred 
thousand  men,  I  would  declare  war  against  him." 

3.  A  young  man  who  passed  for  rich,  but  who  was  laden  with 
debts,  sat  very  pensive,  the  evening  before  his  betrothal,  in  his  fu- 
ture mother-in-law's  parlor.  Several  times  she  said  to  him,  "  CJie 
cosa  avete  ?  "  "  What  have  you  ?  "  (meaning,  "  What  is  the  matter 
with  you  ?  ")  To  which  he  continually  answered,  "  No7i  ho  nienfe" 
"  I  have  nothing, "  (meaning,  "  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me.") 
Eight  days  after  his  marriage,  his  mother-in-law,  seeing  a  crowd 
of  creditors,  said  to  him,  "  Sir,  you  have  deceived  me."  — "  Mad- 
am," added  he,  "I  well  informed  you  that  I  had  notliing;  and  T 
repeated  the  same  thing  to  you  more  than  ten  times  in  your 
parlor  before  my  betrothal." 

5* 


54  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


VOCABULARY. 

1.  Repudiated,  ripudio ;  some  persons,  alcuni ;  were  aston- 
ished, si  maraviglidvano  ;  should  separate  himself,  si  separasse  ; 
so  pretty  a  woman,  una  donna  cost  vezzosa  ;  modest,  modesta  ; 
showing,  mostrcindo ;  his,  la  sua ;  said,  disse ;  you  see,  voi 
vedke  ;  well  made,  hen  fdtta  ;  however,  ^e;'o  ;  no  one,  nessuno  ; 
knows  where,  sa  dove  ;  hurts,  offenda. 

2.  It  was  reported,  yi6  riferito  ;  Frederick  the  Great,  Fede/ico 
i!  Grande  ;  had  spoken  ill,  sparldto  ;  if  this  person,  se  costiii  ;  a 
hundred  thousand,  cento  mila  ;  he  was,  gli  fu  ;  no,  di  no  ;  well, 
bene  ;  added,  soggiunse  ;  I  cannot,  non  posso  ;  nothing,  nulla  ; 
had,  avesse  ;   would  declare  war,  inuoverei  guerra. 

3.  A  young  man,  un  giovinotto  ;  who  passed  for,  tenuto  per ; 
laden,  cdrico  ;  debt,  debito  ;  was  pensive,  stdva  tutto pensieroso  ; 
evening  before,  vigilia  ;  of  his  betrothal,  dei  suoi  spojisdli  ;  par- 
lor, salotto  ;  of  his  future  mother-in-law,  della  sua  futura  suocera  ; 
many  times,  parecchie  volte  ;  sir,,  signore  ;  always,  sempre  ;  eight 
tlays  after,  otto  giorni  dopo  ;  seeing  arrive,  vedendo  capitdre  ; 
a  crowd,  una  turba  ;  deceived,  inganndta  ;  I  well  informed  you, 
vi  feci  pur  avvertita  ;  repeated,  ripetei  ;  more  than,  j^mrfi;  ten, 
died  ;  in  your,  nel  vostro  ;  before,  prima  de\ 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

CM  bdtte  ?  Son  io. 

Che  cdsa  volete  da  me  ?  Voglio  far  colazione  con  voi, 

Che  cbsa  mi  avete  detto  ?  Non  me  ne  ricordo. 

Pa  gate  voi  il  prdnzo  ?  Si,  lo  pdgo  io. 

3Ii  aspettdte  ?  Non  vi  aspetto. 

Di  chi  pdrla  egli?  Egli  pdrla  di  noi. 

Come  si  chidma  questa  ragdzza  ?  Ella  si  chidma  Carolina, 

A  chi  scrivero  io?  Al  pddre  di  3£aria. 

Ti  penti  tu  ?  •  Io  mi  pento. 

Ci  divertidmo  noi  ?  Noi  non  ci  divertidmo. 

Chi  vi  dira  il  nome  di  tutti  gli  X'  uomo  scioperdto  vi  dira  il 

spezidli  della  cittd  ?  nome  di  tutti. 

Siete  voi  il  padrone   di  questa  Sono  il  padrone  di  questo  at- 

cdsa  ?  bergo. 

Avete  il  bastone  di  mio  fratel-  Io  non  ho  il  suo  bastone,  voi 

lo  ?  V  avete. 

Volete  ddrmi  un  anello  ?  Non  voglio  ddrvi  un  anello^  vi 

darb  (will  give)  un  libra. 


PRONOUNS,  PERSONAL   AND    CONJUNCTIVE. 


55 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


PRONOUNS,    PERSONAL    AND    CONJUNCTIVE. 

[  Continuation  of  Preceding  Lesson.'] 

To  avoid  several  monosyllables,  and  for  the  sake  of 
e \ iphony,  tlie  Italians  unite  several  words  together.  This 
union  constitutes  one  of  the  chief  beauties  of  the  Ian2;ua2:e. 
For  exainple  :  the  imperative  ddteinelo  is  composed  of 
date  'iiie  loj^  give  it  to  me ;  and,  because  the  accent  falls 
on  the  first  syllable,  the  word  has  all  the  strength  of  the 
imperative,  the  desire  of  prompt  obedience. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


La  riverisco  divotamente^ 
In  die  pbsso  servirLA  ? 
Come  VE  LA  passdte  ? 
To  ME  LA  pdsso  benone, 
Vi  do  la  huona  notte, 
Non  VI  voglio  incomoddre, 
IhrudtevENK  indietro, 
Glielo  posso  dir  lO, 
AnddteQ.\.\YA.O  a  dir  VOI, 
L'evawi'^i  dindnzi,  temerdrio^ 
Non  MI  comparke  piu  dindnzi, 
Ohe  VE  NE  pdre  ? 
RagionidmoLA.  qui  fra  di  NOI, 
Faccidmo'LA  da  hubni  amici, 
Foi  non  me  la  darete  ad  in- 
tendere, 


I  have  the  honor  to  salute  you. 

How  can  I  serve  you  ? 

How  do  you  do  ? 

I  am  very  well. 

I  wish  you  good  night. 

I  do  not  wisli  to  trouble  you. 

Turn  back. 

I  can  tell  it  to  him  myself. 

Go  tell  it  to  him  yourself. 

Go  out  of  my  sight,  insolent  one. 

Never  appear  before  me  again. 

How  does  it  seem  to  vou  ? 

Let  us  reason  here  together. 

Let  us  act  like  good  friends. 

You  will  not  make  me  believe  it 


I.   A  pronoun  stands  for  a  person  or  thing 


Lo  or  iV, 

Le, 

Ne. 


him,  it;  To  lo  ret/o, 

her,  it ;  Tu  la  conosci, 

them  m. ;  JVoi  li  vedidmo, 

them,  /. ;  lo  le  aspelto, 

of  it ;  Voi  N  E  riderete, 


I  see  it  or  him. 
Thou  kiiowest  her. 
We  see  them. 
I  expect  them. 
You  will  Uiu^h  about 


Oi  or  vi^  of  it 


it. 
To  CI  or  VI  penso,l  think  of  it. 


r-  ft 


b  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR.    • 

II.  Tliej)ronoun  il  or  lo  may  be  contracted  and  blouded 
with  the  negative  non  into  the  monosyllable  nol:  as,  JVol 
so,  I  do  not  know  it ;  Nol  vedo,  I  do  not  see  him.  When 
not  thus  contracted,  lo  is  used,  as  it  always  is  before  verbs 
beginning  with  s  impure,  or  a  vowel.  Before  other  verbs 
lo  is  generally  preferred  to  z7,  unless  euphony  should 
otherwise  require.  Ex. :  Lo  riconobbi  siibito  die  7  vidi, 
I  recognized  him  as  soon  as  I  saw  him ;  Nol  vidi  e  per 
conseguenza  non  lo  salutdi,  I  did  not  see  him,  and  conse- 
quently I  saluted  him  not ;  11  chiese  e  lo  spedi  a  suo 
fratello^  he  asked  for  him  and  sent  him  to  his  brother. 

III.  It  is  also  by  euphony  that  we  should  be  guided  in 
the  elision  of  pronouns  before  verbs,  whenever  the  nieaii- 
ing  allows  it.  The  rules  that  govern  the  elision  of  the 
article  apply  also  to  pronouns,  with  the  exceptions__that 
may  result  from  the  verbs  having  no  gender.  Lo  vide  e 
V  amo  is  properly  said,  because  the  gender  of  the  pronoun 
elided  is  already  determined  by  the  object  of  vide.  U  amo 
qudnto  una  mddre  pud  amdr-e  would  not  be  correct,  owing 
to  the  double  meaning  that  the  pronoun  thus  elided  as- 
sumes ;  vfz.,  She  loved  him  or  her  as  much  as  a  mother 
can  love. 

lY.  Though  the  pronoun  gli  signifies  tojiini^  it  is  also 
used  for^ie  feminine  le  when  prefixed  to  and  blended 
with  lo,  la,  lih,J§:  ^^'  In  sucli  case,  the  letter  e  is  in- 
serted between  the  two  pronouns  ;  thus  :  — 

Glieio ;  V6i  glielo  darete,  You  will  give  it  to  him  or  her. 

Giiela ;  lo  (jU^U  manderb,  I  will  send  them  to  her  or  him. 

Glie'le;  Glie'le  vendera,  He  will  sell  them  to  liim  or  her. 

Gliem;  Vdi  gliene  comprerele,  You  will  buy  her  or  him  some. 

Lene^nstQSid  of  gliene  is  occasionally  used  forjthe 
feminine. 

Y.  In  a  grea,t  number  of  Italian  phrases,  the  pronoun 
la  refers  to  a  feminine  noun  which  is  not  expressed,  but 
it  is  easily  supplied  bjjhe  reader  or  listener.     Ex. :  — 

lo  ve  LA  dico  schietta,     I  tell  it  to  you  frankly  (the  truth). 
Voi  ve  LA  godete,  ITou  enjoy  it  (life). 

lo  me  LA  bdtto,  I  beat  it  (retreat)  ;  I  run  away. 

Tlie  words  veritd,  vita,  and  ritirdta  are  understood. 


PROJSOUNS,    PERSONAL   AND    CONJUNCTIVE.  o7 

VI.  Eii]jhoiiy  requires  that  the  i  of  tlie^  pronouns  mi, 
tij^si,  tu',_iii,_jihould -GhangeL  the  i  into  e  when  they  are 
followed  by  the  pronouns  /o,  la,  li,  ne;  as, — 

Jlfe  Zo,  it  to  me ;  Tu  me  lo  ddi,  Thou  givest  it  to  me. 

Te  la,  it  to  thee  ;  lo  te  la  do^  I  give  it  to  thee. 

Se  li,  them  to  him  ;  Egli  se  li  fard  dare,  lie  will  cause  them  to  be  given  to  himself. 

Ce  lie,  us  of  it ;  Noi  ce  ne  occupidnio,  We  occupy  ourselves  with  it. 

Vele,  them  to  you  ;  lo  ve  le  presto,  I  lend  them  to  you. 

VII.  Md,  tel,  selj^cel  ,jvely  are  written  befbrea  word 
which  commences  Avith  a  consonant ,  instead  of  me  lo,  teloj^ 
etc.  ;  as,  EgTTTe I  figura , "oY^seTo  Jig ura ,  he  iigures  it  to 
himself;  io  vel  diceva,  or  ve  lo  diceva,  I  said  it  to  you. 

VIII.  Some  ancient  authors  have  often  placgd_the  pro- 
nouns lo,  la,  li,  le,  before  7ni,  ti,  si,  ci,  vi^\\Q,u.  euphony 
permitted.  Tlius7~instead  of  "saymg,  Uio  te  lo  perduni, 
may  God  pardon  you  ;  they  have  said,  Dio  il  ti  perdoni. 

IX.  All  the_pron()uns  mi,  ti,  si,  ci,  vi,  lo,  la,  gli,  le^ 
ne,  me  To^  telo^  se  loTetc.,  whether  simple^or  compound, 
are  generally  placed  before  the  verb,  except  when  used 
with  an  infinitive,  a  gerund,  the  second  person  singular, 
and  the  first  and  second  plural  of  the  imperative  :  in  wliich 
cases  they  are  placed  after  the  verb  to  which  they  ara 
joined,  so  as  to  make  one  word  ;    thws,  — 


Parldr'n.i.,  To  speak  to  me. 

ParZdrMENE,  To  speak  to  me  of  it. 

ScriveteL^,  Writ«  to  her. 

KicordidmoCl,  Let  us  remember. 

CotnprdteG'LlEL.O,  Buy  it  for  him. 

GuarddteLO,  Loolc  at  him. 


Cercdndo'LO,  Seeking  him. 

VendcndoGX,lBljA,  Selling  it  to  him. 
ilfosiraZeCENE,        Show  us  some. 
DdfeMELO,  Give  it  to  me. 

I-cmieGLlELA,        Take  it  from  her. 
PensidMOCl,  Let  us  think  of  it. 


Observe  that  the  infinitive  loses  the  final  e  when  the 
pronoun  is  joinedjto^it ;  ahd^TTlTie'infinitrve  terminates  in 
ri'e,  as  cond'Orre,  it  loses  the  syllable_rej  and  we  say, 
Condurmi,  conduct  me. 

X.  To  express  "  give  it  to  me,"  "give  it  to  us,"  etc.,  the 
conjunctive  pronoun  is  placed  after  the  personal  in  this 
way  ;  Ddte^iFJjk  ddteCVA^O. 


58  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

XI.  The  pronoun  is  likewise  placed  after  the  word  ecco, 
to  which  it  is  joined;  ixs,'  Eccomi,  eccolo,  behold  me, 
behold  him. 

XII.  Withjthejie.2:ation  non,  these  pronouns  are^plagad 
before  the  verb,  except  when  the  verb  is  in  the  infinitive ; 
as, — 

Non  GLiELO  domdndate,  Do  not  ask  it  of  him. 

Non  ME  NE  date,  Do  not  give  me  any. 

Non  LO  faccidmo,  Let  us  not  make  it. 

Non  LO  facendoj  or  non  faceiidoh,  Not  making  it. 

Xm.  These  pronouns  are  also  joined  to  the  past  par- 
ticiple  when' the  auxiliary  is  understood;  as,  MaUegrdtosi^ 
having  rejoiced! 

Remark. — These  pronouns  admit  of  other  transposi- 
tions, and  very  much  assist  in  expressing  an  energetic, 
rapid,  or  gentle  sentiment.  For  example,  the  phrase 
"  I  say  it "  may  be  constructed  thus  :  — 

Lo  dico,  to  express  a  grave  sentiment. 

11  dicOf    to  give  a  mild  form  to  the  phrase. 

Dicolo,     to  impress  with  the  rapidity  of  the  thought. 

Dicol,       to  join  rapidity  with  sweetness. 

The  learner  should,  however,  be  careful  not  to  place 
the  ^^ronoun  after  any  other  than  the  imperative,  infixiitiye, 
and  o^erund.. 

XIY.  The  first  consonant  of  the  pronoun  should  be 
doubled  whenever  it  is  joined  to  a  verb  of  one  syllable,  or 
one_which  lias  the  grave  accent  upon  the  final  vo\yel ; 
as,  Dillo,  ddmini,  fdllo,  tell  it,  give  me,  do  it^ 

XY.  The  position  of  thepronoun  can  be  changed  for 
the  sake  of  euphony  ;  as,  — 

To  lo  voglio  vedere,  or  io  vbglio     I  wish  to  see  him. 

ved'erlo, 
lo  gliene  posso  parldre,  or  to     I  can  speak  to  him  of  it. 

posso  parldrgliene, 


PRONOUNS,    PERSONAL    AND    CONJUNCTIVE.  50 

XVI.  In  certain  cases,  the  personal  pronoun  is  changed 
into  the  possessive;  as,  Mio  *wxilqrddo ,  in  spite  of  me  : 
and,  on  the  contrary,  the  possessive  is  sometimes  changed 
into  the  personal;  as,  Cavdtevi  il  vestito,  take  off  your 
coat. 

READING   LESSON. 

Tra  le  varie  nazloni    del  mondo  la  pulltezza  lia  introdotto 

politeness  introduced 

infiniti  iisi  di  salutare.     Plauto  parla  di  popoli  che  si  salutavano 

modes      salutation.        Plautus     speaks 

tirandosi      forte       1'  orecchia.      I    Franchi   si   strappavano   un 
pulling    strong  (hard)  ear.  pulled  out 

capello,  e  lo  presentavano  alia  persona  che  volevano  salutare. 
hair  presented  they  wished 

Al  Giappone  un  conoscente  vi  saliita  togliendosi  dal  piede  lina 

Japan  acquaintance  taking  foot 

pantofola ;    e  nelle  Indie,  egli  viene  a  prendervi  per  la  barba ; 
slipper  comes  to  take  beard ; 

altri  si  salutano  voltandosi  la  scliiena.      Gl'  isol;ini  del  grande 
others  turning  back.  islanders 

oceano  fregano  il  lore  naso  con  quelle  della  persona  salutata, 
rub  ~       '    nose  that 

oppiire   gli   soffiano   nell'  orecchio.       GU   abitanti   di   Horn   si 

or  blow  inhabitants 

coricano   col  ventre  a  terra,  e  la  maggior  parte  dei  negri  si 
lie  down  belly  greater  negroes 

prendouo  a  vicenda  ledlta  e  le  fanno  schricchiolare.     L'   Inglese 
take  turn  make  crack.  Englislnnan 


■t)' 


in  un  eccesso  d'  amicizia  vi  afferra  per  la  mano  e  ve  la  scuote 
fit  friendship  seizes  shalces 

vigorosaraente   come   se  volesse   strapparvi  il  braccio.      Questa 

if  he  wished   to  pull  out  arm.  This 

gentilezza  fa    la  veci  degli  abbracci  dei  Frances!  e  degl'  Italiani. 
courtesy    takes  the  place  embraces 

EXERCISE. 

1.  A  thoughtless  wag  saw  three  blind  peoj)lo  in  the  street, 
wliOj  keeping  together,  went  begging.  "  Stop,"  said  lie  to  thcni ; 
"take  this  crown,  divide  it  between  you,  and  [)ray  God  for  me." 


60  ITALIAN    GllAJVIMAR. 

As  to  the  crown,  he  gave  it  to  neither  of  them.  The  blind  men 
all  thanked  him  at  once,  and  ran  quickly  into  a  tavern,  where 
they  ordered  a  breakfast.  When  they  were  well  satisfied,  one 
said  to  the  others,  "  Let  him  who  has  the  crown  pay  the  fare ;  '* 
but  each  one  answered,  "I  have  it  not:  thou  hast  it."  From 
hard  words  they  came  to  blows ;  and  gave  so  many  blows  with 
their  sticks,  that  they  broke  every  thing  that  was  on  the  table,  to 
tJie  great  detriment  of  the  host. 

2.  The  authors  of  the  century  of  Louis  XIV.  have  expressed 
great  thoughts  in  simple  words. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Humorist,  hurlone ;  thoughtless,  spensierato ;  saw  in,  vide 
per;  keeping  together,  stretti  insieme ;  went  begging,  se  ne 
anddvano  accattdndo  ;  stop,  fermatevi  ;  take,  togliete  ;  divide  it, 
spartitelo  ;  neither  of  them,  nessuno  ;  thanked,  ringraziarono  ;  all 
at  once,  concordemente ;  they  ran,  corsero  ;  a  breakfast,  da  cola- 
zione  ;  well  satisfied,  ben  satolli  ;  let  him  who,  dii  ;  pay,  pdghi  ; 
but  each  one  answered,  al  die  ciascuno  risjyondeudo  ;  thou  hast 
it.  tu  V  hai  ;  they  came,  vennero  ;  they  gave,  diedero  ;  so  many, 
tcinte ;  blows  with  a  stick,  bastoncHe  ;  everything  that  was,  futto 
cio  die  si  trovdva  ;  to  the  great  detriment,  etc.,  con  gran  ddnno 
deir  oste. 

2.  Have  expressed,  hdnno  espresso. 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Che  e  V  Italia  ?  H  giardmo  d*  Europa. 

Che  avete  ?  Ho  una  rbsa, 

Avke  il  libro  ?  Non  ho  il  libro,  ho  la  penna. 

E  giovane  la  sorella  del  Signbre  ?  Si,  ella  e  giovane. 

Che  fdnno  gV  isoldni  del  grdiide  J^glino  fregano  il  loro  ndso  con 
oceano  qudndo  salutano  ?  quello  della  persona^  salutdta. 

E  gli  ahitdnti  di  Horn  ?  Si  coricano  ventre  a  terra. 

Che  vide  un  burlone  ?  J^gli  vide  tre  ciedii. 

Che  dfisse  il  burlone  ?  Pregdte  D'lo  per  me. 

A  dii  diede  egli  uno  scudo  ?  Egli  non  lo  diede  a  iiessuno. 

Come  saliitano  gli  Inglesi  ?  Vi  afferrano  per  la  mdno  e  ve 

la  scuotano. 

QudV  e  la  prima  legge  ?  La  legge   di  Dio  e   la  prima 

legge. 

Tribnfa  essa  sempre  ?  Si,  tosto  o  tdrdi. 


THE    ADJECTIVE.  61 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE    ADJECTIVE  —  L' " ADDIETTIVO. 
MNEMONIC     EXERCISE. 

Godo  di  vedervi  in  hiiona  salute,    I  am  glad  to  see  you  well. 
Passeremo  per  la  piu  corta,  We  will  take  the  shortest. 

Parlidinoci  schietto,  Let  us  speak  clearly. 

Perche  avete  tanta premura'^  Why  are  you  so  hurried? 

Quanti  rinni  avete  ?  How  old  are  you  ? 

I rtcchi  hdnno  molti  amici,  The  rich  have  many  friends. 

II  hello  pidce  a  tutti,  The  beautiful  pleases  all. 

3I6lfi  pochi  fdnno  un  assdi^  *        A  little  repeated  makes  much. 
GV  ingrdti  hdnno  poca  memoria,    Ungrateful   people   have  short 

memories. 
Chi  perdona  ai  catiwi,  nubce  ai    He   who  pardons  the  wicked, 

huoni,  injures  the  good. 

Buon  dl,  hiiona  sera,  felice  notte,    Good  day,  good  evening,  good 

night. 
Per  molti  lafatica  e  poco  sdna,     Labor  is  not  healthy  for  many 
^  people. 

E  uno  che  ha  pocJii  pari,  He    is    a   man   who   has   few 

equals. 

ADJECTIVES  :    THEIR   NIBIBER,    GEXDEE,    ETC. 

I.  Italian  adjectives  all  end  in  o  or  e.  Those  ending 
in  o  change  the  o  into  a  for  the  Feminine  :  those  in_g 
preserve  the  same  form  in  both  genders.  "The  plural  of 
adjectives  is  formed  like  that  of  iiouns ;    as,  — 

SINGULAR. 

Popolo  libero  ed  indipendente,         Free  and  independent  people. 
Nazione  libera  ed  indipendente,      Free  and  independent  nation. 

PLURAL. 

Pbpoli  liberi  ed  indipendenti,         Free  and  independent  peoples. 
Nazibni  lihere  ed  i7idipendenti ,       Free  and  independent  nations. 

*  Idioms  and  proverbs  are  marked  i 


62  ITALIAN    GRA31MAR. 

II.  Some  adjectives  end  either  in  e  or  in  o ;  as,  Via- 
lente  oFmoIenfo.  In  this  case  one  might  say,  Uu  uo'ino 
violente,  una  ddnna  viole7ite^  or  un  uomo  violento,  una 
d6nna  violSnta^  a  violent  man,  a  violent  woman. 

III.  The   only  adjectives    terminating   in   i  are  pdri^ 
equal,  and  dispdri  or  iini:)dri^  unequal.     These  are  inva- 
.'i'iable,  whatever  be  the  gender  or  the  number  of  the  noun 
(to  which  they  belong. 

IV.  The  word  'pdi^i  is^  often  used  as  a  noun.  It  then 
has  a  possessive  adjective  after  it ;  as,  Tin  pdri  mio^  un 
l^dri  vostro,  del  j)dri  nostri,  a  man  like  me,  like  you, 
persons  like  us;  cosi  si  trdtta  cdn  un  pdri  mio?  is  it 
thus  that  one  acts  with  a  person  of  my  rank  ? 

V.  Substantives  used  as  adjectives,  ending  in  t(^re, 
change  tpt'e  into  trice  forme  feminine  ;  as,  A.ut6re,  au- 
thor;  autince,  authoress,  —  except  dottdre,  fattore,  doc- 
tor, farmer ;  which  make  dottoressa^  fattoressa.  Other 
substantives  used  as  adjectives  form  their  feminine  in  essa. 
Such  are,  Poeta,  poet ;  poetessa^  poetess  ;  bar  one,  baron  ; 
baronessa,  etc. 

YI.  Adjectives  of  q riant ity, — as,  Qudnto,  how  much; 
tdnto,  so  much;  altrettdnto,  as  much;  tr6j)po,  too 
much;  pdco,  little;  tnolto,  much,  —  agree  with  their 
TTpuns  ;    as,  — 

Tdnto  orgoglio ;  tdnta paura,        So  much  pride;  so  much  fear. 
Tanti  sciocchi  ;  tdnte  volte,  So  many  fools  ;  so  many  times. 

Poco  sdngue  ;  poca  came,  Little  blood  ;  little  meat. 

Molti  disgusti.,  Much  (or  many)  chagrins. 

Altrettanti   solddti ;    altrettdnte     As    many   soldiers ;    as    many 

donne,  women. 

Trdppo  vento ;  troppe  ceremdme,    Too   much   wind ;     too    many 

ceremonies. 
Qudnto  vino  ?  qucinte  honta  ?  How  much  wine  ?    how  much 

kindness  ? 

VII.  '^e  word  "  such  "  is  sonietimes  translated  hj^^si 
fdtto,  a;  si  fdtto,  a;  as,  — 


TPIE    ADJECTIVE. 


63 


Guardatevi  da  cosi  fdtta  rihal-     Guard  yourself  against  such  a 
ddglia,  rabblti. 

VIII.  The  adjective  alqudnto( ^m^ul^r)  signifies  a  lit- 
Jle_;  alqudnti  (plural),  some.  ~Parecchi,  jKirecchieJ^f^ 
m^y_ahojiULUJ^  ami  c^\  be  replaced  by  tlie  word  piu, 
more;  as,  Vi  erano  pakecchie  hallerine,  or  Piu  bai- 
ler ine,  there  were  many  dancers. 

IX.  Tlie  adjective  mezzo  always  precedes  and  ap^ees 
w  ith  tlic  noun  which  it  limits  ;  but  it  may  be  invariable 
wlien  tiie  Tioun  is  understood :  as,  ^Tna  mezza  bottisrHa, 
half  a  bottle  ;  ilna  botifg-lia  e  mezza  or  mezzo,  a  bottle 
and  a  half.  If  the  noun  is  not„£xpresscd,  the  adjective 
mezzo  takes  no  article. 

X.  The  last  syllable  of  the  words  hello ^  ^^jj:^£^gl^^j^« 
must  be  suppressed  before  niasculine  nouns  commencing_ 
with  a  consonant.     The  adjective  grdnde,  great,  is  written 
gran  before  masculine  and  feminine  nouns,  both  in  the 
singular  and  plural ;    as7 

SINGULAR. 

Bel  giardhio, 
Quel  pcddzzo, 
San  Pietro, 


fine  garden, 
this  palace. 
Saint  Peter. 


Gran  hirhone, 
Gran  regma, 


great  villain. 


PLUKAL. 

JBei  or  he''  giardini. 
Quel  or  que'  paldzzi, 
Sdnti  Pietri. 
Gran  birboni. 
Gran  regine. 


great  queen. 

XL  Biiono^  g^Qod,  loses  the  o  before  a  consonajit ;  as, 
II  huoh  vino  fcTTudn  sdiigue,  good  wine  makes  good 
blood. 

XII.  To  avoid  the  union  of  too  many  consonants,  the 
last  syllable  of  these  adjectives  is  not  retrenched  before 
(nouns  commencing  with  5,  when  followed  by  another  con- 
sonant; as, — 


SINGULAR. 

Bello  sposo, 
Quello  straniero, 
Grande  strepito, 
Grande  spdda, 
Son  to  Stefano, 
Bnnno  snolare. 


handsome  spouse, 
that  stranger, 
great  noise, 
great  sword. 
Saint  Stephen, 
good  scliolar. 


PLURAL. 

Begli  sposi. 
Quelli  stranieri. 
Grdndi  strep'iii. 
Grdndi  spade. 
Sd?iti  Stefau'L 
Budni  scoldri. 


64 


ITALIAN    GllAMMAR. 


XIII.  The  final  vowel  o.f  the  preceding:  adjectives  ia 
retrenclied  before  a  vowel,  and  replaced  by  an  apostrophe  ; 
as,  BelV  ucchio,  fine  eye  ;  quelV  dsino,  that  ass  ;  grdnd' 
^w^^9(??'c>,  great  emph-e  ;  etc. 

/  XIV.  No  fixed  rules  can  be  given  to  determine  the 
place  of  the  adjective,  the  Italians  being  guided  by  the 
ear.  Usage  generally  places  the  adjectives  expressive  of 
form,  color,  and  savor,  after  the  noun;   as, — 

Tavola  quadrdta, 
Ahito  turchmo, 
Color  giallo, 


Un  Signore  italidno, 
Acqua  inzuccherata, 
Una  rosa  hidnca, 


square  table. 

blue  coat. 

yellow  color. 

an  Italian  gentleman. 

sugared  water. 

a  white  rose. 


REMARKS. 

The  following  observations  will  assist  the  student :  — 
The  Italian  adjective  can  be  placed  before  or  after  the 
noun,  andmust^  a^ree  with  it  in  gender  and  nuiniBer: 
euphony  determines  its  positipirr~'  Adjectives  denoting 
materials,  nations,  dignity,  color,  taste,  etc.,  are  placed 
afteFlhe  nouns ;  as,  (Jajppello  bianco,  white  hat ;  un 
udmo  cieco,  a  blind  man. 

Participles  and  adjectives,  preceded  by  an  adverb,  may 
be  ])laced  after  the  noun ;  as,  Una  cdsa  trdppo  piccola, 
too  sniiill  a  house. 

The  position  of  some  adjectives  alters  their  signification ; 
as,  — 

a  certain  (that  is  any)  thing. 

a  certain  (sure)  thing. 

something  important. 

a  great  thing. 

an  honest  man. 

a  polite  man. 

my  only  daughter. 

my  daughter  alone. 


Una  certa  cosa, 
Una  cosa  certa, 
Gran  cosa, 
Una  cdsa  grdnde, 
Un  galantudmo, 
Un  udmo  galdnte, 
La  sola  mia  ftglia, 
Mia  figlia  sola, 
Un  jier  udmo, 
Un  udmo  Jiero, 
Un  pdvero  udmo, 
Un  uomo  povero, 


a  savage  man. 
a  proud  man. 
an  unhappy  man. 
a  poor  man. 


THE    ADJECTIVE.  65 

READING    LESSON. 

Giambattista    Pigna,   scrittore   celebre   del   fortunato   secolo 

writer  century 

decimo  sesto  ci  ha  tramandato  il  ritratto  seguente  dell'  Ariosto. 
sixteenth  transmitted  portrait    following 

L'  Ariosto,*  in  quanto  alia  forma  e  all'  aspetto  del  corpo  avea  la 

had 

statura   alta,  la  testa  calva,  i   capelli  neri   e   crespi,   la  fronte 
tall  bald  black  ciu-ly 

spaziosa,  le  ciglia  alte  e  sottili,  gli  occlii  in  dentro,  neri,  vivaci, 


thin 


e  giocondi,  il  naso  aquilino  grande  e  curvo,  le  labbra  raccolte, 
lively  lips      contracted 

i  denti  bianchi  ed  equali,  le  guance  scarne  e  di  colore  quasi 

cheeks     hollow  almost 

olivastro,    la  barba  un  pdco  rara  cbe  non  cingea  il  mento  iuf  ino 
olive-colored  thin  covered         chin 

alle    orecchie,  il   collo   ben    proporzionato,  le   spalle   larghe   e 

neck     well  shoulders 

alquanto  piegate,  quali     sdgliono       avere  quasi  tutti  quelli  che, 
somewhat     curved,        as     are  accustomed  to  have  those 

da  fanciulli,  hanno  cominciato  a  stare  inchiodati  in  sui  libri :  Le 

nailed 

mdni  asciutte,  i  fianchi  stretti.      Egli   dipinto  dalla  mano  dell' 
thin  hips       narrow.  painted 

eccellente  Tiziano,  pare  che  ancor  sia  vivo.     Un  popolo  fanatico 

seems  still  alive. 

e   superstizioso   e  un  arma  terribile  nelle  mani  d'  un  ddspota. 

Ove   la   pdlle   del  leone  non  basta  bisogna  aggiiingervi  quella 
When  skin  sufficient  to  add 

della  volpe. 

EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  Osley,  a  famous  beggar  of  London,  made  a  fortune  by  using 
the  following  stratagem.  He  placed  himself  in  streets  -where 
there  was  the  greatest  concourse  of  fashionable  people  ;  and,  when 
he  saw  elegant  ladies,  he  asked  charity  of  them.    If  they  refused, 


*  A  few  proper  nouns  of  very  remarkable  people  take  the  definite  article  in  Italian ; 
as,  II  Dante,  VAridstOj  etc. 

6* 


Q6  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

"  Madam,"  said  he  to  one,  "  in  the  name  of  your  beautiful  black 
eyes  ; "  to  another,  "  in  the  name  of  your  fine  hair  ; "  to  this  one, 
"  in  the  name  of  your  rosy  lips  ; "  and,  to  that  one,  "  in  the  name 
of  your  admirable  figure."  Finally  came  the  divine  legs,  the 
charming  feet,  the  majestic  carriage  :  nothing  was  forgotten,  and 
he  returned  home  with  his  purse  well  filled. 

2.  A  drunkard,  who  wished  to  excuse  himself  to  his  confessor 
for  his  too  great  love  of  wine,  reasoned  thus  singularly :  "  My 
father,  good  wine  makes  good  blood,  good  blood  produces  good 
humor,  good  humor  creates  good  thoughts,  good  thoughts  produce 
good  works,  and  good  works  conduct  man  to  heaven :  then  (the) 
good  wine  leads  man  to  heaven." 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Made,  fece  ;  following,  seguente  ;  he  placed  himself,  egli  si 
appostava ;  where  there  was,  ove  era;  fashionable  people,  hel 
mondo ;  when  he  saw,  allorche  vedeva ;  refused,  ricusavano ; 
admirable,  mirdbile  ;  came,  venivano  ;  forgotten,  dimenticato. 

2.  Drunkard,  hevitore  ;  wished,  voUa  ;  too  great  love  of  wine, 
troppo  grdnde  amore  del  vino  ;  reasoned  thus  singularly,  facea 
questo  curioso  arg omenta ;  makes,  fa;  produces,  produce; 
creates,  y*a  ndscere ;  conduct,  menano. 

C  ON  VERS  AZI6nE. 

Sono  gli  Americdni  Viberi  ?  Si  sono  liheri  ed  indipendenti. 

Che  proclamazione  e  quella  di  Si  parla  molto  deW  eniancipa' 

cid  si  pariah  zione  dei  poveri*  neri. 

Che  predicatore  avete  ?  Ahhidmo  un  hrdvo  predicatore. 

Come  si  chidma  (called)  ?  Z'  amico  dei  pbveri. 

Dov*  e  la  rostra  Signora  mddre'?  E  nella  chiesa  di  San  Paolo,  ' 

Cosa  e  il  V astro  Signor  pddre'^  E  autdre. 

E  sua  mdglie  (wife)  ?  E  dottaressa. 

Qudnti  dnni  ha  Maria?  Ha  ndve  dnni. 

Che  statura  ha  ella  ?  Ha  la  statura  piccola. 

Di  che  colore  e  il  sua  dhito  ?  H  sua  nudvo  dbito  e  turchino. 

Che  hudna  cdsa  ha  egli  fdtto  f  Nan  pdsso   (I  cannot)   dtrvelo 

(tell  you). 

Chi  €  questa  cdra  Janciidlina?  Luisina.     Ella  e  mia  nipdte. 

Che  dcchi  celesti  /  Si,  ella  ha  V  ciria  d'  un  angio- 

letta. 


*  The  repetition  of  the  objective  strengthens  its  expression ;  as,  Povero^  poor ;  pdverc 
pdvero,  very  poor 


ADJECTIVES  :     THEIR    COMPARATIVES.  67 

CHAPTER    X. 

ADJECTIVES:    THEIR    COMPARATIVES. 
MNEMONIC     EXERCISE. 

Vi  sono  piu  poveri  die  ricchi^  There  are  more  poor  than  rich. 

Le  donne  sono  piii  compassio-  Women  are  more  compassion- 

nevoli  degli  uommi,  ate  than  men. 

E  meglio  morire  die  temer  sem-  It  is  better  to  die  than  always 

pi'e,  to  fear. 

Quanto  piit  vi  2)6)iso,  tdnto  piii  The   more   I  think   of   it,  the 

mi  vien  rdhhia,  more  I  am  enraged. 

Tali  dohhidmo  essere  qudli  vo-  We   ought   to   be   such  as  we 

glidmo  comparire,  wish  to  appear. 

11  sole  e  piii  grdnde  della  terra,,  The  sun  is  larger  than  the  earth. 

La   terra   non    e    cost  piccola  The  earth  is  not  as  small  as  the 

come  la  lima,  moon. 

La  fdma  di  sua  hellezza  e  mi-  The  renown  of  her  beauty  is 

nore  assdi  della  verifd,  much  below  the  truth. 

/   creditori    m.iglior    7nem6ria  Creditors  have  a  better  memo- 

hdnno  die  i   debitori,  ry  than  debtors. 

E  meglio  fare  invidia  die  pieta,  It  is  better  to  cause  envy  than 

pity- 

V  usurdio  e  peggiore  del  Iddro,     The  usurer  is  worse  than  the 

thief. 
II  vmo   e  il  mio  maggior  ne-     Wine  is  my  greatest  enemy. 
mico, 

THE    COMPARISONS    OF   ADJECTIVES. 

I.  A  comparison  can  only  be  made  between  two  objects. 
An  object  may  be  more  beautiful,  less  beautiful,  and  as 

j  beautiful  as  another.  There  are,  therefore,  tlu-ec  degrees 
':  of  comparison,  —  the  degrees  of  superiority,  of  inferiority, 
I  and  of  equality. 

II.  The  comparative^  of_superiority  is  indicated  by  the 
'Words  pill,  more;    molto  piit  or  assdi  piii  ov  vie  piii, 

much  more";  miglidre,  better   (a.)  ;   maggidre,  greater; 
\  meglio,  better   (ad.). 


QS  ITiy:.IAN    GRAJNOIAR. 

III.  The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  expressed  by  the 
words  mefio  or  mdnco^  less ;  molto  meno  or  assdi  7neno 
or  vie  meno,  much  less  ;  pe^^zore,  worse  (a.)  ;  mindre^ 
smaller;  peggio,  worse   (ad.). 

lY.  The  conjunction  than,  which  joins  the  two  terms 
of  comparison,  is jbranslated  by  di  when  it  is  followed  by 
a  pronoun  or  a  possessive  or  dernonstratis^Ljadjeiitiv 

He  is  much  happier  than  you,  E  molto  piii  felice  di  voi. 

Your    sister    is    prettier    than  Vostra  sorella  e  piu  hella  delhi 

mine,  mta. 

There  are  no  people  more  cred-  No7i  v'  e  gente  piii  creduJe   di 

ulous  than  those  who  have  an  quella  die  ha  interesse  di  es- 

interest  in  being  deceived,  sere  inganndta. 

V.  Than  is_sometimes  translated  by  che,  especially 
if  the  pTirase  is  elliptical.  Di,  however,  may  always  be 
used. 

YI.  If  thayi  is  followed  by  any  other  word,  and  there 
is  a  complement  of  the  phrase  understood,  it  can  be  trans- 
lated by  di  or  .by  che;  as  in  the  following  examples  :  — 

Is  man  more  happy  than  wo-  E  V  uomo  piiu  felice  della  don- 

man  (is  happy  )  ?  na'^   or  che  la  donna ? 

The  stomach  digests  water  more  Lo  stomaco  diger'isce  piii  facil- 

easily  than  wine,  mente  V  dcqua  che  il  vino. 

YII.  It  is  better  to  use  che  for  than,  when  the  compari- 
son  is  made  between  two  verbs,  twoadiectiyes.  or  two 
adverbs  ;  as,  —  ""'^ 

There  are  more  poor  than  rich,  Y^'  sono  piib  poveri  che  ricchi. 

It  is  better  late  than  never,  E  meglio  tdrdi  che  mai^ 

It  is  better  to  save  a  culpable  E  meglio  salvdre  un  colpevole, 

person,  than  to  condemn  an         che  condanndre  un  Innocent e 

innocent  one, 

YIIL.  If  the  natural  order  of  the  words  is  inverted,— 
that  is  to  say,  if  the  verb  is  placed  before  the  subject. 
—  it^  is  better  to  use  che.  This  rule  may  be  applied  to 
phrases  where  than  is~Tollowed  by  a  demonstrative  ad- 
jective ;  as,  — 


ADJECTIVES  :     THEIR    COMrAIlATIVES.  69 

He  who  attacks,  always  has  Piu  cinimo  ha  scmpre  colui  ^he 
more  courage  than  he  who  assdlta,  che  coliti  che  si  di- 
delends  himself,  fende, 

IX.  To  translate  "  more  than  three  years,"  "  more  than 
j  twenty  thousand  men,"  etc.,  we  say,  Three  years  and 
I  more,  twenty  thousand  men  and  more,  t7'e   dnni  e  pin; 

'  venti  mila  udmini  e  piit,  or  j^'^u  di  tre  anni,  qIq.,  piil 
che  tre  anni. 

X.  The  comparative  of  equality  is  indicated  by  cosi  or 
tdnto:  and  the  conjunction  than  is  translated  by  cdme^i 
cosi  has  been  used;  and  by  qudnto,  if  ja2?/_Q_has  been 
used  r~as,  — 

The  eye  of  the  domestic  never  Z'  occhio  del  servitore  non  vede 
sees  as  well  as  the  eye  of  the  mdi  cosi  bene  come  V  occhio 
master,  del  padrone;  or,  non  vede  7nui 

tdtito  bene  qudnto  V  occhio,  etc. 

XL  Sometimes  the  word  cosz  or  tdnto  is  suppressed; 
as,  —  ~ 

A  skin  as  white  as  snow,  Una p'elle  bidnca  come  or  qudn- 

to la  neve. 

XII.  When  the  words  as  many  and  as  refer  to  a  noun, 
as  many  mustl5e  rendered  by  tdnto,  and  as  by  qudnto^ 
makino'  them  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  ; 
as,  — 

He  has  as  many  debts  as  there  £gli  ha  tdnti ;  or,  altrettanti 
are  stars  in  the  sky,  debiti   qudnte   sdno  le  stelle 

net  cielo. 

See_  the  strawberries.  Take  as  Ecco  delle  frdgole.  Prendetene 
many  as  you  wdsli,  qudnte  volete. 

XIII.  In  English  we  say  (with  the  complement  under- 
stood) ,  — 

I  have  as  much  money  as  you     Naples  is  not  as  populous  as 
(have).  Paris  (is). 

In  Italian,  the  complement  is  generally  expressed  in 
similar  phrases  ;    as,  — 

lo  ho  tdnti  danciri  qudnti  ne  Ndpoli  non  ha  tdnta  jmpola- 
avete  voi,  zione  qudnta  ne  ha  Par'iyi. 


70  ITALIAN    GRA^BLiR. 

XIV.  Sometimes  tdnto  or  qudnto  is  placed  before 
moi'c  or  less,  so  as  to  gi\Q  more  enero\y  to  the  expression ; 
as  in  the  followino-  phrases  :  — 

Qudnto  j^/w   uno   e   ignordnte,  The   more   ignorant   a  person 

tdnto  piu  egli  e  pronto  nel  is,  the  more  ready  he  is  to 

giudicdre,                   "  judge. 

X'  aria  e  tdnto  piu  densa  qudn-  The  air  is  much  more  dense  as 

to  e  piii  propinqua  dlla  terra,  it  is  nearer  the  earth. 

XV.  As  well  as,  and  as  much  as,  signifying  as,  are 
translated  by  cosi,  cdtne,  or  qudnto,  and  are  invariable ; 
as,  I  know  him  as  well  as  you,  io  lo  condsco  cdme  or 
qudnto  vdi.  One  can  say,  also,  lo  lo  condsco  al  'par  di 
vdi, 

READING   LESSON. 

I  Romani,  nei  loro  stravizzi,  bevevano  tanti  bicchieri  di  vino 

banquets,        drank 

quante  erano  le  lettere  del  nome  dei  loro  amici  ai  quali  face- 

they 

vano  brindisi.       Catone,  il  censore,  che  vedea  (sorgere) 

made  (drank)    honor  (health).  saw        to  come 

la  pompa  della  mensa,  disse,  che  era  assai  malagevole  il  salvare 

difficult  save 

una  citta  dove  un  pesce  si  vendeva  piu  caro  di  un  bue.      Di 

fish  was  sold 

due  negoziatori  in  polltica  vince  sempre  il  piu  scaltro ;  cioe  chi 

conquers  alwaj^s  sharp  ;    that  is 

sa  meglio  ingannare  1'  altro.     II  diavolo  non  e  cosi  briitto  come 

to  cheat 

si  dipinge.     Non  e  cosa  nel  mondo  piu  preziosa  del  tempo.     La 

painted. 

noja  e  forse  il  maggior  male  che  sia  uscito  dal  vasello  di  Pan- 
ennui  went 

dora.    I  sogni  sono  le  immagini  del  di,  gUc4ste  e  corrotte.   L'  dro, 

spoiled      corrupted. 

come  il  fuoco,  e  buon  servitore  ma  cattivo  padrone.    Gli  deste  una 

gave 

llbbra,  datemene  altrettanto. 


ADJECTIVES  :     THEIK    COMPARATIVES.  71 

EXERCISE    FOR   TRA*NSLATION. 

1.  It  is  difficult  to  decide  if  irresolution  renders  man  more 
unhappy  than  despicable,  and  if  it  is  more  inconvenient  to  take  a 
bad  part  than  not  to  take  any. 

2.  Usage  is  always  introduced  by  the  ignorant,  who  form  the 
greatest  number  (in  society). 

3.  Two  consolations  solace  the  heart  of  the  unhappy :  one  is, 
to  recall  the  time  when  he  lived  more  happily ;  and  the  other,  to 
see  that  there  are  some  in  the  world  more  unhappy  than  he. 

4.  The  city  of  Naples  is  more  beautiful  in  darkness  than 
London  is  when  the  sun  shines. 

5.  The  fatter  the  kitchen,  the  leaner  the  testament. 

6.  Since  we  cannot  make  men  what  we  would  have  them,  it 
is  necessary  to  bear  with  them  as  they  are,  and  make  the  best  of 
them. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Man,  se;  renders,  ya;  unhappy,  infelice ;  despicable,  dis- 
jpregevole;  if  there  are,  se  vi  sono  ;  to  take  a  bad  part,  appigli- 
drsi  ad  un  cattivo  -partito  ;  not  to  take  any,  non  appiglidrsi  ad 
alcimo. 

2.  Usage,  iiso  ;  introduced  by,  introdotto  da. 

o.  Solace,  sollevano ;  is  to  recall,  il  rimemh-arsi ;  when  (in 
which),  in  cm  ;  he  lived,  visse  ;  to  see  (to  think),  i^e/isc^re;  more 
unhappy,  con  ynaggior  doglia. 

6.  Since,  poiche  ;  we  can,  possidmo  ;  we  would,  vorremmo ; 
we  must,  conviene ;   bear  with,  tollerdre. 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Chi  e  pill  feltce,  V  udmo  o  la     1/  uno  non  e  piii  felice  che  V 

donna  ?  dltra. 

Qudl  e  meglio  per  lo  stdmaco,     Per  i  giovani  V  dcqua  e  7neglio 

V  dcqua  o  il  vmo  ?  che  il  vino. 

Vi   sono  molti  ricclii  in  Lon-     Si^  ma  vi  sono  piii  poveri  che 

dra  ?  ricchi. 

Pensdte  (do  you  think)   che  io     Siete  molto  piii  infelice  di  me. 
^  sono  infelice? 
E  hella  la  Signorina  Rosa  ?  Si,  ma  vdsfra  sorella   e  piii 

hella  ancora. 
E  hrutta  la  Ibro  zia  ?  Non  e  cdsi  hrutta  come  si  dice 

(they  say). 


72  ITALIAN    GRAMMAK. 

Hdnno  i  creditori  huona  memO'  JEssi  hdnno  mvglior  memoria 
ria'^  die  %  dehitori. 

Avete  nemici  ?  II  vino  e  il  m'lo  maggior  nemtco. 

Qucd  e  la  cosa  piil  preziosa  net  Nel  mondo  non  e  cosa  piu  pre- 
mondo  ?  ziosa  del  tempo. 

Qudnte  hrdccia  (yards)  di  ques-  Ne  ho  quante  ne  voglio  (I  W'ish). 
to  pdnno  volete  ? 

Luigi,  siete  studioso  ?  '  Si,  ma  qudnto  piil   studio   (I 

study)  tdnto  meno  impdro 
(I  learn). 


CHAPTER    XI. 

THE    ADJECTnrES:    SUPERLATIVES. 
MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

Parigi  e  una  bellissirna  cittd,  Paris  is  a  most  beautiful  city. 

Avete  pochissimi  rigudrdi,  You  have  very  little  regard. 

Fu  ubmo  integerrimo,  He  was  an  upright  man. 

Di  cattivo  egli  diventb  pessimo,  From  bad  he  has  become  worse. 

Godo  mH  ottima  salute,  I  enjoy  excellent  health. 

E  uomo  di  pochissime  parole,  He  is  a  man  of  very  few  words. 

Ho  veduto  una  helVissima  ragdz-  I  have  seen  a  very  beautiful 
za,  girl. 

Vi  serviro  puntualissimamen-  I  will  serve  you  most  punctu- 
re, ally. 

Infelicissimo  e  V  uomo  die  non  Very  unhappy  is  the  man  who 
ha  amici,  has  no  friends. 

Mi  rincresce  assaissimo  dH  egli  I  am  very  sorry  that  he  is 
porta,  goiiig  away. 

Quella  gente  e  di  ottimo  cuore,  These  people  have  an  excel- 
lent heart. 

Notdte  dgni  minima  cosa,  Take   notice   of    the    smallest 

thing. 

A  tutti  il  riso  e  gratissimo,  A  smile  is  very  agreeable   to 

everybody. 

Venne   una  dirottissima  pidg-  There  was  a  pouring  rain. 


THE    ADJECTIVES  :     SUrEKLATIVES. 


7a 


THE  SUPERLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


1.  Cattivissi?no, 

2.  Savissimo, 

3.  Fresclmsimo, 

4.  Larghissimo, 


7n6lto  cattivo, 
molto  sdvio, 
7n6Ito  fresco, 
molto  Icirgo, 


asscd  caitivOf 
asscH  sdvio, 
assdi  fresco, 
assdi  Idrgo, 


very  bad. 
very  wise, 
very  fresh, 
very  large. 


I.  We  see,  by  the  above  examples,  that  the  superla- 
tive is  formed  by  issimo,  molto,  or  assdi.  Issimo,  taken 
from  the  Latin,  is  united  to  the  adjective,  the  final  vowel 
of  which  is  retrenched.  When  the  adjective  ends  in  to, 
both  vowels  are  dropped.  If  the  adjective  ends  in  co  or 
go,  the  letter  h  is  placed  after  the  c  or  g,  to  preserve  the 
hard  sound  of  these  letters.  The  words  amwo  and  nemico, 
friend  and  enemy,  are  exceptions  :  they  make  ainicissi' 
tno,  nemicissimo. 

II.  Verii,  before  a  past  participle,  is  rendered  by  mdlto 
or  assdij  as.  He  is  very  much  esteemed  by  every  one, 
egli  e  nidlto  stimdto  da  tfdti.  We  cannot  say,  Egli  e 
stiniaf issimo  da  tutti.  But,  if  the  past  participle  is  used 
simply  as  a  qualificative  adjective,  then  it  receives  the 
superlative  issimo;  and  we  say,  Mlo  sti')natissi7no  si- 
giidre, 

III.  The  following  words  express  the  superlative  of 
themselves  :  — 

Ottimo,  very  good.  Infimo, 

Pessimo,         very  bad.  Egregio, 

Sommo,  highest.  Mdssimo, 

Estremo,         extreme.  Miserrimo, 

Acerrimo, 

Integerrimo, 


Stupendo. 
Insigae, 


very  good. 

very  bad. 

highest. 

extreme. 

wonderful. 

renowned. 


very  low. 
very  noble, 
supreme, 
very  unhappy, 
very  bitter, 
entirely  honest. 


rV.  The  particle  s^ra  (extra)  is  prefixed  to  a  few- 
words,  giving  them  a  superlative  signification  ;  as,  Stra- 
i'icco,  very  rich  ;   stincdtto,  very  much  cooked. 

Y.  The  adverbs  terminating  in  meiite  (corresponding 
to  ly  in  English),  from  tlie  Latin  mens,  which  is  femi- 
nine, form  their  superlative  missima;   as,  grandissima- 

Mirnte. 


74  ITALIAN    GRAjVOIAR. 

Remark.  —  The  termination  issmio  serves  in  Italian 
for  the  superlative  absolute,  and  can  never  be  translated  in 
English  by  those  superlatives  ending  in  st  or  est,  which 
are  of  the  relative  kind.  The  latter  must  be  rendered 
by  the  adjective,  preceded  by  il  pih,  la  piii,  etc.  ;  as,  H 
jnu  cdrto  p)oema  (not  cortissimo  poe'ma),  the  shortest 
poem. 

THE    SUPERLATIVE   RELATIVE. 

VI.  This  superlative  is  formed  by  the  words  il  piil 
or  il  nieno,  suppressing  the  article  when  jdiu  or  me  no 
comes  after  the  noun  ;  as,  Demdstene  fu  V  oratdre  jnil 
eloquhite  della  Grecia,  Demosthenes  was  the  most  elo- 
quent orator  of  Greece.  But,  if  the  adjective  is  placed 
before  the  noun,  then  the  article  is  used ;  as,  Demdstene 
fu  il  pih  eloquente  oratore  della  Grecia. 

The  words  mdssimo,  injimo,  are  also  superlative  rela- 
tives, and  signify  the  gi^eatest,  the  lowest;  as, — 

To  lo  vedro  col  mdssimo  pia-      I  shall  see  him  with  the  great- 
cere,  est  pleasure. 

READING    LESSON. 

D  Duca  d'  Epernon,  prima  di  morire,  scrisse  al  cardinale  di 

before  dying,       wrote 

Richelieu,  e  termino  la  lettera  col  "  vostro  umilissimo  ed  obbidi- 

entissimo  servo,"  ma  ricordandosi  che  il  cardinale  non  gli  avea 

remembermg 

dato  die  dell'  affezionatissimo,  mando  lino  apposta  per 

given  sent  on  purpose  (an  express) 

trattenere  la  lettera  che  era  gia  partita,  la    principio    da  6apo, 
to  retain  recommenced 

sottoscrisse  affezionatissimo,  e  mori  contento. 
subscribed  died 

Un  cattivissimo  autore       diede      in  luce  un  libro,  che  avea 

gave  (brought)       light 

per  titolo,  "  dell'  anima  delle  bestie : "   Voltaire,  avendolo  letto, 

disse  ad  un  amico  che  gliene  chiedeva  il  suo  parere,  1'  autore  e  un 

asked 


t. 


THE    ADJECTIVES  :     SUPEIILATIVES.  75 

ottimo  cittadino,  ma  non  e  abbastanza  informtito  della  storia  del 

sufficiently       informed 

siio  paese. 

lo  non  conosco  miglior  preservativo  contro  la  noja  che  di 
know  against  ennui 

adempire  esattissimamente  i  proprj  doveri. 
to  fulfil  own       duties. 


EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  Louis  XI.  and  Ferdinand  of  Arragon  were  both  cruel  and 
perfidious,  notwithstanding  the  first  took  the  title  of  Very  Chris- 
tian, and  the  second  that  of  Catholic. 

2.  The  study  of  languages  is  very  useful  and  very  agreeable. 

3.  It  has  been  said,  that  a  nation  of  wise  men  would  be  the 
most  foolish  people  in  the  world,  as  an  army  of  captains  would 
be  the  worst  army. 

4.  When  there  was  an  eclipse  of  the  moon,  the  Romans  were 
accustomed  to  recall  its  light  by  beating  upon  copper  vases  in  a 
very  noisy  manner,  and  by  raising  towards  heaven  a  great  num- 
ber of  fiambeaus  and  lighted  firebrands. 

5.  A  three  days'  ftist  would  make  a  coward  of  the  bravest 
man  on  earth. 

6.  The  language  of  a  people  is  the  most  important  monument 
of  its  history. 


VOCABULARY. 

1.  Louis  XL,  Ludovico  undecimo ;  Ferdinand  of  Arragon, 
Ferdindndo  d'  Arragona  ;  notwithstanding,  nonostdnte ;  took, 
prese ;    that,  qiiello. 

2.  Agreeable,  piacevole. 

3.  It  has  been  smd,  fit  detto ;  foolish,  pdzzo ;  as,  come;  worst, 
il  jnu  cattivo. 

4.  There  was,  succedeva  (succeeded)  ;  were  accustomed,  sole- 
vano ;  recall,  richiamdre ;  light,  cldarbre ;  by  beating,  col  hat- 
fere;  very  noisy,  strepitosamente ;  copper,  7'dme;  to  raise,  sollevdre; 
flambeau,  face  ;  lighted,  acceso. 

5.  Three,  <re  ;  would  make, /«/-eZ»ie  ;  co\v ri\\,  polfrdne  ;  brave, 

valor  o  so. 


n 


G  ITALIA^^    GKAM31AR. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 


Come  avete  dormito  ?  Ho  dormito  saporitissimamerUe, 

E  il  Sig.  D.  huon  cittadino  ?  E  un  ottimo  cittadmo. 

I!  avete  veduto  ?  .SV,  sptssissime  volte. 

Fu  crudele  Ludovico  XL  ?  Si,  crudele  e  perjido. 

Prese  egli  un  titolo  ?  Prese  il  titolo  di  cristiamssimo, 

Siete  contento  ?  Sono  contentissimo. 

Non     e     quest   elefdnte    mblto     Egli  e  grandissimo  e  fortissi- 

grande  ?  mo. 

Qiialmese  e  il piu  freddo  (cold)     //  mese  di  Fehhrdio  e  ordinari' 

dell  anno  ?  amente  freddissimo. 

Ghe  studio  e  utilissimo  ?  Lo  studio  delle  lingue  e  utilis- 

sijno  e  piacevolissimo. 
E  il  vostro  generdle  valoroso  ?         Si,  e  V  ubmo  piu  valorbso  della 

terra. 
Qudli  sono  i  metdlli piit  pesdnti?    Il  pldtino  e  V  oro  sbno  i  piu 

pesdnti  metdlli. 
Qual  animdle  e  il  piii  crudele  ?     La  tigre  e  un  animdle  crudelis 

simo  ;  e  piii  crudele  di  tutti 

gli  altri  animdli. 


CHAPTER  Xn. 

AUGMENTATIVES  AND  DIMINUTIVES. 

The  signification  of  many  words,  both  nouns  and  ad- 
jectives, may  be  either  increased  or  diminished  by  the 
addition  of  certain  syllables  to  their  termination. 

I.  The  augmentatives,  reducible  to  rules,  are  formed 
in  6ne  (m.),  6na  (f. ),  <jtto  (ni.),  6tta  (f.),  to  signify 
bigness  and  stoutness,  in  a  good  sense. 

Likewise  in  dccio  (m.),  dccia  (f. ),  to  signify  some- 
thing of  a  disii'usting  or  contemptible  bulk. 

The  addition  dme  expresses  a  great  abundance  of  any    I 
thing   of  the   same    species,   but    diifering   in    form    and 
qualities  ;  sometimes  for  things  not  very  agreeable. 


AUGMENTATIVES    AND    DIMINUTIVES.  77 

EXAMPLES. 

JAhro^  book ;  librone,  a  very  large  book. 

Ragdzza,  a  girl ;  ragazzona,  a  stout  jolly  girl. 

Casa,  a  house ;  casotto,  casotta,  a  good  roomy  house. 

Sdla,  a  hall ;  salone,  a  large  hall. 

Cavdllo,  a  horse ;  cavalldccio,  a  great  ugly  horse. 

Cdsa,  a  house ;  casdccia,  an  ugly  large  house. 

Bestia,  beast ;  hestidme,  cattle. 

Observe  that  many  nouns  have  a  natural  ending  in 
dccia,  dccio,  and  dme,  without  being  augmentatives.  Ob- 
serve, also,  that  masculine  augmentatives  often  come  from 
feminine  nouns,  as  cdsone  (m.),  from  cdsa  (f.). 

II.  The  diminutives  reducible  to  rules  are  formed  in  ino, 
ello,  efto,  with  the  variations  incident  to  adjectives  and 
substantives  in  o;  as, — 

Carmo  (ra.  s.),  carina  (f.  s.),  carini  (m.  p.),  carme  (f.  p.),  dear 

pretty  little  creature,  or  creatures ;  from  cdro. 
Poverello,  poverella,  poverelli,  poverelle,  poor  little  creature,  or 

creatures ;  from  pdvero. 
Libretto,  a  pretty  little  book  ;  from  libra.    Acquetta,  a  clear  small 

stream ;  from  dcqua.     Such  diminutives  generally  denote  eii' 

dearment  and  smallness. 

Other  diminutives,  ending  chiefly  in  Hccio,  -dccia^  and 
Hzzo,  Hzza.,  indicate  something  small  or  contemptible;  as, 

Casuccia,  a  small  mean-looking  house ;  from  cdsa,  house. 
Uomuzzo,  a  puny  little  fellow ;  from  udmo,  man. 

Yet  all  these  rules  are  liable  to  exceptions,  which  nothing 
but  practice  can  teach ;  for,  besides  the  terminations  which 
we  have  just  given  for  augmentatives  and  diminutives, 
many  others  are  freely  used  in  familiar  conversation,  and 
in  books  on  trivial  subjects.  Thus,  from  dunna,  a  woman, 
cdsa,  house,  libro,  a  book,  may  be  formed  the  following 
augmentatives  and  diminutives  :  — 

Donnone,  a  tall,  stout,  masculine  woman  .  .  .  from  donna. 

JDonnona,  a  tall,  strong,  healthful  woman  .  .  .  „         „ 

Donndccia,  an  impudent,  shameful  virago  .  .  .  „         „ 

7* 


78  ITALIAN    GRAJVOIAR. 

Donnetta,  a  pretty  little,  smart  woman     ....  from  donna. 

Donniciuola,  a  mean-looking  woman „  „ 

Donnina^  a  pretty  little  woman „  „ 

Donnckcia,  a  vulgar  woman  ........"„  „ 

Donnaccione,  a  bold,  impudent,  stout  woman     .     .  „  „ 

Casone,  a  very  large  house  ;  a  mansion    ....  from  cdsa. 

Casdccia,  a  large,  ill-contrived  house „  „ 

CasamentOy  a  well-built,  roomy  house „  „ 

Casvpola  and  casupoJa,  a  small,  despicable  house    .  „  „ 

Casuccidccia,  a  small,  wretched  house      ....  „  „ 

Castle,  a  poor,  thatched  cottage „  „ 

Casella,  a  small,  low-built  house „  ,, 

Casotta,  a  snug,  comfortable  house „  „ 

Casetta,  a  snug  house  ;  also,  a  neat  kennel    .     .     .  „  „ 

Casellina,  a  very  little  but  genteel  house  .     .     .     .  „  „ 

Casettmo  (m.),  casettina  (f.),  a  neat,  pretty  cottage,  „  „ 

Casina,  a  very  small  house „  „ 

Casino,  a  small,  neat,  summer  house „  „ 

Librone,  a  bulky,  heavy  book from  libro, 

Lihrdccio,  an  ugly,  large  book „  j^ 

Lihricolo  and  lihercolo,  a  small^  contemptible  book .  „  ,, 

Lih^etto,  a  pretty,  neat,  little  book „  „ 

Lihrettino,  a  very  little  and  pretty  book    ....  „  ,, 

Libriccino,  a  very  small  pamphlet „  ,, 

And  so  on,  with  thousands  of  other  words,  In  all  the  range 
of  humoi'  and  wdiiras.  But  few  augmentatives  and  dimin- 
utives are  admitted  in  a  style  strictly  correct,  beyond  those 
in  one,  dine,  dccio,  for  increasing ;  and  those  in  ino,  ettOy 
ello,  for  diminishing. 


« 


The  termination  dglia  indicates  an  indeterminate  num- 
ber, and  can  be  applied  only  to  individuals,  and  ahvays  in 
a  bad  sense ;  as,  Ragdzza,  child ;  ragazzdglia,  a  great 
number  of  wicked  children  ;  i^lehdglia,  gentdglia,  from 
'plehe,  gente,  meaning  a  great  number  of  low  people,  vul- 
gar persons.      This  termination  Is  feminine. 

Astro  gives  a  bad  qualification,  and  is  applicable  only 
to  professions;  as,  Medico,  a  physician;  medicdstro,  a  bad 
physician ;  filosofdstro,  i:)oetdstro,  a  bad  philosopher, 
a  bad  poet.       However,   we  can  say  giovindstro,  for  a 


AUG3IENTATIVES    AND    DIMINUTIVES.  79 

naughty  boy;   verddstro,  olivdstro,  hiancdstvo^  etc.,  of 
a  greeniyh,   olive,   whitish  color,   etc. 

Besides  this  quantity  of  augmentatives  and  diminutives 
which  modify  the  nouns  in  so  many  different  ways,  there 
are  still  several  others  which  are  called  irregular,  because 
they  only  belong  to  a  few  words.      Such  are  — 

Mediconzolo,  a  bad  physician  ;  from  inedico  and  onzolo, 
Lepratto,  small  hare ;  from  lepre  and  cHto. 
Cagmiolino,  little  dog ;  from  cane,  nolo,  mo. 
Omicidtto,  poor  little  man ;  from  uomo,  iccio,  dtto. 
TristoMzuoJo,  unwholesome ;  from  tristo  and  anzuolo. 

A  diminutive  syllable  may  also  be  added  to  some  verbs, 
such  as  vivacchidre,  to  live  poorly;  from  vivere:  leggi- 
chidre,  to  read  carelessly;  from  leggere:  innamoracchi- 
drsi,  to  be  slightly  in  love  ;  from  innamordrsi. 

We  can  join  together  the  augmentative  terminations, 
and  thus  form  a  double  augmentative;  as,  Omdccio,  bad 
man ;  omaccidne,  a  very  bad  man  :  from  iidmo,  dccio, 
6ne. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

Mangidte  un  hocconcino  di pane,     Eat  a  little  mouthful  of  bread. 

Dckegli  un'  occhiatina.  Give  him  a  slight  glance. 

E  una  fanciidletta  semplicina,       She  is  a  very  simple  little  girl. 

fjffli  ha  un  poco  del  goffotto,  He  is  a  little  foolish. 

Slke  un  cattiveUo,  You  are  a  naughty  little  one. 

Che  ventareUo  che  trde  !  What  a  pleasant  little  wind  ! 

jihhidte  un  tantino  di  giudizio,       Have  a  little  sense. 

E  un  pezzo  di  volpone,^  He  is  a  sly-boots. 

^gli  e  un  hello  zerUiidtto,  He  is  an  elegant  young  man. 

Co7n  'e  hellina  e  leggiadretta  !  How  pretty  she  is  !  how  grace- 
ful! 

Vorrei  dirvi  due  paroUne,  I  wish  to  say  two  brief  words 

to  you. 

Fla  una  hriitta  lingudccia,  He  has  a  very  wicked  tongue. 

j^gli  ha  cera  d''  uno  scimiottino,    ^  He  has  the  face  of*  a  little  mon- 

E  un  ragazzciccio  ignorantone.       He   is   a  very   ignorant   ugly 

child. 


80 


ITAJLIAN   GEAJiI:MAR. 


State  zitta,  sfacciatella  I 
Che  visino  graziosetto  ! 
Intrattenetevi  un  momentmo, 
Vol  state  henone, 
Fa  con  tutti  il  dottorello^^ 
Ma  guardate  die  amormo  ! 
Quel  gonnellino  e  gentile, 
Dov'  e  il  mio  herrettino  da  notte  ? 
E  nel  cassettino  della  tdvola, 

Ml  rispose  con  una  scroUatma 

di  cdpo^ 
Qicella    vostra   nipotina   e   un 

angioletta, 
Bella  facciotta  ha  questa  ra- 

gdzza  ! 
Va  vi'a,  asi7idccw,  senza   cre- 

dnza  I 
Quel  pasticcetti  mi  consolano  il 

cuore, 
In  Lbndra  le  case  nan  hdnno 

portoni^ 
Ddtemi    una    spazzolatina    al 

tahdrro, 
Ho  gid  fdtto  un  migliarelloy 

E  ricciiito,  biondetto,  e  bassotto, 

Mi  vuoi  tufdre  un  servigetto  ? 

Ho  fdtto  alcime  speserelle^ 

Aspettdtemi  un  quarticello  d'dra, 

Quel  hirhantello  me  V  ha  fdtta, 

Le  serdte  d'  inverno  son  limghette, 

Ha  un  hocchmo  che  innamora, 

Guarddtevi  da  quella    rihaldd- 
glia, 


Be  quiet,  impudent  little  one ! 

What  a  pretty  little  face  ! 

Stop  only  a  little  moment. 

You  are  very  well. 

He  plays  the  wise  man. 

See  the  little  darling ! 

That  little  skirt  is  very  nice. 

Where  is  my  small  night-cap  ? 

It  is  in  the  little  drawer  of  the 
table. 

He  answered  me  by  a  little 
shake  of  the  head. 

Your  little  niece  is  a  little  an- 
gel- 

What  a  beautiful  face  this  girl 
has! 

Go  away,  great  ass,  without 
education ! 

These  little  cakes  rejoice  my 
heart. 

In  London  the  houses  have  not 
coach-doors. 

Give  a  little  stroke  of  the  brush 
to  my  cloak. 

I  have  already  gone  a  short 
mile. 

He  is  little  curly-headed,  pret- 
ty blonde,  and  rather  small. 

Will  you  do  me  a  little  ser- 
vice ? 

I  have  made  some  trifling  ex- 
penses. 

Wait  for  me  a  brief  quarter  of 
an  hour. 

This  little  rogue  has  tricked 
me. 

Winter  evenings  are  rather 
long. 

She  has  a  ravishing  small 
mouth. 

Mistrust  that  rabble. 


AUGMENTATIVES    AND    DIMINUTIVES. 


81 


Gli  ho  tirdto  una  sassdta, 
Le  mattindte  son  freschette. 
Si  e  fdtta  una  corpaccidta, 
Siete  nn  hel  rlhaldonaccio^ 
11  poveretto  e  magricciublo, 
Venite  nel  mio  salottino, 
Ella  ha  un  bel  bracciotto, 
Che  tempdccio  fa  quest'  oggi  ! 
Che  spalldcce  da  facchino  ! 

Oh  !  cdra  la  mia  gioietta  I 


I  have  tlirowii  a  stone  at  him 
The  mornings  are  a  little  cool. 
He  has  eaten  to  satiety. 
You  are  a  p-eat  villain. 
The  poor  fellow  is  rather  thin. 
Come  into  my  little  parlor. 
She  has  a  plump  fine  arm. 
What  bad  weatlier  it  is  to-day  ! 
What   great    shoulders    for    a 

porter ! 
O  my  dear   little  jewel  of  a 

ivoman  I 


E.EMAEK.  — It  will  be  seen  by  the  above  examples,  that 
the  Italian  language  admits  of  the  frequent  use  of  augmen- 
tative and  diminutive  terminations.  These  last  modify  the 
signification  of  words  in  much  the  same  way  as  the  ter- 
minations Icin^  ling,  ing,  oclc,  en,  el,  in  English;  as, 
lamh-hin,  duck-ling,  hill-ocZ;,  chick-e??-,  cock-ereZ,  etc. 
Augmentative  terminations  have  no  corresponding  meaning 
in  Enolish. 

Augmentatives  and  diminutives  form  one  of  the  striking 
beauties  of  the  Italian  language  ;  but,  as  no  strict  rules  can 
be  given  concerning  them,  the  student  is  caiitioned  not  to 
venture  upon  their  use  until  familiar  with  the  language. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 


Clii  e  fanciidlino  f 

Dove  dimbra  (fives)  egli'i 

Che  avete  ? 

])i  che  colore  ? 

(Jie  uomo  e  egli? 

Chi  e  questo  cattivello'^ 


Mio    fratello  e  fanciidlino. 

In  un  casino. 

Ho  un  canino. 

Biancdstro. 

E  una  cattwa  Ungudccia, 

E  figlio  del  medicbnzolo. 


Avete  veduto  (seen)  mm  cugina?     Si  I  ConH  e  hellhia  e  leggiadret- 

ta! 
Ddtemi  una  canzbne,  se  vi  pidce.     Non  ho  che  questa  ca^izoncina, 

prendetela  (take  it). 
AhUdte  un  tantino  di  giudizio      V  ho,  non  vi  pdre,  qudndo  vi 
nelparldre'?  dico   (I    say)   che   siete  un 

hel  zerhinotto  ? 


82  ITALIAN    GKAMMAR. 


CHAPTER    Xm. 

THE    NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

Vo  a  letto  dlle  undid  in  punto,  I  go  to  bed  precisely  at  eleven. 

Mi  dlzo  dlle  dieci  precise,  I  rise  precisely  at  ten. 

Vi  andremo  una  volta  per  uno.  We  will  each  go  there  once. 

Vi  son  torti  d^  dmho  le  pdrti.  There  are  wrongs  on  both  sides. 

Gli  ho  detto  a  qudttr''  occhi  le  I  told  him  my  way  of  thinking, 

mie  ragioni,^  face  to  face. 

II  capitdle  mi  frutta  il  sei  per  The  capital  yields  me  six  per 

cento,  cent. 

Qudnto  impbrtano  due  dnni  di  What  is   the    interest   of   one 

frutti,  at  cinque  per  cento,  di  thousand  seven  hundred  and 

un  capitdle  di  mille  sette  cento  ninety  -  two    francs    for    two 

novdnta  due  frdnchi  ?  years,  at  five  per  cent  ? 

Cdrlo  ottdvo  scese  iri  Itdlia  nel  Charles  VIII.  went  into  Italy 

mille   qudttro    cento    novdnta  in   one   thousand   four  hun- 

qudttro,  dred  and  ninety-four. 

Mi  par  iiiille  dnni  di  rivedere  I  am  impatient  to  see  my  coun- 

la  mia  pdtria,^  try  again. 

Egli  non  sa  nemmeno  che  dice  He  does   not  even  know  that 

via  due  fan  qudttro,  twice  two  make  four. 

NIBIERAL   ADJECTIVES. 

The  numeral  adjectives  *   are  divided  into  cardinal  and 
ordinal. 

I. CARDINAL    NUMBERS. 


Uno, 

one. 

Cinque, 

five. 

Due, 

two. 

Sei, 

six. 

Tre, 

three. 

Sette, 

seven. 

Qudttro, 

four. 

Otto, 

eight. 

*  Numbers  may  be  divided  into  cardinal,  ordinal,  collective,  distributive,  and  propot- 
tional. 


THE    NmiERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


83 


Nove, 

Died, 

XJndici^ 

Do  did, 

Tredid, 

Quattordid, 

Qmndidy 

Sedici, 

Didassette, 

Didotto, 

Didannove, 

Venti, 

Ve^it'imo,  or  ) 

Ventuno,*     ) 

Ventidue, 

Ventitre, 

Ventiqudttro, 

Venticinque, 

Ventisei, 

Ventisette, 

Venfotto,  or 

Veritotto, 

Ventinove, 

Trenta, 

Treniujio,* 


■} 


nine. 

ten. 

eleven. 

twelve. 

thirteen. 

fourteen. 

fifteen. 

sixteen. 

seventeen. 

eisrhteen. 

nineteen. 

twenty. 

twenty-one. 

twenty-two. 

twenty-three. 

twenty-four. 

twenty-five. 

twenty-six. 

twenty-seven. 

twenty-eight. 

twenty-nine. 

thirty. 

thirty-one. 


Trentotto,         thirty-eight. 
Quardnta,        forty. 


Oinqudnta, 

fifty. 

Sessdnta, 

sixty. 

Settdnta, 

seventy. 

Ottdnta, 

eighty. 

Novdnta, 

ninety. 

Cento,^ 

Duecento, 

Ducento,  or 

Dugento, 

Tj'ccento, 

Quattrocento, 


hundred. 

two  hundred. 

three  hundred, 
four  hundred. 


Duemila,  or 

Dumila, 

Tremila, 


thousand, 
two  thousand, 
three  thousand. 


Millecento,  or )     ,  ,       ,     , 

i\m        '\     r  eleven  hundred. 
Mule  e  cento,  \ 


Diecimila, 
Centomila, 
Milibne, 


ten  thousand, 
hundred  thousand 
million.  \ 


*  Wlien  a  noun  follows  the  numbers  twentA'-one,  thirty-one,  forty-one,  etc.,  it  remains 
In  the  singular ;  as,  Ycnt'  iuio  I'tbro,  twenty-one  books.  But,  when  the  noun  precedes  the 
uumber,  it  is  put  in  the  plural ;  as,  L'tbri  trcnV  uno. 

t  The  numerals  cr7ito  and  m'llle  are  never  accompanied  by  the  indefinite  article  as  in 
English,  —  a  hundred,  or  a  thousand.     Cento  is  invariable. 

t  When  the  numerals  are  used  to  indicate  the  hour  of  the  day,  they  are  preceded  by 
the  feminine  article  la,  le:  but  then  the  word  ora,  hour,  ore,  hours,  is  not  expressed. 


ITALIANISMS. 


Verso  le  set,  at  about  six  o'clock. 

iSuona  tin''  ora,  it  has  struck  one. 

E  P  una^  or  c  iin  ora,  it  is  one  o'clock. 

Ad  un'  6ra ,0V  al  tocco  1  at  one  o'clock. 


Bi  due  ffiorni  V  I'tnn.  every  other  day. 
Q,rhulicigionii_fa,  or  j.  .^  f^.t^,  j^t  q. 
Sono  quindici  gioriii,  \  -^        '' 

Domdni  a  quindici,       to-morrow  fortnight. 


84  ITALIAN   GRAMMAR. 


II. ORDINAL    NUMBERS. 

Primo first. 

Secondo _  second. 

Terzo third. 

Quarto fourth. 

Qmnto fifth. 

Sesto sixth. 

Sktimo seventh. 

Oticwo eighth. 

Nbno ninth. 

Decimo       . tenth. 

Undecimo,  or  decimo  primo    .     .  eleventh. 

Duodecimo,  or  decimo  secondo    .  twelfth. 

Tvedecimo,  or  decimo  terzo     .     ;  thirteenth. 

Decimo  quarto fourteenth. 

Decimo  quinto fifteenth. 

Decimo  sesto sixteenth. 

Decimo  s'ettimo seventeenth. 

Decimo  ottdvo eighteenth. 

Decimo  nbno nineteenth. 

Ventesimo,  or  vigesimo      .     .     .  twentieth. 

Ventesimo  prwio,  etc twenty-first. 

Trentesimo thirtieth. 

Quarantesimo fortieth. 

Cinquantesimo fiftieth. 

,  Sessantesimo sixtieth. 

Settantesimo seventieth. 

Ottantesimo eightieth. 

Novantesimo ninetieth. 

Centesimo one  hundredth. 

Millesimo one  thousandth. 

These  adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns.     (See  Chap- 
ter IX.) 

III.  Fractional  and  collective  numbers  are  — 


Mezzo,  half 

Una  meta,      a  half  (moiety). 

Thi  terzo,        a  third. 

Un  quarto,     a  fourth. 

Una  decima,  a  ten  (half-score). 


Una  dozzma,  a  dozen. 

Una  quindicina,  a  fifteenth. 

Una  ventina,  a  score. 

Un  centindio,  a  hundred. 

Un  miglidio,  a  thousand. 


THE    NUIklERAL    ADJECTIVES.  85 

IV.  ^20,  numeral  adjective,  like  the  indefinite  article 
un,  agrees  with  its  noun;  but  the  final  o  is  suppressed, 
unless  the  noun  begins  with  s  followed  by  another  conso- 
nant;  as,  JJn  c/dllo,  one  or  a  cock ;  2m  autoi^e,  one  or 
an  author;  uno  spillo,  a  pin.  The  feminine  is  una;  as, 
^na  donna,  a  woman.  We  write  un^  before  a  feminine 
noun  beginning  with  a  vowel;  as,   Ui'C  dnitra,  a  duck. 

Y.  There  are  a  great  many  phrases  in  Italian  in  which 
the  noun  after  ixno  is  suppressed ;  as,  ^  mio  die  dice 
mdle  di  tdtti,  he  is  a  man  (one)  wdio  speaks  ill  of 
everybody. 

YI.  On  the  contrary,  uno  is  often  suppressed  before 
nouns  which  express  an  indefinite  sense;  as,  _£^  uomo  di 
huona  fdma,  he  is  a  man  of  good  repute. 

YII.  Pel'  uno  signifies  per  head ;  as,  II  prdiizo  ci  e 
costdto  cinque  frdnchi  per  Uno,  the  dinner  cost  us  five 
francs  per  head. 

YIII.  The  expression  ^?^  U7i,  often  employed  by  the 
poets,  is  an  abridgment,  signifying  in  un  solo  moinento, 
in  un  medesimo  tempo,  in  a  single  moment,  in  an  even 
time  ;  and  the  expression  ad  una  voce,  signifies  unani- 
mously. 

IX.  To  translate  "one  by  one,"  "tw^o  by  two,"  "three 
by  three,"  etc.,  the  preposition  is  repeated;  and  we  say, 
ad  uno  ad  uno,  a  due  a  due,  a  tre  a  tre.  "Both,"  "  all 
three,"  etc.,  are  translated  tutti  e  due,  tidti  e  tre, 

X.  "Firstly"  and  "secondly"  are  expressed  \yj premier a- 
mente,  secondariamente :  afterwards  Ave  say,  iii  terzo 
luSgo,  in  qudrto  ludgo,  for  "in  the  third  place,"  "in  the 
fourth  place,"  etc. 

XI.  In  multiplication,  via  expresses  times;  as,  Twice 
or  two  times  two  are  four,  due  via  due  fan  qudttro ;  or, 
by  abbreviation,  due  via  dUe  qudttro. 

8 


86  ITALIAN    GR.\JMMAK. 

XII,.  In  dating  letters,  the  article  may  be  used  either  in 
the  singular  or  plural;  as,  The  21st  May,  li  21  Mdg- 
gio,  or  ai  21  di  Mdggio^  or  il  21^  Mdggio,  etc. 

XIII.  In  speaking  of  years,*  in  Italian  we  use  in  the; 
as,  mi  1500,  nel  1862. 

XIV.  For  the  knowledge  of  epochs,  it  Is  important  to 
know  that  the  Italians  sometimes  call  the  thirteenth  cen- 
tury il  200,  because  it  goes  from  1200  to  1299  ;  and,  for 
the  same  reason,  tliey  say  il  300,  il  400,  il  500,  etc., 
for  the  fourteenth,  fifteenth,  sixteenth  centuries  :  hence 
the  words  un  trecentista,  cinqiiecentista,  un  seicentista, 
etc.,  for  "an  author  of  the  fourteenth,  sixteenth,  seven- 
teenth centuries."  Generally,  however,  they  say,  as  in 
English,  il  dSchno  terzo  secolo,  il  decimo  ndno  secolo, 
the  thirteenth  century,  the  nineteenth  century. 

XV.  "Both"  is  translated  by  dmho  or  ambedue;  as, 
Amho  i  piedi,  dr}ibe  le  gdmhe,  ambedue  le  famiglie, 
Both  feet,  both  legs,  both  families. 

XVI.  In  speaking  of  sovereigns,  the  ordinal  number 
is  used,  as  in  English ;  as,  Enrico  qudrto,  Henry  the 
Fourth ;  Gregorio  decimo  sesto,  Gregory  the  Sixteenth. 

READING   LESSON. 

Ludovico  Ariosto  nacque  addi  otto  di  Settembre,  dell'  anno 
mille  quattrocento  settanta  quattro. 

Dante  nacque  in  Firenze  nel  Marzo  dell'  anno  mille  ducento 
sessanta  cinque  da  Alighiero  e  da  Bella.  II  siio  primiero  nome 
di  Durante  fu  cangiato  per  vezzo  in  quelle  di  Dante.  Nell'  anno 
mille  trecento  ventuno,  nel  mese  di  Settembre,  raori  il  grande  e 
valente  poeta  Dante  Alighieri  nella  citta  di  Ravenna. 

Petrarca  nacque  addi  venti  di  Liiglio  nelF  anno  mille  trecento 
quattro  nella  citta  d'Arezzo.  Mori  d'  apo])lessia  nella  notte  del 
diciotto  di  Liiglio  dell'  anno  mille  trecento  settanta  tre. 


*  I  am  twenty,  thirty,  fifty  years  old,  cannot  be  rendered  literally ;  but  is  expressed 
thus :  I  have  twenty,  thirty,  fifty  years,  lo  ho  venf  dnni,  trent^  dnni,  cinquanV  dnni. 


THE    NUMEEAL    ADJECTIVES.  87 

Torquato  Tasso  nacqiie  in  Sorrento  agli  undici  Marzo  dell' 
anno  raille  cinquecento  qiuininta  quattro.  Spiro  ai  venticinque 
d'Aprile  mille  cinquecento  novanta  cinque. 

Giovanni  Boccaccio  nacque  nell'  anno  1313 ;  e  mori  add!  21 
di  Dicembre,  1374. 

Machiavello  venne  alia  luce  in  Firenze  ai  3  di  Maofgio  delF 
anno  1467,  e  mori  ai  22  di  Giugno  1527. 

Leonardo  Salviati  il  piii  illustre  grammdtico  di  Firenze  vide 
il  gidruo  nel  1540. 

Leonardo  da  Vinci  nacque  nel  1452. 

Michelagnolo  Buonarroti  ebbe  vita  nel  1475 ;  e  mori  in  eta  di 
qnasi  89   anni. 

Benveniito  Cellini  venne  al  mondo  il  di  d'  ognissanti  1500. 

Nacque  il  Galileo  nel  1564,  nello  stesso  gidrno  e  quasi  alia 
stessa  ora,  in  ciii  mori  Michelangelo. 

Francesco  Soave,  autore  delle  "  Novelle  Morali,"  vide  la  luce 
nel  1743  e  mori  in  eta  di  63. 


EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  It  is  more  difficult  to  make  five  francs  with  six  sous  than 
to  gain  a  million  with  ten  thousand  francs. 

2.  An  inhabitant  of  Padua  invented  paper  in  the  twelfth  cen- 
tury, and  a  Florentine  invented  spectacles  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  fourteenth. 

3.  Man  has  commonly  but  twenty-two  years  to  live  :  during 
these  twenty-two  years,  he  is  subject  to  twenty-two  sicknesses, 
of  which  many  are  incurable.  In  this  horrible  state,  man  still 
struts :  he  loves  (makes  love),  he  v^-ars  (makes  war),  he  forms 
projects,  as  if  he  would  live  a  thousand  centuries  in  his  delights. 

4.  A  regimen  to  be  followed  by  every  man  who  wishes  to  live 
a  hundred  years :  first  repast,  —  a  glass  of  pure  water  at  nine 
o'clock  in  the  morning ;  second  repast,  —  soup,  roast  meat, 
stewed  fruit,  a  glass  of  old  wine,  at  two  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  ; 
third  repast,  —  a  walk,  without  fatigue,  at  four  o'clock;  fourth 
repast,  —  a  glass  of  sugared  water  at  nine  o'clock  at  night,  on 
going  to  bed. 

5.  A  very  brave  soldier  had  lost  both  liis  arms  in  battle.  His 
colonel  offered  him  a  crown.  "  You  think,  without  doubt,"  said 
tlie  grenadier,  with  vivacity,  "  that  I  have  lost  only  a  pair  of 
gloves." 


88 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


VOCABULARY. 

1.  Sou,  soldo  ;  franc,  franco. 

2.  Padua,  Pddova ;  Florentine,  Fiorentino ;  at  the  com- 
mencement, nel  principio. 

3.  During  these,  nel  decorso  di  questi  ;  is  subject,  va  soggetto; 
would,  dovesse. 

4.  To  follow  by  every  one  who  would  wish,  da  tenersi  da 
chiunque  vorra  ;  stewed  fruits,  conserva  ;  afternoon,  dopo  mezzo- 
giorno  ;  walk,  passeggicda  ;  i'atigiii^,  stancarsi  ;  sugared,  zucche- 
rdto  ;  on  going  to  bed,  nelV  anddre  a  Utto. 

5.  Lost,  perduto  ;  offered  him,  gli  offerse  ;  you  think,  credeie. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 


Qudnti  dnni  avete  ? 

E  vostro  fratello  f 

Avete  dandro  in  tdsca  ? 

In  che  cldsse  e  Luigi  ? 

In  che  anno  ndcque  Galileo  ? 

Qiumti  djini  visse  Adchno  ? 

Che  ora  e  ? 

A  che  ora  pranzidmo  dggi? 

Qudnti  ne  ahhidmo  del  mese  ? 

Qudnti  occhi  hdi  ? 


Adesso  (now)  ho  trenfotto  dnni. 

Diciotto  dnni. 

Si,  ho  cento  cinqudnta  scudi, 

E  nella  seconda  cldsse. 

Ml  1564. 

Egli  visse  ndve  cento  trenta. 

E  un  quarto  dopo  mezzodl, 

Pranzeremo     cdle  due. 

Ne  ahhidmo  venticinque. 

Due. 


Qudnte  dita  (fingers)   ahhidmo     Ne  ahhidmo  cinque. 


a  ciascuna  mano  i 


E  le  dita  dei  piedi  (feet)  qudnte     Died. 


S0710 


E  le  dita  delle  mdni  e  dei  piedi     Sbno  venti. 

qudnte  sono  ? 
Qudnti  ahitdnti  ha  la  citta  di     Londra  ha  tre  millioni  dH  obi- 

Londra  ? 
Che  eta  ha  il  Signor  S ? 


Qudnti  sensi  avete  ? 
Qudndo  mori  Napoleone  ? 
In  che  pdsso  servirvi  ? 


tcmti. 
E  nel  suo  sessantesimo  secondo 

dnno. 
Ginque :  udito,  vista,  odordto, 

gusto,  tdtto. 
Nel  mdggio  del  mille  ottocento 

ventuno. 
Nel  prestdnni  cinquemila  frcin- 

chi. 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


SJ 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


CM  e  che  hdtte  ?  or  chi  hdtte  ? 

Chi  e  ?    CM  chiouma  ? 

Che  cosa  e  successo  ? 

Ohe  nuove  ahhidmo  ? 

Sapete  voi  chi  sono  ? 

Che  rdzza  di  pensdre  ? 

Non  so  che  dire,  davvero, 

Che  male  vi  ho  fdtto  to? 

Che  (jibrno  e  bggi  ? 

Di  chi  e  la  colpa  ? 

Che  eta  avete  ? 

Che  cosa  siete  venuto  a  fdre  ? 

Che  vdle  avere  ricchezze  senza 

salute  ? 
Che   hella   cosa  e  il  girdre  il 

mondo  1 
Che   cosa  mi  darete  da  man- 

gidre  ? 
Qudl  e  la  minestra  che  piu  vi 

pidce  ? 
Che  cosa  sento  ?  che  cosa  vedo  ? 

Che  cosa  fate  di  hello,  amico  ? 

Che?   Comef   Che  dite? 

In  qudl  concetto  mdi  mi  tenete  ? 

Sapete  qudl  sia  V  ammo  suo  ? 

Qudnti  pdzzi  vi  sono  nel  mbndo  ! 

E  un  ubmo  cui  niuno  pidce, 


Who  knocks  ? 

Who  is  it?   Who  calls? 

What  has  happened  ? 

What  news  have  we  ? 

Do  you  know  who  I  am? 

What  manner  of  thinking;  ? 

Truly,  I  know  not  what  to  say. 

What  harm  have  I  done  you  ? 

What  day  is  it  to-day  ? 

Whose  fault  is  it  ? 

How  old  are  you  ? 

What  are  you  come  to  do  ? 

What  are  riches  worth  without 

health  ? 
What  a  pleasure  to  travel  over 

the  world ! 
What  will  you  give  me  to  eat  ? 

What  soup  do  you  like  best  ? 

What  do  I  hear?  what  do  I 
see? 

What  good  thing  are  you  do- 
ing, friend  ? 

What?  How?  What  do  you 
say? 

What  opinion  have  you,  then, 
of  me? 

Do  you  know  what  is  his  in- 
tention ? 

How  many  fools  there  are  in 
the  world ! 

He  is  a  man  who  likes  no  one. 


8* 


90  ITALIAN    GRAaijVIAR. 


EELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

I.  These  pronouns  are  cA^,  cAe,  quale,  cin,  who,  which, 
what.* 

II .  "  Who,"  chi,  when  it  has  no  antecedent  expressed ; 
as, — 

Who  loves,  fears,  CM  dma,  feme. 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?  Z^i  chi  parldte  f 

See  who  knocks,  Guarddte  chi  picchia. 

III.  "He  who,"  "some  one  who,"  "no  one  who," 
"those  who,"  or  "the  one,"  "the  other,"  may  be  trans- 
lated by  chi,  whenever  they  do  not  relate  to  an  antecedent; 
as, — 

Distrust  those  who  flatter  you,  Dirffiddtevi  di  chi  vi  adula. 

Those  who  live  on  hope  will  Chi  vive  di  spei'dnza  morrd  di 

die  of  hunger,  fdme. 

In   the  world,  some  are  rich,  Nel  mondo,  chi   e  ricco,  chi  e 

others  poor,  povero. 

The  word  chi,'\  used  only  for  persons,  and  representing 
an  individual  in  the  singular,  requires  the  A-erb  of  which  it 
is  the  subject  to  agree  with  it  in  the  singular. 

IV.  "Who,"  relating  to  an  antecedent  expressed,  is  trans- 
lated by  che  when  it  is  the  subject,  and  by  c  i  when  it  is 
the  object ;  :j:  as-,  — 

The  woman  to  whom  I  speak,  La  donna  a  cui  pdrlo. 

The  master  for  whom  I  labor,  //  padrone  §  per  cui  lavoro. 

Man   is   the   only  animal   who  L'  ubmo   e   il  solo  animdle  che 
weeps  and  who  laughs,  pidnge  e  che  ride. 


*  Oii,  not  interrogative,  is  always  singular ;  clie^  cid,  which,  singular  and  plural ; 
iiudle,  who,  which,  singular  ;    qudli,  plural. 

t  Chi  refers  to  persons  only  :  che,  cui,  quale,  refi^'"  both  to  persons  and  things. 

4.  Che  is  chiefly  used  in  the  uomiuative ;  ciii,  in  all  other  relations  ;  chi,  quale,  are  used 
in  all  their  relations.  Che,  when  it  relates  to  a  jierson,  must  be  translated  in  English  by 
who  or  ivhom ;  when  it  relates  to  an  animal,  by  which.  In  English,  the  relative  pronouns, 
though  understood,  are  often  left  out  after  the  noun.  In  Italian,  they  must  always  be 
expressed:  as,  Chi  si  ininlia,  si  esalta,  who  humbles  himself,  etc. ;  qw'i  giovani  che  vol  i-t- 
dete,  those  young  men  whom  you  see  ;  il  cane  die  ved-He,  the  dog  which  \  ou  see :  la  IcWra 
che  avcte  scntta,  the  letter  you  have  written ;  il  ragdzzo  cii'  io  ho  vediUo,  the  boy  I  have 
seen. 

§  The  master  who  teaches  Ls  maestro ;  the  master  who  commands  is  padrdne. 


RELATIVE    PEOXOUNS.  01 

V.  The  preposition  a,  to,  can  be  understood  before  ciii; 
and  we  may  say,  La  donna  ciii  pdrlo, 

yi.  "I  who  write,"  "thou  who  writest,"  etc.,  are 
translated,  lo  che  scrivo,  tu  che  scrtvl,  etc.  In  similar 
phrases,  the  verb  agrees  with  the  personal  pronoun,  as  in 
English. 

yil.  "  Which,"  as  the  regimen  of  a  verb,  is  translated  by 
che  or  by  ciii;  as,  — 

The  bread  which  you  eat,  II  pane  che  ^nangidte. 

The  wall  which  the  house  con-     II  muro  ciii  nasconde  la  cdsa. 
ceals, 

In  the  last  phrase,  cut  (nasconde)  is  better  than  che, 
because  che  serves  either  for  subject  or  object.  Petrarch 
says,  Quella  ddnna  gentil  cui  pidnge  anidre. 

Vni.  Che,  ov  qudle  (qudli,  qudi,  in  the  plural),  is 
used  in  exclamatory  phrases  ;  as,  — 

What  a  misfortune !  Che  disgrdzia  ! 

What  a  pity  !  Che  peccdto  ! 

What  beauties  !  Qudi  (or  die)  helUzze  ! 

IX.  Qudle  is  used  in  doubtful  phrases,  or  when  fol- 
lowed by  a  verb ;  as.  Which  of  these  two  books  do  you 
wish?   qudl  volete  di  questi  due  Uhri? 

X.  Che  is  generally  used  in  interrogative  phrases ; 
as,  — 

What  book  is  this  ?  Ohe  Uhro  e  ? 

What  man  is  that  ?  Che  ubmo  e  ? 

What  house  is  that  ?  iJhe  cdsa  e  ? 

What  business  have  you  ?  Che  affdri  avete  ? 

XI.  "Which "in  the  genitive,  signifying  "of  which," 
"for  which,"  is  rendered  in  Italian  by  di  cui,  or  del 
qudle,  etc.  ;  as,  It  is  a  favor  for  which  I  thank  you,  e 
un  favdre  di  cui,  or  del  qudle  io  vi  ringrdzio. 


02  ITALIAN    GEA3^IMAR. 

XII.  When  the  noun  following  which  designates  some- 
thin  o-  belonging  to  that  which  precedes  it,  then  cid 
(whose)  is  used  with  the  article ;  as,  The  hero  whose 
exploits  have  astonished  the  world,  V  eroe  le  cui  gesta 
hdnno  fdtto  maraviglidre  il  mdndo, 

Xin.  The  word  "which"  in  the  ablative  case,  signify- 
ing "by  which,"  "from  which,"  indicating  the  origin,  the 
derivation,  the  point  of  departure  of  an  action  or  thing,  is 
rendered  in  Italian  by  da  cui,  or  dal  qudle,  etc.  ;  as,  — 

There   is   no   evil  from  which  N'on  c'  e  male  da  cui  non  ndsca 

good  does  not  arise,  un  bene, 

The  army  by  which  the  city  is  L'  armata  da  cid  e  assedidta  la 

besieged,  cittci. 

XrV.  "What,"  interrogative,  is  translated  by  che  or  che 
c6sa;  as, — 

Upon  what  shall  we  dine  ?  Con  che  pranzeremo  ? 

"What  is  the  use  of  merit  with-     A  che  giova  il  merito   senza 
out  fortune  ?  fortuna  ? 

XY.  "To  which,"  relating  to  an  entire  phrase,  is  trans- 
lated by  al  che;  relating  to  a  single  word,  by  a  cui,  or 
al  qudle,  or  dlla  qudle;  as,  — 

To  which  I  answered,  Al  che  rispdsi. 

That  of  which  the  miser  thinks     La  cosa  a  cid  meno  pensa  V  avd- 
the  least  is  to  succor  the  poor,         ro,  e  il  sovvemre  i  miseri, 

XYI.  We  translate  such  phrases  as  the  following, 
thus : — 

What  are  politics  ?  Che  cosa  e,  or  cos'  e  la  politica  ? 

What  do  you  say  ?  Che  cosa  dite  ?   che  dite  ? 

What  is  it?  Che  cos' e? 

What  is  there  ?  Che  cosa  d  ef   che  d  e? 

What  do  I  hear  ?  Che  cosa  sento  ?   che  sento  ? 

What  are  you  doing  ?  Che  cosa  fate  ?    che  fate  ? 

Who  is  going?  Chi  parte "^ 

In  what  manner  ?  In  che  modo  ?  in  qudl  inbdo  ? 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS.  93 


OBSERVATIONS. 


XYII.  The  word  onde  is  often  used  in  Italian  poetry 
in  lien  of  di  ciii,  or  del  quale,  dal  quale,  either  in  the 
singular  or  plural,  masculine  or  feminine  ;  as,  Di  quel 
sospivi  oiuV  io  nudriva  il  c6re  (Petrarca) ,  those  sighs 
with  which  I  nourished  my  heart.  In  this  line  the  word 
6nde  is  in  place  of  c6i  qudli,  with  which. 

XVIII.  In  poetry  particularly,  the  word  die,  relative, 
is  sometimes  employed  as  an  indirect  object,  in  place  of 
cin  or  qudli ;  as,  Qli  dcchi  di  ch^  io  parldi  si  calda- 
tnente  (Petrarca),  the  eyes  of  which  I  spoke  so  warmly. 
Here  the  word  che  is  in  place  of  cid. 

XIX.  In  using  che  as  an  indirect  object,  the  Italian 
authors  sometimes  omit  the  preposition  which  ought  to 
precede  it,  and  which  is  the  sign  of  the  regimen  ;  as,  Ed 
io  s6n  un  di  quei  cheH  'pidnger  giova  (Petrarca),  and 
I  am  one  of  those  to  whom  weeping  helps.  Here  the 
preposition  a  (to)  before  die  is  understood. 

XX.  It  often  happens  that  die  is  used  in  Italian  in 
place  of  nCdla,  nothing ;  as,  j&  un  duro  peso  il  non  aver 
die  fare,  it  is  a  heavy  burden  to  have  nothing  to  do. 

XXI.  Non  die  is  elegantly  used  for  "not  only."  But, 
in  this  case,  the  non  die  is  placed  in  the  second  part 
of  the  phrase  ;  as  in  the  line  from  Petrarca,  —  Spero 
trovdr  pietd,  non  die  perdono,  I  hope  to  find,  not  only 
pardon,  but  pity. 

XXII.  Finally,  de  is  often  connected  with  other  words  ; 
thus  forming  adverl^s  and  conjunctions  at  pleasure.  In 
these  cases,  the  final  letter  is  accented,  which  renders  the 
sound  more  striking,  as  in  the  v^ords  j)Timadie ,  hendie^ 
fuordie,  perciocdie ,  avvegnache ,  contuttodie ,  etc. 

XXIII.  In  the  subjunctive  mood  of  the  verb,  die  may 
be  understood;  as,  Vogiio  mi  diddle,  I  wish  that  you 
would  say  it  to  me. 


94  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


READING   LESSON. 

I  Roinani  avendo  scelti  per  mandcdre  in  Bitinia  tre  ambascia- 

chosen  to  send 

t(5ri,  uno  dei  qiiali  pativa  di  podagra,  1-  altro  era  stato  trapanato 

suffered  trapanned 

6  r  ultimo  era  teniito  per  uomo  scempio,  Catone  disse  ridendo, 

laughing 

che  i  Romani  maiidavano  un'  ambasceria  che  non  aveva       ne 

sent  neither 

piedi,  ne  capo,  ne  mente.       Dio  ci  dia     buoni  principi,  perche, 

nor  May  God  send  us 

una  volta  cbe  s'  lianno,  e  forza      soifrirli      tali  quali  sono.     L* 

to  bear  with  them 

egolsta  e  un  uomo  che  appicclierebbe  fuoco  ad  una  casa  per     far 

would  set  to  make 

cuocere   un   novo.     Ogni   lingua  e   piacevole    all  orecchio  del 
to  cook 

popolo  per  cui  e  fatta.     Cicerone  fu  assassinato  da  Popelio  Lena, 

made. 

a  cui  aveva  gia  salvato  la  vita  in  una  causa  in  cui  era  accusato 

saved 

d'  aver  ucclso   il   proprio   padre.     Sibari   era   una   citta   della 
killed 

Magna  Grecia,  i  cui  abitanti  erano  mdlto  dati  all'  effeminatezza ; 

given 

donde  viene  il  nome  di  sibarlta  per  dinotare  un  uomo  efFeminato. 
comes  denote 


EXERCISE   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

1.  I  have  seen  this  Italy  which  Corinne  calls  "the  empire  of 
the  sun."  What  a  fertile  soil !  What  a  delightful  climate  !  What 
superb  cities  !  What  noble  antiquities  !  AVhat  more  sublime  than 
the  genius  of  the  man  who  emulates  nature,  and  erects  eternal 
monuments  everywliere  (in  all  parts)  ! 

2.  Who  can  love  repose  before  having  experienced  the  pain 
of  weariness  ?  Who  is  he  that  finds  pleasure  in  eating,  drinking, 
and  sleeping,  before  having  suffered  from  hunger,  thirst,  and 
sleepiness  ? 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS.  Of) 

3.  ''  I  have  three  sorts  of  friends,"  said  Voltaire ;  "  the  friends 
who  love  me,  the  friends  to  whom  I  am  indifferent,  and  the 
friends  wdio  detest  me." 

4.  It  is  a  very  glorious  thing  for  Italy,  that  the  three  powers 
between  whom  almost  all  America  was  divided,  owed  their  first 
conquests  to  the  Italians :  the  Spaniards,  to  Christopher  Colum- 
bus ;  the  English,  to  the  two  Cabots  of  Venice ;  and  the  French, 
to  Florentine  Verazzani. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Calls,  chidma ;  what,  die  dltro  v' ha ;  genius,  ingegno ; 
erects,  innalza;  in  all  parts,  da  ogni  parte. 

2.  Can  love,  pud  aver  caro  ;  before,  etc.,  se  prima  non  ha  sen- 
tito. 

3.  Detest,  detestano. 

4.  Divided,  diviso  ;  almost,  quasi :  owed,  dovessero  ;  their  first 
conquests,  le  prime  Ibro  conquiste  ;  Spagnuoli  ;  Cristbforo  Go}67n- 
bo  ;  Inglesi ;   Cahbtti      Venezidni, 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Che  avete  veduto  ?  Ho  veduto  la  hella  Italia. 

Gome  e  ella  chiamdta'^  E  chiamdta  V  impero  del  sole, 

E  del  clima  die  dite  ?  Che  e  delizioso  / 

JE  die  ?    Siete  vbi  ?  lo,  in  persona. 

Che  cercdte  ?  II  mio  lihro. 

Dov'  era  ?  Sopra  la  tdvola. 

Che   diceva    Voltaire   d'ei  subi  Egli  diceva,  "  io  ho  tre  specie 

amici  ?  d^  amici." 

Qiidl  differenza  v*  e  fra  dggi  e     Oggi  non  e  tdnto  cdldo. 

ieri  ? 

A  dii  pidce  una  lingua  qua-  Al  pbpolo  per  cui  e  fdtta. 

lunque  ? 

Che   si   (one)   dice   delle  citta  Che  son  superhe. 

d^  Itcdia  ? 

Che  abbidmo  per  prdnzo  ?  Avremo  (we  shall  have)  ubva  e 

frutti. 

Che  disse  Catdne  dei  tre  amba-  Che  era  uiH  ambasceria  die  non 

sciatori  mandcdi  in  Bitinia  ?         aveva  ne  piedi,  ne  capo,  7ie 

mente. 

Cdsa  t  assdi  gloridso  per  Vltci-  Che  le  potenza  d'  Eurdpa  deb' 

lia?  bono     dgl'  Italidni     le     Idro 

prhne  conquiste  in  America. 


96 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


CHAPTEE  Xy. 


POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


MNEMONIC     EXERCISE. 


Che  intenzione  e  la  vostra  ? 

Voglio  la  roha  mia,^ 

Partirete  con  vostro  coinodo, 

Mio  padre  ha  da  v'lvere^ 

jEgli  e  un  pd'  scdrso  del  suo, 

Ai^ddtemi  lontdno  ddgli  occhi, 

Ho  gettdto  via  il  mio  dandro, 

Non  ho  dandri  in  tdsca, 

Ho  qudlche  cosetta  del  mio^ 

Vi  son  servo, 

So  che  mi  siete  aimco, 

Ogni  mia  cdsa  e  vostra, 

Anddtevi  in  mia  vece, 

lo  attendo  di  fdtti  miei, 

Voglio  far  a  modo  mio, 

Egli  ha  posto  in  sicuro  la  vita, 

Voi  siete  del  mio  par  ere, 

Sentiamo  il  suo  parere, 

lo  aspettero  il  vostro  padrone, 

Ognitno  vuol  hene  di  siioi, 

lo  non  ci  voglio  anddr  di  mezzo 

per  causa  vostra, 
Vi   riiigrcizio    di    tdnte   vostre 

hontci, 
Oggi  mettero  il  mio  hel  vestito, 

Se  siete  cieco,  vostro  ddnno, 

Che  vi  dice  il  cuore  di  tiitto  cid  ? 

Ognuno  amdr  dee  la  p atria, 


What  is  your  intention  ? 

I  wish  my  property. 

You  will  depart  at  your  ease. 

My  father  has  enough  to  live  upon. 

He  is  a  little  short  of  money. 

Go  far  from  my  sight, 

I  have  thrown  my  money  away. 

I  have  no  money  in  my  pocket. 

I  possess  soruething. 

I  am  your  servant. 

I  know  that  you  are  my  friend. 

All  I  have  is  yours. 

Go  in  my  stead. 

I  attend  to  my  affairs. 

I  wish  to  do  as  I  please. 

He  has  put  his  life  in  security. 

You  are  of  my  opinion. 

Let  us  listen  to  his  advice. 

I  expect  your  master. 

Every  one  loves  his  own. 

I  do  not  wish  to  be  compro- 
mised on  your  account, 

I  thank  you  for  so  much  kind- 
ness. - 

To-day  I  shall  put  on  my  best 
coat. 

If  you  are  blind,  so  much  the 
worse  for  you. 

What  says  your  heart  to  all 
that? 

Every   man    should    love   his 
country. 


POSSESSIVi:   ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS.  97 

POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVE   PRONOUNS. 

I.  The  possessive  pronouns*  are  — 


M'lo, 
Tuo, 
Suo, 

mia, 

tua, 

sua. 

my  or  mme. 
thy  or  thine, 
his,  her  or  hers,  its. 

Nostra, 

nostra, 

our  or  ours. 

Vostro, 
Loro, 

vostra, 
loro, 

your  or  yours, 
their  or  theirs. 

Mio,  tuo,  suo,  ndsti'o,  vSstro,  are  masculine ;    and  are 
changed  in  the  plural  into  — 


Miei, 

my  or  mine. 

Tubi, 

thy  or  thine. 

Suoi, 

his,  her  or  hers,  its. 

Nostri, 

our  or  ours. 

Vostri, 

your  or  yours. 

Mia,  tua,  s{ia,  ndsti^a,  vSsira,  are  feminine ;  and  form 
their  plural  thus  :  — 


Mie, 
Tue, 
Sue, 

my  or  mine, 
thy  or  thine, 
his,  her  or  hers,  its. 

Nostre, 

our  or  ours. 

Vostre, 

your  or  yours. 

n.  Ldro,  their  or  theirs,  is  of  both  genders,  and  of 
both  numbers,  and  takes  the  article  agreeing  with  the 
noun  to  which  it  belongs. 

III.  Possessive  pronouns  are  generally  varied  with  the 
prepositions  and  articles. 


*  Remark.  —  Galignani  divides  the  possessive  pronouns  into  th:Be  classes;  viz.,  con- 
junctive, disjunctive,  and  relative. 

The  conjunctive  are  those  which  are  united  to  nouns;  as,  11  m'lo  libra,  my  book; 
t  miei  parentis  my  relations. 

The  disjunctive  are  those  v/hich  are  not  united  to  nouns  ;  as,  Im,  vostra  ccisa,  e  la  in'ia^ 
your  house  and  mine;  i  inici  cavdlli,  e  i  vostri,  mj'  horses  and  yours.  La  m'la  and  t 
vdstri  are  disjunctive,  as  they  stand  in  place  of  the  noun. 

The  relative  are  those  which  have  relation  to  a  person  or  a  thing  already  spoken  of ; 
as.  ii  mio  or  mm,  it  is  mine ;  sono  tuoi  or  /we,  they  are  thine. 

9 


98  ITALL\N    GRA31:M.^II. 

Yariation  of  a  masculine  possessive  i  ronoun  :  — 


SINGULAR. 

Subjective 

II  mio, 

mj  or  mine. 

Relation  of  Possession    . 

Del  mio, 

X)f  my  or  mine. 

„         „    Attribution 

,     Al  mio, 

to  my  or  mine. 

„         „   Derivation 

Dal  mio. 

from  or  by  my  or  mine. 

Objective      .... 

.     II  mio. 

my  or  mine,  etc. 

IV.  ilffo,  ttio,  si(0,  7i6stro,  vdstro,  and  loro  are  some- 
times used  with  the  article  substantively,  —  il  mio,  il  tuo, 
suo,  etc.  In  this  case,  the  word  avere,  property,  is  under- 
stood ;  and  the  pronouns  are  equivalent  to  "my  property," 
"thy  property,"  etc.  ;  as, — 

3Idngi  del  suo.  Let  him  eat  of  his  own  [property], 

Non  mangerd  del  nostro.       He  will  not  eat  of  ours. 

V.  Miei,  tu6i,  ndstri,  and  loro,  are  also  used  sub- 
stantively, —  i  miei,  i  tuoi,  i  su6i,  i  ndstri,  i  l6ro. 
Then  the  word  jjarenti,  relations,  amici,  friends,  com- 
pdgni,  comj^anions,  familidri,  domestics,  solddti,  sol- 
diers, or  segudci,  followers,  is  understood;  and  these 
pronouns  are  equivalent  to  "  my  relations,"  "thy  friends," 
"his  companions,"  "our  domestics,"  "your  soldiers,"  "their 
followers  ;  "  as ,  — 

Incontra  a!  miei.  Against  my  relations. 

Pregdto  da'  suoi,  Requested  by  his  friends. 

YI.  To  avoid  the  ambiguity  which  in  many  instances 
would  arise,  in  Italian,*   from   the  indiscriminate  use  of 


*  Remark.  —  The  English  language,  for  want  of  a  sufficient  variety  of  personal  pro- 
nouns of  the  third  person  and  their  possessives,  often  labors  under  an  ambiguity  which  is 
unknown  in  Italian.  Obsei-Te  the  example,  "He  sent  him  to  kill  his  own  father." 
Nothing  but  the  sense  of  that  which  precedes  can  determine  whose  father  is  meant ; 
whereas,  in  Italian,  the  pronouns  siia  and  di  h'li  mark  the  sense. 

Observation.  — Propria  adds  emphasis  to  the  possessive  pronoun,  as  own  in  Eng- 
lish :   it  is  considered  by  some  grammarians  a  real  possessive  pronoun. 

In  Italian,  the  possessive  pronoun  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  thinff 
possessed,  and  not  with  the  possessor  as  in  English  ;   as, — 

POSSESSOR  (sing.).  POSSESSED  OBJECT  (/.  sing.). 

II  padre  ama  (loves)  si'ia  Jiglia  (h ts  daughter). 
La  madre  ama  (loves)  sua  figlin  (lier  daughter). 


POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVE    rEONOU:f^S.  99 

the  possessive  pronouns  suo,  sua,  suoi,  sue,  when  these 
pronouns  do  not  rehite  to  the  subject  of  the  proposition, 
they  are  changed  for  the  personal  pronouns  di  Ifii,  di  lei, 
of  him,  of  her.  Thus,  in  the  phrase  "John  loves  Peter 
and  his  chiklren,"  if  the  pronoun  "  his"  relates  to  "John," 
the  subject  of  the  proposition,  it  is  expressed  by  i  sxioi; 
as,  Giovanni  dma  Ptetro  ed  i  sttoi  Jigliuoli,  Jolm  loves 
Peter  and  liis  [Jolni's]  children  ;  but  if  "  liis  "  does  not 
relate  to  "John,"  but  to  "Peter,"  the  object  of  the  proposi- 
tion, then  it  is  expressed  by  i  di  lid ;  as,  Giovdiini  dma 
Pietro  ed  i  di  ltd  Jigliuoli,  John  loves  Peter  and  his 
[Peter's]   children. 

Mandb  ad  uccidere  suo  padre,        He  sent  to  kill  his  father  [the 

father  of  him  who  sent]. 

Sua  sorella  e  i  f'lgli  di  I'd,  Her  sister  and  her  cliildren  [the 

children  of  her  sister]. 

Vn.  The  article  is  used,  first,  when  titles,  or  the  names 
of  relationship,  are  in  the  plural ;  as.  My  brothers,  i 
miei  fratelli ;  your  majesties,  le  vdstre  Maestd :  second, 
when  the  possessive  is  placed  after  them  ;  as,  //  fratello 
tnio,  la  Maestd  sita:  third,  when  they  are  accompanied 
by  another  adjective  ;  as,  II  mio  cdro  j)ddre,  or  il  cdro 
pddre  mio,  my  dear  father  :  fourth,  when  the  name  of 
the  relation  is  a  diminutive ;  as.  My  little  sister,  la  mia 
sor^ellina,  or  la  sorelllna  mia, 

YTII.  There  are  a  number  of  expressions  where  the 
possessive  pronoun  does  not  receive  an  article  ;  as,  Ij  mio 
parere,  a  suo  seniio,  di  sua  testa,  etc.,  it  is  my  advice, 
at  his  pleasure,  of  his  head.  Such  phrases  are  easily 
learned  by  practice. 

IX.  Politeness  requires  the  Italians  to  say,  II  vSstro 
Signur  pddre,  la  vostra  iSigiidra  zia,  your  father,  your 
aunt,  etc. 

X.  To  translate  "it  is  one  of  my  cousins,"  "there  are 
three  of  our  domestics,"  "  there  are  many  of  our  friends," 
the  Italians  say,  witliout  the  article,  IJ  un  mio  ciigino, 


100  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR." 

sdno  tre  nostri  servitori,  s6no  parecchi  nostri  amici, 
or  e  un  del  miei  cugini,  son  tre  del  7i6stri  servitdin,  sSno 
parecchi  dei  ndsti^i  amici.  The  same  is  the  case  in  such 
phi-ases  as,  It  is  my  fault,  e  ^m  mioerrore. 

XI.  To  translate  " these  are  my  children,"  "these  are 
my  sisters,"  "these  are  my  parents,"  etc.,  we  say,  SSno 
miei  f^gli^  sdno  onie  sorelle,  s6no  miei  parenti, 

XII.  The  possessive  forms  an  Italianism  in  many 
phrases ;  as,  — 

Mio  ddnno,  So  much  the  worse  for  me. 

Ogni  mio  pensiere,  My  every  thought. 

XIII.  The  possessive  pronouns,  referring  to  parts  of 
the  body  or  dress,  are  rendered  by  the  pronouns  mi,  ti, 
si,  gli,  ci,  and  vi,  particularly  when  they  follow  the 
verb. 

Take  off  your  hat,  Levatevi  il  cappeUo. 

"We  shall  put  it  in  our  pocket,  Oe  lo  metteremo  in  tdsca. 

He  put  it  upon  his  knees,  Se  lo  pose  sidle  ginocchia, 

I  put  it  upon  his  head,  lo  glielo  post  in  capo, 

XIV.  We  say  in  the  same  manner,  — 

He  is  not  my  father,  Egli  non  mi  e  padre, 

I  am  not  his  friend,  lo  non  gli  sono  amico. 

Remember  that  he  is  thy  son,  Ricbrdati  cK  egli  ti  e  figlio. 

Call  my  domestic,  Ghiamdtemi  il  cameriere. 


READING   LESSON. 

IL    CAViLLO    RUbItO. 
STOLEN. 

II  piu  bel  cavallo  d'  un  contadino  venne  di  notte  rubato  nella 

came 

sua  stalla.     Alcuni  giorni  dopo  il  paesano  si  reco  al  mercato  de* 

went 

cavalli  che  si  tenne  nella  citta  vicina,  per  comprarne  un  altro. 
one    held  to  buy 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS.'  101 

Quale  fu  la  sua  sorpresa  allorche  tra  i  cavalli  in  vendita  egli 

when  sale 

riconobbe  il  siio.       Subito       lo  prese  per  la  briglia,  sclamando : 
recognized  Immediately  took  bridle 

"  Questo  cavallo  e  mio.      Sono  tre  giorni  die  mi  fu  rubcito."  — 

"  Voi    v'  ingannate,    galantuomo,"    rispose    tranquillamente    il 
You  deceive,  gentleman,  replied 

padrone  del  cavallo,  "  e  piu   d'  un  anno  che  questo  cavallo  mi 

appartiene ;  diinque  non  e  il  vostro :    puo  essere,  pero,  che  gli 

belongs ;  then  it     may  be 

rassomigli  qualche  poco." 

resembles 

II  contadino  coperse  subito  gli  occhi  del  cavallo  colle  sue  mani, 
covered  quickly 

6  disse :  "  Ebbene,  se  1'  animale     vi    appartiene  da  tanto  tempo, 

said:  Well,        if  to  you 

ditemi  un  poco,  di  qual  occhio  egli  e  cieco  ?  " 
tell  me 

L'  altro,  il  quale  infatti  aveva  rubato  il  cavallo  senza  esami- 

in  fact  examin- 

narlo     da    presso,     rimase     sbigottito  un  memento.      Dovendo 
ing  him  closely,     i-emained      frightened  Having 

pero        dire    qualche  c(5sa,  egli  rispose  all'  avventura :    "  Dell' 
however    to  say  at  a  venture : 

(Scchio  sinistro  !  " 

left! 

"  V  ingannate,"  rispose  il  contadino,  "  il  cavallo  non  e  cieco 

deir  occhio  sinistro !"  —  "  Eh ! "  sclamo  il  furbo,  "ho  fatto  lino 

rogue 

sbaglio  di  lingua  ;  il  cavallo  e  cieco  dell'  occhio  destro." 
slip  right. 

Allora  il  contadino  scoperse  gli  occhi  del  cavallo  e  disse :    "  E 
Then  imcovered 

evidente  ora  che     sei     ladro  e  bugiardo.     Guardate  tutti !     II 
now  thou  art  thief  liar.  Look         all ! 

cavallo  non  e  cieco  ne  poco  ne  punto.     Gli    ho  fatto  le  domande 

(not     at     all.)      To  him         made 

Boltanto  per  iscoprire  il  furto." 
oulv  discover  theft. 

9* 


102       •  '    '     ■        ^  •  '   ITALIAJ^    GRAMMAR. 

Tiitti  gli  astanti  si  misero  a  ridere  ed  a  battere  le  maaii, 
bystanders  put  laugh  clap 

gridando :  "  E  colto,  il  fiirbo,  e  colto." 
crying:  caught 

EXERCISE   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

1.  If  the  best  man  was  oblI<2;ed  to  wear  his  fa.ults  written  on 
his  forehead,  he  would  never  dare  to  raise  his  hat. 

2.  A  woman  of  Sparta  said  to  her  son,  who  had  returned  lame 
from  battle,  "  At  every  step  which  you  take,  you  will  now 
remember  your  valor  and  your  glory." 

3.  A  man,  who  had  dissipated  his  property,  complained  of  the 
injury  the  hail  had  caused  to  his  farms.  A  person,  who  knew 
the  boaster  well,  said,  "  It  is  your  own  fault ;  for,  if  you  had  had 
the  precaution  to  open  your  umbrella  when  it  hailed,  your  farms 
would  not  have  been  injured. 

4.  The  great  Conde  —  tired  of  hearing  a  certain  fop  continually 
speak  of  monsieur,  his  father ;  madam,  his  mother ;  misses,  his 
sisters  —  called  one  of  his  servants,  and  said  to  him,  "  Mister,  my 
lackey,  tell  mister  my  coachman  to  harness  messrs.  my  horses 
to  madam  my  carriage." 

5.  A  superstitious  prince  once  dreamed  that  he  saw  three 
mice,  —  a  fat  one,  a  poor  one,  and  a  blind  one.  The  prince 
consulted  a  sibyl,  who  said  to  him,  "  My  prince,  the  fat  mouse 
is  your  minister,  the  poor  mouse  is  your  people,  and  the  blind 
mouse  is  your  portrait." 


VOCABULARY. 

1.  If  he  was  obliged,  se  dovesse ;  written,  scritti ;  upon,  in ; 
to  dare,  ardire. 

2.  Of  Sparta,  Spartdna ;  return  from,  torndre  da ;  at  every 
step,  ad  ogni  pdsso  ;  you  will  remember,  rammenterete. 

3.  A  man  (a  spendthrift),  uno  spiantdto ;  complained,  lag- 
ndvasi  ;  caused,  fdtto  ;  farms,  podere  ;  boaster,  millantatore  ;  it 
is  }'our  own  fault,  la  coJpa  e  vostra  ;  it  hailed,  si  mise  a  grandi- 
ndre  ;  irjured,  danneggidti. 

4.  Tired  of  hearing,  annojdto  d'  intendere ;  fop,  scidcco  vana- 
rello  ;  Miss,  Signorina  ;  called,  chiamava  ;  lackey,  staffiere  ;  tell, 
iite  ;  harness,  attaccdre. 

5.  Once,  una  volta  ;  that  he  saw,  che  vide;  consulted,  consulto. 


DEMONSTrtATIVE    ADJECTIVE    PKONOUNS. 


103 


CONVERSAZIONE. 


CM  e  questa  donna'^ 

Dov^  e  ilcUUiriti'iitio  (picture)  ? 

Chi  avefe  veduto  ? 

A  chi  scrivete  (write)  voi'^ 

Di  chi  e  queslo  cavdllo  ? 

Come  vidggia  il  Conte  ? 

Maria  dorme  ancora'^ 

Perche  tiene  ella  gli  occhi  chi- 


usi 


Si  dice  cliG  il  Sigjior  E.,  e  mor- 
to,  ha  fdtto  un  testamenio  ? 

Avete  veduto  le  mie  sorelle  ? 

Che  volete  da  me  ? 

Signdr  Maestro,  desidererei  (I 
should  like)  di  avere  da  lei 
qudlche  lezione  di  hallo, 


Una  certa  mia  arnica. 

To  lo  posi  nella  sua  camera. 

Ho  veduto  la  sorellma  vdsfra. 

A.lla  mia  ccira  figlia. 

Del  mm  staffiere. 

Colla  propria  carrozza. 

Non  dorme,  no. 

Tien  (she  keeps)  gli  occhi  chiusi 
(closed)  per  c'elia  (sport). 

Si ,  ha  fdtto  di  gran  Idsciti  alio 
spedale  ;  resta  per 6  al  figlio 
un  hel  pafrimonio. 

No  Signore,  ho  veduto  sola- 
mente  (only)  vostro  fratello. 

Non  voglio  (wish)  niente  (no- 
thing) da  voi. 

Sono  pronto  a  servirla. 


CHAPTER    XVI. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


Servo  di  questi,  Signori, 
E  capitdto  quest''  dggi, 
Dite  qiidnto  vi  pare, 
Che  maniere  son  queste  f 
Non  e  tiut"  bro  quel  che  luce, 
Comprdte  questo  mio  cavdllo, 
Questo  ])dnno  e  troppo  euro, 
II  mko  dehole  parere  e  questo, 
Che  vuol  dir  questo  ?' 
Questo  si  sa  da  tutti, 


Your  servant,  gentlemen. 
He  has  arrived  to-day. 
Say  all  that  you  please. 
What  manners  are  these  ? 
All  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 
Buy  my  horse. 
This  cloth  is  too  dear. 
Tliat  is  my  weak  advice. 
What  does  this  mean  ? 
Everybody  knows  that. 


104  ITAI.IAN    GE^ijMMAR. 

E  un  seccatore  costui,  This  man  is  importunate. 

Mandate  via  coldro,  Send  those  people  away. 

Scuotetevi  da  cotesta  tristezza,        Shake  off  this  sadness. 
Questo  e  qudnto  mi  disse,  This  is  all  he  said  to  me. 

CM  e  costui  ?  Who  is  he  ? 

Z'  u6?no  ascolta  volentieri  quel     A  man  willingly  listens  to  'what 

che  gli  pidce,  pleases  him. 

Questo  e  quello  che  piii  di  tutto     This  is  what   afflicts   me   the 

m'  affitgge,  most. 

Mi  renderete  ragione  di  cotesti     You  shall  account  for  having 

ingdnnij  thus  deceived  me. 

Qudnti  vivono  in  questo  viondo     How  many  people  in  this  Avorld 

dlle  spese  di  questo  e  di  quel-        live  at  the  expense  of  this 

lol  one  and  that! 

N^oji  mi  parldte  j)iu  di  colui,  Speak  no  more  to  me  of  this 

man. 
Costui  v'  ingannera  di  certo^  This  man  will  certainly  cheat 

you. 
Stasera  vi  aspettero  a  cdsa,  This   evening   I   shall   expect 

you. 
Maladetta  sia  questa  mia  curi-     Cursed  be  my  curiosity ! 

osita  ! 
Questa  cdsa  non  e  piii  vdstra,       This  house  no  longer  belongs 

to  you. 


DEMONSTRATIVE     ADJECTIVE     PRONOUNS. 

I.  Questo  and  questa,  with  their  plurals  questi  and 
queste,  signify  this  and  these,  or  this  here  and  these  here, 
and  indicate  an  object  near  to  the  person  who  speaks. 

Cotesto,  cotesta,  with  their  plurals  cotesti,  coteste,  this, 
these,  are  used  to  point  out  an  object  near  the  person  to 
whom  we  speak. 

Quello,  quella,  with  their  plurals  quelli,  quelle,  that, 
those,  that  there,  those  there,  indicate  an  object  distant 
from  the  person  who  speaks;*  as, — 


*  In  English,  we  use  the  personal  pronoun  before  the  relative  "who,"  "whom,"  or 
"  that ;  "  and,  in  Italian,  we  use  tlie  demonstrative  instead ;  as,  Quella  die  mi  pidcque 
tdnlo,  she  whom  I  so  much  admired ;  coliii  che  ar.catdva  pclle  stride,  he  that  begged  in 
the  streets.  Questo,  cotesto,  quello,  are  frequently  represented  by  cid ;  as,  Cid  e  vera. 
that  is  true. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS.  105 

Take  this  book,  and  give   me  Piglidte  qiiesto  Uhro,  e  ddtemi 

that,  quello, 

I  iee  that  thief  who  has  stolen  Vedo  quel  Iddro  che  nrC  ha  ru- 

from  me,  huto. 

This   dress  becomes  you  very  Gotesto  vestito  vi  sta  henone. 

well, 

I  prefer  this  room  to  that,  Preferisco    questa     camera    a 

quella. 

n.  Questo  refers  to  the  object  last  named  in  a  phrase, 
and  quello  to  that  first  mentioned  ;  as,  — 

Riches  and  poverty  are   alike  La  ricchezza  e   la  poverfa  son 

injurious:  the  former  creates  del  pari  nocevoli :  quella  fa 

too  many  wants  ;    the  latter  ndscere  troppi  bisogni ;  ques- 

hardly  permits  the  knowledge  ta  non  permette  di  conoscerne 

of  them,  quasi  alcuno. 

III.  "In  the  mean  while,"  "dming  this  time,"  is  expressed 
by  in  questo  mentre,  in  questo  mezzo,  or,  abridged,  in 
questo,  in  questa;  and  in  the  same  sense,  but  referring 
to  a  more  distant  epoch,  the  Italians  say,  in  quel  mezzo, 
in  quel  mentre,  or  in  quello, 

IV.  "  That  which  "  is  translated  by  cid  che  or  quel  che; 

i    as,  — 

I    He  will  do  what  (that  which)  I     Egli  fara  quel  che  gli  dirb  io 

tell  him,  or  cib  che  gli  dirb  io. 

\    All  that   (that  which)   pleases     Tutto  cib  che  pidce,  or  qudnto 
\        the  eyes  pleases  the  heart,  pidce    dgli   occhi,    pidce    al 

cuoi^e, 

V.  The  demonstrative  adjective  may  be  added  to  the 
possessive  pronoun  in  Italian  ;  as,  Lascidte  stdre  questa 
mia  pcnna,  e  scrivete  con  cotesta  vdsti^a.  This,  literally 
translated,  signifies,  "  Leave  this  pen  which  is  near  me, 
and  which  belonos  to  me,  and  write  with  that  which  is 
near  you,  and  which  belongs  to  you." 

VI.  Instead  of  saying  questa  mattina,  questa  sera, 
questa  ndtte,  this  morning,  this  evening,  this  night,  the 
Italians  say,  for  abbreviation,  stamattina  or  stamdne,  sta^ 
sera,  standtte. 


106  ITALIAN    GilAMMAF.. 

VI.  Tale,  such,  often  replaces  the  demonstrative  pro- 
noun questo  or  quello.  Thus  we  can  say,  tale  consider- 
azidne,  instead  of  questa  consiclerazidiie,  provided  that 
the  idea  has  been  specified  in  the  anterior  phrase. 

VIII.  Speaking  of  persons  in  an  absolute  sense,  the 
Italians  say,  — 

Costui,    this  man  here  ;  Golm,    that  man  there. 

Gostei,     this  woman  here  ;  Colei,    that  woman  there. 

Gostoro,  these  men  or  women  here  ;     Goloro,  those  women  there. 

Sometimes  these  pronouns  are  transposed,  and  the 
preposition  omitted. 

Per  lo  coUd  consiglio.  By  the  advice  of  that  man. 

Per  la  costui  dappocdggine,  By  the  stupidity  of  this  man. 

Instead  of  Pel  consiglio  di  colui,  per  la  dappocdggine 
di  costiii. 

IX.  Questi,  quegli,  qiiei,  cotesti,  are  also  used  in 
speaking  of  a  man;  as,  Questi  fu  ddtto;  quegli,  ignordn- 
te,  this  man  was  learned  ;  that,  ignorant.  These  words  are 
used  only  in  the  singular,  and  may  likewise  be  applied  to 
animals  and  inanimate  things  personified ;  as  in  this  quo- 
tation from  Boccaccio  :  DdlV  una  parte  mi  trde  V  am6re, 
e  ddlV  dltra,  mi  trde  giustissimo  sdegno;  quegli  vu6le 
dC  io  ti  p)erd6ni,  e  questi  vuole,  che  cSntro  a  mia  natura 
in  te  incrudelisca.  On  one  side,  love  influences  me ;  and, 
on  the  other,  a  just  anger  :  that  wishes  that  I  would  par- 
don thee ;  and  this,  that  I,  contrary  to  my  nature,  should  f 
be  cruel  to  thee. 

READING   LESSON. 

La  politica  di  un  prIncipe  e  1'  arte  di  conservare  quello  che  ha, 
0  di  usurpare  quello  che  non  ha. 

Diogene  un  giorno  vide  un  giovinetto  che  arrosiva :   "  animo, 

youth  blushed : 

figliuolo  mio,"  diss'egh,  "  cotesto  e  il  colore  della  viUiu.'* 

Non  v'  e  popolo   colto   che  creda  di  cedere  agli  altri  in  genere 

cultivated  to      cede 


DEMONSTKATIVE   ADJECTIVE    TilONOUNS.  107 

di  lingua,  benche  tutti  convengano  nelle  qualita  clie  ne  fdrmano 
although  ■  agree- 

la   perfezidne,  il  che  e  iin  segno  che  ognuno  ha  quel  che  gli 

basta,        ne  sente  quel  che  gli    manca. 
is  sufficient  feels  is  wanting. 

Un  contadino  tagliava  un  albero  alia  riva  cl'  un  fiurae ;  per 
was  cutting  margin  river 

mala  sorte  la  scure  gli  cadde  nell'  acqua,  ne   pote    ritrovarla. 
ill        luck  axe  fell  could  he 

Merciirio  gli  apparve :   "  E  questa  la  tua  scure,  galantuomo  ? " 
appeared 

mostrandosliene  una  d'  oro.    "  No,  cotesta  scure  non  e  la  mia."  — 

showing  him 

"  E  forse  questa,"  porgendogliene  una  d'  argento.     "  No,  cotesta 

presenting 

non  e  ancora  quella  che  mi  appartiene."  —  "  E  questa  dunque  ?  " 

belongs. 

mostrandogliene  una  di  ferro,  che  era  veramente  quella  che  avea 

iron 

perduta.     "  Ecco  veramente  quella  scure  la  cui  perdita  mi  affiig- 

ge."  —  "  Prendi  questa  e  ancora  le  due  prime  che  ti  ho  mostrate ; 
take 

ricevile    in  premio  della  tua  sincerita.     La  probita  e  la  migliore 
receive  them  honesty 


politica.' 

policy. 


EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 


1.  Merit  depends  on  neither  titles  nor  manners  :  these  depend 
on  ourselves  ;  those,  on  chance. 

2<  An  English  banker  was  accused  of  having  plotted  a  con- 
spiracy to  cany  off  George  III.,  and  conduct  him  to  Philadel- 
phia.    "  I  know  very  well,"  said  he  to  the  judges,  "  what  a  king 
can  make  of  a  banker ;  but  I  do  not  know  Avhat  a  banker  can 
[     make  of  a  king." 

3.  A  considerable  sum  of  money  had  been  stolen  from  a  lord. 
,  ije,  suspecting  tliat  it  was  one  of  his  domestics,  called  them  all 
j  one  morning,  and  said  to  them,  "  My  friends,  the  Angel  Gabriel 
I  appeared  to  me  la.<t  night,  and  told  me  that  the  tliief  should 
[    have  a  parrot's  feather  on  the  end  of  his  nose."     At  these  words, 


108  ITALIiiN    GEAJNEMAR. 

the  guilty  man  immediately  put  his  hand  to  his  nose.     "  It  is 
"■  you,  villain,  who  have  stolen  from  me  !  "   said  the  master :   "  the 
Ano;el  Gabriel  came  to  tell  me  of  it."     In  this  manner  he  re- 
covered  his  money. 

4.  Lent  is  never  long  to  him  who  is  obliged  to  pay  at  Easter. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Depends  on,  dipende  da. 

2.  Was  accused,  z;ew?2e  accusdto;  plotted,  tramdto  ;  to  carry 
off,  rapire ;  Giorgio  ;  a  Filadeljia  ;  I  know,  so  ;  can,  pud  ;  I  do 
not  know,  7ion  so. 

3.  Considerable,  ragguardevole ;  suspecting,  sospettdndo ;  do- 
mestic, servitdre  ;  called,  chiamo  ;  end,  punta  ;  guilty,  reo  ;  put 
his  hand  on  his  nose,  s^  tbcca  il  ndso  ;  villain,  mariudlo ;  re- 
covered, riebhe. 

4.  Is  obliged  (has)  to  pay,  ha  da  pagcire  ;  Easter,  pdsqua. 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Che  vide  Didgene  un  gidrno  ?         Un  giovinetto  che  arrosiva. 
Cdsa  diss'  egli  ?  "  Ammo,  Jigliudlo  mio." 

Ddve  taglidva  un  contadmo  un     Alia  riva  d'  un  jiume. 

dlhero  ? 
Avea  egli  due  scuri  ?  ^o,  non  ne  avea  che  una. 

Che  gli  accddde  ?  Per  mcda  sdrte  gli  ccidde  la 

scure  nelV  dcqua. 
La  ritrovo  ?  Non  poteva  ritrovcirla. 

Chi  gli  appdrve  ?  Me/r curio. 

Che  disse  egli?  "  ^  questa  la  tua?"  mostrcindo- 

gli  una  scure  d'  dro. 
Che  rispdse  il  contadmo  ?  "  No,  cotesta  scure  non  e  la  7ma." 

"  Forse  e  questa  d'  argento  ?  "         "  No,  cotesta  non  e  ancdra  quella 

che  mi  appartiene." 
"  E  dunque  questa  di  ferro  ?  "        "  Ve7-amente,  questa  e  la  mia." 
Che  disse  Mercurio  alldra  ?  "  La  prohita  e  la  miglidre  poll- 

tica." 
QuaV  e  la  poUtica  di  un  prin-    E  V  arte  di  conservdre  quello  che 
cipe?  ha,  0  di  usurp  are  quello  che 

non  ha. 


INDEFINITE    ADJECTIVE    PEONOUNS.  109 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

.    INDEFINITE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 
MNEMONIC    EXERCISE.  . 

Ogni  rosa  ha  la  sua  spina,  Every  rose  has  its  thorns. 

Andcite  con  tutta  fretta,  Go  with  all  haste. 

La  fortima  governa  oGNi  cosa,  Fortune  governs  every  thing. 

Vengo  da  parte  di  tutti  loro,  I  come  from  them  all. 

QuALUNQUE  fatica  merita  pre-  Every   exertion    deserves    re- 

mio,  ward. 

La  posta  parte  ogni  dl  per  V  The  mail  leaves  every  day  for 

Italia,  Italy. 

Mi  VI  trattenni  alcune   setti-  I  stopped  there  some  weeks. 

mane, 

Spendete  il  tempo  in  quXlche  Spend  your  time  in  some  useful 

utile  occiqjazione,  occupation. 

La  morte  e  il  fine  di  tutte  le  Death   is   the  end  of  all  our 

sciagure,  misfortunes. 

QuALUNQUE  siano  le  mie  ra-  Whatsoever  be  my  reasons. 

gioni, 

Staro  in  cdsa  per  tutto  quesf  I  shall  be  at  home  all  day. 

f99h  ,       ,  , 

TuTTO  ilmdle  non  vienpernuo-    All  is  for  the  best. 

cere, 

E  pazzta  il  voler  sapere  TUTTO,     It  is  a  folly  to  wish  to  knov7 

(^all)  every  thing. 

La  saprete  in  tutt'  Iltra  guisa,     You  will  know  it  in  a  very  dif- 

ferent  way. 

I.  Of  indefinite  pronouns,  the  following  are  used  only 
in  the  singular,  and  cannot  be  put  before  nouns  in  the  plu- 
ral number  :  — 

Qudlche,  m.  and  f. some,  any. 

Ogni^  m.  and  f. all,  every. 

Chiunque,  m.  and  f. whoever,  whosoever. 


*  With  dgni  are  formed  the  words  ognidi,  every  day  ;  ognora,  always ;  ogm'ino,  evory 
one.  Ogni,  before  numeral  adjectives,  as  in  the  phrases,  ogni  di'ie  7?iesi,  evei-y  two  months ; 
6gni  sci  pdgijie,  every  six  pages ;  ogni  died  soiddti,  every  ten  soldiers ;  and  in  the  word 
ognissdnti,  the  day  of  All-saints,  —  is  used  with  nouns  in  the  plural. 

10 


no 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


Ghisivoglia,  m.  and  f. 
Chi  che^  m.  and  f.     . 
Chicchessia,  m.  and  f. 
Che  che,  m.  and  f.     . 
CJiecchessia^  m.  and  f. 
Qualunque^  m.  and  f. 
Quahivoglia,  m.  and  f. 
Qualsisia,  m.  and  f. 
NiiUa,  in.  and  f.    .     . 
Niente,  m.  and  f.  . 


ima,  f. 


Uno,  m. 

Uii'altro,  m.  un'dltra,  f. 

QiLolcuno,  m.  qualcuna,  f. 

Qiialchediino^  m.  qualcheduna,  f. 

Ognuno,  m.  ognuna,  f.  , 

Ciascuno,  m.  ciascuna^  f. 

Ciascheduno^  m.  ciascheduna,  f. 

Veruno,  m.  veruna,  f.    . 

Nessmio,  m.  nessuna,  f.  . 

or  Nissuno,  m.  nissima,  f.  . 


Neimo,  m. 
or  Niuno,  m. 
Niillo,  m. 


neuna,  f. 
niuna,  f. 


whoever,  whosoever. 


)> 


w 


whatever,  whatsoever. 


7) 


5> 


whosoever,  whatsoever. 


nothing. 


one. 

another. 

some,  some  one,  somebody. 

every  one,  everybody. 
j>        J)  » 

no  one,  nobody. 


J) 

3J 


J) 
3> 


II.  The  following  are  used  in  both  numbers  :  — 


SINGULAR. 


Tale,  m.  and  f. 
Gotdle,  m.  and  f. 
Alcuno,  m. 
Taluno,  m. 
Oer^o,  m. 
Stesso,  m. 
Medesimo,  m. 
Altro,  m. 
Tutto^  m. 
Alqudnto,  m. 
Tdnto,  m. 
Cotcmto,  m. 
Altrettdnto,  m. 

Molto,  m. 
Troppo,  m. 


alcwia,  f. 
taluna,  f. 
certo,  f. 
stessa,  f. 
medesima,  f. 
a^i^ra,  f, . 
<w^to,  f.  . 
alqudnta,  f. 
tdnta,  f. 
cotdnta,  f. 
altrettdnta,  f. 
poca,  f. 
molta,  f. 
troppa,  f. 


such. 

such,  such  a  one. 

some,  some  one,  somebody. 

certain, 
same. 

other. 

all. 

a  little,  somewhat. 

so  much. 

as  much,  as  much  more, 
a  little,  a  few. 
much, 
too  much. 


INDEFINITE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


Ill 


PLURAL 


Tali,  m.  and  f.     .     .     . 

Cotali,  m.  and  f.  .     .     . 

Alcmii,  in.  alcune,  f. 

Tdlum,  m.  taUme,  f. 

Certi,  m.  cer^e,  f.  . 

Stessi,  m.  stesse,  f. 

Medesimi,  m.  medesime,  f. 

Altri,  m.  <://^re,  f.  . 

7'ii/i'?*,  m.  ^ii^ife,  f.  . 

Alqudnti,  m.  alquante,  f. 

Tanti,  m.  ^a?z^e,  f. 

Cotcmti,  m.  cotante,  f. 

Altrettdnti,  m.  aUrettdnte, 

Pochi,  m.  poche,  f. 


Molti,  m. 


molte,  f. 


f. 


such. 

such,  such  ones. 

some,  some  ones. 

certain, 
same. 

others. 

all,  every  one,  everybody. 

a  few,  not  many. 

as  many. 

as  many,  as  many  more. 

few. 

many. 

too  many. 


Troppi,  m.         troppe,  f. 

.m.  Ohiunque,  chisivdglia,  chi  die,  chicchessia^ 
qualcuno,  qualcheduno ,  ognitno,  taluno,  are  applied  to 
persons  only  :  the  others  may  be  applied  both  to  persona 
and  things. 

IV.  "Every,"  and  the  word  "all"  meaning  "every,"  are 
translated  by  6gni  or  qualunque,  which  are  always  in  the 
singular,  and  serve  for  the  masculine  and  feminine ;  as, — 


!  Every  king,  every  queen. 
Every  merit,  every  pain. 


Ogni  re,  ogni  regma, 
Ogni  merito,  ogni  pena. 


Or  qualunque  re,  qualunque  regina,  qualunque  merito, 
qualunque  pena,   etc.      We  can  also  say,  ciascimo  re, 
ciasciina  regina,  etc.  ;  ciascuno  agreeing  in  gender  with 
I  its  noun. 

i 

I       y.  "All,"  and  "the  whole,"  expressing  a  collective  sense, 
I  are  rendered  by  tutto,  and  agree  with  the  noun  ;  as,  — 

All  the  people,  the  whole  city,        Tutto  il  popoJo,  tutta  la  cittd. 
All  hearts,  all  nations,  Tutti  i  cuori,  tiitte  le  nazionL 

The  inversion,  il  popdlo  tutto,  la  cittd  tiitta,  etc.,  is 
I  much  used,  and  is  very  pretty. 


112  ITALIAN    GliAMMAR. 

VI.  The  Itallanisms  tiitto  qudnto^  tutta  quanta,  with 
their  plurals,  express  collectively  all  the  parts  of  a  whole  ; 
as,  — 

La  ccha  e  hruccidta  tiitta  quanta,     The  entire  house  is  burned. 
Og<ii  VI    asjjetto  a  2?rdnzo  tutti     To-day  I  expect  you   all   (a< 
qudnti,  many  as  you  are)  to  dinnei-. 

Trenio  tutto  qudnto,  I  tremble  all  over  (from  head 

to  foot). 

VII.  "All,"  when  it  means  "every  thing,"  may  be 
translated  by  tiitto,  or  by  ogni  cdsa,  according  to  eupho- 
ny ;   as,  — 

Idleness  renders  all  (everything)     La  pignzia  fa  parer  cliff tcih 
difficult,  dgni  cdsa,  or  fa  par  it-  tdtto 

difficile. 

VIII.  "All,"  used  as  an  adverb,  and  sionifvino-  "en- 
tirely,"  is  often  rendered  thus  :  La  faccenda.  e  hella  e 
Jinita,  la  cdsa  e  hella  e  fdtta,  le  ndvi  sdno  belle  e  ap- 
pavecchidte,  the  affiiir  is  entirely  finished,  the  thing  is  all 
done,  the  vessels  are  all  ready. 

IX.  "No,"  "no  one,"  is  translated  by  nessuiio,  niuno, 
'Verdno,  or  by  alcuno  employed  only  as  the  object  {alcdno 

as  the  subject  signifies  "someone").  Any  of  these  Ita- 
lian words,  when  put  after  the  verb,  requires  non  before 
it ;   as,  — 

No    country    is    more   beautiful     Verun  paese  e  piu  hello  della 

than  Tuscany,  Toscdna. 

I  never  saw  that  anywhere,  Non  ho.veduto  questo  in  alcuna 

pdrte. 

X.  "  Some  "  is  translated  by  qudlche  or  alcdno  (plural 
alcuni  or  alqudnti^,  and  not  by  qitdlchi;  as, — 

He  has  been  gone  some  time,  Epartitogia  da  qudlche  tempo,    j 

We  have  some  books,  Abhicmio  alcuni  Ubri. 

I  have  some  of  them,  JSfe  ho  alqucinti. 

XL   "  Such  "  is  rendered  by  idle  or  cotdle;  as,  — 

I  have  seen  such  a  person,  Lfo  veduto  quel  idle. 

He  has  such  a  face  as  does  not     LJgli  ha  una  tdl  cera  che  non 
please  me,  mi  picice. 


1 


INDEFINITE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS.  113 


READING-   LESSON. 

Ogni  secolo,  6gm  epoca,  ogni  eta,  dgni  paese,  divien  celebre 

becomes 

per   qualche   nuova   scoperta ;    e   il   tempo   presente   aggiunge 

discovery  adds 

sempre  qualche  cosa  al  tempo  passato. 

Se  la  pazzia  fosse  un  dolore,  si  sentirebbero  lament!  in  tutte 
were  should  hear 

le  case. 

Ogni  lingua,  per  se  stessa,  e  intraducibile,  per  motivo  del  siio 

untranslatable 

carattere  particolare,  die  e  il  friitto  del  clima,  del  governo,  del 
genio,  degli  studj  e  delle  occupazioni  dei  popoli.. 

Pope  asserisce  francamente  che  dopo  la  lingua  greca,  veruna 

declares 

lingua  ha  un'  armonia   cosi  imitativa  cdme  la  lingua   inglese : 

comunque     sia,   nessuno  e  obbligato  a  credergli. 
however  that  may  be 

L'  educazione  varia  quasi  in  ogni  paese ;  ogni  uomo  assennato 

procura   di   adattarsi  alle   usanze   esistenti   nel  site  in   cui   si 
endeavors  adapt  existuig 

trdva. 

finds  himself. 

Senza  una  buona  educazione,  il  dotto  non  e  altri  che  un  pe- 

dante,  il  filosofo  un  cinico,  il  soldato  un  bruto,  e  ogni  uomo 

qualsisia  sara  spiacevolissimo. 

Non  v'  e  pazzia  la  quale,  per  quanto  stravagante  essere  possa, 

it  may  be 
non    sia  c6rsa    per  la  mente  a  qualche  filosofo. 
may  be  passed 


EXERCISE    FOR   TRANSLATION, 

1.  No  farmer  is  pleased  to  have  grain  cheap,  no  soldier  is 
pleased  with  peace  in  his  country,  nor  an  architect  with  the 
solidity  of  houses,  nor  a  doctor  with  the  health  of  his  friends. 

10* 


114  ITALIAN    GRAMMAll. 

2.  After  the  defeat  of  Perseus,  king  of  Macedon,  Paiilus 
Emilius  poured  such  a  quantity  of  silver  into  the  public  treasury, 
that  the  people  were  not  obliged  to  pay  any  tribute  during  the 
space  of  a  hundred  and  five  years.  Useful  and  glorious  vic- 
tories ! 

3.  Newton  was  born  on  the  same  day  that  Galileo  died ;  as  if 
Nature  had  not  wished  to  have  any  interval  between  these  two 
philosophers. 

4.  A  jDhilosopher,  who  had  the  misfortune  to  live  under  a 
tyrant,  was  in  the  habit  of  feeling  his  neck  every  morning  on 
awaking,  to  see  if  his  body  was  still  attached  to  it. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Is  pleased,  si  compidce  di;  nor,  ne. 

2.  Perseo ;  Macedonia ;  Pablo  Emilio ;  poured,  verso  ;  such, 
tdnta ;   during,  per. 

3.  As  if,  quasi ;  had  not  wished  to  have,  non  avesse  voluto 
lascidre. 

4.  To  live,  vivere ;  under,  sotto  ;  was  in  the  habit,  soleva  ; 
of  feeling,  di  tastdrsi ;  on  awaking,  destdndosi ;  was  still  at- 
tached, VI  stdva  ancora  attaccdto. 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

E  ogni  lingua  traducibile  '.  No,  per  se  stessa  e  intraducibile, 

Che  disse  Pope  della  lingua  in-  Veruna  lingua  ha  un'  armonia 

glese  ?  cosl  imitativa. 

Come  i  diversi  paesi  diventano  Diventdno  celehri  per  qudlche 

celehri  ?  nuova  scoperta. 

Aggiunge  il  tempo  presente   at  II  tempo  presente  vi  aggiunge 

tempo  passdto  ?  senipre  qudlche  cdsa. 

Che  e  il  dotto  senza  una  budna  Egli  non  e  dltro  che  un  pedcinte. 

educazidne  ?  ^ 

Cosa  e  il  Jilosofo  senza  educa-  E  un  cinico. 


zione  i 


Perche  ?  Per  che.  ha  un  cardttere  partico- 

Idre. 
In  che  gidrno  ndcque  Newton  ?       Nello  stesso  'gibrno  in  cui  mori 

il  Galileo. 
Di  che  efrutto  il  cardttere  d'  una     E  il  friitto  del  cVima.,   del  go- 
lingua  ?  verno,  degli  stiidj  e  delle  occn^ 

fazioni  dei  pbpoli. 


INDEFINITE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS.  115 


CHAPTER  XYIII. 

INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS 

( Continued.) 

MNEMONIC  EXERCISE. 

Non  bisogna  rubdre  C  altrui,  We  must  not  rob  the  property 

of  others. 

NiENTE  facendo,  s'  impura  a  Doing   nothing,  one   learns    to 

far  male,  do  evil. 

Dopo  il  fcitto,  OGNUNO  e  huon  After  the  deed,  every  one  is  a 

consigliere,  good  adviser. 

Schidvo  ALTRUi  si  fa  chi  dice  il  He  who  reveals  his  secret  be- 

suo  segreto,  comes  the  slave  of  others. 

Ha  da  esser  privo  di  ogni  dif-  He  Avho  wishes  to  criticise  the 

fetto   chi  vuol  censurdre   gli  defects  of  others  should  him- 

^  ALTRUi,  self  be  free  from  them. 

E  padrone  delta  vHa  altrui  He  is  master  of  the  lives  of 

chi  sprezza  la  sua,  others  who  despises  his  own. 

Gli  faro  parldre  da  qualche-  I  will  have  him  spoken  to  by 

DUNO,  some  one. 

Ognuno    e  V  amico  deW  uomo  Every  one  is  the  friend  of  the 

che  regdla,  man  who  makes  presents. 

V  e  in  CIASCUN  di  ndi  qualche  In  eveiy  one  of  us  there  is  some 

seme  di  pazzia,  germ  of  folly. 

NiUNO  e  prof  eta  nella  sua  pa-  No  one  is  a  prophet  in  his  own 

tria,  country. 

Un  malvdgio  feJice  non  fa  in-  Nobody  envies  a  happy  wicked 

.  vidia  a  NESSUNO,  person. 

//  peggio  che  pdssa  fdrsi  e  il  The  worst  thing  that  one  can 

non  far  nulla,  do,  is  to  do  nothing. 

II  pane  d'  ^ltri  sempre  sa  di  The  bread  of  others  is  always 

sdle,^  bitter. 

Non   mi  sento   niente  affdtto  I  do  not  feel  well  at  all.- 

bene, 

Non  conviene  beffdrsi  di  nessu-  We  should  make  fun  of  no  one, 

NO, 

Nonfdte  tngiurie  a  chicciies-  Injure  no  one  whosoever, 

SIA, 


116  ITALI^iJs^    GRAimVlAR. 

I.  Altr{ii,  with  the  article,  signifies  "the  property  of 
others  ;  "  as,  — 

E  un  ladroneccio  V  usurp  are  V  It  is  a  theft  to  usurp  the  goods 
altrui,  of  others. 

II.  "  One  "  and  "another"  are  transLated  hy  gli  uni,  gli 
dltri;-  as.  Fortune  humbles  one,  and  exalts  another,  la 
fortuna  ahhdssa  gli  uni,  e  inndlza  gli  dltri. 

III.  The  above  sentence  may  be  differently  constructed  ; 
as.  Some  ascend,  others  descend  :  thus  go  the  wheels  of 
fortune,  Glii  sdle,  chi  scende,  or  dltri  sdle,  dltri  scende, 
or  qudl  sdle,  qudl  scende,  or  questi  sdle,  quegli  scende: 
cost  va  la  ru6ta  della  fortuna. 

IV.  For  the  correct  use  of  all  these  forms,  the  choice 
of  which  depends  on  taste  guided  by  the  ear,  we  must 
remember,  first,  that  chi,  and  sometimes  quale,  may  be 
repeated  many  times;  second,  that  the  word  dltri^  and 
quegli,  without  an  article,  are  pronouns  in  tlie  singular, 
indicating  a  person. 

Y.  "  Nothing "  is  rendered  by  niente  or  nUlla.  The 
negation  non  is  used  when  one  of  these  words  comes  after 
the  verb  ;  as,  — 

It  is  better  to  labor  without  an  E  7neglio  lavordre  senza  scopo 
object  than  to  do  nothing,  che  il  non  far  nidla. 

He  who  observes  nothing,  learns  Chi  nidla  osserva,  nidla  impd- 
nothing,  ra  ;  or,  chi  non  osshva  nulla, 

non  impdra  nidla. 

YI.  Niente  or  ml Z/^j  without  7^07^,' expressed  or  under- 
stood, means  "  something,"  "  any  thing  :  "  in  which  case 
it  is  generally  placed  after  the  verb,  if  governed  by  it ;  as, 

aS^  io  posso  far  nidla  per  vdi,  If  I  can  do  any  thing  for  you, 
cojnanddtemi,  command  me. 

*  Altri  is  a  word  verj'  much  used  in  elegant  style,  and  must  not  be  confounded  with 
gli  altri,  which  means  "  the  others." 

This  word,  as  well  as  chi,  belongs  to  persons  :  quale  refers  to  persons  and  things ;  as  in 
this  verse  of  Petrarca:  "  Qudl  si  posava  in  terra,  e  qudl  su  V  onde,''''  some  (tiowers)  were 
■>n  the  earth,  others  upon  the  waves.    These  words  all  require  the  verb  in  the  singular. 


INDEFIJSITE    ADJECTIVE    PliONOUNS.  117 

VII.  The  word  "  nothing,"  employed  negatively,  may 
sometimes  be  translated  by  che;  the  verb  being  preceded 
by  non,  and  sometimes  by  c6sa. 

The  idle  have  nothing  to  do,  I pigri  non  hdnno  che  fare. 

He  who  is  innocent  has  nothing     Chi    e    innocente    non  ha   che 
to  fear,  temere. 

VIII.  Nulla  and  niente  are  sometimes  used  with  an 
article ;  as,  Sempronio  rose  from  nothing,  Seawprdnio  ^ 
sdrto  dal  nulla.  The  following  phrases  are  thus  trans-* 
lated  :  — 

He  is  a  man  of  nothing,  E  un  iiomo  di  niente. 

A  man  good  for  nothing,  Un  uomo  da  niente. 

He  has  quarrelled  with  us  for  a    S^e  corrucciato  con  noi perim 

trifle,  mdla,  or  per  una  hngatteUa. 

This  man  is  nothing  to  me,  Non  ho  alcana  ajjinita,  or  re- 

lazione  con  lid. 

IX.  Si  is  generally  considered  as  an  indefinite  pro- 
noun, and  is  used  both  for  the  masculine  and  feminine 
gender,  singular  and  plural :  it  is  equivalent  to  the  Eng- 
lish words  "  one,"  "  we,"  "  people,"  "  they  ;  "  as,  — 

Come  si  e  detto,  As  we  have  said. 

Si  parldva  di  guerra^  People  talked  of  war. 

Si  loderd  molto  il  suo  co7^dggio,     They  will  praise   his    courage 

very  much. 

Si  vede  che'siete  un  galantuomo,  One  sees  that  you  are  a  gentle- 
man. 

But,  in  these  and  similar  phrases,  si  holds  the  place  of  a 
passive  proposition,  and  may  be  equally  well  rendered  in 
English  by  "  it  is,"  "  it  was,"  "  it  will  be  ;  "  as,  — 

Si  cred'evi  cosi  general nieiite.         It  was  genei-ally  so  believed. 
Si  dice  che  la  pace  e  gia  fer-     It   is    said    that    the    peace    is 
mdta,  already  (oncluded. 

X.  JSFon,  when  need  in  a  sentence  expressing  an  in- 
definite meaning,  is  always  placed  at  the  commencement ; 
as,  Non  si  jmo  far  mdla,  one  can  do  nothing. 


118  ITALIAN    GkAJ^LMzVR. 

XI.  "To  US,"  "to  you,"  is  rendered  by  c^,  vi,  and  is 
placed  before  the  indefinite  pronoun  si;  but  "of  it," 
"of  him,"  "of  her,"  ^*of  them,"  is  translated  by  we,  and 
is  placed  after  si,  which  is  changed  into  se;  as, — 

They  do  not  speak  to  you,  Non  vi  si  p aria. 

They  do  not  speak  of  it,  Non  se  ne  pdrla. 

Xn.  The  indefinite  pronoun  cannot  be  translated  by 
si  when  it  is  followed  by  the  reflective  pronoun  si,  as  si  si 
would  not  be  euphonious.  It  is  then  necessary  to  adopt 
another  form,  according  to  the  sense  of  the  phrase.  Thus, 
to  translate  "Man  believes  himself  happy  when  he  lives 
in  opulence,  but  he  deceives  himself,"  we  can  say,  Uno 
or  tale  or  dltri  or  V  u6mo  si  crede  felice  qudndo  vive 
nelV  opulenza,  ma  s^  ingdnna;  or  gli  udmini,  or  alcimi 
si  credono  felici  qudndo  essi  vivono  nelV  opidenza;  or 
n6i  ci  credidmo  felici  qudndo  vividmo  nelV  opidenza, 
inia  g'  ingannidmo. 

READING   LESSON. 

0  voi,  chiunque     slate,     poveri   o  ricchi,  pdpoli   o  principi, 

you  may  be 

ricordatevi  che  la  falce  della  morte  miete  nell'  iimile  capanna 
remember  harvests 

come  nei  superbi  palagi. 

Un   gentiluomo    era    travagliato    dalla    podagra.      Tutti   gli 

tormented 

consigliavano  di  lasciar  1'  uso  delle  carni  salate,  ma  egli  rispon- 
advised  leave  off  salted 

deva  che   nei   dolori   della  sua  malattia  era   assai   contento   di 

potersela  pigliare  con  qiialche  cosa,  e  che  arrabbiandosi  quando 
to  be  able    to  blame  getting  angry 

col  presciutto  e  quando  col  salame  si  sentiva  bello  e  confortato. 

felt 

Nei  paesi  dispotici  si  sofFre  m61to  e  si    grida    poco ;   nei  paesi 

suffers  complains 

liberi,  si  softre  poco  e  si  grida  molto. 


INDEFINITE    ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS.  119 

I  grandl  sono  cdme  quel  mullni  eretti  siille  montagne,  i  quali 

erected 

non  danno  farina  se  non  quando  si    da   loro  del  vento. 
give  gives 

Alcuni  si  divertivano  in  casa  di  una  sigiiora  a  troviire  delle 
differenze  ingegnose  da  un  oggetto  ad  un  altro.     "  Qual  difFe- 

renza,"  disse  la  Signora,  "  si  potrebbe  fare  fra  me  ed  un  oriuolo." — 

could      make 

"  Signora,"  egli  le  rispose,  "  un  oriu61o  indica  le  ore,  e  appresso 

near 
di  v6i,  si  dimenticano." 
forgets. 


EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  There  is  not  a  man  who  can  say,  I  have  need  of  no  one. 

2.  There  is  nothing  more  dangerous  than  to  have  for  enemies 
those  whom  we  have  laden  with  benefits. 

3.  Every  man  may  presume  with  reason,  that  no  one  can  ever 
attain  to  a  perfect  knowledge  of  all  the  secrets  and  all  the  riches 
of  nature. 

4.  The  same  deed,  the  same  word,  awakens  remembrances 
agreeable  to  some,  and  sad  to  others.  Whosoever  looked  at  Ca- 
ligula's forehead,  excited  in  him  sudden  anger,  because  this  action 
reminded  him  of  his  baldness,  which  he  wished  to  conceal  from 
everybody ;  but  he  who  looked  at  the  forehead  of  Scipio  Afri- 
canus,  gave  him  great  pleasure,  because  he  had  a  warlike  wound 
there,  —  a  witness  of  liis  valor  and  his  glory. 

5.  Some  one,  in  speaking  of  a  tyrant  who  enjoyed  the  reputa- 
tion of  liberality,  said,  "Judge  how  much  liberality  dominates 
in  this  man  ;  Avho  gives  not  only  his  own  spoils,  but  even  those  of 
others." 

6.  Envy  is  certainly  the  basest  and  the  most  cruel  of  all  the 
passions,  since  there  is  hardly  any  person  who  may  not  have  in 
himself  something  to  excite  the  passion  of  the  envious. 

7.  Never  do  to  others  that  which  you  would  not  wisli  others 
should  do  to  you. 

8.  One  day  a  lady  wrote  to  her  husband  this  letter,  which 
may  serve  for  a  perfect  model  of  laconism  :  "  Having  nothing  to 
do,  I  write  to  you :  leaving  nothing  to  say  to  you,  I  finish." 


120  ITALTAN    GRAMMAR. 


VOCABULARY. 

1.  There  is  not,  non  v*  e  ;  can,  possa  ;  need,  hisogno. 

2.  Laden  with  benefits,  henejicdto. 

3.  May,  puo  ;  presume,  presumere  ;  attain,  pervemre. 

4.  Same  deed,  stesso,fdtto  ;  awakens,  svecjUa  ;  looked  at,  guar- 
ddva ;  excited  in  him  sudden  anger,  suscitdva  in  lui  suhito 
sdegno ;  reminded  him  of,  gli  rammentdva ;  to  conceal,  nas- 
condere  ;  Scipione  V  Africdno  ;  great  pleasure,  inagndnimo  pia- 
cere  ;  warlike,  marzidle. 

5.  Judge,  pensdte  ;  dominsites,  regna  ;  not  on\j,  non  solamente  ; 
gives,  dona  ;  his  own  spoils,  la  roba  sua  ;  even,  a7ic6ra. 

6.  There  is  hardly,  v'  e  quasi  ;  to  excite,  da  suscitdre  ;  envious, 
invidioso. 

7.  Never  do,  non  fdte ;  wish,  vorreste, 

8.  Wrote,  scrisse  ;  may  serve,  pud  servire  ;  I  write,  scrwo. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 

Con  cM  siete  venuto  ?  Con  nessuno. 

Avete  dltre  amiche  ?  Non  ne  ho  dltre. 

Chi  ha  detto  cid  ?  Ognuno  lo  dice. 

Sdno  le  vdstt^e  dice  sorelle  ricche  ?     U  ima  e  ricca,  V  dltra  e  pdvera. 

Come  sdno  i  commanddnti  ?  Geldsi  gli  uni  degli  dltri. 

Volete  (will  you)   aver  qudlche     No,  vi  ringrdzio  (thank  you), 
cdsa  ?  ^  non  vdglio  niente. 

Qualcuno  picchia,  anddte  a  ve-     E  la  Signora  K. 
dere  chi  e  ? 

Non  credesi  die  avremo  (shall     Non  e  prohdhile, 
have)  la  pdce'^ 

Avete  ritrovdtolelettere  per dute?    Ne  ho  ritrovdte  alcHne,  ma  la 

maggidr  parte  sd7io  perdute. 

Sdno  fratelli  que  sti  due  uomini'^     Non  so   (I  do  not  know);    si 

rassoraigliano    (resemble)   V 
uno  air  dltro. 

Che  si  dice  (say)  di  nudvo  ?  Non    ho    letto    (read)    nessun 

giorndle  dggi,  ma  si  dice  che 
ci  sdno  cattive  nuove. 

Dove  V  avete  inteso  ?  In  cdsa  d'  un  amico  e  per  via 

d'  una  lettera  privdta. 


PREPOSITIONS.  121 


CHAPTER    XIX. 

THE  PREPOSITIONS  DI,  A,  DA. 

A  thorough  acquaintance  with  these  prepositions  is  abso- 
lutely necessary,  and  therefore  requires  the  attention  of  the 
pupil :  first,  because  the  English  and  Italians  differ  some- 
what in  the  use  of  them  ;  and,  second,  because  they  are  the 
signs  which  establish  the  connection  between  our  ideas, 
and  the  slightest  error  in  their  interpretation  would  en- 
tirely change  the  sense  of  a  phrase/ 


* 


MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

10  son  DEL  vostro  parere,  I  am  of  your  opinion. 

•  Vol  J7ii pagdte  Bi  cattiva^noneta/  You  pay  me  with  ingratitude. 

11  mondo  va  da  se  stesso,  The  world  goes  by  itself. 
Si  e  caccidto  a  ridere^  He  burst  out  laughing. 

Le  Alpi  sepdrano  V Italia  dIl-  The  Alps  separate  Italy  from 

LA  Frmicia,  France. 

Lapolvere  da  ccinnone  fu  inven-  Gunpowder  was  invented  by  a 

tdta  DA  un  frdte,  friar. 

Voi  non  avete  ragione  da  far  You  have  no  good  reason  to 

valere,  give. 

Anddte  A  vedere  die  cosa  c'  e,  Go,  see  what  it  is. 

Voi  mi  trattdte  per  da  piu  die  You  do  me  more  honor  than  I 

sono.,  deserve. 

lo  ho  ditto  da  scherzo  e  voi  fdte  I  said  it  in  joke,  and  you  took 

davvero,  it  in  earnest. 

Dutemi  la  mia  veste  da  camera  Give   me   my  night-gown  and 

e  il  herrettmo  da  notte^  night-cap. 

D All.'  opera  si  condsce  il  tnaes-  We  know  the  master  by  the 

tro,  work. 

Sieie  voi  maritdta  o  da  mari-  Are  you    married,    or   to   be 

tdre  ?  married  ? 

E  venuto  nessuno  a  domanddre  Has  no  one  come  to  ask  for  me  ? 

di  me  ? 

*  Observe  that  some  of  the  prepositions  govern  one,  two,  or  three  cases. 

11 


122 


ITALIAN   GEAMIklAR. 


PKEPOSITIONS   IN    COMMON   USE. 


Di,* 

of. 

Accdnto, 

aside,  about,  near,  by. 

A,\ 

to,  in,  at. 

Alldto, 

5'                 55                 JJ          J> 

Da,X 

from,  by,  on. 

at. 

Attorno, 

about,  around. 

I^h^ 

in,  on,  upon. 

Dattorno, 

55                    55 

Oo?i, 

with. 

Addosso, 

on,  upon,  about. 

Per, 

through,    by. 

on 

ac- 

Presso, 

near,  almost. 

count  of, 

in  0 

rder 

Appresso, 

55                     55 

to,  for. 

Vic  (no. 

55                    55 

Su, 

on,  upon. 

Lungi, 

far,  from. 

Sopra, 

JJ            55 

Lontdno, 

55             55 

Sotto, 

under. 

Appo, 

at,  with,  in  compari 

Fra, 

amongst,  within. 

son  with. 

Tra, 

55                        5 

5 

Verso, ^ 

towards. 

Infra, 

in,  in  about. 

Oltra, 

beyond,  besides. 

Intra, 

55       55            55 

Oltre, 

55                         W 

Prima, 

before. 

Lungo, 

along. 

Dopp, 

after. 

Fino, 

till,  until,  as  far  as. 

Anzi, 

before,  in  presence  of. 

Sino, 

55              55           55       V        55 

Inncmzi, 

55              55 

55 

55 

Infino, 

55              55           55       55        » 

Dindnzi 

5          55              55 

55 

55 

Insino, 

55              55           55       J>        » 

Avdnti, 

55               55 

55 

55 

Contra,** 

against. 

Davdnti 

5          55^             55 

55 

55 

Contro, 

55 

Dikro, 

behind. 

A-frbnte,^\ 

■  opposite. 

Didietro 

' .     "  . 

Rimpetto, 

55 

Entro, 

in,  within. 

Dlrimpetto,        „ 

Dentro, 

55               55 

Senza, '  \ 

without. 

Fuora, 

out  of,  without,  besides. 

^dlvo. 

except,  excepted. 

Fuori, 

55       55                55 

55 

Fccetto, 

55                        55 

Infuori, 

except,  excepted. 

Tranne, 

55                        J5 

The  pupil  is  requested  to  commit  to  memory  the  phrases 
given  under  the  various  prepositions. 


*  From  the  Celtic  rfe,  a  sign  of  qualification. 

t  Prom  the  Celtic  a,  near,  joining  with. 

i  From  the  Celtic  da,  at. 

§  From  tlie  Celtic  en,  in. 

II  From  the  Latin  apud,  Celtic  ap,  joint,  attached. 

IT  From  the  Latin  versus,  Celtic  gicero,  to  turn. 
**  From  the  Celtic  con,  a  sign  of  opposition ;  and  track,  side. 
tt  From  the  Latin  frons,  Celtic  fron,  hefore. 

%%  And  sanza  and  san  (used  by  old  writers).    From  the  Latin  st»e,  Celtic  sy,  "want 
priyation.  —  Bac/ii. 


PREPOSITIONS.  123 

DI.* 

I.  Domanddre  di  iino,  donianddi'e  la  presenza  di 
iino,  to  ask  the  presence  of  some  one ;  fdr  d'  occhio,  fare 
un  cenno  d^  occhio,  to  make  a  sign  of  the  eye  ;  far  di 
cajopello,  fare  un  saldto  di  capj)ello,  to  salute  with  the 
liat ;  dare  di  penna^  dare  un  colpo  di  penna^  to  eiface 
with  the  pen  ;  dare  del  hriccdne,  ddre  il  titolo  di  bric- 
cone,  to  treat  as  a  viHain  ;  pimire  di  mdi^te,  punire  cdlla 
pena  di  mSrte,  to  punish  with  penalty  of  death ;  accu- 
mre  di  furto,  accusdre  per  delitto  di  fdrto^  to  accuse 
of  theft. 

n.  Many  adverbial  phrases  are  formed  with  the  prepo- 
sition di;  such  as  di  rdro^  rarely;  di  soppidtto,  di  nas- 
c<jsto,  in  secret;  di  certo,  certainly  ;  di  fresco,  di  nudvo, 
newly;  etc. 

A. 

III.  The  preposition  a,  in  Italian,  is  a  sign  of  the  da- 
tive :  it  is  used  to  mark  the  object  towards  which  the  action 
or  the  intention  of  the  subject  is  directed.  It  expresses 
the  idea  of  tendency  of  action,  of  attribution,  or  of  prox- 
imity to  a  place  or  person  ;  as,  — 

£gli  venne  A  trovdrmi,  He  came  to  me. 

Manddre  A  vedere,  a  cercdre,  To  send  to  see,  to  find. 

Avvicindrsi  ad  uno,  To  approach  some  one. 

Appoggidrsi  ad  uno,  To  lean  upon  some  one. 

Appoggidrsi  al  inuro^  To  lean  against  the  wall. 

Vic'ino  AL  fuoco^  AL  Utto,  Near  the  fire,  the  bed. 

Al  tempo  di  Noe,  At  the  time  of  Noah. 

Voltdrsi  AD  uno^  To  turn  to  a  person. 

Anddre  iLLA  volta  di  Mildno,  To  go  towards  Milan. 

Porre  inente  ad  ogni  cosa,  To  pay  attention  to  every  thing. 

Passdi^e  all'  ditra  parte  della  To  go  on  the  other  side  of  thf> 
strdda,  street. 

It  w^ill  be  seen  that  all  the  verbs  of  motion,  which  ex- 
press a  direction  towards  some  object,  are  followed  by  the 
preposition  a, 

*  The  preposition  di  may  express  a  relation  of  possession,  of  extraction,  or  of  qxialifl- 
cation,  as  in  English. 


124  ITALIAN    GRAiMMAU. 

IV.  There  are  many  other  expressions  in  Italian  in 
which  the  preposition  a  is  likewise  employed ;  such  as  — 

Taglidre  a  fette,  To  cut  in  slices. 

Anddre  A  due  a  due,  To  go  two  by  two. 

Morivano  A  miglidia,  They  died  by  thousands. 

Impardre  A  mente,  To  learn  by  heart. 

Stare  all'  erta,*  To  be  upon  one's  guard. 

Anddre,  parldre  AL  huio,  To  walk,  to  speak  in  the  dark. 

Tenete  le  rndni  a  voi,  Keep  your  hands  off. 

Stare   A   capo  chino,  A   hocca     To   be  with   the   head   down, 

aperta,  and  mouth  open. 

V.  The  Italians  say,  adverbially,  dlla  sfuggita,  by 
stealth  ;  alV  impyazzdta,  foolishly  ;  alV  hnjjensdta,  sud- 
denly ;  dlla  rinfusa,  pell-mell ;  dlla  pteggio,  at  the  worst ; 
dlla  meglio,  at  the  best ;  dlla  grSssa,  nearly. 

DA. 

YI.  Da  is  the  sign  of  the  ablative  :  it  is  used  to  express 
the  point  from  which  persons  or  things  depart ;  as,  — 

Allontandrsi  da  Parigi,  To  go  from  Paris. 

Liherdrsi  da  un  impegno,  To  get  out  of  a  difficulty. 

I piaceri  ndscono  dai  bi'sogm,        Pleasures  spring  from  wants. 
Separdrsi  d^lla  fam'iglia,  To  separate  from  one's  family. 

Astenersi  dal  rulere,  dal  par-     To  abstain  from  laughing,  from 

Idre,  talking. 

Ripardrsi   dal    vento,   d^lla     To  shelter  one's  self  from  the 

piioggia,  wind  and  from  the  rain. 

Dall'  anno  or  sin  dXll'  dnno     Since  last  year. 

scorso, 
La  carita  comincia  da  se  me-     Charity  begins  at  home. 

desimo, 
La  moglie  dipende  dal  marito,      The  wife  depends  on  her  hus- 
band. 
Staccdre  una  cosa  da  un  dltra,      To    detach    one    thing     from 

another. 
Venire  dal  tedtro,  da  cdsa,  To    come    from    the    theatre, 

from  the  house. 

*  AlP  erta.    This  aW  erta  has  given  rise  tn  the  English  word  "  alert." 


! 


PEEPOSITIONS.  125 

Essere  incalzato  dal  nemico,         To  be  pursued  by  the  enemy. 

Giudicdre  dXlle  cqyparenze,         To  judge  by  appearances. 

Anddte  da  quella  parte,  Go  on  that  side. 

Che  voUte  da  me  ?  What  do  you  wish  of  me  ? 

Fare  una  cosa  da  se,  or  da  per  To  do  a  thing  aloue,  or  by  one's 
se,  self. 

Guarddrsi  da  uno,  To  be  on  one's  guard  against 

one. 

Distinguere  il  vero  dal  fdlso,       To  distinguish   the    true   from 

the  false. 

Cader  da  cavdllo,  dIll'  dlbero,     To  fall  from  a  horse,  from  a 

tree. 

Difendersi  Dj(gli  ipocriti,  Dii  To  defend  one's  self  against 
Iddri,  DAL  nemico,  hypocrites,  thieves,  and  ene- 

mies. 

VII.  The  verbs  usctre,  venire,  nntovere,  levdrsi,  to 
go  out,  to  come,  to  move,  to  rise,  etc.,  sometimes  take  di 
for  the  sake  of  euphony,  particularly  when  the  article  is 
not  used ;  as,  Esgo  di  chiesa,  si  leva  di  tdvola,  I  go 
out  of  church,  he  rose  from  the  table.  With  the  verb  ca- 
der e,  the  Italians  say,  Cader  di  mdno,*  di  bdcca,  to  fall 
from  the  hand,  from  the  mouth ;  but  with  the  article,  and, 
above  all,  in  the  plural,  they  say,  Uscir  ddlla  chiesa, 
cader  ddlle  Tndni,  to  go  out  of  the  church,  to  let  fall 
from  the  hands. 

VIII.  "Out  of"  is  translated  \>j  fuor  di,  because  it 
sounds  better  than  fuor  da;  as,  Fuori  di  pericolo,  out 
of  danger. 

IX.  Da  is  likewise  used  before  words  marking  the  use, 
employment,  or  distinction  of  a  thing  ;  as,  — 

Carta  DA  scrivere,  writing-paper. 

Carta  da  lettere,  letter-paper. 

A.cqua  DA  here,  water  to  drink. 

Casa  DA  vendere,  house  to  sell. 

Sotte  DA  olio,  oil-cask. 

Camera  da  letto,  bed-chamber. 

Ragdzza  da  maritdre,  a  marriageable  girl. 

*  Mano  admits  of  various  significations  in  idiomatic  phrases.     (See  list  of  idiomfl.) 

11* 


J26 


ITALIAN    GRAJVOIAR. 


X.  Da  is  employed  to  express  the  idea  of  aptitude, 
etc.  J  as )  — 

A.r7ni  da  difendersi,  Arms  proper  for  defence. 

Non  sono  cose  da  dirsi,  They  are  not  things  to  be  said. 

Z/'  err  are  e  da  uomo,  It  is  human  to  err. 

U6}7io  DA  molto,  DA  pdco,  DA     A  man  fit  for  many  things,  for 

few  things,  for  nothing,  for 

fatigue. 
They  are  things  to  cause  laugh- 


7iiente,  da  stento, 
Son  cose  da  ridere, 
Non  e  cosa  da  un  pari  vostro, 
E  una  ragdzza  da  marito, 


ter. 

It  is  not  proper  for  such  a  man 

as  you. 
A  young  lady  of  marriageable 

age. 


XI.  Da  may  be  used  in  various  other  ways  ;  as,  — 


Avke  DA  fare  ? 
Datemi  da  lavordre, 
Venite  qua  da  me, 
Dite  DA  hurla  ? 
Dtte  DA  vero,  or  DAVi^ero  ? 
Uomo  DA  bene,  or  DABbene, 
Anddte  dal  fornaio, 
Andrb  da  mia  madre, 
Vive  DA  Signore, 
Ha  trattdto  DA  birhdnte, 
Egli  fa  da  dottdre,  da  medi- 
co, 
Vi  giuro  da  galantuomo, 


Have  you  something  to  do  ? 

Give  me  something  to  do. 

Come  here  near  me. 

Do  you  say  it  in  jest  ? 

Do  you  speak  seriously  ? 

An  honest  man. 

Go  to  the  baker's. 

I  shall  go  to  my  mother's. 

He  lives  like  a  lord. 

He  has  behaved  like  a  rogue. 

He  plays  the  doctor,  the  phy- 
sician. 

I  swear  to  you  upon  the  faith 
of  a  gentleman. 


READING   LESSON. 

Napoleone  andato  a  Milano  a  farsi  iucoronare  re  d'  Italia, 

goiae 

visito  r  Universita  di  Pavia.     Egli  si  fece  presentare  i  professori. 

made 

e  domando  di  Scarpa.      Gli   fu    detto  che     era      state  depdsto 

was     said  was  (had)   been      deposed 

dalla   sua   cdttedra   per  non   aver  voliito   prestare   giuramento 

to  have  wished      to  take 


PREPOSITIONS.  127 

al    nuovo  governo.      Eh !  clie  importa,  riprese  Buonaparte,  il 

replied 

giuramento  e  le  opinidni  politlche  !     Scarpa  onora  1'  Universita 
ed  il  mio  stato. 

II  nome  solo  di  Roma  e  una  storia  di  maraviglie  che  scalda  il 

warms 
petto    ad   ogni    mortale.     Terra   degli    eroi,   capo    del   mondo ; 

innanzi   a  lei  sparlrono  nazioni,  popoli  e  citta  famose,  ed  ella 
l)efore  disappeared 

stette  e  sta  onore  e  gloria  d'  Italia,  aspettando  che  suoni    1'  dra 
stood       stands  aAvaiting  may  sound 

d'  una  nuova  grandezza. 

Un  gidrno  Brasidas  trovo  tra  alcuni  f  ichi  secchi  un  sdrcio,  cho 

found 

lo  mdrse  si  fattamente  che  lo  lascio  andar  via.     Voi  vedete, 
bit  let  see 

disse  a  chi  gli  stava  intorno,  che  non  v'  e  animaletto,  il  quale, 

stood 

per  piccolo  che   sia,   non  possa  scampar  la  vita  dve   abbia   il 
may  be  can         save  may  have 

cudre  di  difendersi  da  chi  I'assale. 


EXERCISE    FOR   TRANSLATION. 

1.  If  you  wish  to  have  a  faithful  servant,  serve  yourself. 

2.  "  Deliver  me  from  my  friends,"  said  a  philosopher ;  "  be- 
cause I  can  defend  myself  against  my  enemies." 

3.  We  should  abstain  from  such  truths  as  have  the  appearance 
of  falsehood. 

4.  Amerigo  Vespucci,  of  Florence,  made  many  discoveries  in 
the  New  World  in  the  year  one  thousand  four  hundred  ninety- 
seven.     Hence  it  was  called  America,  from  this  navigator. 

5.  Princes  ought  to  punish  as  princes,  and  not  as  executioners. 

6.  The  knowledge  of  foreign  languages  serves  to  correct  and 
perfect  our  own. 

7.  The  changes  of  states,  far  from  injuring,  often  aid  in  the 
rapid  progress  of  civilization  and  the  arts. 

8.  "  Fi'om  the  evils  which  the  barbarians  brought  into  Italy," 
said  Varchi,  "  two  good  things  have  come  forth,  —  our  Italian 
language,  and  the  c;ity  of  Venice." 


128 


ITALIAN    GllAAIMAK. 


VOCABULARY. 


1.  If  you  wish,  se  volete  ;  serve  yourself,  servitevi  da  voi. 

2.  Deliver  me,  liheratemi ;  I  can  (shall)  defend,  difenderb. 

3.  We  should  abstain,  conviene  astenersi  ;  appearance,  fdccia. 

4.  Made,  fece ;  hence  it  was  called,  che  venne  qutndi  chiamdto, 

5.  Ought,  dehhono. 

6.  Our  own,  la  propria. 

7.  Injuring  (to  injure),  nuocere  ;  aid,  giovano. 

8.  Brought,  j)ortdti ;  have  come  fortli,  ndcquero. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 


Vddo  al  tecitro. 

Con  mio  marito  (husband). 

Non  ho  niente  da  fdre. 

jEgli  va  in  campdgna. 

Ho  del  caffe  e  una  focdccia. 

Sara  dedicdto  a  Mozart. 


Dove  andcite  ? 

Con  chi  anddte  ? 

Che  avete  da  fdre, 

Dove  va  il  Dottore  ?    > 

Che  avete"} 

A  chi  sara  dedicdto  quesfo  mon' 

umento  ? 
Dove  trovdste  voi  (did  you  find)     lo  li  trovdi  sulla  tdvola. 

i  lihri  ? 
Come  anddvano  (went)  i  fanci-    A  due  a  due. 

ulli? 
Sdno  le  tdvole  e  le  sedie  nella     Si,  sdno  nella  camera, 

cdmera  ? 


Venite  da  me  oggi  ? 
Che  cdsa  avete  ? 
Ddtemi  di  grdzia  due  ubva. 
Ha  egli  delpepe'^ 
Che  volete  fdre% 


Non  pdsso  ;  non  esco  (go  out) 

di  cdsa. 
Una   huona   cdsa  a  tre  pidni 

(floors).  ^ 

Non  ne  ahbidmo,  ma  dbhidmo 

pane  e  hutirro. 
Si,  Signore,  ha  del  pepe,  e  del 

sale. 
Ho  intenzibne  di  anddre  al  haJ~ 

lo,  ma  andrb  prima  da  m/i/i 

mddre. 


PKEPOSITIONS.  129 


CHAPTER  XX. 

THE    PKEPOSITIONS    CON,  IN,  PER. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

lo  lo  vidi  co'  miei  proprj  occhi,  I  saw  him  with  my  own  eyes, 

Assistetemi  coi  vdsiri  consigli,  Assist  me  with  your  counsels. 

La  Senna  mette  foce  in  mare,  The  Seine  flows  into  the  sea. 

Leggo  per  divertirmi,  I  read  (for)  to  amuse  myself. 

lo  appu7ito  ho  manddto  per  voi,  I  have  just  sent  for  you. 

Egll  ha  ddto  in  luce  uiH  opera,  He  has  published  a  work. 

E  famoso  PER  le  sue  i7nprese,     _  He  is  famous  b^  his  exploits. 

Tutti  parldvano  in  una  vdlta,  They  all  spoke  at  once. 

Diede  urC  occhidta  in  giro,  He  cast  a  glance  around  him. 

lo  vengo  a  bella  posta  per  vbi,  I  come  expressly  for  you. 

Lo  farete  con  vdstro  cdmodo,  You  will  do  it  at  your  leisure. 

E  virtiX  il  dir  molto  IN  pdchi  It  is  a  talent  to  say  much  in 

detti,  few  words. 

E  cdsa  che  non  gli  pud  capir  in  It  is  something  which  he  can- 

testa,  not  understand. 

Le  selle  non  son  fdtte  per  gli  Saddles  are  not  made /or  asses. 


dsi7ii. 


Vice  qu'ello  che  gliviene  in  hocca,     He   says  what  comes  into  his 

head. 
Quella  donna  si  adira  CON  tutti,     This   woman    gets  angry  loith 

everybody. 
VY.'2i  caritd,  non  mi  precipitate!    For  pity's  sake,  do   not  ruin 


me ! 


E  un  ubmo  chidro  per  nohilita.     He  is  a  man  illustrious  hy  his 

nobility. 

Vddo  ad  aspettdrvi  in  giardino,  I  shall  wait  for  you  in  the  gar- 
den. 

Voi  cercdfe  d'  ingarhuglidrmi  You  try  to  confuse  me  ivith 
COIS!  parole  che  non  intendo,  words  which  I  do  not  under- 

stand. 

Ognun  per  se  e  Dio  per  tutti.         Every  one  for  himself,  and  God 

for  us  all. 


180 


ITAI.IAN   GRAMMAR. 


CON  {with). 

I.    Oon  is  used  as  in  English  in  such  sentences  as  the 
followino' :  — 


Strignere  amicizia  CON  alcuno, 
Egli  pcirla  cogli  occhi  chiusi, 
Donne  c6lla  hbcca  aperta, 
Parldrsi  Cogli  occhi, 
Percuotere  col  piede, 
Far  cenno  cox  la  memo,  COL 

capo, 
Dire  CON  voce  hdssa,  CON  voce 

sonora, 
Lavordre  COL  pennello,  collo 

scalpeUo, 
Fare  {ma  cosa  CON  piacere,  CON 

facilitd,   CON  dffficoltd,   con 

destrezza, 
Parldre  col  ciiore  in  mdno, 


k 


uscito  COL  servitor e, 


To  make  friends  with  some  one. 

He  speaks  with  his  eyes  shut. 

He  sleeps  ivith  his  mouth  open. 

To  speak  ivith  the  eyes. 

To  stamp  witli  the  feet. 

To  make  a  sign  with  the  hand, 

with  the  head. 
To  speak  in  a  low  voice,  in  a 

sonorous  voice. 
To  work  with  pincers,  with  a 

chisel. 
To  do  a  thing  tvith  pleasure, 

with  facility,  with  difficulty, 

ivith  dexterity. 
To  speak  in  an  open-hearted 

manner. 
He  has  gone  out  with  his  ser- 
vant. 


II.  In  some  phrases,  the  Italians  use  con  where  the 
English  use  by ;  as,  Illustrdrsi  COL  suo  merito^  to  make 
himself  illustrious  hy  his  merit. 

EST  {in). 

III.  In  follows  a  verb  when  it  expresses  the  existence 
of  an  object  in  or  upon  another ;  as  will  be  seen  by  the 
followino- :  — 


II  prdnzo  e  in  tdvola, 

Ponete  vino  in  tdvola, 

Anddre  in  villeggiatura, 

Essere  in  mcire, 

Gadere  in  terra. 

Nan  ho  dendri  mdosso,* 

lo  non  entro  nei  fdtti  vostri, 

Alzdrsi  IN  punta  di  piede. 


The  dinner  is  upon  the  table. 
Put  the  wine  upon  the  table. 
To  go  iiito  the  country. 
To  be  2ipon  the  sea. 
To  fall  to  the  earth. 
I  have  no  money  about  me. 
I  do  not  meddle  in  your  affairs. 
To  stand  on  tiptoe. 


*  Indosso  is  from  in  and  dosso,  back. 


PREPOSITIONS.  131 

In  mia^  in  sua  vece,  In  my,  in  his  place. 

Essere  in  potere  di,  essere  nel-  To  be  at  the  power  of,  to  be  in 

LA  cuna,  the  cradle. 

Stare  in  piedi  in   mezzo   alia  To  stand  up  in  the  middle  of 

piazza,  the  place. 

Tutti  gli  sguardi  erano  fissi  in  Every  look  was  fixed  upon  him. 

lid. 


Stare  in  cittd,  in  ^;^Z/cf,  in  cdsa,     To  live  ^?^  the  city,  in  the  town, 

in  the  house. 

To  Z'  ho  gettdto  in  mare,  I   have   thrown  him  «?ito  the 

sea. 

Morire  in  e^a  c/i  cento  dnni,  To  die  <2^  the  age  of  one  hun- 

dred. 

IV.  In  elegant  style,  in  is  sometimes  used  instead  of 
cdntro  (against)  ;  as,  Vendicdrsi  in  uno,  to  avenge  one's 
self  against  another  ;  incrudelire  ne'  sHoi  schidvi^  to  be 
cruel  to  (against)  his  slaves. 

V.  It  is  difficult  to  know  when  to  use  the  article  with 
in,  and  when  to  suppress  it ;  and  there  can  be  no  positive 
rules  given  on  this  point.  We  must,  however,  observe 
that  in  is  generally  used  without  an  article  for  any  thing 
which  is,  or  seems  to  be,  on  the  surface;  as,  II  vascello 
che  era  IN  tndre  si  e  rotto  negli  scogli,  the  vessel  which 
was  upon  the  sea  is  broken  on  the  rocks  ;  i  pesci  vivono 
NEL  mare,  fish  live  in  the  sea. 

PER  {for,  by,  through,  etc.). 

YI.  The  preposition  per  indicates  two  distinct  connec- 
tions :  — 

1.  It  denotes  the  idea  of  passage  ;  as,  — 

Scrivere  per  la  posta.  To  write  hy  post. 

.Essere  crudele  per  natura,  To  be  cruel  by  nature. 

Operdre  per  interesse,  To  work  for  interest. 

Prendere  pel  h^dccio.  To  take  hy  the  arm. 

Pagdi^e  cmque  frdnchi  VY.^  gior-  To  pay  five  francs  a  day. 

no, 

Per  padre  egli  e  nohile,  Tlirough  his  fatlier,  he  is  of  no- 
ble birth. 


132  ITALIAN    GKA^IMAR. 

Per  un  secolo,  per  un  anno,  During  (for)  a  year,  a  century. 

Una  voce  corre  per  la  citta,  A  rumor  runs  through  the  city. 

Viaggidre  per  la  Frdncia,  To  travel  through  France. 

Passdre  per  la  Frdncia,  per  la     To  pass  through  France,  through 

camera,  per  la  porta,  the    chamber,    through    the 

door. 

2.  Per  serves  also  to  mark  the  aim  or  object  of  a  per- 
son ;  as,  — 

Egli  e  morto  per  la  p atria,  He  died  for  his  country. 

lo  lavoro  per  ^  miei  scoldri,  I  work  for  my  pupils. 

Fiirono  lascidti  per  morti.  They  were  left  ybr  dead. 

VII.  We  can  also  say,  nella  cittd,  nella  strdda,  in 
Frdncia;  but  the  idea  of  motion  is  better  expressed  by 
the  word  ^jer,  rendering  the  phrase  more  forcible. 

VIII.  We  also  say,  — 

Per  veritd,  io  non  lo  credo.  In  truth,  I  do  not  believe  it. 

Egli  e  venuto  per  pdrte  di  uno.     He  came  from  some  one. 
Essere  per,  or  stdre  per,  To  be  about  to. 

Per  me  vi  assicuro  che,  As  for  me,  I  assure  you  that. 

Io  ho  quel  che  dite  piii  che  per     I  perfectly  believe  all  that  you 

vero,  say. 

Anddte  T'E.'  fdtti  vdstri,*  Let  me  alone  ;   or,  mind  your 

business. 
Per  qudnto  si  affatichi,  tutto  git     He  may  tire  himself  as  much 

va  a  voto,  as  he  will,  nothing  succeeds 

with  him. 

reading  lesson. 

Un  giovindtto  avdva  i  capelli  neri  e  la  barba  bianca.     Tiitti 

domandavano  la  causa  di  un  tal  fenomeno.     Un  motteggiatore 

rispose :  "  Perche  forse  quel  Signore  ha  lavorato  piii  colla  ma- 
labored 
scella  che  col  cervello. 

Giulio  secondo,  in  eta  di  70  anni,  con  un  elmo  in  capo  monto, 

air  assalto  della  mirandola.     Si  dice  che  un  giorno  questo  papa 

guerriero  buttasse  nel  Tevere  le  chiavi  di  San  Pietro,  per  non 

threw 

aver  piii  ad  usare,  diceva  egli,  che  la  spada  di  San  Paolo. 


PREPOSITIONS.  133 

Un  buoii  veccliio  pcirroco  di  villa,  die  era  debole  di  vista,  e 
avea  le  dita  poco  elastiche,  stava  leggendo  in  pulpito  an  capo 

"was        reading 

della  genesi.      A  queste  parole:    "II  Signore  diede  ad  Adamo 

gave 

una  moglie,"  volto  due  pagine  in  una  volta,  e  senza  abbadarvi 

he  turned  perceiving  it 

lesse  tuttavia  con  voce  forte  e  cliiara  :  "  Ed  ella  era  incatramata 
read  pitched 

per    di   dentro    e    per  di  fudri."      Quel    bu6n    piovano    si    era 

without.  parson 

diso;riizIatamente  imbattuto  nella  descrizione  dell'  area  di  Noe. 
unfortunately       lighted  upon 

Bisogna  che  1'  udmo  abbia  tanto  senno  da  sapersi  accomodare 

alle  costumanze  delle  nazioni  nelle  quali  si  trova.    Per  mancanza 

is.  want 

di  un  chiddo  si  pdrde  il    ferro    ad  un  cavallo ;  per  mancanza  di 

lost         shoe  (iron) 

un  ferro  si  perde  il  cavallo,  e  per  mancanza  di  un  cavallo,  anche 

il   cavaliere   e   perduto,  perche    il   nemico   lo   sopraggivinge,  1' 

succeeded 

ammazza,  e  tutto  questo  per  non  aver  pdsto  mente  ad  un  chiodo 
killed  put 

d'  un  fdrro  del  suo  cavallo. 


EXERCISE   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

1.  It  is  a  great  misfortune  not  to  have  wit  enough  to  speak 
well,  nor  judgment  enough  to  keep  silent. 

2.  In  this  world,  we  ought  to  be  born  either  a  king  or  a  fool : 
a  king,  to  be  able  to  avenge  injuries,  and  punish  the  vices  of 

;i  men  ;  a  fool,  so  as  not  to  perceive  injuries,  or  be  troubled  by  any 
j  thing. 

j  3.  A  caricature  represented  George  III.  with  a  very  large 
,  sleeve,  from  which  Napoleon  wished  to  come  out ;  but,  as  soon  as 
,  he  put  out  his  nose,  George  gave  him  a  push  to  force  him  back 
'  into  the  sleeve. 

4.  We  shall  be  measured  by  the  same  measure  as  we  measure 
others. 


12 


134  ITALIAN    GEAMMAR 


^ti  • 


5.  We  should  be  careful  not  to  lose  time  and  words  in  refuting 
things  evidently  false.  Zeno  denied  motion,  and  Diogenes  began 
to  walk  without  saying  a  word  :  Zeno  persisted  in  his  paradox, 
and  Diogenes  continued  to  w^alk. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  To  speak,  joarMre  ;  to  keep  silent,  stare  zttto. 

2.  We  ought  to  be  born,  converrehhe  nascere ;  to  be  able,  po- 
tere ;  to  avenge,  vendicdre ;  to  punish,  castigcire ;  to  perceive 
(to  know),  conoscere  ;  or  to  be  troubled,  ne  ddrsi pensi&ro. 

3.  Represented,  Jigurdva  ;  Giorgio  ;  wished  to  come  out,  voU- 
va  uscire ;  put  out,  sporgeva ;  gave,  ddva ;  to  force  him  back, 
per  fdrlo  torndr  dentro. 

4.  Measured,  misui'dti ;  we  measure,  minvriamo. 

0.  We  should  be,  etc.,  hisogna  guarddrsi  dal  perdere  ;  in  re- 
futing, nel  confutdre  ;  denied,  negdva  ;  began  to  walk,  si  mise  a 
passeggidre  ;  persisted,  persistette  ;  continued,  continub. 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Che  fa  il  vostro  servo  ?  JEgli  fa  un  cenno  col  capo. 

Che  vuol  (wishes)  dire'^  Che  il prdnzo  e  in  tdvola. 

Dov'  e  la  vostra  arnica  ?  E  uscita  col  servitore. 

Glie  e  cadibto  in  terra  ?  Lo  scalpello  con  cwi  lavoro. 

Per  die  e  il  Signor  M.  famoso'^  Per  le  sue  dpere  letter  drie. 

Che  cdsa  ha  egli  fdtto  ?  Ha  ddto  in  luce  mdlte  dpere. 

H  avete  lette  ?  Si^  le  ho  lette  con  piacere. 

Come  ha  egli  parldto  ?  Ha  parldto  col  cudre. 

Dove  stdte  bra  ?  Sto  in  cittd. 

Prestdtemi  un  dbllaro.  Non  ne  ho  in  ddsso. 

Che  si  dice  delfii  Capitdno'^  Che  egli  e  mortoper  la  p atria. 

Perche,  lavdra  il  Signor  B.  ?  Lavdra  pei  sudi  scoldri. 

Volete  andcire  in  vece'  mia  ?  Si,  andrd  in  vece  vostra. 

Qhe  chiedete  (demand)  voi  ?  Chiedo  dandro  in  jJrestito. 

E  criidele  quest^  animdle  ?  Per  natura  non  e  crudele. 

Ha  egli  comprdto  una  carrozza  ?  No,  e  troppo  avdro  per  far  queS' 

ta  spesa. 


PREPOSITIONS.  135 


CHAPTER    XXI. 

THE     PREPOSITIONS. 

C  Continued.) 

MNEMONIC  EXERCISE. 

Cid  sia  ditto  era  di  not,  That  may  be  said  among  us. 

Egli  verra  era  dieci  giorni,  He  will  arrive  in  ten  days. 

Che  c'  e  qui  dentro  ?  What  is  that  within  ? 

Facciamocegli  incontro  Let  us  go  to  meet  him. 

lo  le  sedeva  acc^nto,  I  was  seated  beside  her. 

J^gli  stette  alquanto  sopra  di  se,^  He  stopped  some  time  to  reflect. 

Noe  ndcque  prima  del  diluvlo,  Noali  was  born  before  the  flood, 

e  mori  dopo  il  diluvio,  and  died  after  it. 

Venni  questa  mcme  a  cdsa  vds-  This  morning  I  went  to  your 

tra,  house. 

N^on  v'  e  cosa  nudva  S(5tto  il  There  is  nothing  new  under  the 

sole,  sun. 

J^lla  ha  trovdto  un  marito  se-  She  has  fovind  a  husband  ac- 

CONDO  il  suo  genio,  cording  to  her  taste. 

Neir  inverno  si  sta  bene  ACCiN-  In  winter,  one  is  well  near  the 

TO  alfuoco.  fireside. 

Bisdgna  vivere  second  o  le  leggi  We  ought  to  live  according  to 

della  natura,  the  laws  of  Nature. 

Non  vo  mdi  a  letto  prkia  deW  I  never  go  to  bed  before  day- 

dlha,  •  break. 

//  sdnno  in  stjl  mattmo  e  salute-  Sleep  in  the  morning  is  healthy. 

^  vole, 

Animo^  Signorma  ;  vien  tdrdi :  Come,  miss  ;  it  is  late  :  get  up. 


levatevi  su, 


Che  avete  fcdto  infino  ad  dra'^     What  have  you  doi.u  up  to  the 

present  moment  ? 

Ciascuno  e  padrdne  in  cdsa  sua,     Every  one  is  master  in  his  own 

house. 

Qudndo  avrb  cisA  mia,  invitero  When  I  have  a  house  of  my 
tiuti  i  miei  amici,  own,    I   will    invito    all   my 

friends 


13(3  ITALIAN    GRAMJVIAH. 

UPON. 

I.  "Upon"  is  often  translated  by  in;  as, — 

1  will  wait  for  you  on  the  piazza,  Vi  aspettero  in  piazza. 

Ungrateful  people  write  benefits  GV  ingrdti  scrivono  i  henefizi 

upon  the  sand,  nell'  arena. 

To   have  no   money  upon    (or  Non  avere  dandri  IN  dosso. 

about)  you, 

BETWEEN,    AMONiG. 

II.  These  prepositions  are  rendered  by  fra  or  tra,  and 
occasionally  by  infra  or  intra;  as,  — 

Among  the  people,  Fra  (or  tra)  il  popolo. 

Among  men,  Fra  (or  tra)  gli  uomini. 

Between  these  two  cities  you  Fra  queste  diie  cittd  s'  incon- 

find  three  villages,  trano  tre  paesetti. 

III.  Fra  (or  tra)  soiftetimes  expresses  "  in  "  or  "  with- 
in ;  "  as,  — 

I  said  within  myself,  To  diceva  fra  me. 

God  has  created  the  world  in  Dio  ha  credto  il  mondo  in  sei 

six  days,  giorni. 

He   will     arrive    within     two  Bgli  arrivera  fra  due  mesi. 

months. 

To  live  in  pleasure,  in  pain,  Vivere  fra  i  piaceri,  fra  le 

pene. 

UNTIL. 

IV.  "Until"  is  translated  hj  fino  or  sino;  also  insino 
or  infino. 

TO  or  AT. 

V.  "  To  "  or  "  at "  is  rendered  by  da  when  it  signifies 
going  to  some  one  ;  as,  — 

I  go  to  my  banker's,  lo  vo  dal  mio  hanchiere. 

You  go  to  your  uncle's,  Voi  anddte  da  vostro  zio. 

He  will  send  to  the  baker,  Mandera  dal  forndio. 

Yesterday  I  went  to  your  house  leri  venni  da  vol  per  pregdrvi 

to  beg  you  to  call  upon  me         di  passdre  dggi  da  me. 

to-day. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


137 


A  cdsa  di,  a  cdsa  rnia,  a  cdsa  vdstra^  etc.,  are  also 
used  wlien  we  refer  more  particularly  to  the  house ;  as, 
Vdi  anddte  a  cdsa  di  vdsti^o  zio  ;  ieri  venni  a  cdsa  v6s- 
tra  per  pregdrvi  di  passdre  oggi  a  cdsa  mia. 

VI.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  use  of  va- 
rious prepositions  :  — 


At  the  fireside, 
After  dinner, 
After  me, 
About  the  table. 
Against  me,  him, 
Against  the  enemy, 
About  3,000  francs. 
About  three  feet  high. 
Along  the  river, 


AcCjCnto  al  fiioco. 

Dopo  iwdnzo. 

Dopo  di  me. 

Intorno  alia  tdvola. 

CoNTRO  di  me,  di  lui. 

CoNTRO  al  nemico. 

Circa  a  tre  mila  frdnchi. 

A.Uo  circa,  or  alto  intorno  a  trepiedi. 

LuNGO  il  jiume. 


According  to  youropinion,    Secondo,  or  giusta  il  vostro  parere. 


Before  all,  before  me, 

Before  speaking, 

Before  daylight, 

Beyond  the  sea. 

Behind  the  door, 

Before  the  chimney, 

Beyond  the  Rhine, 

Beside  that. 

Far  from  the  truth. 

In  the  middle  of  the  street, 

In  fiice  of,  or  opposite  to. 

Near  the  bed, 

Near  the  sea, 

Outside, 

Out  of  the  house, 

Towards  me,  thee, 

Towards  spring, 

Without  money. 

Within  him. 


Prima  di  tiitto,  prima  di  me. 

Prima  di,  or  av^nti  di  pdrlare. 

InnInzi  V  dlha,  or  prima  deW  alba. 

Al  di  lX  dal  mare. 

DiETRO  la  porta,  or  cdla  porta. 

Dav^nti  ^7,  or  al  cammino. 

Di  la  dal  Reno. 

Oltre  a  cib. 

LuNGi,  or  lontXno  dal  vera. 

In  mezzo  alia,  or  della  strdda. 

DiRIMPETTO  A,  or  IN   FiOCIA  A. 

AccXnto,  or  viciNO  al  Utto. 

ViciNO,  or  PRESSO  al  or  del  mare. 

Per  di  fuori,  or  al  di  fuori. 

FuoRi  or  FUORA  di  cdsa. 

Verso  or  inverso  a  me,  a  te,  or  di  me. 

Verso  primavera. 

Senza  dandro. 

Dentro,  or  PER  di  dentro,  di  lui- 


VII.  When  the  above  prepositions  are  followed  by  a 
personal  pronoun,  the  pronoun  is  often  placed  before  the 
verb,  and  the  preposition  terminates  the  phrase  ;  as,  JSTon 
mi  comparite  pih  dindnzi^  appear  no  more  before  me. 

12* 


188  ITALIAN   GKAJMMAK. 


READING    LESSON. 
Tasso^s  last  Letter 

Che  dira  il  mio  Signor  Antonio,  quando  udira  la  mdrte  del 

will  say  will  hear 

sue  Tasso  ?  e  per  mio  avviso  non  tardera  molto  la  novella,  perclie 

will  not  delay 

io  mi  sento  al  fine  della  mia  vita,  non  ess^ndosi  potuto  trovar 
feel  being  able 

mai  rimedio  a  qu(^sta  mia  fastidiosa  indisposizione  sopravvenuta 

alle  molte  altre  mie  solite,  quasi  rapido  torr(^nte,  dal  quale  senza 

accustomed 

pot^re  aver  alciin  ritegno  vedo  chiarara^nte  ^sser  rapito.     Non  e 

defence  taken  away. 

tempo  che  io  parli  della  mia  ostinata  fortuna,  per  non  dire  dell 

speak 

ingratitudine  del  mondo,  la  quale  ha  pur  voluto  aver  la  vittoria 

di  condurmi  alia  sepoltura  mendico ;  quand'io  pensava,  che  quella 

gloria,  che,  mal  grade  di  chi  non  vuole,  avra  qu^sto  secolo  da  mi^i 

scritti,  non  fosse  per  lasciarmi  in  alcun  modo  s^nza  guiderdone. 

Mi  son  fatto  condurre  in  questo  Monastero  di  Sant'  Onofrio,  non 
to  conduct 

solo  perche  T  aria  e  lodata  da'  m^dici,  piu   che  d'  alcun'  dltra 

praised 

parte  di  Roma,  ma  quasi  per  cominciare  da  questo  luogo  emi- 
n^nte,  e  colla  conversazione  di  questi  div6ti  Padri,  la  mia  con- 
versazione in  Cielo.  Pregate  Iddio  per  me :  e  siate  sicuro  che 
siccome  vi  ho  amato,  ed  onorato  sempre  nella  presente  vita,  cosi 

faro  per  voi  nell'  altra  piu  v^ra,  cio  che  alia  non  f  inta,  ma  ve- 
wilf  do  feigned 

race  carita  s'  appartiene ;  ed  alia  Divina  grazia  raccomando  v6i 

^  belongs 

e  me  stesso.     Di  Roma  in  Sant'  Onofrio. 


PREPOSITIONS.  139 

EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  The  tears  of  an  inheritor  are  smiles  concealed  under  a  mask. 

2.  Distrust  those  wlio  love  you  very  much  on  short  acquaint- 
ance. 

3.  Private  thieves  spend  their  lives  in  chains  and  prisons; 
public  thieves,  in  the  midst  of  purple  and  gold. 

4.  With  many  people,  love  of  country  is  none  other  than  to 
kill  and  despoil  other  men. 

0.  There  are  some  country  towns  in  France  where  societies 
meet  at  six  o'clock  in  the  evening,  in  winter.  They  seat  them- 
selves around  the  fireplace ;  and,  after  the  usual  compliments, 
each  one  goes  to  sleep.  At  eight  o'clock,  one  of  them  sneezes. 
Then,  there  is  a  general  movement  of  surprise.  "  What  is  it  ?  " 
— "  Nothing."  One  of  the  company  takes  out  his  watch,  and 
announces  that  it  is  eight  o'clock.  "  Ah  !  it  is  not  late  :  we  can 
amuse  ourselves  a  little  longer."  They  sleep  again  till  nine 
o'clock,  when  the  mistress  of  the  house  gives  a  signal.  They 
rise  ;  they  congratulate  each  other  at  having  been  much  amused  ^ 
and  each  one  goes  to  his  own  home. 

6.  "  Wit  and  judgment,"  says  Pope,  "  are  always  in  opposition 
to  each  other,  as  the  husband  and  wife ;  although  made  to  live 
together,  and  mutually  help  each  other." 

7.  A  preacher  displayed  all  his  eloquence  in  a  panegyric  upon 
St.  Antonio ;  and,  among  the  figures  of  rhetoric  with  which  he 
embellished  his  style,  there  was  one  wherein  he  said,  "  Among 
what  inhabitants  of  heaven  shall  I  place  our  saint  ?     Shall  it  be 

I  with  angels  or  archangels  ?  shall  it  be  with  cherubims  or  sera- 
phims  ?  No  !  Shall  T  place  him  among  patriarchs,  among  prophets  ? 

]  No !  Neither  shall  I  place  him  among  apostles,  nor  doctors,  nor 
evangelists."  One  of  his  auditors,  who  was  tired  of  this  long 
declamation,  said  to  him,  in  rising,  "  My  father,  if  you  do  not 

''  know  where  to  place  your  saint,  you  can  put  him  here  ;  because 
I  am  going  away." 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Concealed,  nascosti. 

2.  Distrust,  dijidotevi ;  love  very  much,  vogliono  gran  bene. 

3.  Private, /jm-a^o  ;    spend  (pass), />«5S(:m<9. 

4.  Is   none    other  than,  non  e  dltro  che ;   kill,  ammazzdre ; 
despoil,  spoglidre. 

5.  There  are,  vi  sono ;  societies  meet,  siva  in  conversazione; 
at  six  o'clock,  p.m.,  dlle  sei  pomerididne ;  usual,  sbliti ;  there  is 


140  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

a  general  movement,  i7is6rge  un  mbto  generale  ;  takes  out,  cava ; 
it  is  not  late,  7i07i  e  tm^di ;  to  amuse,  trattenere ;  they  sleep 
again,  ognuno  torna  ad  adormentarsi ;  they  rise  tiitti  si  dlzaiio  ; 
they  congratulate  each  other,  si  rallegrano. 

6.  Although  made,  henche  fdtti;  to  live  together,  tenersi  coni- 
pagma  ;  to  help,  ajutdre. 

7.  Displayed,  sfoggidva ;  to  embellish,  orndre ;  to  place,  col- 
locdre  ;  neither,  neppure  ;  declamation,  jilastrocca  ;  if  you  do  not 
know,  se  non  sap'ete ;  you  can  put  him  here, ponetelo  pur  qui ; 
because,  che  ;  I  am  going  away,  io  vddo  via. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 

Che  cdsa  avete  ?  una  hottiglia  di  vino. 

Dite  da  vero,  o  dite  da  hicrla  ?        Da  vero  ;  non  ischerzo. 

Dov'  e  il  mio  pdne  (roll)  imhu-     Non  so,  vddo  nella  cucina  per 

tirrdto  (buttered)  ?  cerccirlo. 

Che   fecero  (do)   quel  povermi     Chiesero  aiuto  col pidnto  e  cblle 

colle  Idgrime  in  sugli  dcchi?  strida. 

Fra  qiidli  dei  celesti  abitatori  fa     Amico  mio,  non   e  importdnte 

collocdto  Sanf  Antonio  f  di  saperlo. 

Ho  io  lascidto  (left)  il  mio  has-     Voi  lo  lascidste  da  mia  sorella. 

tone  qui  ? 
Chi  e  felice  ?  Voi  ed  io,  per  che  non  ci  mdnca 

^  (fails)  un  amico  sincero. 
Qual   e  qu'elV  animdle,   che   va     E-  V  ubmo,  che  da  bambino  va 
(goes)  con  qucdtro  piedi,  poi         carponi   con   le    mdni  e  cdi 
con  diie,  ed  in  ultimo  con  tre  ?        piedi,  e  cbsi  con  qucittro  pie- 

di,  pbi  ritto  su  due  piedi,  ed 
in  ■  vecchidja  con  tre,  perche 
va  col  bastone. 


VEEBS.  141 


CHj^PTER  XXII. 

THE  VERBS   ESSERE  AM)  AV^RE. 

MNEMONIC  EXERCISE. 

Non  c'  e  tempo  da  jyerdere^  There  is  no  time  to  lose. 

Non  c'  e  came  sen£  ossa,  There  is  no  meat  without  bones. 

Avete  voi  m proiifo  la  jnoneta?  Have  you  tlie  money  ready? 

No7i  hisogna  aversela  a  male^  You  must  not  take  it  ill. 

lo  v'  ho  cara  qudnto  sorella,  I  cherish  you  as  a  sister. 

Perche  avete  cosi  fretta'^  Why  are  you  in  such  a  hurry? 

Comprdte  dellaUgna; perchein  Buy  more  wood;    for  there  is 

cantina  non  ce  rC  e  piu,  no  more  in  the  cellar. 

Se   non  avete   die  fare,   venite  If  you  have  nothing  to  do,  come 

meco,  with  me. 

Tocca  a   voi  a  coprire  i  miei  It  is  for   you    to    conceal    my 

difettiy  faults. 

Ora  toccherd   a  me   a    raccon-  Now  it  is  my  turn  to  adjust  the 

ciarla^  affair. 

Non  ho  piacere  di  viaggidre  di  I  feel  no  pleasure  travelling  by 

notte,'  night. 

Con  chi  V  avete'?     lo  non  V ho  With  whom  are  you  displeased? 

con  nessuno,  I  am  displeased  with  no  one. 

Vi  sdno  gran  rihdldi  in  questo  There  are  great  villains  in  this 

moiido,  world. 

Non  si  pud  dare  un  cuore  piu  There  cannot  be  a  more  per- 

perfido,  fidious  heart. 

Ahhidmo  a  discdrrere  a  qudttro  We    must    speak    of    that   to- 

occhi^  gether  tete-a-tete. 

Ho   incontrdto    due    giorni   fa  Two  days  ago  I  met  your  cous- 

vostro  cugino,  in. 

Theni  del  mbndo  sono  in  mdno  The  riches  of  tliis  woi'ld  are  in 

delJa  sdrtcj  the  hands  of  fate. 

A  voi  tocca  il  dir  prima  il  vds-  It  is  for  you  to  give  your  ad- 

tro  jyarere,^  vice  first. 

Egli  non  e  in  grddo  di  fur  questa  He  is  not  in  a  position  to  iu- 

spesa^  cur  this  expense. 


142  ITALIAN    GRAl>OIAR. 


ESSERE,    TO    BE. 

I.  This  verb  is  very  much  used  in  Italian,  by  its  form-" 
ing  the  passive,  which  predominates  in  that  language.  1st, 
It  is  its  own  auxiliary  in  compound  tenses  ;  as,  /o  s6no 
stdto,  I  have  been:  2d,  The  past  participle ^.s^a^o  agrees 
in  gender  and  number  with  its  subject ;  as,  Ella  e  STATA, 
she  has  been ;  ndi  sidmo  stati,  we  have  been. 

II.  When  essere  is  used  impersonally,  it  agrees  with 
the  subject  which  follows  it ;  as,  JE  un  6ra,  it  is  one 
o'clock ;  s6no  le  {mdici,  it  is  eleven  o'clock. 

III.  The  verb  ve7iire  is  very  often  used  for  essere, 

IV.  The  Italian  expression  essere  per,  or  stdre  per, 
signifies  "to  be  upon  the  point  of;"  as, /o  sdiio,  or  io 
sto  per  ammoglidrmi,  I  am  about  to  marry. 

V.  In  the  phrases  "there  is,"  "there  are,"  "there  was," 
etc.,  the  Italians  use  ci  and  vi  (there),  abridged  from 
qmnci  and  quivi.  Oi  denotes  proximity,  and  vi  a  more 
distant  place  ;    as,  — 

There  is,  was,  etc.,  V  e,  or  c'  e  ;  v'  era,  or  c'  era,  etc. 

There    are    many   people    who  Vi   sono   mold   die  vorrebhero 

wish  to  learn  much  without  impardre  molto  senza  studi- 

study,  are. 

VI.  Ci  and  vi  are  chano-ed  into  ce  and  ve  when  it  is 
necessary  to  use  the  indefinite  pronoun  7ie  (of  it,  of  them), 

J^on  ce  n^  e  piii,  or  7ion  ve  n^  epm,    There  are  no  more  of  them. 
Non  ce  n'  e  piii,  etc.,  There  is  no  more  of  it. 

VII.  To  express  "it  is  ten  years  since,"  etc.,  the  Ital- 
ians say,  ^^Dieci  dnni  fa,  or  dieci  dnni  s6no ;  and  for 
"it  is  an  hour,"  "  a  week,"  "a  month,"  "two  centuries," 
etc.,  they  say  ui-C  6ra  fa,  una  settimdna  fa,  un  tnese  fa, 
due  secoli  fa.  "There  is,"  "there  are,"  is  occasionally 
rendered  by  vi  ha,  or  lidvvi. 


VERBS. 


143 


VIII.  Avere  (to  have), 
active  verbs  as  in  English, 
lowing  phrases  :  — 

To  be  judicious, 
To  be  ready, 
To  be  thirsty, 


To  be  hunsfr 


Jj 


To  be  hot, 

To  be  satisfied  with. 

To  cherish  some  one, 

To  remember. 

To  be  in  a  hurry, 

To  be  cold. 

To  be  ill, 

To  be  ashamed. 

To  take  a  thing  ill, 

To  be  afraid, 

To  be  charmed. 

To  be  in  possession  of. 

To  have  knowledge  of, 


besides  being  the  auxiliary  of 
is  used  idiomatically  in  the  fol- 

Ave?'  giudtzio  ;  aver  cervello. 

Avere  in  pronto  ;  avere  a  mdno. 

Aver  sete. 

Aver  fame. 

Aver  cdldo. 

Aver  cdro  di. 

Aver  cdro  una, 

Avere  a  mmte. 

Aver  fretta. 

Aver  freddo. 

Aver  mdle. 

Aver  vergdgna. 

Aver  per  7ndle. 

Aver  paura. 

Aver  gusto  ;  aver  piacere, 

Avere  in  memo. 

Avere  conoscenza. 


READING-   LESSON. 

Seduta  un  po'  in  disparte,  coUa  fronte  bassa  e  le  mani  intrecci^- 
te  sulle  ginocchia,  stava  piangendo  cheta,  la  povera  Laudomia. 
Le  sue  guance  in  questi  mesi  s'  eran  affilate  e  ftitte  pallide,  che 
quel  viver  sempre  in  agitazione,  quel  dover  ad  ogni  ora  temere 
le  giungesse  1'  avviso  che  Lamberto  era  rimasto  ucciso,  esauriva 
in  lei  a  poco  a  poco  la  vita.  Ed  ora,  dopo  questa  rotta,  della 
quale  s'  ignoravano  i  particolari,  ed  in  cui  si  sapeva  pero  quasi 
3,000  persone  aver  perduta  la  vita,  rimaner  col  tremendo  dubbio 
s'  egli  fosse  vivo  o  morto  !  Non  aver  mode  di  uscirne,  non  sapere 
a  chi  domandarne  !  "  Oh  !  pensiamo,"  diceva,  "  s'  egli  non  si 
sara  gettato  nel  maggior  pericolo !  s'  ^gli  avra  voluto  staccarsi 
dal  fianco  del  Ferruccio  !  Oime  !  Oime  !  ch'  io  non  abbia  pro- 
prio  a  vederlo  raai  pi  u  ?  " 

Le  cognate,  le  nipoti  e  gli  altri  tutti  di  quelle  tre  case  che 
forma vano  una  sola  famiglia,  la  veneriivano  piu  che  sorella  e  zia, 
e  la  chiamavano  V  Ameda,  nome  antico,  venuto  dal  latino  Amita 
I'che  viiol  dir  zia),  e  tuttora  vivo  nel  contado  della  Brianza. 


144  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 


1.  There  was  in  Athens  a  very  opulent  miser,  who  troubled 
himself  very  little  about  being  the  talk  of  his  fellow-citizens. 
"  People  may  hiss  me,"  said  he  ;  "  but  I  am  not  angry  :  for,  when 
I  am  at  home,  I  rejoice  at  the  sight  of  my  crowns." 

2.  Whei-ever  there  are  tears  to  be  dried  up,  you  w^ill  be  sure 
to  meet  a  woman.' 

3.  There  are  men  on  whom  is  imprinted  the  whole  character 
of  their  nation. 

4.  Unhappily,  it  is  but  too  true,  that  no  nation  can  flourish 
without  vices.  If  it  were  not  for  ambition  or  cupidity,  there 
would  not  be  a  single  man  who  w^ould  wish  to  take  charge  of  the 
government  of  others.  Take  vanity  away  from  women,  and 
the  fine  manufactures  of  silk  and  lace,  which  furnish  labor  (cause 
to  live)  to  so  many  thousands  of  artisans,  would  cease  (would  be 
no  more).  If  there  were  no  thieves,  lock-makers  would  die  of 
huno-er.     Thus  sood  and  evil  are  always  found  together. 

5.  Always  live  as  if  you  were  old,  in  order  that  you  may 
never  repent  having  been  young. 

6.  There  are  men  who  know  neither  how  to  speak  nor  to  be 
silent. 

7.  An  old  woman  asked  Mahomet  what  it  was  necessary  to  do 
so  as  to  go  to  Paradise.  "  My  dear,"  said  he,  "  Paradise  is  not 
for  old  women."  The  good  woman  began  to  weep  ;  and  the 
prophet  said,  to  console  her,  "  There  are  no  old  w^omen  there, 
because  they  all  become  young  again." 

8.  Dolabella  said  to  Cicero,  "  Do  you  know  that  I  am  only 
thirty  years  old ? "  —  "I  ought  to  know  it,"  said  Cicero ;  "  because 
you  have  been  telling  it  to  me  these  ten  years." 

9.  If  princes  were  obliged  to  combat  hand  to  hand,  there  would 
be  no  more  wars. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Atene ;  who  troubled  himself  very  little,  che  si  ddva  poca 
briga;  hiss,  fa  le  fschidte  ;  I  rejoice,  nn  r allegro. 

2.  Wherever,  dovunque  ;  to  dry,  asciugdre. 

3.  Imprinted,  i7npresso. 

4.  Unhappily,  etc.,  e  cosa  disgraziatamente  pur  vera ;  can 
flourish,  pud  esser  Jiorida  ;  if  it  were  not,  se  non  fosse  ;  would 
wish,  avesse  voglia  di ;  to  take  charge,  incaricarsi ;  take  away, 
togUete  via;  manufacture,  fdhhica ;  cause  to  live,  danno  da 
vwere  a  ;  would  die,  morirebbero. 


VERBS.  145 

5.  If  you  were,  se  foste  ;  may  never  repent,  ?^o^^  vi  ahhiute  a 
jientire  mdi. 

6.  To  be  silent,  stch^e  zitti, 

7.  Old  woman,  vecchia ;  asked,  domanddva ;  Maometto  ;  it 
was  necessary,  convenisse  ;  to  go,  per  anddre  ;  paradiso  ;  my 
dear,  c«rrt  7nia  ;  began  to  weep,  si  caccio  a  'pidngere  ;  to  console, 
racconsoh'ire  ;  become  young,  ritornercmno  giovani. 

8.  DolabeUa  ;  Cicerone  ;  only,  solamente  ;  I  ought  to  know  it, 
lo  debho  sapere  ;  because,  perche  ;  telling,  anddte  dicendo. 

9.  Were  obliged  to,  dovessero ;  combat,  pugndre ;  hand  to 
hand,  cdrpo  a  cdrpo, 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Dov^  e  la  Luisa  ?  £J  rimdsta  a  casa. 

Perche  ?  Perche  e  un  poco  infredddtcu 

Louisa,  che  hai  ?  La  mamma  stu  (is)  mdle, 

Che  cosa  ha%  Ha  una  grossa  febhre, 

Bevete  (drink).     E  dolce  abhas-     Si,  e  buonissimo. 

tdjiza  ? 
Che  cos'  e  questa  nostra  vita!         Un  sogno,  sognidmo  in  pace. 
Qadnti  dnni  sono  che  siete  fuori     Sono  ormdi  qumdici  dnni? 

di  pdtria  ? 
Figliuoli  miei,  avete  appetite  ?       No,  cdra  mddre. 
Volete  (will  you)  bere  (di'ink)  ?     Prenderemo  (we  will  take)  una 

limondta. 
E  morta  la  Signora  ?  Si,  la  Signora  Maria  e  mdrta. 

E  la  Giulietta  f  E  desoldta.     II  suo  vivo  dolore 

mi  Idcera  (pierces)  V  dnimo. 
Avete  studidto  la  vdstra  lezidne     Mi  son  levcito   questa  mattina 

di  musical     X'  avete  prati-  dlle  sette,  e  nan  mi  sono  jjiii 

cdta  perbene  ?  mbssa    (moved)    dot  piano- 

forte. 
Potrei  (could  I)  vederla  ?  Si;   se  volete  entrdre  un   mo- 

mento,  ma  non  le  dite  (say) 


nulla. 


13 


146  ITALIAN    GKAJVIIVIAE. 


CHAPTER    XXm. 

THE   VEEBS   AND   THEIR   SYNTAX. 
MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

Gome  ve  la  passdte,  carina  ? '  How  goes  it  with  you,  dear  ? 

lo  sto  ascoltdndo:  non  mimuovo,  I  listen  :  I  do  not  move. 

Amico^  gettdte  via  la  fatica,  Friend,  you  lose  your  labor. 

Venite  pure  avdnti,  You  can  likewise  enter. 

CUie  cosa  dite  ?  What  do  you  say  ? 

Tirdte  via,  gocciolone  !  Go  away,  great  fool ! 

lo  stdva  scriv'endo  una  lettera,  I  was  writins:  a  letter. 

Gomportdtevi  bene,  e  sarete  ben  Behave    well,    and  everybody 

voluto  da  tutti,  will  love  you. 

Da  alcuni  jilbsoji  si  crede  che  Some  philosophers  believe  that 

la  vita  sta  un  sdgno,  life  is  a  dream. 

Vi  sbno  taliini  che  vdnno  sempre  There  are  people  who  are  al- 

macchindndo  delle  novita^  ways  thinking  of  something 

new. 

Ghe  cbsa  impedisce  aW  uomo  di  What  prevents  man  from  being 

esser  felice  ?  l^appy  ? 

Piove^  tuona,  e   balma,  in  un  It  rains,  thunders,  and  lightens, 

punto,  nil  at  once. 

Mentre  state  pranzdndo  scrivero  While  you  dine,  I  will  write  to 

alio  zio,  my  uncle. 

Ghe   anddte  facendo   cost   per  What  are  you  doing  so  early  ? 

tempo  ? 

Non    parldr   mdi    senza    aver  Never  speak  without  reflection. 

^  pensdto, 

E  cosa  che  si  dice  da  alcuni,  There  are  some  persons  who 

speak  of  it. 

Mubve  piu  V  interesse  propria  One's  own  interest  is  always 
che  V  altrui,  jpore  touching  than  that  of 

others. 

Non  ho  goduto  un'  ora  di  bene,  I  have  never  enjoyed  a  mo- 
ment's happiness. 

Appena  mi  vide  tiro  via  subito^     He  no  sooner  saw  me  than  he 

ran  away. 


VERBS    AND    THElll    SYNTAX.  147 

The  verbs  in  the  infinitive  are  easily  recognized  in  Ital- 
ian by  their  terminations,  namely,  in  aee,  eee,  ire  ;  as, 
amdre*  to  love  ;  vedere,  to  see  ;  jinire^  to  finish.  Many 
verbs  have  two  terminations  for  the  infinitive  :  some  end  in 
ere  or  ire. 

In  Italian,  the  infinitive,  when  preceded  by  the  definite 
article,  has  the  nature  of  a  noun  ;  as,  ^  proibito  il  far 
male,  it  is  forbidden  to  do  evil. 

GENERAL   RULES. 

I.  The  word  via  (which  signifies  "  way,"  "  street "  )  is 
placed  after  certain  verbs  of  motion  ;  as,  — 

Levdr  via,  to  take  away. 

Portdr  via,  to  carry  away. 

A7iddr  via,  to  go  away,  etc. 

II.  The  passive  form  of  the  verb,  as  we  have  already 
stated,  is  much  used  in  Italian ;  particularly  in  didactic, 
poetic,  and  historic  styles.  The  active  form  becomes  pas- 
sive by  changing  the  construction  of  the  phrase :  the 
subject  becomes  the  regimen,  and  takes  the  preposition 
da :  the  verb  takes  the  addition  of  si,  which  is  a  sio-n  of 
the  passive  ;  or  it  is  conjugated  through  all  its  tenses  with 
the  verbs  essere  or  venire;  as,  Everybody  says,  si  dice 
da  Udti,  e  detto  da  iutti,  or  vien  detto  da  tidti ;  the 
people  fear  war,   la  giierra  e   temida  dal  ]j6j)oIo. 

III.  There  are  many  impersonal  verbs  |  in  Italian ; 
amono*  which  are  the  followinof :  — 


Alheggia,         the  clay  appears. 
RaggiSrna,       ,,^     „      ^    „ 
Annotta,  it  is  growing  dark. 


Pioviggina,  ^  it  drizzles:  it 
Ldmica,  >  rains  in  small 
Sjjruzzola,     )       drops. 


*  The  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation^  which  ends  in  ARE  —  amount  to  more  than  four 
thousand:  among  them,  only  about  tliirty  are  irregular. 

t  The  impersonal  verbs  may  be  divided  into  proper  and  improper.  The  proper  are 
those  which  have  only  the  third  person  singular  throughout  all  their  moods  and  tenses ; 
as,  Si  fa  osriiro,  it  grows  dark  ;  tempiJsta^  it  hails.  The  improper  arc  those  wliich  are  not 
impersonal  by  themselves,  but  only  occasionally  used  in  an  impersonal  siguilication  ;  as, 
Convicnf.  it  is  proper  ;  hisdgna,  it  must. 


148 


ITALIAN   GRAJVOIAR. 


Balena, 

it  lightens. 

Accdde, 

it  happens. 

Lampeggia, 

"      .  " 

Avvietie, 

5)                J) 

Piove^ 

it  rains. 

Interviene, 

?5                ?J 

N^evica, 

it  snows. 

Pare, 

it  appears. 

Tuona, 

it  thunders. 

Semhra, 

it  seems. 

Graudina, 

it  liails. 

Disdice, 

it  does  not  become. 

Gela, 

it  freezes. 

Bisogna, 

it  is  necessary. 

lY.  Impersonal  A'erbs  are  used  in  the  plural  when  the 
noun  which  follows  them  is  plural ;   as,  — 


Accddono  strdne  cose, 
Sono  le  set, 


Strange  things  happen. 
It  is  six  o'clock. 


V.  All  the  impersonal  verbs  are  conjugated  in  their 
compound  tenses  with  essere;  as,  tl  tondto,  e  pioviito. 

VI.  Many  of  these  verbs  are  conjugated  with  the  per- 
sonal pronouns  ;  as.  Mi  pare,  it  seems  to  me ;  mi  dis- 
place, I  am  sorry. 

Remaek. — In  most  languages,  many  verbs  are  used 
with  an  idiomatic  turn  very  different  from  their  proper 
signification. 

VII.  The  verbs  venire  and  volere,  for  instance,  do  not 
always  answer  to  the  English  verbs  "  to  come  "  and  "  to  be 
willing  :  "  but  the  former  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the 
verb  essere  (to  be)  ;  and  the  latter,  being  preceded  by 
the  particles  ci,  vi,  and  unipersonally  employed,  has  the 
same  meaning  as  the  verb  bisogndre  (must  or  to  be 
necessary)  ;   as,  — 

Mi  vihi  detto  cosi,  I  am  told  so. 

Gi  vuol  pazienza,  We  must  have  patience. 

VIII.  The  verb  dovere  is  expressed  in  English  by  the 
verb  '^'  to  owe "  when  it  means  to  be  a  debtor,  and  by 
the  verb  "  to  be  obliged "  when  it  signifies  duty  or  the 
necessity  of  doing  an  action.  It  is  also  used  instead  of 
the  verb  bisogndre,  in  the  signification  of  "must;"  as 
^'  gli  doveva  trecento  fiorini,  he  owed  him  three  hun- 
dred florins. 


VERBS  AND  THE[R  SYNTAX.  149 

IX.  The  English  verb  "  to  be,"  used  in  the  sense  of 
"to  be  one's  turn,"  "business,"  or  "duty,"  is  rendered  in 
Italian  by  the  verb  toccdre^  in  the  signification  of  "  to 
belong ;  "  as,  — 

Tocca  a  me  a  giuocdre,  It  is  for  me  to  play. 

Tocca  a  lui  a  leggere,  It  is  for  him  to  read. 

X.  The  verb  "  to  think,"  used  in  English  in  the  sense 
of  "to  believe  "i)r  "to  suppose,"  is  translated  into  Italian 
by  the  verb  credere;  and,  when  in  the  sense  of  "to  re- 
flect" or  "meditate,"  by  the  YQvh  pensdre. 

XL  The  verb  "to  know"  is  translated  by  the  verb 
sapere  when  intellectual  knowledge  is  meant,  and  by  the 
verb  condscere  when  personal  knowledge  derived  from 
the  evidence  of  one  of  our  senses  is  intended. 

XII.  The  pronouns  ?7^^,  ti,  ci,  ne,  etc.,  are  often  use^* 
as  expletives*  with  certain  verbs  ;  as,  ib  mi  son  pre sa  la 
lihertd  di  scrivervi,  1  have  taken  the  liberty  to  write  to 
you. 

XIII.  The  verbs  dovei^e,  potere^  sapere,  volere, 
sometimes  form  their  compound  tenses  with  essere  when 
followed  by  an  infinitive  ;  as,  io  non  son  potuto  venire. 

XIV.  The  verb  suondre,  or  sondre,  is  used  in  the  sense 
of  to  play  on  an  instrument;  as,  Sudna  il  violino,  suoyia 
il  c6rno  da  cdccia. 

XV.  The  verbs  avvertire  and  haddre  (to  take  care)  are 
followed  by  a  negation  ;  as,  Avvertite  or  haddte  di  non 
inganndrvi,  take  care  not  to  deceive  yourself. 

XVI.  The  verb  may  be  placed  before  or  after  the  sub- 
ject,  according  to  the  dominant  idea  of  either  verb   or 


*  Expletives  are  particles  which  give  strength  and  energy.     They  are  bene,  si  bdne, 
pure,  tutto,  mi,  ti,  poi,  altrimenti,  ci,  gid,  via,  vi,  mai,  cgli,  si,  bello,  non,  ne ;  as, — 

Il  vdstro  vest'ito  e  bcW  e  fcitto,  Your  suit  of  clothes  is  finished. 

Son  tiUto  stnnco,  I  am  quite  tired. 

Oie  tempo  fa,  rgli  ?  What  is  the  weather  ? 

ti^gli  (■  pill  ddtto  c/P  'w  non  crecleva,  Ue  is  more  learned  than  I  thought. 

13* 


150  ITALIAj^   geaimjmak. 

subject.       This    inversion    sometimes    gives    great    effect, 
particularly  to  poetry.     We  may  see  it  in  Tasso  :  — 

GilCE.  r  aha  Cartdgo;  appena  i  segni 
DeW  alte  sice  ruine  il  lido  serha, 
MuoiONO  le  citta ;  muoiono  i  regni,  etc. 

REMARKS. 

1.  The  verbs  ending  in  care  and  gare,  as  predicdre, 
Hpiegdre,  take  h  in  those  tenses  in  which  c  and  g  would 
precede  e  or  i,  so  as  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  the 
infinitive.      (See  conjugation  of  cercdre.^ 

2.  Students  should  be  careful  to  notice  the  difference 
between  the  imperfect  and  perfect-definite  tenses  of  Ital- 
ian ^verbs.  The  mipey^fect  expresses  an  action  not  accom- 
plished during  the  time  of  another  past  action,  or  the 
repetition  of  an  action,  and  may  be  known  by  its  making 
sense  with  the  auxiliary  was.  The  perfect-definite  ex- 
presses an  action  entirely  past;  as,  I  was  going  to  your 
sister  when  I  sato  you,  %o  me  ne  (imp.)  andava  da  v6s- 
tra  sorella^  qudndo  lo  vi  (perfect)  viDi ;  I  went  almost 
every  night  to  pay  a  visit  to  the  famous  Schiller,  io  an- 
dava qudsi  6gni  sera  a  far  visita  al  celehre  Schiller, 

•READING   LESSON. 

Era  intanto  comparsa  la  Caterina  con  qualche  cosarella  per 
cena*:  e  chi  non  avesse  saputo  che  la  casa  era  andata  a  sacco,  1' 
avrebbe  indovinato  vedendo  quell'  imbandigione,  che  tutta  con- 
feisteva  in  un'  iiisalata,  un  pezzo  di  cacio,  e  due  pan  neri,  che  1' 
lino  neppiir  era  intero.  La  povera  donna,  sciira  e  macilenta  in 
viso,  cogli  ocehi  sonfi  e  rossi,  apparecchiava  senza  parlare,  e 
metteva  ogni  tanto,  Mnghi  sospiri ;  e  dopo  quelle  prime  e  brevi 
j)ar61e,  nessuno  apri  piu  bocca,  e  rimaser  pensosi,  sedendo  su  una 
panca  che  era  tiitt'  in  giro  conf  itta  nel  muro :  e  questo  silenzio 
parea  tanto  piu  mesto,  che  nessuna  voce,  nessvino  strepito  s'  udiva 
neppure,  al  di  fuori,  benche  fossero  nel  cuor  della  terra,  pdco 
lontani  di  piazza.  II  canto  d'  un  gallo  o  F  abbaiar  d'  un  cane 
avrebber  almeno  dato  segno  di  cosa  viva  ;  ma  quel  desolate  borgo 
aveva-  aspetto  di  cimitero.  —  D'Azelio. 


VERBS  AND  THEIK  SYNTAX.  151 

t 

EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

The  Stranger  and  the  Guide  {seated  on  the  top  of  the  Coliseum). 

1.  S.  —  As  I  just  now  observed,  as  we  climbed  up  here,  the 
name  of  Rome  awakens  the  most  agreeable  sensations. 

2.  G.  —  It  is  because  you  have  read  so  much,  sir :  besides, 
you  know  Latin,  and  then  you  have  travelled  much. 

3.  S.  —  Two  years  of  travel  have  profited  me  much  more 
than  eight  years  of  Latin.  I  have  studied  nature :  I  have 
freed  myself  from  my  prejudices,  and  from  the  false  national  love 
which  makes  us  so  unjust  towards  our  fellow-creatures. 

4.  G.  —  What  think  you,  then,  of  Italy  ? 

5.  S.  —  Italy  has  conquered  the  world  by  her  arms  ;  she  has 
enlightened  it  by  her  sciences ;  civilized  us  by  her  fine  arts ; 
governed  by  her  genius ;  and,  far  from  succumbing  under  the 
redoubtable  blows  of  barbarians,  she  has  triumphed  over  them, 
forcing  them  to  lay  down  their  ensanguined  arms  at  her  feet. 

6.  G.  —  Very  true ;  and  you  cannot  mention  another  nation 
which  has  held  its  conquests  so  long  as  Italy. 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  We  climbed,  salivdmo  ;  awakens,  desta. 

2.  Read,  letto  ;  travelled,  viaggidto. 

3.  Profited,  giovdto  ;  studied,  studidto  ;  have  (am)  freed,  sono 
spoglidto  ;  fellow-creatures,  simile. 

4.  Think,  pensate. 

5.  Conquered,  conqidstato ;  enlightened,  illumindto ;  civilized, 
ingentilito  ;  governed,  governdto ;  far  from  succumbing,  non  che 
soggiacere  ;  triumphed,  trionfdto ;  foi'cing  (constraining  them), 
costringendoli  ;  ensanguined,  insanguindti. 

6.  You  cannot  mention  {Qxtei)^vossignoria  non  pud  citdre. 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Avke  cdmere    da   affiUdt^e    (to  Si,  Signore,  ne  ho  vdrie. 

let)? 

Vorrei  un  appartamento.  Con  tnohili  o  senza  mobili  ? 

Lo  vorrei  (should  like)  smohig-  Pensdte  di  trattenervi  (to  re- 

lidto.  main)  mdlto'^ 

Non  pill  che  r  inverno.  E  al  pcirtire'^ 

Al  partire  rivenderb  (I  will  sell  Non   ne    caverete  un  terzo  del 

again)  la  moMglia,  cdsto.                                  • 


152 


ITALIAN   GRA:MMAR. 


Allora  e  meglio  trovdre  una 
huona  padrona  ed  un  helV 
appartamento. 

Andidmo  a  vedere. 

Che  mohili  ha  ella  ? 

II  letfo  e  la  cosa  principalissi- 

ma.     - 
La  camera  risponde  sidla  strd- 

da'^ 
Desidera  vedere  urC  dltra  stdn- 

za'^ 

Che  si  dice  delV  ostinazione  ? 

Che  ci  vuole  in  tutte  le  cose  ? 

Qudndo  e  il  sole  piu  risplen- 

dente  ? 
Che  volete  amico  mio  f 

Che    hisogna  fare   per  godere 

budna  salute  ? 
Che  sta  facendo  quesf  udmo  ? 

Che  cdsa  e  pazzia  ? 


Vi  condurrb  io  ddlla  Signora 
Bidnca  ;  ella  e  persona  gen- 
tilissi7na  e  discrefa. 

La  situazidne  e  hellissima. 

Ha  mohili  di  7ndgano  (mahog- 
any), e  tapjpeti  di  lusso. 

Nonpotete  desiderdrne  un  migli- 
bre. 

No  Signdre,  da  nel  giardino. 

No,  credo  che  il  letto  sia  hudno. 

Non  si  trdtta  adesso  che  del 

prezzo. 
Si  dice  che  V  ostinazidne  e  peg- 

gibr  di  tutti  i  peccdti. 
In  tutte  le  cdse  ci  vuole  la  mo- 

derazidne. 
Ddpo  una  burrdsca  e  sempre 

piu  risplendente  il  sdle. 
Vdglio  pile  che  vdi  potete  dcir- 

mi. 
Sisdgna  vivere  parcamente. 

Sta  ragiondndo  per  passdre  il 

tempo. 
Lo  sperdr  sempve  nelV  avvenrre 

e  pazzia. 


THE    SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  153 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

THE  VERB:  THE  SUBJmTCTIVE  MOOD. 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

Gil  comandd  che  parldsse,  He  ordered  liim  to  speak. 

Dicbito  che  V  ora  sia  tarda,  I  fear  that  it  is  late. 

DiteglicH  egli  fdcciacbmevuole.  Tell  him  to  do  as  he  likes. 

Non  so  se  to  debha  dir  di  si  o  I  do  not  know  if  I   ought   to 

di  no,  say  yes  or  no. 

Qudnd^  dnche  to  lo  sapessi,  non  Even  if  I  knew  it,  I  would  not 

ve  lo  direi,  tell  you. 

Si  da  per  siciiro  che  la  pace  sia  We  are  assured  that  peace  is 

fdtta,  made. 

Bisogna    che    gli   scrividte    voi  It  is  necessary  that  you  write 

stesso,  to  him  yourself. 

JS  il  piu  bravo  uomo  cK  to  dbbia  He  is  the  most  honest  man  that 

mdi  co7iosciuto,  I  have  ever  known. 

Benche  sia  difficile,  bisogncLpero  Although    it    is    difficult,    we 

vincere  se  stesso,  must  conquer  ourselves. 

JEgli  lo  dice  perche  non  didte  a  He  says  it  that  you  may  not 

me  la  colpa,  blame  me. 

To  gli  dtssi  che  come  gli  piacesse  I  told  him  that  he  might  an- 

le  rispondesse,  swer  her  as  he  pleased. 

Pcire    cli  ella   si  fdccia   ognor  She    seems    to    be   continually 

pill  bella,  growing  handsomer. 

Gli  dtssi  che  facesse  come  vo-  1  told  him  to  do  as  he  pleased. 

lesse, 

Se  to  avessi  studidto,  sarei  ddtto,  If  I  had  studied,  I  should  be 

learned. 

Ptcd  essere  cli'  to  porta  domdni,  It  is  possible  that  I  may  leave 

to-morrow. 

Se  tu  sapessi  qudnto  to  fdmo  I  If  thou   knewest  how  much  I 

love  thee ! 

Venne  da  me  e  mi  domandb  chi  He  came  to  me,  and  asked  me 

fossi,  e  dove  anddssi,  who  I  was,  and  where  I  was 

going. 


154  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

THE    SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Every  proposition  is  either  positive  or  doubtful. 

I.  The  positive  indicates  that  the  thing  positively  exists  ; 
that  the  action  is  done  in  an  absolute  manner.  This  propo- 
sition is  expressed  by  the  indicative  mood  ;  as,  Jo  pdrlo, 
I  speak  ;  io  par^ldva,  I  was  speaking. 

II.  The  doubtful  proposition,  on  the  contrary,  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  subjunctive  mood,  and  serves  to  indicate 
the  possibility  or  doubt  of  a  thing  existing  :  it  shows  that 
the  existence  of  the  action  is  conditional  and  relative,  be- 
cause it  depends  on  an  antecedent  proposition,  expressed 
or  understood ;  as,  I  wish  to  write,  io  voglio  scrivere,  is 
positive,  and  in  the  indicative  mood ;  I  wish  that  you 
would  write,  io  vSglio  die  v6i  scrividte^  is  doubtful,  de- 
pending on  the  will  of  another,  and  therefore  put  in  the 
subjunctive. 

III.  The  verb  is  used  in  the  subjunctive  after  all  verbs 
that  signify  ashing,  entreating ,  suspecting ,  wondering, 
rejoicing ,  grudging,  supposing,  hoping,  imagining, 
conjecturing,  intimating;  after  all  verbs  expressive  of 
desire,  will,  command,  permission,  prohibition,  fear, 
belief;  after  all  verbs  implying  doubt,  ignorance,  uncer- 
tainty, or  future  action;  and  after  all  verbs  used  with  a 
negative  ;  as,  — 

Per  amor  di  te  ti  prego  (eke)     For  your  sake,  I  beseech  you 

te  ne  rimdnghi,  to  desist. 

Che  vuoi  tu  chU  lo  sdppia  ?  What    do    you    tliink   that   I 

know  ? 

TV.  Some  of  these  verbs,  however,  appear  sometimes 
to  be  used  indiscriminately,  either  in  the  indicative  or  in 
the  subjunctive  mood  :  but  it  is  not  so  in  fact ;  for,  when 
they  are  so  used,  each  mood  expresses  the  action  in  a 
diiferent  manner,  as  may  be  seen  in  tlie  following  exam- 
ples :  — 


THE    SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  155 

Voglio  sposare  una  donna  die  I  wish  to  marry  a  woman  whom 

mi  pi  dee,  I  Hke. 

Voglio  sposch'e  una  donna  die  I  wish  to  marry  a  woman  whom 

mi  pidccia,  I  may  hke. 

Vddo  cercdndo  uno  die  mi  vuol  I  am  seeking  one  who  is  fond 

bene,  of  me. 

Vddo  cercdndo  uno  die  mi  vo-  I  am  seeking  one  who  may  be 

glia  bene.  fond  of  me. 

In  which,  in  the  first  instance,  being  certain  of  the  exist- 
ence of  the  action  expressed,  we  use  the  indicative ;  and, 
in  the  second,  we  use  the  subjunctive,  because  the  existence 
of  the  action  is  not  certain,  but  doubted  or  desired. 

V.  After  semlyi'di'e,  jparere^  hisogndre,  or  any  other 
impersonal  verb,  the  subjunctive  is  always  used;  as, — 

Bisbgna  die  voi  jpartidte  domdni,  You  must  go  away  to-morrow. 

Mi  sembrdva  die  avesse  voglia  He  appeared  as  if  he  had  a 

di  ridere,  wish  to  laugh. 

Parevami  die  ella  fosse  piu  hi-  She    appeared    to    me   to   be 

dnca  die  la  neiie,  whiter  than  snow. 

VI.  The  verb  is  also  used  in  the  subjunctive  after  the 
relative  pronoun  che,  following  a  comparative  or  a  super- 
lative ;  as,  — 

Bella  quant''  dltra  donna   {che)  As  handsome  as  any  other  lady 
^  fosse  mdi  in  Firenze,  in  Florence  ever  was. 

E  la  miglibre  opera  che  sia  com-  It  is  the  best  work  which  ever 
pdrsa,  appeared. 

VII.  And  after  the  relative  quale,  not  used  in  an  inter- 
rogative manner ;  as,  — 

una  parte  qudle  volesse  ne  reg-     He  might  govern  such  a  part 
gerehhe,  as  he  should  wish. 

OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  DEPENDENT  VERBS  IN  A  COM- 
POUND SENTENCE. 

VIII.  T\'hcn,  in  a  compound  sentence,  the  principal 
verb  is  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  or  in  the  future, 
the  dependent  verb  must  be  put  in  the  irresent   of  the 


156  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 

subjunctive,  if  we  mean  to  imply  the  present  or  future 
time ;  and  in  the  hrfperfect  of  the  subjunctive,  if  we 
mean  to  imply  the  past ;  as,  —  ' 

Qredo  mi  portdsse  amore,  I  believe  that  he  loved  me. 

£)  credo  omdi  die  7n6nti  e  pidg-  I  believe,  that,  by  this  time, 
ge  sdppian  di  die  tempra  sia  mountains  and  plains  know 
la  mia  vita,  what  is  the  condition  of  my 

life. 

IX.  When  the  dependent  verb  expresses  an  action 
which  may  be  done  at  all  times,  it  may  be  put  either  in 
the  imperfect  or  the  prese?2^  of  the  subjunctive,  although 
the  principal  verb  be  in  the  perfect-indefinite  of  the  indica- 
tive ;  as,  — 

Iddio  ci  a  ddto  la  ragione  qffin-  God  gave  us  reason  in  order 
die  ci  distinguidmo,  OY  ci  dis-  that  we  might  distinguish 
tinguessimo,  ddgli  animdli,  ourselves  from  animals. 

X.  In  suppositive  or  conditional  phrases,  the  hnperfect 
of  the  indicative  in  English  —  had,  %uas,  or  %i^ere  —  is 
rendered  in  Italian  by  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive ; 
as,  — 

Se  io  avessi  qiiesti  dendri,  glieli  If  I  had  this  money,  I  would 

presterei  iiicontanente,  lend  it  to  you  immediately. 

Chi   starehhe  meglio  di  me,  se  Who  would  be  more  happy  than 

quei  dendri  fosser  miei  ?  I,  if  that  money  was  mine  ? 

Remark.  —  Some  conjunctions  require  the  subjunctive 
mood;  as,  Affinche,  in  order  that;  benche,  though; 
senza  che,  without ;  d!'ato  che,  suppose. 

READING    LESSON. 

E  cosa  rara  che  s'  incontri  un  giureconsulto  che  litighi,  un 
medico  che  prenda  medicina,  e  un  teologo  die  sia  buon  cristiano. 

Flechier  era  figlio  d'  un  droghiere.  DIcono  che  in  un  momento 
di  malavoglia,  un  vescovo  gh  rimproverasse  la  vilta  dei  suoi  na- 
tali,  e  che  Flechier  gli  rispondesse :  Monsignore,  v'  e  questa 
differenza  fra  vdi  e  me,  che  se  voi  foste  nato  nella  bottega  di  mlo 
padre  vi  sareste  ancora. 

Tre  giorni  dopo  la  morte  di  Caterina  di  Frc4ncia,  il  predica- 
tore  Lini^estre  cosi  dalF  alto  del  pergamo  la  raccomandava  agh 


THE    SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  157 

astanti :  "  La  Regina  mddre  e  mdrta,  la  quale,  vivendo,  fece 
molto  male,  e  per  me  credo  molto  piii  mjile  clie  bene.  In  quest' 
oggi  si  presenta  una  difficolta,  che  consiste  in  sapere  se  la  chiesa 
cattolica  deva  pregare  j^er  lei  che  visse  tanto  male,  e  cosi  spesso 
sostenne  la  eresia,  quantunque  si  dica  die  in  I'lltimo  sia  stata  con 
noi,  e  non  abbia  acconsentito  alia  morte  dei  nostri  prlncipi.  Su 
di  che  io  devo  dirvi,  che  se  volete  recitarle  un  pater  ed  ave  cosi 
a  casaccio,  fate  vdi ;  varra  per  qudllo  che  puo  valere  :  e  lo  rimet- 
to  alia  vostra  liberta." 

EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  As  a  countryman  was  one  day  walking  in  the  streets  of 
Paris,  he  passed  by  a  broker's  shop  ;  and,  not  seeing  any  thing  but 
a  man  occupied  in  writing,  he  was  anxious  to  know  what  busi- 
ness he  did.  He  entered,  and  asked  what  they  sold.  "  Asses' 
heads,"  answered  the  money-changer.  "  You  must  do  good  busi- 
ness," immediately  replied  the  countryman,  "  since  you  have  only 
your  own  left."  ^ 

2.  Semiramis  ordered  the  following  inscription  to  be  engraved 
upon  her  tomb :  "  Let  the  king  who  has  need  of  money  demol- 
ish this  tomb,  and  he  will  find  a  treasure."  Darius  caused  the 
tomb  to  be  opened :  instead  of  money,  he  found  this  other  in- 
scription :  "  If  thou  hadst  not  been  a  bad  man,  and  of  insatiable 
avarice,  thou  wouldst  not  have  disturbed  tlie  ashes  of  the  dead." 

3.  A  Turkish  ambassador  asked  Lore'nzo  de  Medecis  why  they 
did  not  see  as  many  fools  in  Florence  as  in  Cairo.  Lorenzo 
pointed  to  a  monastery,  and  said,  "  See  where  we  shut  them  up." 

4.  A  man  having  consulted  the  philosopher  Bias,  to  knov\^  if 
he  should  marry,  or  lead  a  life  of  celibacy,  he  answered,  "  The 
woman  you  marry  will  be  pretty  or  homely :  if  she  is  pretty,  you 
will  marry  a  Helen ;  if  she  is  homely,  you  will  marry  a  Fury : 
so  you  would  do  better  not  to  marry. 

VOCABULARY. 

L  As  a  countryman  was  walking  in,  girando  un  paesdno  per  ; 
was  anxious  to  know,  ebbe  voglia  di,  etc.;  did,  /"wcesse ;  entered, 
entro  ;  sold,  vendesse  ;  you  must  do,  etc.,  ne  abhidte  un  gran  con- 
sumo  ;  you  have  left,  rimdne. 

2.  Demolish  (make  to  demolish),  y«ma  demoJire ;  will  find, 
trovera. 

3.  Did  see,  vedessero  ;  pointed,  addito  ;  we  shut,  rincJiiudidmo. 

4.  Should  marry  (if  he  had  to  take  a  wife)  ;  will  marry,  mene-^ 
rete. 

14 


158  ITALIAN    GEAlVmAR. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 


Che  cosa  domando  egW^  Se  w  avevo  hen  studidto, 

Che  diceste  voi  ?  Non  so  s'  io  dehha  dir  di  si  o  di  no, 

Che  voUte  sapere  ?  Voglio  sapere  clii  ella  sia. 

Qudndo  ritornerete  ?  Pud  essere  ch'  io  ritorni  domdni, 

Chi  sarehhe  stdto  genei'oso  se  fos-  II  povero  die  si  mostra  riconos- 

se  ndto  ricco  ?  cente  di  un  benefizio. 

Che  disse  Maria  ?  Se  w  fossi  ricca^  so  hen  lo  quel 

che  avrei  a  fare. 
Ghe  cosa  e  rdra  ?  J^  cosa  vara  che  s'  incbntri  un 

medico  che  prenda  medicina. 
Perche  vi  maraviglidte  voi?         Perche   voi   avete   venduto  quel 

cavdllo. 
Eseioavessihisdgnodidandro?   Se   sajjeste  qudnt' to  v' dmo,  nC 

avreste  domanddto  di  prestdr- 

vene. 


THE    INFINITIVE,    GERUND,    ETC.  159 


^       CHAPTER  XXV. 

THE    INFINITIVE,    GEEUND,  PRESENT    AND    PAST    PAR- 
TICIPLES. 

MNEMONIC  EXERCISE. 

Spesso  la  veritd  sta  occidta,  Truth  is  often  concealed. 

Che  cosa  avete  sentito  dire  ?  What  have  you  heard  said  ? 

Ho  sempre  odidto  V  adidazione,  I  have  always  hated  flattery. 

II  fuoco  e  spcirso  in  tuttalana-  Fire  is  spread  throughout  all 

tura^  nature. 

Bisogna  anddre  cduto  nel  par-  It  is  necessary  to  be  careful  in 

Idre,  speaking. 

Giunto    alia   porta,   la    frdvai  "When  I  arrived  at  the  door,  I 

chiusa,  found  it  shut. 

/  Toscdni  sono   acutissimi  nel  The  Tuscans  are  very  sharp  at 

motteggidre,  raillery. 

Al  primo  vederla  la  sorpresa  mi  Surprise  betrayed  me  when  I 

ha  tradito,  first  saw  her. 

Lo  sperdre  nelV  avvenire  e  paz-  It  is  foolish  to  place  one's  hopes 

zia,  on  the  future. 

La  folia  crescente  shoccdva  da  The  sweUing  crowd  poured  in 

ogni  parte,  from  all  parts. 

II  farldr  poco,  il  fare  assdi,  e  7  To  speak   little,  to    do   much, 

non   lauddre   se   stesso,  sono  and  not  to  praise  one's  self, 

virtii  rare,  are  rare  virtues. 

Guarddti    dal    vantdre   le  cose  Abstain  from  praising  what  be- 

tiie,  longs  to  thee. 

Una  hurla  per  essere  detta  fiiori  An  untimely  joke  may  become 

di  tempo  pub    diventdre   un  an  offence. 

offesa, 

Si  'pud  dire  quella  essere  vera  It  may  be  said,  that  true  art  is 

arte  che  non  appdrc  essere  arte,  that  which  does  not  appear 

to  be  so. 

Non  il  comincidre,  ma  il  perse-  It  is  not  the  commencing,  but 

verdre,  e  degno  di  lode,  the  persevering,  which  mer- 
its praise. 


](iO  ITALIAN    GKAMIVIAR. 

I.  The  infinitive  takes  the  place  of  the  third  person 
when  the  phrase  is  composed  of  a  principal  proposition 
and  a  subordinate  one,  connected  by  the  conjunction 
"that;"  as,  He  said  that  the  people  ought  not  to  be  de- 
ceived, egli  dice  il  'p6'polo  non  dover  essere  ingayi- 
Qidto;  it  is  said  that  time  is  the  father  of  all  truth,  dicono 
il  tem'po  ESSERE  padre  di  ogni  veritd.  This  style, 
though  very  elegant  and  much  used,  is  not  adapted  for 
common  conversation.  The  above  phrases  may  be  trans- 
lated word  for  word  ;  as,  tlgli  dice  che  il  j^dpolo  non  dee 
essere  inganndto, 

II.  The  pronouns  lui  and  lei  are  used  instead  of  egli 
and  ella  with  the  infinitive ;  as,  Sa  ogniino  ltd  essere 
stdto  maestro  di  hel  dire,  everybody  knows  that  he  was  a 
model  of  eloquence. 

III.  The  infinitive  is  used  for  the  second  person  singu- 
lar of  the  imperative  mood,  when  preceded  by  the  negative 
particle  710 ?i;  as, — 

Non  fare  strepito,  Do  not  make  a  noise. 

Non  ti  lusingdre,  Do  not  flatter  thyself. 

Cid  7ion  temere,  Do  not  fear  that. 

Non  mi  toccdre,  rihdldo  I  Do  not  touch  me,  rascal ! 

IV.  The  infinitive  may  be  used  as  a  noun  in  the  nomi- 
native case,  or  as  regimen  of  the  verb  ;  as,  — 

Mi  pidce  mblto  il  siw  fare,  His  manners  please  me  much. 

Nel  danzdre,  ella  non  ha  pari  In  dancing,  she   has  no  equal 

nel  mondo,  anywhere. 

Dal parldre  si  conosce  V  interno  We  know  the  hearts  of  men  by 

degli  uomini,  their  speech. 

V.  The  infinitive  is  used  as  follows  by  an  able  his- 
torian, in  describing  the  movements  of  a  camp  preparing 
for  an  assault :    Quindi  era  nel  cdinpo  un  anddre,*  un 


*  The  Italians  make  ft-equent  use  of  andare^  venire,  and  stare:  the  first  two  conyey  an 
idea  of  movement ;  the  latter,  that  of  rest. 


PARTICIPLES.  161 

venire,  un  urtdrsi  c?'  uSmini  e  di  cdrri  un  jorhir  cU 
drmi,  un  apparecchidre  di  mdcchine  murdli,  die  V  dere 
ne  era  a  7ii6lta  distdnza  introndto. 

VI.  Many  English  phrases  may  be  translated  literally  ; 


as, 


It  is  a  great  folly  to  live  poor,  E  gran  pazzia  il  viver  povero, 

in  order  to  die  rich,  ^  per  morir  ricco. 

It  is  a  virtue  to  say  much  in  JE  virtu  di  dir  molto  in  pdchi 

few  words,  detii. 

THE    PARTICIPLES. 

VII.  When  the  past  participle  *  is  joined  to  the  verb 
Sssere  (to  be),  or  to  such  verbs  as  venire,  restdre  or  rima- 
nere,  vedersi,  etc.,  used  in  the  signification  of  "to  be,"  it 
should  agree  with  the  subject  of  the  verb  with  which  it  is 
joined,  in  gender  and  number;  as, — 

JEssi  eran  di  frondi  di  quercia     They  were  garlanded  with  oak- 

ingJdrlanddti,  leaves. 

Ne  erano  le  fdlte  de*  Vitellidni     Nor  w^ere  the  faults  of  Vitel- 

punite,  ma  ben  pagdle,  lius'    troops    punished,    but 

well  paid. 

VIII.  But  when  the  past  participle  is  joined  to  the  verb 
avere  (to  have),  — if  this  verb  is  used,  instead  of  essere, 
in  the  sis^nification  of  "to  be,"  or  is  used  in  the  sionifica- 
tion  of  "to  hold,"  "to  possess,"  etc.,  as  an  active  and  not 
an  auxiliary  verb,  —  the  participle  agrees  with  the  object 
of  the  verb  in  gender  and  number ;  as,  — 

aS*  avea  (for  s'  era)  messe  alcune  He  had  put  some  small  stones 
petruzze  in  hocca,  in  his  mouth. 

Per  non  poterti  vedere  f  avresti  Thou  wouldst  have  torn  out 
(for  ti  saresti)  cavciti  gli  occhi,         thy  eyes,  not  to  see  thyself. 

Uno  che  fordta  avea  (for  tenea,  One  who  had  his  throat  pierced. 
possedea)  la  gdia, 

*  There  are  many  participles  ia  dto,  dta,  which  are  contracted  by  suppressing  the  at: 
these  are  — 

Accetto  —  a  for  accettdto  —  a,  accepted. 
Addtto  —  a  for  adattdto — a,  adapted. 
Cdrico — a  for  caricdto  — a,    loaded,  etc. 

14* 


162  ITALIAN    GRAMi\L4R. 

IX.  If  the  verb  avere^  to  which  the  past  participle  is 
joined,  is  used  as  an  auxiliary  verb  in  order  to  represent 
the  idea  of  past  time,  which  could  be  equally  expressed  by 
a  single  form  of  the  verb  to  which  the  participle  belongs, 
then  this  participle  remains  invariable  ;  as,  — 

Come  iq  avrb  dcito  (or  daro)  As  soon  as  I  shall  have  given 
loro  ogni  cosa,  every  thing  to  them. 

Cercdto  ho  (or  cercdi)  sempre  I  have  always  sought  a  solitary 
solitdria  via.,  way. 

Chi  queste  cose  ha  manifestato  "Who  has  told  these  things  to 
(or  manifesto)  al  ?naestro  ?  the  master  ? 

X.  When  the  past  participle  is  preceded  by  one  of  the 
pronouns  mi,  ti,  ci,  vi,  si,  il,  lo,  la,  li,  gli,  le,  ne,  che, 
aui,  qudle,  qudli,  qudnti,  as  objects  of  the  verb,  the 
participle  agrees  with  the  pronouns,  or  the  objects  repre- 
sented by  them,  in  gender  and  number  ;  as,  — 

JElla  medcsima  me  le  ha  dette  She  herself  has  told  them  to 

(or  mi  ha  dette  queste  cose),  me. 

II  liherto  diceva  averla  esso  uc-  The  freedman  said  that  he  had 

cisa  (or  avere  esso  uccisa  la         killed  her  himself. 

dojina), 

XI.  The  English  present  participle  may  be  expressed 
in  Italian,  — 

1.  By  the  gerund  of  the  corresponding  verb  ;  as,  — 

Veggendolo  consumdre  come  la  Seeing  him  waste  away  like 
neve  al  sole,  snow  in  the  sun. 

Dormendo  gli  pdrve  di  vedere  la  (Sleeping,  or)  whilst  he  was 
donna  sua,  asleep,  it  seemed  to  him  that 

he  saw  his  lady. 

2.  By  the  conjunction  che,  or  the  adverb  qudndo,  and 
a  tense  of  the  indicative  mood  ;  as,  — 

Poi  cK  ebhi  riposdto   il  cojpo     Having  rested  my  weary  body. 

lc(SSO, 

Qudnd'  ebbe  detto  cid,  riprese  il  Having  said  this,  he  took  up 
teschio  misero  c6'  denti,  once    more    that    miserable 

skull  with  his  teeth. 


PARTICIPLES.  163 

3.  By  a  preposition  and  the  verb  in  the  infinitive  ;  as, — 

Consiuno  quella  mattina  in  cer-  He  spent  that  morning  in  look- 
ccirli,  ing  after  them. 

Credo  die  le  snore  sien  tutte  a  I  beheve  that  the  nuns  are  all 
dormire^  (sleeping  or^  asleep. 

XII.  When  the  English  present  participle  has  before  it 
a  preposition,  such  as  "of,"  "from,"  "on,"  "in,"  etc.,  it  is 
always  rendered  in  Italian  by  the  corresponding  verb  in 
the  infinitive  with  a  preposition. 

XIII.  If  the  participle  is  preceded  by  the  prepositions 
"of,"  "from,"  "with,"  they  are  expressed  in  Italian^by  the 
preposition  di^  attended  by  the  infinitive;  as,  l^hhi  il 
piacere  di  vederlo,  I  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing  him. 

Xiy.  The  preposition  "  on,"  before  the  participle,  may 
be  expressed  by  the  prepositions  di  or  in;  as,  - — 

Si  vdnta  d^  aver  la  loro   cono-    He  values  himself  on  being  ac- 

scenza,  quainted  with  them. 

Nel  partire  gli  sovvenne  di  lei.       On  his  leaving,  he  recollected 

her. 

The  preposition  "  in  "  is  relidered  by  a  or  in;  as,  — 

Avea  nel  quetdr  popolo  autorita     In  appeasing  the  people,  he  had 

ed  arte,  both  authority  and  art. 

Che  a  far  cid  volesse  aitdrlo,         That  he  would  assist  him   in 

doing  that. 

XV.  The  prepositions  "for,"  "without,"  "before," 
"after,"  etc.,  are  literally  translated. 

XVI.  If  the  participle  is  preceded  by  the  preposition 
"  by,"  this  preposition  is  generally  omitted  in  Italian,  and 
the  participle  rendered  by  the  gerund  of  the  correspond- 
ing verb ;  as,  — 

Gli  scoldri  impdrano  le  regole  Scholars  learn  the  rules  of  a 
di  una  lingua  studiundole^  language  by  studying  them» 


164  ITALIAN    GKAJNIMAR. 

XVII.  But  if  we  wish  to  express  the  preposition,  then 
the  verb  must  be  put  in  the  infinitive,  and  "by"  rendered 
by  con;  as,  — 

II  divino  Giulio  rintuzzb  la  se-  The  divine  JuHus  checked  the 
dizione  del  suo  esercito  col  dir  sedition  of  his  army  by  only 
solo,  "  Ah,  Quiriti  1 "  saying,  "  Ah,  Romans ! " 

READING   LESSON. 

Dio  mi  creo  per  aniare  ;  io  mi  ricordo  di  un  fanciiillo  sensitive, 
vago  di  solitudine,  abbandonare  il  trambusto  deha  citta,  e  lontano 
nei  campi  voharsi  indietro  a  contemphirla,  come  I'Alghieri  des- 
crive  il  naufrago  che  uscito  fiiori  dal  pelago  alia  riva,  si  volgc  all' 
acqua  perigliosa,  e  guata ;  egli  si  avvolgeva  pei  boschi,  udiva  la 
voce  arcana  che  par  che  mandi  la  natura  al  siio  Creatore,  ascol- 
tava  commosso  1'  armonia  degli  uccelli,  ed  invidiava  la  voce  loro 
per  cantare  anch'  egli  un  inno  di  gloria,  e  le  ali  per  accostarsi  al 
firmamento,  perche  gli  avevano  detto  il  Padre  del  creato  abitfire 
nei  cieli :  quanto  tesoro  di  affetto  era  nell'  anima  di  quel  fan- 
ciullo  !  Appena  la  campana  della  sera  indicava  1'  ora  dei  morti, 
prosternato  davanti  alia  immagine  di  Gesu  Cristo  non  senza 
lacrime  la  supplicava  per  le  anime  dei  suoi  defiinti  .  .  .  per  tutti 
quelli  che  purgandosi  aspettano  di  sollevarsi  alle  gioie  divine:  egli 
aveva  una  parola  di  conforto  per  qualunque  sconsohito.  Ah! 
quel  fanciiillo  fui  io.  —  GuerrXzzi. 

EXERCISE    FOR   TRANSLATION. 

1.  The  ancients  pretended  that  the  greatest  happiness  was  not 
to  be  born ;  and  the  next,  to  die  young. 

2.  The  Epicureans  denied  the  existence  of  the  soul,  and  rec- 
ognized only  physical  principles :  they  said  the  gods  did  not  en- 
ter into  worldly  things. 

8.  The  philosopher  Cleante  earned  his  living  by  drawing 
water  during  the  night,  so  that  he  might  study  by  day  (to  attend 
to  study). 

4.  Apelles  painted  a  bunch  of  grapes  so  natural,  that  several 
birds,  seeing  it,  came  to  peck  at  it. 

5.  At  Rome,  a  father  emancipated  his  son  by  giving  him  a  box 
on  the  ear. 

6.  In  Paris,  various  academies  are  seen  aiming  at  very  differ- 
ent ends.    There  is  the  Academy  of  Music,  which  excites  (moves) 


PARTICIPLES.  165 

the  passions ;  and  the  School  of  Philosophy,  to  quiet  them :  the 
Fencing  Academy,  which  teaches  how  to  kill  men  ;  and  the  Medi- 
cal Academy,  to  preserve  life. 

7.  The  painter  Caracci,  having  been  despoiled  by  certain 
thieves,  knew^  so  well  hoAv  to  delineate  their  physiognomy,  and 
paint  their  faces,  that  they  were  discovered  and  arrested, 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  Pretended,  pretendevano ;  to  be  born,  ndscere ;  to  die, 
mo7^ire. 

2.  To  deny,  negdre ;  recognized,  riconohhero ;  they  said,  dice' 
vaiio. 

3.  Earned,  guadagnava. 

4.  Painted,  dipinse ;  came,  vennero. 

5.  To  emancipate,  emancipare  ;  box  on  the  ear,  schidffo. 

6.  Are  seen,  vedonsi ;  moves,  muove  ;  to  quiet,  acchetdre  ;  to 
teach,  insegndre  ;  to  kill,  cwijnazzdre. 

7.  To  despoil,  spoglidre  ;  to  designate,  disegndre  ;  discovered, 
scoperti, 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Che  negd7'ono  gli  epicurei  ?  X'  esistenza  deW  dnima. 

Che  riconohhero  essi  ?  Soltdnio  i  prmcipj  fisici. 

Che  dicevano  ?  Dicevano  gli  dei  non  entrdre 

nelle  cose  di  questo  mbndo. 

Di  chi  era  Bellini  r^iaestro  ?  Di  Tizidno. 

Che  fece  il  pittdre  Bellmi  per  JEgli  dipinse  la  decollazidne  di 
Maonietto  secondo  ?  San  Giovdnni  Battista. 

Ne  fu  coniento  il  sidtdno  ?  Loddndo  la  pittura,  avverti  V 

artista  d'  un  errore. 

Come  giiadagndva  la  vita  il  Col  cavcir  dcqua  in  tempo  di 
jilbsofo  Clednte  ?  notte  per  attendei^e  dllo  studio 

di  gidrno. 

A  chi  somigliano  gli  udmini  in  A  un  miserdhile  prmcipe  do- 
generate  ?  mindnte  sidle  cdste  delta  Gui- 

nea. 

Perche  ?  Perche,  diceva  ad  alcuni  Fran- 

cesi :  "  Si  parla  mblto  di  me 
in  Frdncia  ?  " 

Che  fretendevano  gli  antichi  ?       Pretetidevano,  la  prima  felicita 

essere  il  non  ndscere,  la,  se- 
cdnda,  il  morir  presto. 


166  ITALIAN   GEAMMAR. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

THE  VERBS  AND  ARE,  DARE,   FARE,  AND  STARE* 

MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 

Mi  rincresce  di  ddrvi  disturbo,  I  am  soriy  to  disturb  you. 

Fece  vista  di  non  intendere,  He  pretended  not  to  hear. 

Venite  a  stare  con  noi,  Come  to  live  with  us. 

Gome  state  c?'  appetito  ?  How  is  your  appetite  ? 

A  che  bra  siete  sblito  far  colazio-  At  what  hour  do  you  generally 

ne  ?  breakfast  ? 

jcJ  un  ragdzzo  che  non  puo  star  He  is  a  child  who  cannot  keep 

fermo,  still. 

Sidmo  cosi  stdnche  che  non  pos-  We  are  so  tired  that  we  can  no 

sidmo  piii  stare  in  piedi,  longer  stand. 

Ditegli  cK  egli  fdccia  come  vuo-  Tell  him  that  he  may  do  as  he 

Ze,  likes. 

II  gusto  degli  ubmini  va  sogget-  The  taste  of  men  is  liable  to 

to  a  mblte  vicende,  many  changes. 

JSgli  non  pose  gran  fcitto  cura  He  did  not  \my  much  attention 

a  quello  ch'  w  dtssi,  to  what  I  said. 

To  scelsi  una  moglie  secbndo  il  I  took  a  wife  after   my  own 

cubr  mio^  heart. 

Non  fate  capitdle  della  sua  pa-  Do  not  depend  upon  his  word. 

Da  ndi  si  da  in  tdvola  dlle  cm-    We  dine  at  five  at  our  house. 

qnCy 
Vi  darb  contezza  del  suo  stdto,       I  will  inform  you  of  his  situa* 

tion. 
To  r  inddco  qiidnto  so  e  pbsso,  a     I  will  induce  him,  as  much  as  I 
stare  allegro  e  a  fdrsi  dniino,         can,   to    drive    away  melan- 
choly, and  take  courage. 


*  Andare,  diirr,  stare,  are  the  only  irregular  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation.  In  some 
of  their  compoundf5,  they  become  regular;  asria7iddre,  trasandctre,  etc.,  Avhich  are  varied 
like  amare.  FJre  is  a  "contraction  of  faccre  (now  obsolete),  of  which  it  retains  many 
forms.  It  is  considered  by  some  grammarians  as  belonging  to  the  second  conjugation,  and 
is  irregular  in  its  compounds. 


VERBS. 


167 


ITALIANISMS  WITH  AND  ARE  (TO   GO). 


kjuesta  cosa  non  va  fdtta, 

Anddr  dietro  ad  uno, 

Andai'e  a  voto,  in  vdno, 

Anddre  alia  ventura, 

Anddre  in  collera, 

Andch-  sicuj'o, 

Lascidmo  anddre  questo, 

A  Idtigo  anddre, 

Anddre  altera, 

To  so  quel  che  va  detto, 

II  sole  va  sotto, 

Anddre  bene, 

Anddrne  la  vita, 

II  merito  va  congiunto  colla  mo- 

destia, 
Le   ddnne    vdnno    trattdte    con 

gentilezza. 


This  thing  ought  not  to  be  done. 

To  follow  some  one. 

Not  to  succeed. 

To  go  at  random. 

To  get  angry. 

To  be  sure. 

Do  not  speak  of  that. 

In  the  long-run. 

To  be  proud. 

I  know  what  I  must  say. 

The  sun  sets. 

To  succeed. 

To  have  one's  life  at  stake. 

Merit  is  accompanied  by  mod- 
esty. 

Women  ought  to  be  treated 
with  courtesy. 


WITH  DARE  (TO   GIVE). 


Dare  a  cdmhio, 
Ddre  cojnpiniento, 
Dar  da  dormire, 
Dar  da  ridere, 
Ddre  de'  cdlci, 
Dar  fede, 
Dar  luogo, 
Dar  le  vele  a^  venti, 
Dar  il  huon  dnno, 
Ddre  il  motto, 
Dar  la  mdno, 
Avere  a  ddre, 
Ddrsi  budn  tempo, 
Ddrsi  V  acqiia  ai  piedi, 
Ddrsi  a  gdinhe, 
Ddrsi  pejisiere, 
Dar  che  dire, 
Dar  giu, 

Ddre  una  voce  ad  uno, 
Ddre  in  tdvola, 
Ddre  voce. 


To  put  out  money  at  interest. 

To  finish. 

To  lodge. 

To  give  cause  for  laughter. 

To  kick. 

To  believe. 

To  give  an  opportunity. 

To  set  sail. 

To  wish  a  merry  new-year. 

To  give  the  word. 

To  marry,  to  shake  hands. 

To  be  in  debt. 

To  live  a  merry  life. 

To  praise  one's  self. 

To  run  away. 

To  care  for. 

To  give  occasion  to  talk. 

To  subside,  to  decline. 

To  call  some  one. 

To  serve  the  dinner. 

To  spread  a  report. 


168 


ITALIAN    GRAjVIMAR. 


WITH  FARE  (TO  DO), 


Fate  che  venga  da  me. 
Fare  le  carte, 
Questo  non  fa  per  me, 
Aver  molto  a  fare, 
Non  ne  ho  a  fare, 
Fatevi  a  me, 
Far  si  alia  finestra, 
Tre  me  si  fa, 
Una  settimdna  fa, 
Al  far  del  giorno, 
Far  hello, 
Non  fa  forza. 
Far  certo, 
Fatevi  indietro, 
Far  capo  ad  una, 
Far  del  grdnde. 
Far  stare  uno. 
Fare  una  predica, 
Far  vita  stretta, 
Far  sua  vbglia, 

Che  vi  fa  egli  che  venga  o  non 
venga  9 


Bid  him  come  to  ma. 
To  deal  at  cards. 
This  will  not  do  for  me. 
To  be  very  busy. 
I  have  no  need  of  it. 
Come  near  me. 
To  look  out  of  the  window. 
Three  months  ago. 
A  week  ago. 
At  the  break  of  day. 
To  set  off. 
It  is  no  matter. 
To  assure. 
Go  back. 

To  address  some  one. 
To  be  self-important. 
To  restrain  some  one. 
To  admonish. 
To  live  niggardly. 
To  do  as  one  pleases. 
What  is  it  to  you  if  he  cornea 
or  not? 


WITH  STARE  (TO  BE). 


Sto  per  partire. 

Qui  sta  il  punto, 

State  qudnto  vi  pidce, 

Dove  state  di  cdsa  ? 

H  tutto  sta,  s'  egli  sia  hudno  a  no, 

La  cdsa  sta  come  vi  dico, 

Stare  a  pane  ed  dcqua, 

Gome  state  vpi  ? 

Egli  sta  bene, 

Star  cheto, 

Stdndo  alia  finestra  lo  vidi  pas- 

sdre, 
Sta  come  una  stdtua  di  mdrmo 

senza  parldre, 
Ditemi  in  che  inddo  sta  che  egli 

sia  vostro  fratelW^ 


I  am  on  the  point  of  leaving. 

This  is  the  question. 

Stay  as  long  as  you  please. 

Where  do  you  live  ? 

The  point  is,  if  it  be  good  or  not. 

The  thing  is  as  I  tell  you. 

To  live  upon  bread  and  water. 

How  do  you  do  ? 

He  is  well. 

To  be  quiet. 

Whilst  I  was  at  the  window,  I 

saw  him  going  by. 
He  stands  like  a  marble  statue, 

without  speaking. 
Tell  me,  how  comes  it  that  he 

is  your  brother  ? 


VEKBS.  169 

READING    LESSON. 
II  fuoco,  V  dcqua  e  V  ondre. 

II  fuoco,  r  acqua  e  1'  onore,  fecero  un  tempo  comunella  insieme. 
II  fuoco  non  puo  mai  stare  in  un  luogo,  e  1'  acqua  anche  sempre 
si  muove  ;  onde  tratti  dalla  loro  inclinazione,  indussero  1'  ondre  a 
far  viaggio  in  compagnia.  Prima  dunque  di  partirsi,  tutti  e  tre 
dissero  cbe  bisognava  darsi  fra  loro  un  segno  da  potersi  ritrovare, 
se  mai  si  fdssero  scostati  e  smarriti  1'  uno  dalF  altro.  DIsse  ii 
fuoco  :  "  E  se  mi  avvenlsse  mai  questo  caso  che  io  mi  segre- 
gassi  da  voi,  ponete  ben  mente  cola  dove  voi  vedete  fumo ; 
questo  e  il  mio  segnale  e  quivi  mi  troverete  certamente."  —  "  E 
me,'-'  disse  1'  acqua,"  se  voi  non  mi  vedete,  non  mi  cercate  cola 
dove  vedrete  secciira  o  spaccature  di  terra,  ma  dove  vedrete 
salci,  ontani,  canmicce  o  erba  molto  alta  e  verde ;  andate  costa  in 
traccia  di  me,  e  quivi  saro  io."  —  "  Quanto  a  me,"  disse  1'  onore, 
"  spalancate  ben  gli  occlii,  e  ficcatemegli  bene  addosso  e  tenetemi 
saldo,  perche  se  la  mala  ventiira  ini  guida  fuori  di  cammino, 
fliccbe  io  mi  perda  una  volta,  non  mi  trovereste  piu." 

EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  A  drop  of  water  complained  of  remaining  unknown  in  the 
ocean.  Moved  to  compassion,  a  genius  caused  an  oyster  to 
swallow  it.  It  became  the  most  beautiful  pearl  of  the  East,  and 
was  the  most  splendid  ornament  of  the  Great  Mogul's  throne. 

2.  Milton,  after  he  became  blind,  married,  for  his  third  wife,  a 
woman  who  was  very  beautiful,  but  of  a  furious  temper.  A 
friend  once  said  to  him,  tliat  his  wife  w\as  like  a  rose.  "I  can- 
not judge  so  by  its  color,"  he  replied.  "  but  I  do  by  the  thorns." 

3.  Who  would  believe  that  smoking  tobacco  was  in  fashion 
with  the  English  ladies  in  the  sixteenth  century  ?  Every  day, 
when  Queen  Elizabeth  rose,  there  were  (one  saw)  thirty  ladies 
seated  in  a  circle  around  her,  smoking  pi])es.  The  queen  set 
(gave)  them  the  example ;  but  one  day  she  broke  the  pipe,  say- 
ing, "  We  will  renounce  a  pleasure  that  evaporates  in  smoke." 

4.  A  doctor  was  translating  a  work.  They  came  to  tell  him 
that  his  wife  was  very  sick,  and  desired  to  speak  with  him.  "  1 
have  only  one  page  to  translate,"  said  he ;  ."  when  I  will  come  im- 
mediately." A  second  messenger  came,  and  informed  him  that 
she  was  dying.  "  Two  words  more,  and  I  have  done,"  said  the 
translator.  "  Go,  return  to  her."  A  moment  after,  they  came  to 
tell  him  that  she  was  dead.  "  I  am  very  sorry  for  it,"  said  he ; 
"  she  was  a  good  woman : "  and  he  continued  his  work. 

15 


170  ITALIAN   GKAMINIAE. 


VOCABULARY. 


1.  Complained,  si  dolse  ;  moved,  mdsso  ;  causeil,  fece  che  ; 
became,  divenne. 

2.  Become,  divenuto  ;  furious,  furibbndo  ;  can,  'pbsso  ;  judge, 
giudicdre. 

3.  Would  believe,  crederehhe ;  one  saw,  si  vedevano ;  seated, 
seduto  ;  smoking  pipes,  pipdvano  ;  gave,  dciva  ;  broke,  spezzo  ; 
we  will  renounce,  rinunzieremo ;  evaporates,  svapora. 

4.  Was  translating,  stdva  traducendo ;  they  came,  vennero ; 
will  come,  verro  ;  came,  venne  ;  she  was  dying,  era  dgli  estremi  ; 
go,  anddte  ;  return,  torndte ;  I  am  sorry,  me  ne  rincresce ;  con- 
tinued, continuo. 


C  ON  VERS  AZIONE. 


A  chi  sono  cdri  i  ndmi  del  Sdr-     Son    tdnto    cdri    alV  Eurdpa 

pi,  del  Paruta  e  delV  AlgardUi?         qudnto  alV  Italia. 
Che  hisdgna  fare  per  V  infortu-     Bisdgna  compidngerlo  e  soccor- 

nio  ?  rerlo  se  si  pud. 

Per  reggere  aW  ingiustizia  degli     Un  gran  cordggio. 

udmini  che  e  necessdrio  ? 
Chi  fu  Aldo  Manuzio  ?  H  primo  celehre  stampatore  che 

sia  stdto  in  Europa. 
E  il  Zeno  ed  il  Goldoni  f  Sdno  i  pcidri  del  drdmma   e 

della  commedia  iialidna. 
Chi  fu  Bemho  ?  II  primo  legislatdre  della  lin- 

gua italidna. 
Cdme  si  chiamdva  anticamenfe     Partenope,  nome  di  una  Sirena 
Ndpoli  ?  che  credesi  dhhia  fonddia  la 


citta. 


Che  si  dice  della  potenza  Vene-     Ella  ha  arricchita  V  Italia  e  V 
zidna?  ha   difesa  gran    tempo    ddi 

Bdrbari, 


ADVEEBS. 


171 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 


ADVERBS. 


aiNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


Vi  raccontero  la  cosa  per  minuto, 
Osservate  minutamente  ognicosa, 
Per  ora  non  posso  dirvi  di  piu, 
Dove  andate  cost  per  tempo  ? 
Dite  da  vero,  oppure  hurlcite  ? 
Dove  si  va  cost  in  fretta  ? 
Cattiva  erha  ndsce  dappertuttOy 
II  tempo  pdssa  presto, 
Mi  preme  assdi  di  parldrgli, 
Venke  qiianto  piii  presto  potete, 
l^  ing  anil  ate  di  gran  lung  a* 
Questa  non  e  gia  colpa  vostra, 
Gli  uomini  imitano  molto,  e  ri- 

jlettono  poco, 
Chi  ohhedisce  alia  cieca,  spesso 

si  pente, 
Cki  sempre  ride,  spesso  ingdn- 

na, 
Le  sue  cose  vdnno  di  bene  in 

meglio, 
lo  non  vi  voglio  neppur  guar- 

ddre  1 
Gli  ho  reso  cbnto  appimtino  di 

ogni  cosa, 
Di  rdro  il  medico  piglia  medi- 
cine^ 
Non  hisbgna  mdi  parldre  a  ca- 
se, 
Me  ne  ricorderb  per  un  pezzo, 

Donde  venite  ?  Dove  andate  ? 


I  will  relate  the  affair  minutely. 

Observe  every  thing  minutely. 

I  cannot  tell  you  any  more  now. 

Where  do  you  go  so  early  ? 

Are  you  in  earnest,  or  joking? 

Where  are  you  going  so  quickly  ? 

Weeds  grow  everywhere. 

Time  passes  quickly. 

I  much  need  to  speak  to  him. 

Come  as  soon  as  possible. 

You  are  greatly  mistaken. 

This  is  not  your  fault. 

Men  imitate  much,  and  reflect 
little. 

He  who  obeys  blindly,  often 
repents. 

He  who  always  laughs,  often 
deceives. 

His  affairs  become  better  and 
better. 

I  do  not  wish  even  to  look  at 
you! 

I  have  rendered  an  exact  ac- 
count of  every  thing. 

The  physician  rarely  takes 
medicine. 

We  should  never  speak  at  ran- 
dom. 

I  shall  remember  it  for  a  long 
time. 

Whence  do  you  come  ?    Where 


are  you  going 


•?. 


172 


ITALIAN    GRAilMAR. 


ADVERBS. 

I.  The  greater  portion  of  the  Italian  adverbs  are  formed 
of  a  feminine  adjective  and  the  noun  onente,  manner  (from 
the  Latin  me7is)  ;  as,  .Dotta,  learned  ;  dotta-mente,  learn- 
edly ;  sdvia^  wise  ;  savia-mente,  wisely  ;  dolce,  sweet ; 
dolce-mente,  sweetly. 

If  the  adjective  ends  in  le  or  re,  the  final  e  is  dropped^ 
for  the  sake  of  euphony,  in  the  formation  of  the  adverb  : 
as,  Fedele,  faithful;  fedel-mente,  faithfully;  maggidre, 
greater ;  niaggior-mente,  greatly. 

II.  These  adverbs  have  their  comparatives  and  super- 
latives formed  from  the  comparatives  and  superlatives  of 
the  adjectives  ;  as,  Piil  sincera,  more  sincere  ;  ^9Z2>  sincer- 
amente,  more  sincerely ;  'nieno  felice,  less  happy ;  nieno 
felicemente,  less  happily;  j^'^'udentisshjia,  very  prudent; 
prudentissrniamente,  very  prudently. 

III.  Some  adverbs  are  mere  adjectives,  and  are  used 
also  in  their  comparatives  and  superlatives  ;  as,  Chidro 
{chiaramente) ,  clearly;  piu  chidro,  more  clearly;  schi- 
etta  (^schiettamente) ,  candidly;  ineno  schietta,  less 
candidly;  trlste  (tristameiite) ,  sadly;  tristissimo,  very 
sadly. 

IV.  The  followino-  are  the  other  adverbs  most  in  use 
in  Italian  :  — 


Adesso, 

now. 

m, 

yy 

Ora, 

}3 

Alldra, 

then. 

Ancdra, 

still. 

Tuttdraj 

}) 

Taldra, 

sometimes,    {ta 

Ogndra, 

always. 

Sempre, 

» 

Sove'nte, 

often,     {spesso, ) 

Tesfeso, 

just  now. 

TesU, 

J  J 

leri, 

yesferday. 

ADVERBS    OF    TIME. 

Avanti€n, 
l€r  V  dltro, 
U  altrieri, 
lermattina, 
lers&a, 

Oggidi, 

Stamdne, 

Stascra, 

Standtte, 

Domattina, 

Dimdni, 

Donidne, 


the  day  before  yester- 
the  other  day.       [day. 

}f  yt  jj 

yesterday  morning. 

last  evening. 

to-day. 

in  our  days. 

this  morning. 

this  evening. 

to-night. 

to-morrow  morning 

to-morrow. 


i\DVEKBS. 

1 

Posdimdni 

,  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

Non  mai. 

never. 

Posdomdne 

)     )>       »        }>              >y 

Omdi, 

now. 

Inndnzi, 

before. 

Oramdi, 

a 

Didnzi, 

» 

Oggimdi, 

j> 

Prima, 

yj 

Qudsi, 

almost. 

Didro, 

afterward. 

Circa, 

about. 

Ddpo, 

» 

Incirca, 

» 

Pdi, 

then,  smce,  afterward. 

Intdrno, 

>, 

Dipdi, 

»            >y                   )t 

Tdrdi, 

late. 

Dappdi, 

»           »                   »> 

Pertempo, 

soon. 

Pdscia, 

>>           j>                   » 

Presto, 

quick. 

Indi, 

then,  afterward. 

Addgio, 

slow. 

Quindi, 

))            >f 

Mentre, 

whilst. 

Apprdsso, 

}y                 f> 

Intdnto, 

in  the  mean  time. 

Infine, 

in  fine. 

Fraitdnto, 

)>    »       »        i* 

Da  cdpo. 

once  more. 

Trattdnto, 

"    )>       )i        »* 

Gia, 

ahready. 

Dacche, 

since. 

Di  gia. 

>> 

Finche, 

until. 

Mdi, 

never. 

Qudndo, 

when. 

Giammdi, 

>f 

Tuttavia, 

still. 

OF   PL 

ACE. 

Qui, 

here,  hither. 

Ovunque, 

wherever. 

Qua, 

j>         » 

Dovunque, 

>) 

Li, 

there,  thither. 

6gni  ddve. 

everywhere. 

La, 

yy              >y 

Altrdve, 

elsewhere. 

Costi, 

there  near  you. 

Altrdnde, 

>j 

Costa, 

>>        j>      j> 

Avdnti, 

before. 

Coh, 

there,  thither. 

Davdnli, 

jj 

Cola, 

jy                     yy 

Dietro, 

behind. 

Sh, 

up. 

Didietro, 

yy 

Gill, 

down. 

Indietro, 

back. 

Qnivi, 

there. 

Addidtro, 

j> 

GCi, 

>> 

Sdpra, 

upon,  above. 

Ivi, 

y9 

Sdtto, 

under,  below. 

Indi, 

thence. 

Abbdsso, 

below. 

Quinci, 

from  hence. 

JEntro, 

within. 

Quindi, 

from  thence. 

Dentro, 

>> 

Quassu, 

here  above. 

Fudri,     . 

without. 

Quaqqiu, 

here  below. 

Fudra, 

yy 

Insu, 

upward. 

Difudri, 

from  without. 

Ingiu, 

downward. 

Difu6ra, 

j>          »> 

Lassu, 

tliere  above. 

Alldto, 

aside. 

Laggiu, 

there  below. 

Accdnto, 

yy 

Colasm, 

there  above. 

Attdrno, 

around. 

Colaggiu, 

there  below. 

Dattdrno, 

j> 

Costa  ggiu. 

there  below  near  you. 

Rimpetto, 

opposite. 

Costinci, 

from  thence. 

Dirimpetto, 

jj 

6ve, 

where. 

Lungi, 

far. 

Ddae, 

yy 

Oltre, 

beyond. 

Ddnde, 

whence. 

173 


15* 


174 


ITALIAN   GKAMMAR. 


OP  ORDER. 


Prima, 
DipcH, 
Quindiy 
Infine, 
In  giro, 
Alia  fila, 


first, 
then. 

afterward, 
finally, 
by  turns. 
in  a  row. 


Assi^me, 
Insi€me, 
A  vic€nda, 
Al  tutto, 
Al  rov€scio, 
Sossdpra, 


together. 

>> 
by  turns, 
altogether, 
the  reverse, 
topsy-turvy. 


OF   QUANTITY. 


Piu, 

M^no, 

Mdnco, 

Assdi, 

Abbastdnza,      enough, 

A  suffici€nza, 


more, 
less. 

much. 


» 


Ni^nte, 

Non  giidri, 

Davantdggio, 

Alpiu, 

Ahn^no, 

Almdnco, 


nothing, 
not  much, 
more. 

at  the  most, 
at  least. 
»     » 


OF    QUALITY. 


B€ne, 
Mdle, 
App€na, 
Appdsta, 
A  gdra, 
A  cdso, 
A  tdrto, 


well. 

badly. 

hardly. 

purposely. 

emulously. 

by  chance. 

wrongly. 


Brancoldne, 

Inginocchidne, 

Carpdne, 

A  cavalcidne, 

Tentdne, 

Boccdne, 


crawlingly. 
on  one's  knees, 
upon  all  fours, 
astride  over, 
gropingly, 
with   one's   face 
downward. 


OF  AFFIRMATION. 


SI, 

Gih, 

Bene, 

Invdro, 

Davvdro, 

Da  dovdro, 

In  verita, 


yes. 

yes,  certainly. 

well. 

indeed,  truly,  in  truth. 


» 


» 


» 


Maisl, 
Si,  bdne, 
AffK 
Appunto, 
Volenti eri, 
Benvolentidri, 


yes,  indeed, 
yes,  truly, 
in  faith, 
just. 

willingly, 
very  willingly. 


Malvolentidri,     unwillingly. 


OF   NEGATION. 


No, 
Mai, 
Mainh, 
Cdrto  no, 
Nongia, 


no,  not. 
never, 
no,  indeed, 
certainly  not. 
not,  not  at  all. 


Nonmdi, 
Mica, 
Nonmica, 
Per  nulla. 


never. 

not. 

not  at  all. 

by  no  means. 


Nidnte  affdtto,    nothing  at  all. 


F<5rse, 
Forseche, 
Pub  dssere. 
Pub  ddrsi, 


perhaps, 
may  be. 


OF   DOUBT, 


Per  acciddnte,     perchance. 
Per  sdrte,  „ 

Per  avventura, 


y> 


AD\TflRBS. 


175 


OF    COMPARISON. 


SI,  BO,  thus. 
Cost,         „     „ 

Cdme,  as. 

Siccdme,  so,  as. 

Piu,  more. 

Meno,  less. 

Assdi,  much. 


Viappiu,  a  great  deal  more. 

Vieppiu,  „      „       „        „ 

Viainm€no,  a  great  deal  less. 

Viemm^no,  „      „       „        „ 

A  ginsa,  like. 
A  mddo,         „ 
Al  pari,  „ 


OF   INTERROGATION. 


Ove  9       where  1 
Ddve?     where'?  whither  1 
Ddmle  7    whence  ? 
Qudndo?  when  7 


Che? 
Cdme? 
Perche  ? 
Quanta  ? 


how  ? 
how? 
why"? 
how  much  ? 


OF  CHOICE. 


Anzi,       rather,  sooner. 
Prima, 


» 


Piuprdisto,    rather,  sooner. 
Piuitdsto,         „ 


I) 


OF   DEMONSTRATION. 


Ecco,       here  o?*  there  is ;  lo !  behold ! 
Eccoqui,  here  is,  here  are. 
Eccoqua,     „     „      „      „ 


there  is,  there  are. 


EccoTi, 
Eccola, 
Qudnd   ecco,  when,  lo  ! 


V.  A  list  of  the  adjectives  which  are  used  in  Italian  as 
adverbs  :  — 


Fdrte, 

Spesso, 

Sddo, 

Alto, 

Certo, 

Tnste, 

Ddlce, 

Cliidro, 

S'hie'tto, 

Piano, 

Tarda, 

Lenta, 

Presto, 

Prdnta, 

Tdsto, 

lldtto, 

Tdnta, 


very  much. 

often. 

fast,  hard. 

softly. 

certainly. 

sadly. 

sweetly. 

clearly. 

candidly. 

low,  softly. 

late. 

slowly. 

soon. 

readily. 

speedily. 

j> 
so  much. 


Rdra, 

rarely. 

Sdlo, 

only. 

Tut.to, 

aU. 

Pdco, 

little. 

Mdlta, 

much. 

Trdppo, 

too  much. 

Bella, 

handsomely. 

Budno, 

very  well. 

M€ylio, 

better. 

P^gyio, 

worse. 

Aperto, 

openly. 

Suhito, 

immediately 

Sicura, 

surely. 

Dim€ssa, 

lowly. 

Sammdssa, 

humbly. 

Victno, 

near. 

Lontdno, 

far. 

In  order  to  know  when  these  words  are  adjectives,  and 
when   adverbs,  it  is   sufficient  to   observe,  whether  the^ 


no 


ITALIAN    GRAMIVIAR. 


stand  by  themselves,  or  are  added  to  or  used  for  a  noun : 
for,  in  the  former  case,  they  are  always  adverbs;  and,  in 
the  latter,  adjectives. 

VI.  Besides  the  above  adverbs,  there  are  some  expres- 
sions called  adverbial  phrases;  chiefly  the  following  :  — ■ 


Di  siihito, 

li  bdtto, 

In  un  baleno, 

In  un  hatter  d'  dcchio, 

P6co  fa, 
Fra  pdco, 
Un  pezzo  fa, 
De/le  v6lte, 
AW  improvviso, 
AW  avvenire, 
A  minuto, 
Di  fresco, 
Di  budn  grdclo, 
Mio  malgrddo, 
Senza  meno, 
Qiidnto  pr(ma, 
A  bello  stiidio, 
A  bella  pdsta, 
A  meno  che, 
Da  per  tutto, 
Per  dgni  ddve. 
Ad  un  trdtto, 


suddenly, 
presently, 
in  an  instant, 
in  the  twinkling 

of  an  eye. 
a  little  while  ago. 
in  a  short  time, 
some  time  ago. 
at  times, 
miexpectedly. 
in  futm-e. 
in  detail, 
newly, 
willingly, 
against  my  will, 
positively, 
very  soon, 
designedly. 

miles  s. 
everywhere. 

at  once. 


Di  rddo, 

Di  rdro, 

Infdtti, 

Difdtti, 

Di  gran  lunga, 

A  lungo  anddre, 

A  pill  pote're, 

Di  India  vdglia, 
A  un  di  pre'sso, 
D'  alldra  in  qua, 
D'  dra  inndnzi, 
In  quel  me'ntre. 


seldom,  rarely. 

j>  » 

in  fact. 

jj    >> 

by  far. 

in  the  long-run, 

in  time, 
with  all  one's 

might, 
unwillingly, 
almost. 

since  that  time, 
henceforth, 
in   or   at    that 

time, 
exactly, 
point-blank. 


Di  punto  in  punto, 
Di  punto  in  bianco, 
Di  qudndo  in  qudndo,  now  and  then. 
Di  trdtto  in  trdtto,  ,,       „        „ 

Di  tdnto  in  tdnto,  „       „       „ 

11  jnu,  the  utmost. 

Per  lo  piu,  for  the  most  part, 

generally. 


READING   LESSON. 

La  P6vera  Cieca. 

E  brvina  1'  aria  —  per  le  contrade, 
A  fiocche  a  fiocche  la  neve  cade ; 
E  la  in  ginocchio  presso  la  chiesa, 
Geme  una  vecchia  donna  prostesa: 
6rba  degli  occhi,  la  poveretta 
Attende  il  pane,  che  a  lei  si  getta  . 
Fate  limosina,  pietosa  gente, 
Fate  limosina  alia  dolente  ! 


Y6i  non  sapete  die  quella  donna, 
Macero  il  viso,  lorda  la  g6nna, 
De'  suoi  concenti  coll'  armonia 
Di  cento  popoli  1'  dime  rapla  ; 


ADVERBS.  177 

Oh  quanta  invldia  ai  fortunati 
Che  d'  uii  sorrlso  rendea  beati ! 
Fate  limdsina,  pietosa  gente, 
Fate  limosina  alia  dolente ! 

Oh  quante  volte  fuor  de'  teatri 
L'  immensa  folia  degl'  idolatri 
Fra  mille  plaiisi  le  fea  codazzo 
Fine  alia  porta  del  siio  palazzo, 
E  riverente  stendea  il  ginocchio 
Perche  scendesse  dall'  aureo  cocchio  I 
Fate  limosina,  pietosa  gente, 
Fate  limosina  alia  dolente  ! 

Quante  dovizie  spandeva  intorno 
II  suo  magnifico  vasto  soggiorno ! 
Bronzi,  colonne,  vasi,  cristalli, 
Argento  ed  oro,  cocchi  e  cavalli  .  .  . 
Di  fiori  e  gemme  da  tiitte  bande, 
Sovra  i  suoi  passi  piovean  ghirlande  .  .  . 
Fate  limosina,  pietosa  gente, 
Fate  limosina  alia  dolente ! 

Ma  un  di  fra  1'  dnsie  d'  un  duolo  atroce 
Perde  la  vista,  perde  la  voce  — 
Ahi  sventurata !  or  per  le  strade 
Va  mendicando  1'  altriii  pietade, 
Ella  che  un  giorno  per  chi  gemea 
De'  suoi  tesori  1'  arche  schiudea ! 
Fate  limosina,  pietosa  gente, 
Fate  limosina  alia  dolente ! 

Ma  il  freddo  addoppia  —  gelida  e  sp^ssa 
La  n^ve  cdpre  la  genufldssa, 
Che,  pur  pregando,  intirizzita 
Stringe  il  Rosario  fra  le  sue  dita  — 
Perche  la  misera  conf  idi  ancora 
Nella  pietade  del  ciel,  che  impldra, 
Fate  limdsina,  pietdsa  gdnte, 
Fate  limosina  alia  dolente ! 

A.   FUSINATO. 


178  ITALIAN    GKAJVOIAR. 

EXERCISE    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

1.  A  truly  courageous  man  is  he  who  has  a  knowledge  of 
danger.  We  often  see  men  who  neither  fear  nor  are  afraid 
of  death:  yet  we  cannot  call  them  courageous;  because  (being), 
ignorant  of  danger,  they  rush  forward  foolishly. 

2.  Francis  I.,  going  out  from  the  council  which  had  determined 
upon  war  with  Italy,  met  his  buffoon,  who  said  to  him,  "  Sire,  it 
seems  to  me  that  your  councillors  are  fools." — "Why?"  asked 
the  king.  "  Because,"  he  replied,  "  they  have  been  so  long  dis- 
cussing what  part  of  Italy  they  intend  to  enter,  and  have  never 
said  a  word  about  the  part  to  go  out.  Therefore,  0  sire !  take 
care  not  to  go  there  at  all."  A  month  after  this,  Francis  was  a 
prisoner  in  Pavia. 

3.  There  are  many  people  who  think  that  they  can  learn  the 
Italian  language  in  three  months  ;  and  (these  people),  after  six 
months'  study,  do  not  know  how  to  say,  "  I  have  just  written ; 
the  clock  has  just  struck  ten ;  I  sliould  like  to  know  it  for  cer- 
tain." 

VOCABULARY. 

1.  We  see,  si  vedono ;  they  rush,  spiiigono. 

2.  Going,  uscendo ;  met,  incontrd  ;  have  (been  discussing) 
discussed,  hdnno  discusso  ;  said,  detto  ;  take  care,  avvertite. 

3.  Think,  stimano  ;  do  know,  sdnno  ;  I  should  like,  vorreu 

CONVERSAZIONE. 

Che  cosa  dimando  egW^  II  perche, 

Che  ora  e  ?  Soiio  appena  hattute  le  diecL 

I^erche  non  siete  venuto  ?  Perche  sono  stdto  alia  villa. 

E  quella  dunque  la  vostra  aimca  ?  E  hen  lei. 

Av'ete    vino.,  pane^   forma g,gio,  Non  ho  proprio  nulla  da  ddr- 

qualche  cosa  ?  vi  ? 

JVon  avete  neppure  una  scodella  Non  ho  7iidla  in  verita, 

di  Idtte  ? 

E  dunque  un  dnno  e  mezzo  ch''  No,  non  sbno  ancora  qumdici 

eUa  e  partita'^  mesi? 

Dove  dimora  il  suo  Signbr  pd-  Dimora  qui  vicmo. 

dre'^ 

Che  effetto  fa  la  medichia  ?  Guarisce  talvolta  e  consbla  spes- 

so. 
Qudndo  condsce  uno   il  valor e      Qudndo  e  asciutto  (dry)  il poz- 

deir  dcqua  ?  zo. 


CONJUNCTIONS    AND   INTERJECTIONS. 


179 


CHAPTER    XXYin. 


CONJUNCTIONS  AND  INTERJECTIONS. 


MNEMONIC    EXERCISE. 


Vza,  via  ;  meno  cicirle  ! 

Oime  /  che  vedo  men  ? 

Deh  !  non  lo  fdte^ 

Oh  bella  !  son  venuto  per  questo, 

Qudnclo  e  cost,  vddo  via, 

Cost  dico  ;  ancor  lo, 

La  CQsa  ando  pur  cost, 

JEM,  quel  giovine  ! 

A.nimo,  ammo  hdsta  cosi  ! 

JEhi,  quella  giovine^ 

Mvviva,  il  n  ostro  Sempronio  ! 

To  ve  V  ho  pur  defto, 

Non  ha  pure  most r a  to  di  conos- 

cermi, 
Oh!   se  potessi  ridere,  rider ei 

pur  di  cuore, 
Al  can  che  fugge,  ognun  grida, 

ddgli,  dcigli, 
Per   Bdcco,    piii    ci   penso,   e 

meno  so  comprendere  il  7no- 

tivo, 
Questo  partito   e  il  migliore ; 

d.nzi,  il  solo  cui  dehha  appi- 

glidrmi, 
E  cosi,  che  cdsa  faccidmo  ? 

Addio,  cdro :  dove  si  va  ? 

Via,  non  lo  sgriddte :  povermo  ! 

To  m  dmo,  per  che  lo  meritdte, 


Come,  come  ;  less  talk  ! 
Alas !  what  do  I  see  ?        _ 
Do  not  do  it,  I  beg  of  you. 
Indeed  !  I  came  on  purpose. 
Since  it  is  so,  I  shall  go. 
I  say  so ;  even  I. 
It  certainly  went  off  so. 
Here,  young  man ! 
Courage  !  that  will  do. 
Well,  miss. 

Bravo,  our  Sempronio ! 
I  have,  however,  told  you. 
He  did  not  even  appear  to  know 

me. 
Oh !  if  I  could  laugh,  I  would 

laugh  willingly. 
When  a  dog  runs,  people  cry 

after  him,  after  him. 
Truly,  the  more  I  think  of  it, 

the   less   I   understand   the 

motive. 
Tliis  part  is  the  best ;  nay,  the 

only  one  which  I  ought  to 

take. 
Well,   what  are   we  going   to 

do? 
Adieu,    my    dear:    where   are 

vou  ffoino;? 
There,  don't  scold  him :  poor 

boy! 
I  love  you,  because  you  deserve 

it. 


180 


ITALIAN    GRA]^IMAR. 


CONJUNCTIONS    IN    COMMON   USE. 


E, 

and. 

Nonostdnte, 

0,                     or,  either. 

Nondimeno, 

Ne,                     nor,  neither. 

Nientedime'no, 

Se,                     if,  whether. 

Con  tulto  cib. 

still,   nevertheless, 

Ma,                    but. 

Non  per  tdnto, 

■     notwithstanding, 

Perb, 

Non  per  questo. 

for  all  that. 

Che,                    that. 

Cib  non  ostdnte. 

Pure,                 yet,  nevertheless. 

Cib  non  di  meno, 

Gm,                    yet,  already. 

Tuttavia, 

Anzi,                  nay,  rather,  on  the 

Non  gia. 

not  at  all,  not  in- 

contrary. 

deed. 

Anche,                also,  even. 

Non  sdlo,  ) 
Non  che, 

not  only,  not  mere- 

Anco,                   „        „ 

ly- 

Eziandio,               „        „ 

Purche, 

provided. 

Altresi,                   „        „ 

-4  77ieno  che. 

unless. 

Anc6ra,              also,  even,  again. 

Anzi  che. 

rather,  sooner. 

Eppiire,              yet,  nevertheless. 

Anzi  che  no. 

rather     than     not. 

Ossia,                  or,  either. 

rather    so    thn,n 

Ovve'ro,                „        „ 

otherwise. 

0/?/)M/-e,               „        „ 

Si, 

so,  thus. 

Nemmeno,           neither,  not  even. 

Cost, 

>j      j> 

Nemmdnco,               „          „       „ 

Cdme, 

as,  like. 

Neppure,                 „          „       „ 

Siccdme, 

»     j> 

Nednche,                  „          „       „ 

Sicche, 

so,  thus,  wherefore. 

Tampdco,                 „          „       „ 

Cost  che. 

>>      >>            » 

Se  mdi,               if  ever,  if  indeed. 

Talche,^ 

so,  so  that. 

Se  pure,                 „              „ 

Giacche, 

since. 

Se  perb,             if  however. 

Cioe, 

that  is. 

Se  non,                unless,  except,  but. 

Cioe  a  dire. 

that  is  to  say. 

Se  non  che,               „           „         „ 

Vale  a  dire. 

jj       j> 

Accib,         1 

Ahn^no, 

at  least. 

Acciocche, 

in  order  that,  to  the 

Ahndnco, 

» 

Affine, 

end  that. 

Di  pill. 

moreover. 

Affinche,     J 

Indltre, 

besides,besides  this. 

Ancorche,            even  that. 

Oltrecche, 

i>                 yy           y> 

Contuttoche,            „        „ 

Oltraccib, 

))                 }}           )> 

Che,                   for,  why,  because. 

D'  aUrdnde, 

))                 })           }> 

Perche,                  „       „             „ 

Ddnque, 

then,  therefore. 

Poiche,       )        because,  since,  as. 

Adiinque, 

»            )> 

Posciache,  J 
Perocdte, 

after. 

dnde,      ) 
Ladnde,  > 

wherefore,    where- 

Imperocche, 
Ptrciocche, 
hnperciocche. 

because,    whereas, 
as,  since. 

Quindi,  ) 
Percib, 

upon. 

therefore,  for  which 
reason. 

Conciosiacche,  J 

In  sdmma,  ) 
In  fine,      J 

in  short,  in  conclu- 

Qnantjcnque,       although. 

sion. 

Sebbe'ne,                     „ 

Sia  che. 

whether,  or,  either. 

Benche,                      „ 

Vudi, 

3)                  }■)               >> 

Comeche,                   „ 

Dei  re'sto. 

otherwise,  besides. 

Avvegnache, 

1 

Per  ditto, 

i>               »» 

CONJUNCTIONS. 


181 


Tdnto, 
Qudnto, 
Qudndo, 
Qudnd'  dnche, 
In  guisa  die, 
In  mddo  che, 
In  maniera  che, 
Di  viddo  che, 
Di  maniera  che. 


as. 

}} 

when, 
even  when. 

so   that,  in  such  a 
manner. 


Intdnto,      \ 

Frattdnto,  ) 

Me'ntre, 

Mentrecche, 

Salvo, 

Ecce'tto, 

Trdnne, 

Fuorche, 

Fdrse, 

6ra, 


in  the  mean  time,  mean* 

while,  whilst, 
whilst,  whilst  that. 

j>  >>        >} 

save,  saving,  except. 


perhaps, 
now. 


» 


I.  JP{ire  is  often  used  In  the  sense  of  ancdra  (even), 
and  s(^lo  (only) . 

II.  Per  che  has  four  significations  :  1.  In  an  interroga- 
tive phrase,  it  has  the  meaning  of  "why;"  as.  Per  che 
anddte  via?  why  do  you  go  away?  2.  Followed  by  a 
verb  in  the  subjunctive,  it  signifies  "in  order  that;"  as, 
JSfon  vi  ho  dcito  il  dendro  -perche  lo  spendidte  suhito, 
I  did  not  give  you  the  money  that  (in  order  that)  you 
should  immediately  spend  it.  3.  It  is  used  for  "though  ;" 
as  in  the  phrase  of  Dante,  JSfon  lascidvam  V  anddr, 
perche  e'  dicesse^  We  did  not  cease  walking,  although  he 
spoke.  4.  It  also  signifies  "because;"  as,  Perche  ri- 
dete?  Perche  ho  v6glia  di  rider e,  Why  do  you  laugh? 
Because  I  wish  to  lauijh. 

III.  Anzi  is  sometimes  used  for  "before;"  as,  Anzi 
tempo,  dnzi  V  6ra,  anzi  la  rtiia  niSrte,  before  the  time, 
before  the  hour,  before  my  death. 

IV.  Mentre,  nel  mentre  che  or  mentre  che,  in  tempo 
che,  signifies  "whilst"  or  "whilst  that;"  as,  Mintr'  egli 
cantdvcc,  io  balldva,  whilst  he  sung,  I  danced. 

V.  Many  conjunctions,  as  nondim^eno,  cid  non  os- 
tdnte,  etc.,  contain  in  themselves  a  pronoun,  a  prepo- 
sition, an  adverb,  etc.  ;  but,  from  their  office  of  joining 
sentences  together,  they  are  commonly  reckoned  amongst 
conjunctions,  though  in  fact  they  are  but  conjunctive 
phrases, 

16 


182 


ITALIAN    GKAMMA.K. 


mTERJECTIONS   IN    COMMON    USE. 


Ah! 

Eh!  e! 
Ih! 

Oh!  o! 
Uh! 
Jhi! 
Ehi! 
6hi!  di! 
Uhi ! 
Deh! 

Doh! 
Ah,  ah  ! 
Eh,  eh ! 
Oh,  oh! 
Poh! 
Puh!  pu! 
Eia ! 
Ola! 
Cost ! 
Si! 
Gia! 
Pure  ! 
Cdme  ! 

Su!^ 

Orsu  ! 

Su,  sii ! 

Via! 

Via,  via! 

Eh  via  ! 

Verqdqna  ! 

Oiho  ! 

Animo  ! 

Cordggio  ! 

Fate  cudre! 

Bene  ! 

Bravo  ! 

Budno  ! 

Viva  ! 

Eh  viva  !  evviva  ! 

Cdpperi ! 

Cdppita  ! 

Poffdre! 


Ohbdlla! 
Ecco  ! 


ah!  ba!  alas! 

eh! 

ih! 

oh.!  ho! 

uh! 

ah!  alas!  [there! 

here  !  ho  hey  !  ho 

ah!  oh! 

ah !  alas ! 

ah !    alas  !    pray  ! 

prithee  ! 
oh !  pshaw ! 
ah,  ah ! 
eh,  eh ! 
oh,  oh ! 
poll! 

pu !  pooh ! 
halloo ! 

holla  !  ho  there ! 
so !  thus ! 
yes,  certainly ! 

yet! 

how  !    how  then ! 
why !  why  so  ! 

up,  up  !     come  ! 
come  then! 

away ! 

fie  !  fie  upon  ! 

for  shame ! 

oh,  fie  !  oh,  fough ! 

courage!  cheer  up! 
)>  >) 

))  >> 

well! 

bravo !  very  well ! 

good ! 

long  live ! 

huzza ! 

ay !  heyday !  mar- 
ry! 

fine ! 

lo!  behold! 


Ahime  !  aime! 
Ehime!  eime! 
Ohime!  oime! 
Ome  ! 
Oite! 
Oise  ! 
Gudi ! 
A  into  ! 
0  Dio  ! 
Ldsso  ! 
Ldsso  me! 
Ahi  ldsso  ! 

Pdvero  me  ! 
Miser 0  me  ! 
Meschino  me  ! 
Dolente  me  ! 

0  me  bedto  ! 
0  me  felice  ! 
Bedto  me  ! 
Felice  me! 
Alto! 
Sta! 
Ohe! 
Gudrda  ! 
Ldrgo  ! 
Pidno, 


alas  (me) ! 


alas  (thee) ! 

alas  (him  or  her)! 

woe ! 

help ! 

0  Heavens ! 

alas ! 


wretched  that  I 
am  !  unfortu- 
nate that  I  am ! 
wretched    me  ! 


poor  me 


1 


happy  that  I  am  1 
happy  me ! 

halt! 
Btop ! 

take  care  !    hare 
,     .  care  !  beware  ! 

>,    )  softly  !    gently! 

io,  )  slowly ! 


Addgio 
Zi!  zUto! 
Cheto  ! 
Non  piu! 
Bdsta ! 
Silenzio  ! 
Tacdte  ! 
Anddte  ! 
Baddte  ! 
Air  e'rta  ! 
Stdte  air  drta  ! 
Di  grdzia  ! 
Per  carita  ! 
Per  amdr  delcidlo 
Merce,  \ 

Misericdrdia,  ) 
Possihile  ! 
Appwito  ! 
Pensdte  ! 


siowiy  : 
whist!  hush! 
quiet !  stiU ! 
enough ! 

silence ! 

■  away ! 

mind !  have  care ! 
beware ! 

pray! 

for  charity's  sake ! 

.'  for  heaven's  sake ! 

mercy !     mercy 

ui)on  us ! 
is  it  possible ! 
exactly !  just ! 
just  think !  * 


*  It  is  important  to  observe,  that,  as  some  of  these  interjections  are  used  to  express 
different  and  even  contrary  emotions  or  affections  of  the  mind,  their  exact  signification 
can  only  be  determined  by  the  sense  of  the  words  which  accompany  them,  or  give  rist>  to 
the  exclamation. 


INTERJECTIONS.  183 

The  interjections  Idsso,  pdvero,  mzsei'o,  meschino, 
hedto  {me I),  are  mere  adjectives;  and,  when  used  by  a 
female,  take  the  feminine  termination,  —  Idssa,  p(>vercf, 
misera  (??ie/),  etc.  ;  and  in  the  plural  make  Idssi,  p6v- 
eri  (ndif),  etc.,  for  the  masculine;  and  Jdsse,  ^9(5've7'e 
( 7i (^2*/),  etc.,  for  the  feminine  ;  as, — 

Ldssa  7ne  /  in  che  maV  ora  ndc-     Alas  !  in  what  evil  hour  was  I 

qui  ?  born  ? 

Miseri  noi !  che  sidm,  se  Iddio     Miserable  that  we  are  !  what 

ci  Idscia  ?  becomes  of  us,  if  God  for- 

sakes us  ? 

Brdvo,  zUto,  che  to,  are  also  adjectives ;  and  when 
used  in  speaking  to  a  female,  or  to  more  than  one  male  or 
female,  follow  the  same  rule  ;  as,  — 

Brdva  !  come  qudndo  ?  Bravo !  as  when  ? 

Zittij  un  po'  I  Hush,  a  little ! 

Brdvo  is  also  used  in  its  superlative,  and  makes 
hravissimo^  bravissima,  bravtssiini,  bravissime,  "bravis- 
simo." 

READING   LESSON. 
La  Rondinella. 

Rondinella  pellegrina 
Che  ti  posi  in  sul  verdne 
Ricantando  ogni  mattina 
Quella  flebile  canzone, 
Che  vuoi  dirmi  in  tua  favella 
Pelleo;rina  rondinella  ? 

Sohtaria  nell'  oblio, 
Dal  tuo  sposo  abbandonata, 
Piangi  forse  al  pianto  mio 
Vedovella  sconsolata  ? 
Piangi,  piangi  in  tua  favella, 
Pellegrina  rondinella. 

Pur  di  me  manco  infelice 
Tu  alle  penne  almen  t'  affidi, 


184  ITALIAN    GRAJMMAR. 

Scorri  il  lago  e  la  pendice, 
Empi  r  aria  cle'  tiioi  gridi, 
Tutto  il  giorno  in  tua  favella, 
Lui  chiamando,  o  rondinella ! 

Oh,  se  ancli'  io !    Ma  lo  contende 
Questa  bassa  angusta  volta, 
Dove  sole  non  risplende, 
Dove  r  aria  ancor  m'  e  tolta, 
D'  onde  a  te  la  mia  favella 
Giunge  appena,  o  rondinella ! 

H  settembre  innanzi  viene, 
E  a  lasciarmi  ti  pre  pari : 
Tu  vedrai  lontane  arene,  . 
Nuovi  monti,  nuovi  mari, 
Salutando  in  tua  favella, 
Pellegrina  rondinella. 


■'&' 


Ed  io  tutte  le  mattine 
E.iaprendo  gli  occlii  al  pianto 
Era  le  nevi  e  fra  le  brine 
Credero  d'  udir  quel  canto, 
Onde  par  che  in  tua  favella 
Mi  compianga,  o  rondinella. 

Una  croce  a  prima  vera 
Troverai  su  questo  suolo ; 
Rondinella  in  su  la  sera 
Sdvra  a  lei  raccogli  il  volo : 
Dille  pace  in  tiia  favella, 
Pellegrina  rondinella ! 

EXERCISE   FOE,   TRANSLATION. 

1.  Lycurgus  prohibited  those  who  returned  from  a  feast  taking 
a  light,  in  order  that  the  fear  of  not  being  able  to  find  their 
homes  might  prevent  their  becoming  intoxicated. 

2.  There  is  nothing  meaner  than  to  see  hypocrites  launching 
their  thunders  against  the  weaknesses  of  humanity,  whilst  their 
heart  is  the  sink  of  every  vice. 

3.  Vespasian  incurred  the  danger  of  being  condemned  to  death, 
because  he  gaped  while  the  fool  Nero  was  singing  on  the  stage 
in  Rome. 


CONJUNCTIONS    AND    INTERJECTIONS.  1S5 

4.  During  summer  evenings,  Dante  was  accustomed  to  sit 
upon  a  stone,  which  is  still  religiously  preserved  in  Florence. 
One  evening,  a  man  unknown  to  him  passed  before  him,  and 
said,  "  Sir,  I  have  promised  to  give  an  answer,  and  know  not 
how  to  get  myself  out  of  the  difficulty :  you,  who  are  so  learned, 
can  suggest  it  to  me.  What  is  the  best  mouthful  ?  "  Dante  imme- 
diately answered,  "  An  egg."  A  year  after,  at  the  same  hour, 
Dante  being  seated  on  the  same  stone,  the  same  man,  whom  he 
bad  not  since  seen,  returned,  and  asked,  "  With  what  ?  "  Dante, 
without  hesitation,  answered,  "  With  salt." 


VOCABULARY. 

1.  Prohibited,  i^ze^o  ;  returned,  torndvano  ;  might  prevent,  ^m- 
pedisse  ;  intoxicated,  uhhriacdte. 

2.  Launching  thunders,  scaglidre  i  fulmini  ;  sink,  sentina. 

3.  Incurred  (ran),  corse;  gaped,  shadiglidva. 

4.  Was  accustomed,  soUva  ;  unknown,  sconosciuto  ;  to  get  out, 
etc.,  trdrmi  d'  affdre  ;  can  suggest,  potreste  suggerire  ;  mouthful, 
boccdne  ;  without  hesitation,  senza  metier  tempo  in  mezzo. 


CONVERSAZIONE. 

Qiidl  fu  it  regdlo  che  fece  tin  Ujio  scudo,  credendo  forse  con 

colonnello  ad  iino  de  sudi  gra-  cid  di  ricompen&ctrlo  di  tdnta 

natieri  che  pugndndo  valoro-  perdita. 

sissimamente    aveva    perdute 

cmihe  le  hrdccia  ? 

Tdle  meschinitd  non  eccito  essa  CertatJienfe,  e  con  ragidne  dtsse 

lo  sdegno  del  brdvo  solddto  ?  al    suo  Colonnello  —  Credete 

fdrse  cJi'  lo  non  dhhia  perduto 
che  un  pdio  di  gudnti  ? 

Qiidle  fdma  hdnno  lascidta  Lu-  una   tristissima  fdma,  perche 

dovico  XL  e  Ferdindndo  d'  fiirono  entrdmhicrudelieper- 
Arragona  ?  fidi. 
Non   si   chiamdrono,  il  primo  Si,  e  cid  prdva  che  V  dmhra  del 

cristianissimo  e  Z'  cdtro  cattd-  trdno   pud    coprire   immensi 

lico  ?  delitti. 

Che  rispdse  Ddnte  a  chi  gli  do-  Tin  ubvo  con  sale. 

manddva  qualfdsse  il  miglibr 

boccdne  ? 

16* 


186 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


^n^xlxKx-Q    & txhB* 


A.vere^  to  have. 


ESTFINITIVE 


MOOD.  —  Ave're,  to  have. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PKESENT  TENSE. 

hoar  d, 

Mi  or  di, 
haoT  d  (ace), 

I  hare, 
thou  hast, 
he  has. 

abbidmo  (avemo)^ 

avcte, 

hdnno  or  anno, 

we  have, 
j'ou  have, 
they  have. 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

to  nveva  or  avea^ 

tu  avevi, 

igli  aveva  or  avca, 

I  had. 
thou  hadst. 
he  had. 

avevdmo, 
avevdte, 
avevano  {avieno), 

we  had. 
you  had. 
they  had 

PERFECT  TENSE. 

&>bi, 

avestij 

ebbe, 

I  had. 
thou  hadst. 
he  had. 

ave?}itno, 

avcste, 

ebbero, 

we  had. 
you  had. 
they  had. 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

• 

avrdi 

avrai, 
avrdy 

I  shall  have, 
thou  wilt  have, 
he  -mU.  have. 

avremo, 

avrete, 

avrdnno, 

we  shall  have. 

you  will  have. 

■  they  will  have. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


avrei  (avna), 
avrdsti, 
avribbe  (avria), 


the  10  abbia, 

che  tu  dbbia  or  ahbi, 

che  egli  dbbia, 


die  w  avessi, 
die  tu  avessi, 
die  egli  avesse, 


abbl  tu, 
abbia  egli, 


I  should  have, 
thou  wouldst  have, 
he  would  have. 


uvrcmmo,  we  could  have. 

avrcste,  you  should  have. 

avrcbbero  (avriano),  they  would  have. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


if  I  may  have. 

if  thou  mayst  have. 

if  he  may  have. 


die  abbidmo, 
che  abbidte, 
che  dbbiano, 


if  we  may  have, 
if  you  may  have, 
if  they  may  have. 


UrPERFECT  TENSE. 


if  I  might  have. 

if  thou  couldst  have. 

if  he  would  have. 


che  avessimo, 

che  avcste, 

che  avessero  {-ino), 


have  thou, 
let  him  have. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


abbidmo  ndi, 
abbidte  voi, 


dbbiano  cglino. 


if  we  should  have, 
if  you  might  have, 
if  they  might  havft 


let  us  have. 

have  ye. 

let  them  have. 


GERUND. 
avdndo,  having. 

PARTICIPLES. 

having. 


avente, 
aviito,avuta  (s.),  \ 
aviiti,  aviite  (p.),  | 
avendo  aviito, 


had. 
having  had. 


COMPOUND   TENSES. 


w  ho  aviito, 
10  avcvn  nviUo, 
10  cbbi  aviito, 
io  avro  aviito, 
to  avrei  aviito, 
che  10  abbia  aviito, 


I  have  had. 

I  had  had. 

I  had  had. 

I  shal!  have  had. 

I  should  have  had. 

if  I  may  have  had. 


che  io  avessi  aviito,  if  1  might  have  had. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


IS"/ 


]£ssere^  to  be. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD.  — Asere,  to  be. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


to  s6no^ 
seii  or  «e', 

lam. 
thou  art. 
he  is. 

sidmo  (semo), 
sicte  (sale), 
sono, 

we  are. 
you  are. 
they  are. 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

to  era, 

I  was. 
thou  wast, 
he  was. 

eravuino  (6ramo), 

travdte, 

crano, 

we  were, 
you  were, 
they  were. 

PERFECT  TENSE. 

fosti, 
fu  (file). 

I  was. 
thou  wast, 
he  was. 

fuynmo, 

foste, 

furono  (funno), 

we  were. 
30U  were, 
they  were. 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

sard  (fin), 

sardi, 

sard  (fia,fie), 

I  shall  be. 
thou  \vilt  be. 
he  will  be. 

saremo, 

aarete, 

sardnno  (fiano). 

we  shall  be. 
you  \sill  be. 
they  will  be 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


sarii  (sar'ia,  fira),     I  should  be. 
sarcsti,  thou  wouldst  be. 

sarebbe  (saria,/6ra),  he  would  be. 


sarcTnmo. 


sarcste, 

sarebbero  (sariano), 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 


che  10  sm, 

eke  tu  s'la,  or  sit, 

die  egli  sia, 


che  10  fissi  {fiissi), 
che  tu  fossi, 
die  egli  fdsse, 


t'za,  or  sU'tu, 
a'la  egli. 


if  I  maybe. 

if  thou  mayst  be. 

if  lie  may  be. 


che  sidmo, 

die  sidte, 

che  s'latw,  or  s'leno, 


we  should  be. 
you  should  be. 
they  should  be 


if  we  may  be. 
if  you  may  be. 
if  they  may  be. 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

if  I  were,  or  should  be 
if  thou  Mert. 
if  he  were. 


che  fossimo,  if  we  were. 

che  foste,  if  you  were. 

chefossero  (fossino),   if  they  were. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


be  thou, 
let  him  be. 


stamo  noi, 

sidte  v6i, 

siano,  or  sieno  dglino, 


let  us  be. 

be  ye. 

let  them  be. 


(ssindo, 


GERUND. 

* 

being. 


stdti,  state'  (■[).), 
essendo  stdto, 


PARTICIPLES 

I 


been, 
having  been. 


COMPOUND   TENSES. 


10  sono  stdto, 
20  era  stdto, 
10  sard  stdto, 
to  sarci  stdto, 
che  io  s'la  stdto, 
che  io  fdssi  stdto. 


I  have  been. 

T  had  been. 

I  shall  have  been. 

I  should  have  been. 

if  I  ni.iy  have  been. 

if  1  might  have  been. 


*  Tlie  past  participle  of  the  verb  dssere  always  agrees  with  the  subject  in  gender  and 
number  :  thus  we  say,  10  s6no  stdto.  if  the  subject  is  masculine  sin^^ular  ;  w  sono  stdta, 
If  feminine  singular;  noi  sidmo  stdti,  if  masculine  plural;  iioi  s'lamo  state,  if  feminine 
plural ;  and  so  on. 


188 


ITAI.IAK    GRAMMAR. 


^tgxxlixx    W !^xhB. 


VARIATION   OF   ACTIVE   VERBS. 

Active  verbs,  in  the  compound   tenses,  are  varied  with   the 
auxiliary  verb  avere,  to  have. 


am'ure. 


FIRST     CONJUGATION. 
A.7ndre,  to  love. 

PARADIGM    OF   THE    VERBS    ENDING   IN    dre, 
INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

to  love. 


Present. 


Present. 


amr&ndo, 


loving. 


Past, 
avere  amato,  to  have  loved. 

GERUND. 

Past, 
avendo  amalo^  having  loved. 


Present, 
am-dnte  (s.),  am-dnti  (p.),*  losing. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Past. 


ani-dto  (m.  s.),  am-dti  (p.),  loved. 
am-dia  (f  s.),  a?«-d/e(p.),*  loved. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 
Present. 


dm-o, 

I  love,  or  do  love. 

am-idmoy 

•we  love. 

dm-i, 

thou  lovest. 

am-dle, 

you  love. 

dm-a, 

he  loves. 

dm-anOf 

they  love. 

Imperfect. 

io  am-dva^ 

I  loved,  or  did  love. 

am-avdvio, 

we  loved. 

am-dvi, 

thou  lovedst. 

a??i-ai-dte, 

you  loved. 

igli  am-dva^ 

he  loved. 

a?n-dvano, 

they  loved. 

Perfect. 

am-di, 

I  loved,  or  did  love. 

am-dmmo, 

we  loved. 

am-dsti. 

tbou  lovedst. 

am-dste, 

you  loved. 

am-o, 

he  loved. 

am-drono  (am 

■dro),  they  loved. 

Future. 

am-ero,^ 

I  shall  or  uill  love. 

am-ernno, 

we  shall  or  wull  love. 

am-erdi, 

thou  wilt  love. 

am^ercte., 

you  will  love. 

arn-erd. 

he  will  love. 

a7T2-erdnno, 

they  will  love. 

I 


*  The  present  participle  of  active  verbs,  like  that  of  avere,  agrees  with  the  subject  of  tho 
proposition  in  gender  and  number.  The  past  participle  agrees^  sometimes,  with  the  object 
in  gender  and  number. 

t  The  verbs  of  this  conjugation  in  the  future  and  the  conditional  change  the  a  of  their 
terminationH  for  e,  and  make  lan-'id^  instead  of  ATW-aro,  etc. 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


189 


ho  amdto, 
hdi  at7idto, 
ha  amato, 


I  have  Icved. 

thou  hast  loved. 

he,  she,  or  it  has  loved 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 
Second  Perfect. 

ahbiamo  amdto, 
avcte  anidto^ 
hdnno  amdto. 


lo  aveva  amdto,       I  had  loved. 


PlujJerfect. 

I     avevdmo  amdto, 


we  have  loved, 
you  have  loved, 
they  have  loved. 


we  had  loved. 


Second  Pluperfect, 
ibbi  amdto,  I  had  loved. 


Future  Anterior, 
avrd  amdto,  I  shall  have  loved 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 


Present. 


che  10  dm-i  (dw-e),    that  T  love,  or  may  love. 
che  tu  dm-i,  that  thou  lovest. 

che  cgli dm-i{dm-e\  that  he  loves. 


che  am-idmo, 
che  am-idte, 
che  dm-ino, 


Imperfect. 


che  to  am-dssi, 
che  tu  a7)i-dssi, 
eke  egli  am-dsse, 


if  I  loved,  or  should  love, 
il  thou  lovedst. 
if  he  loved. 


che  am-'lssimo, 

che  am-dste, 

che  am-dssero  {-ino), 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Perfect. 

che  to  abbia  amdto,  that  I  have  loved,  or 
may  have  loved. 


Pluperfect, 
the  10  avessi  amdto. 


that  we  love, 
that  you  love, 
that  they  love. 


if  Tve  loved, 
if  you  loved, 
if  they  loved. 


if  I  had  loved. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSE. 

Present. 


am'erei  (am-er'ta),    I  should  love. 
am-eresti,  thou  wouldst  love. 

am-er6bbe{am-eria),  he  would  love. 


am-ercTumo,  we  should  love. 

am-ereste,  you  would  love. 

am-erebbero  (amer'iano),  they  would  love. 


COMPOUND   TENSE. 

Past. 

avrei  amdto,  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  loved,  or  might  have  loved. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


dm.-a  tu, 
dm-i  egli, 


love  thou, 
let  him  love. 


am-idmo  ndi, 
am-dte  v6i, 
dm-ino  eglino. 


let  us  love. 

love  ye. 

let  them  love. 


Besides  the  foregoing  changes  of  termination,  there  are  some  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation  wliich  undergo  in  some  persons  and  tenses  a  change  of  orthography. 

Verbs  ending  in  cidre,  (/tare,  drop  the  ?',  which  follows  c,  (/,  whenever  cl,  (/i, 
precede  e,  i;  as,  Bacldre,  to  kiss;  fref/idre,  to  adorn. 

Verbs  ending  in  idre,  in  Avhich  ia  form  one  syllable,  drop  the  ^  whenever  it  is 
followed  by  another  i;  as,  Noidre^  to  annoy. 

Verbs  ending  in  idre,  in  which  ia  form  two  syllables,  drop  the  i  only  when  it 
would  be  followed  by  the  vowels  ia;  as,  Invldre,  to  send. 


100 


IT.VT.IAN    GKAMM/\.Il. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Cerciire. 


PARADIGM   OF   THE    VERBS    ENDING   IN    cdre. 


cerc-o, 

cercH-if 

cerc-a. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present. 


I  search,  or  do  search, 
thou  Bearchest. 
he  searches. 


cercH-tamo, 

cere-ate, 

cerc-ano. 


we  search, 
you  search, 
they  search. 


cercH-cro, 

cercE-erdi, 

cercH-erd, 


Future. 


1  siiall  (;/  will  search, 
thou  wilt  search. 
he  will  search. 


cercn-eremo, 

ceim-ercte, 

cercR-erdnno, 


we  shall  .search, 
you  will  search, 
they  will  search. 


che  10  cercn-i  (-«), 

ehe  tu  cercu-ii 

die  cgli  cercll-i  (-e), 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  search, 
that  thou  search, 
that  he  search. 


che  cercn^dmo, 
che  cercn-idtey 
che  ccrcu-ino, 


that  we  search, 
that  you  search 
that  they  search. 


cercn-erei  {-eria), 

cercn-frcsti, 

cercu-crcbbe, 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 
Present. 


I  should  .'?earch. 
thou  wouldst  search, 
he  would  search. 


cercn-erdmmo, 

ce.rcn-ercste, 

cercH-erehbero, 


we  should  search, 
you  would  search, 
they  would  search 


cerc-a  tu, 
cercH-i  egli, 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


search  thou, 
let  him  search. 


cercTi^idmo  ndi, 
cere-ate  v6i, 
cercH.-ino  egliiio, 


let  us  search. 

search  ye. 

let  them  search. 


Tenses  conjugated  like  those  of  the  regular  verb  are  omitted. 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


191 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Pregdre. 

PARADIGM    OF   THE    VERBS    ENDING   IN  gdve. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present. 


preg-o, 
pregn-i, 
pr^g-a,      ■ 

I  entreat,  or  do  entreat, 
thou  entreatest. 
he  entreats. 

pregn-idino, 

preg-dte, 

prcg-ano, 

we  entreat, 
you  entreat, 
they  entreat. 

FuV 

xre. 

pregn-erd, 

pregu-erdi, 

pregB.-erdy 

I  shall  or  will  entreat, 
thou  wilt  entreat, 
he  will  entreat. 

pregn-erdmo, 

pregn-ercte, 

pregu-erdnno, 

we  shall  entreat, 
you  will  entreat 
they  will  entreat 

eke  to  pregH-i  (-e), 

c/i€  tu  prcgH-i, 

che  dgli  prcgu-i  (-e), 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  entreat, 
that  thou  entreat, 
that  he  entreat. 


che  pregn-idmo, 
eke  pregH-idte, 
che  prcgu-ino, 


that  we  entreat. 
that  you  entreat, 
that  they  entreat. 


pregn-erei, 

pregn-eresti, 
pregu-erebbe, 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 


I  should  entreat, 
thou  wouldst  entreat. 
he  would  entreat. 


pregn-eremmo, 

pregn-ereste^ 

pregn-erebbcro, 


we  should  entreat, 
you  would  entreat, 
they  would  entreat 


BIPERATIVE  MOOD. 


preg-a  tu, 
pregn-i  igli^ 


entreat  thou, 
tet  him  entreat. 


pregn-idmo  ndi, 
preg-dte  v6i, 
prcgn-tno  cglinoy 


let  us  entreat. 

entreat  ye. 

let  them  entreat 


192 


ITALIAN    GllAIVIMAR. 


SECOND    CONJUGATIOK      - 

The  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  commonly  divided  into  two 
classes,  —  those  ending  in  ere  (long),  accented,  and  those  ending 
in  ere  (short),  unaccented:  both  of  tliese  in  the  perfect  have  two 
terminations,  ei  and  etti,  except  a  few  which  have  the  termination 
ei  only. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Tem^re. 

PARADIGM    OF    THE   VERBS    ENDING    IN   Ire  (lONG),   ACCENTED,    ANr 
OF   THOSE   WHICH,    IN   THE   PERFECT,    END   IN   ti  AND   etU. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 


Present 
tem-dre,  to  fear 


Past, 
avere  temuto,  to  have  feared. 


Present, 
tem-indo^  fearing. 


GERUND. 

I  Past. 

I     avendo  temuto,        having  feared. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Present. 
Um-6nte  (s.),  tem-enti  (p.),  fearing. 


Past. 


tem-uto  (m.  s.),  temuti  (p.),  feared. 
tem-iUa  (f.  s.),  temiite  (p.),  feared. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

SBIPLE   TENSES. 


Present. 


tem-o^ 
tem-e. 


I  fear,  or  do  fear, 
thou  fearest. 
he  fears. 


te?n-idnio^ 

tem-ete, 

tem-ono. 


Imperfect. 


to  tem-eva  or  tem-6a,  I  feared,  or  did  fear. 
tem-evi,  thou  fearedst. 

4gli  tem-eva,  he  feared. 


tetn-evdmo, 

teni'evate, 

tem-evano, 


Perfect. 


tem-m  or  few-liTTl,    I  feared,  or  did  fear. 
tem-esti,  thou  fearedst. 

tem-ii  or  ^cw-rtte,     he  feared. 


tem-emmo, 

te7fj-este, 

«e?n-ER0NO, 


we  fear, 
you  fear, 
they  fear. 


we  feared, 
you  feared, 
they  feared. 


we  feared, 
you  feared, 
they  feared. 


KEGULAR  VERBS. 


193 


tem-erd, 

tem-erdi, 

tem-erd, 


Future. 


I  shall  or  will  fear, 
thou  wilt  fear. 
he  will  fear. 


tem-cremo^ 

tetn-erete, 

terrt'erunno, 


we  shall  or  will  fear, 
you  will  fear, 
they  will  fear. 


ho  temuto^ 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 
Second  Perfect.  ) 

I  have  ffeared.  |    abbiamo  temuto, 


we  have  fbared. 


Pluperfect 
io  aveva  temuto,  I  had  feared,  etc. 


che  io  tem-a, 

die  tu  tcm-a  or  -i, 

che  cgli  tem-a, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE   TENSES. 
Present. 


that  I  fear, 
that  thou  Ibar 
that  he  fear. 


che  tem-idmo, 
che  tem-idte, 
che  tem-ano, 


that  we  fear, 
that  you  fear, 
that  they  fear. 


che  10  tetn-essij 
che  tu  tem-essi, 
die  dgli  tem-esse, 


Imperfect. 


if  I  feared. 

if  thou  fearedst. 

if  he  feared. 


che  tem-essimo, 
che  tem-este^ 
che  tem-essero, 


if  we  feared, 
if  you  feared, 
if  they  feared. 


Perfect, 
die  io  abbia  temuto,     that  I  have  feared 


COMPOUND   TENSES. 

Pluperfect. 
che  io  avessi  temuto,  if  I  had  feared. 


tem-erei  (-ena), 
iem-eresti, 
tem-erebbe  {-eria), 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSE. 
Present. 


I  should  fear, 
thou  wouldst  fear, 
he  would  fear. 


tem-eremmo, 

tem-ercste, 

tem-errbhero, 


we  should  fear, 
you  would  fear, 
they  would  fear. 


COMPOUND   TENSE. 

Past. 

avrei  temuto,  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  feared,  or  might  have  feared. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


tdm-i  tu, 
iem-a  egli, 


fear  thou, 
let  him  fear. 


tem-idmo  ndi, 
tem-ete  v6i, 
titn-ano  eglino. 


let  us  fear. 

fear  ye 

let  them  fear. 


17 


194 


ITALIAN   GKAMMAK. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Tessere. 

PAHADIGM    OF    THE   VERBS    ENDING    IN    hx    (SHORT)  ,    UNACCENTED  j 
AND   OE   THOSE  WHICH,   IN   THE   PERFECT,   END   IN   H   ONI.Y. 


rNEINITlVE  MOOD. 


Present, 
tiss-ere,  to  weave. 


Past 
av&re  tessuto,  to  have  ■woven. 


GERTJOT). 


Present, 
tess-endo,  weaving. 


Past, 
avendo  tessuto,        having  woven. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Present, 
uss-ente  {8.)ytess-enti  (p.),  weaving. 


Past. 


tessuto  (m.  s.),  tess-uti  (p.),  woven. 
tess-uta  (f.  s.),  tess-ute  (p.),  woven. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 
Present, 
tiss-o,  I  weave,  or  do  weave,  or  am  weaving.  |     tess-idmo  (tess-emo),  we  weave. 

LnperJ'ect. 
lo  t€ss-6va  or  tess-ea^  I  wove,  or  did  weave,  or  was  weaving. 


Perfect. 


tess-iilj  I  wove,  or  did  weave. 

tess-esti,  thou  wovest. 

tess-i  {tess-eo)f  he  wove. 


tess-emmo,  we  wove. 

tess-dste^  you  wove. 

fess-iiRONO,  they  wove. 


Future, 
tess-ero,  I  shall  or  will  weave. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  195 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
Second  Perfect.  Pluperfect. 

ho  tessiito,  I  have  ■woven  to  aveva  tessiito^        I  had  woven,  etc 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSE. 
Present.  Imperfect. 

the  to  tess-a^  that  I  weave.  che  lo  tess-essi,  that  I  wove. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
Perfect.  Pluperfect. 

ehf  to  abhia  tessuto,     that  I  may  have  woven,      che  lo  avessi  tessuto,  if  I  might  have  woven. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSE. 

P7'esent. 

tess-erei  {tess-er'ia),  I  should,  would,  or  could  weave,  or  might  weave. 

COMPOUND  TENSE. 

Past. 

avrH  tessxito,  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  woven,  or  might  have  woven. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

tess-i  tUf  weave  thou. 


Verbs  ending  in  cere  (long),  accented,  in  order  to  preserve  the  soft  sound  of  o 
in  all  their  inflections,  take  an  i  after  that  consonant,  whenever  it  is  followed  by 
o,  0,  u ;  as,  Tacere,  to  be  silent. 
^  Verbs  ending  in  iere  drop  the  t  whenever  it  is  followed  by  another  i;  as 
Empiere,  to  fill. 


196 


lT^y:.IAN    GRMOIAR. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

The  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  divided  into  three  classes, 
—  those  which,  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  end  in  o  ;  those 
wliich  end  in  isco  ;  and  those  which  have  both  of  these  termina- 
tions. 


Ya7Hatio7i  of  the  Fer5  Sentire. 

P^\JIADIGM   OF   THE   VERBS   OF   THE   THIRD    CONJUGATION,   WHICH,    IN 
THE  PRESENT   OF   THE   INDICATIVE,    END   IN    0   ONLY. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present.  I  Past. 

sent-irCf  to  hear.  |     avere  sent'tto,  to  have  heard. 


■  Present. 
sent-endOy  hearing. 


GERUND. 

I  Past. 

I     avendo  sentito^        having  heard. 


Present. 


PARTICIPLE. 


sent-ente  (s.),  sent-enti  (p.),  hearing. 


Past. 


sent-'ito  (m.  s.),  sent-'iti  (p.),  heard. 
sent-'ita  (f.  s.),  sent-'ite  (p.),  heard. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


SIMPLE 

TENSES. 

Present. 

sent-o^ 
sent-j, 
sent-iSj 

I  hear,  or  do  hear, 
thou  hearest. 
he  hears. 

sent-idr7io, 

sent-ite, 

sent-O'SO, 

we  hear 
you  hear, 
they  hear. 

Imperfect. 

• 

ic  sent-wa  or  sent-ia 

tent-'ivi, 

egli  sent'iva  or  sent-ia 

1  heard,  or  did  hear, 
thou  heardst. 
,,  he  heard. 

sent-ivamo, 

sent-ivate, 

sent-ivano, 

we  heard, 
you  heard, 
they  heard 

Perfect. 

sent-ii, 
sent-'isti, 
sent-i  (sent-io), 

I  heard,  or  did  hear, 
thou  heardst. 
he  heard. 

sent-itnmo, 

sent-iste, 

sent-irono, 

we  heard, 
you  heard, 
they  heard 

REGULAR   VERBS. 


197 


sent-ird, 

sent-ir  at, 
sent-ird, 


Future. 


I  shall  or  will  hear, 
thou  wilt  hear, 
he  will  hear. 


sent-iremo, 

sent-ircte, 

sent-irdnno. 


we  will  hear, 
you  will  hear, 
they  will  hear. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Second  Perfect, 
he  sentito,  I  have  heard. 


Pluperfect. 
10  aveva  sent'ito.       I  had  heard,  etc. 


che  10  sent-A, 
che  til  sent-A  or 
che  egli  scnt-A, 


che  10  sent-'issi, 
che  tu  sent-'issi, 
che  sent-isse, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 


Present. 


that  I  hear, 
that  thou  hear, 
that  he  hear. 


che  seiit-ianiOy 
che  sent-idte, 
che  sent-A^O, 


Imperfect. 


that  I  heard, 
that  thou  heardst. 
that  he  heard. 


che  sent-'issimo, 
che  sent-'iste, 
che  sent-tsserOf 


that  we  hear, 
that  you  hear, 
that  they  hear. 


if  we  heard, 
if  you  heard, 
if  they  heard. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Perfect, 
io  dbbia  sent'ito^  that  I  may  have  heard. 


Pluperfect. 
10  avdssi  sent'ito,      if  I  had  heard. 


sent-irci  {-iria), 

sent-ircsti, 
sent-ircbbe  {-ir'ia), 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SBIPLE  TENSE. 


Present. 


I  should  hear, 
thou  wouldst  hear, 
he  would  hear. 


sent-iremmo, 

sent-ircste, 
sent-irebbero, 


we  should  hear, 
you  would  hear, 
they  would  hear. 


COMPOUND  TENSE. 

Past. 

avr6i  sent'ito,  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  heard,  or  might  have  heard. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


s6nt-i  tu, 
sent-A  cgli. 


hear  thou, 
let  him  hear. 


sent^amo  ndi, 
sent-'ite  v6i, 
sent-Amo  eglino, 


17* 


let  us  hear. 

hear  ye. 

lot  them  hear. 


198 


ITALIAN   GEAJVIMAR. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Esibire. 


PARADIGM   OF   THOSE   VERBS   OF   THE    THIRD    CONJUGATION,    WHICH, 

IN   THE   PRESENT   OF   THE   INDICATIVE,    HAVE   THE 

TERMINATION  tSCO   ONLY. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Esib-ire, 


esib-dndoj 


Present. 

Past. 

to  offer. 

avere  esibito,            to  have  offered 

GEEUND.    • 

Present. 

Past. 

offering. 

avendo  esibitOj         ha-ving  offered. 

PARTICIPLE. 


Present, 
esib-dnte  (s.),  esibdnti  (p.),  offering. 


Past. 


esib-ito  {m.  s.),  esib-iti  (p.),  offered. 
esib'ita  {f.  s.),  esib-ite  (p.),  offered. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 
Present. 


esib-isCO, 
esib-tsci, 
cst6-lSCK, 

I  offer,  or  do  offer, 
thou  offerest. 
he  offers. 

esib-idmo, 

esib-ite, 

esib-tsCOTHOf 

•we  offer, 
you  offer, 
they  offer. 

Imperfect. 

to  esib-iva  or  -la, 
esib-ivi., 
esib-iva  or  -ia, 

I  offered,  or  did  offer, 
thou  offeredst. 
he  offered. 

esib-ivdmo, 

esib-ivdte, 

esib-ivano, 

•we  offered, 
you  offered, 
they  offered. 

Perfect. 

esib<i, 
esib-isti, 
esib-i  {esib-to), 

I  offered,  or  did  offer, 
thou  offeredst. 
he  offered. 

esib-immo, 
esib-iste, 
esib-irono  {esib- 

we  offered, 
you  offered. 
iro),  they  offered. 

Fviure. 

esib^rd, 

esib^rdi, 

esib-ird. 

I  shall  or  -will  offer, 
thou  wilt  offer, 
he  -will  offer. 

esib-iremo, 

esib-irete, 

esib^rdnno, 

•we  will  offer, 
you  will  offer, 
they  •will  offer 

REGULAR  VERBS. 


199 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


ko  esUntOf 


Second  Perfect. 

I  have  oSered,  etc. 


Pluperfect. 
10  aveva  esii'ito^       I  had  o£fered,  etc. 


c/if  to  esib-isOA, 
die  tu  esib-isCA, 
die  cgli  esib-tsCAf 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 
Present. 


che  esib'iamo^ 
che  esib-idte, 
che  esib-tsOAmo, 


that  I  offer, 
that  thou  offer, 
that  he  offer. 


that  we  offer, 
that  you  offer, 
that  they  offer. 


che  to  esib-'isst, 
che  tu  esib-issi, 
che  cgli  esib-issej 


Imperfect. 


if  I  offered. 

if  thou  offeredst. 

if  he  offered. 


che  esib-issimo, 
che  esib-iste, 
che  esib-'issero, 


if  we  offered, 
if  you  offered, 
if  they  offered. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Perfect, 
che  10  abbia  esibito^      that  I  have  offered. 


Pluperfect, 
che  10  avessi  esibito,  if  I  had  offered. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSE. 


Present. 


esib-ir&i  (««6-zna),       I  should  offer. 
esib-ircsti,  thou  wouldst  offer. 

esib4rcbbe  {esib-dria\    he  would  offer. 


esib-iremmo, 

esib-ireste, 

esib-irebberOf 


we  should  offer, 
you  would  offer, 
they  would  offer. 


COMPOUND  TENSE. 

Past. 
avrH  esib'tlOf  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  offered,  or  might  have  offered. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


esib-idmo, 

»/6-fS0I, 

*<fer  thou. 

esib-ite, 

tib-tsOAf 

I'it  him  offer. 

esib-teOAHOf 

let  us  offer. 

offer  ye. 

let  them  offer. 


200 


ITALIAN   QRi 


Cucire,  to  sew. 

Verbs  ending  in  cire,  in  order  to  preserve  the  soft  sound  of  the 
c  in  all  their  inflections,  take  an  i  after  that  consonant,  whenever 
it  is  followed  by  a,  o  ;  as,  Gucire,  to  sew. 

PAKADIGM   OF   THE    VEEBS   Ein)IKG   IN   cive. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


cticl-o, 

I  sew,  or  do  sew. 

cuc-iamo  {-imo), 

we  gew. 

cuc-iy 

thou  Bewest. 

cuc-ite, 

you  sew. 

CUC-Cf 

he  sews. 

cucl-ono, 

they  sew. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


the  io  c«ci-a,  that  I  sew  or  may  sew. 

che  tu  cuci-a  or  ciic-i,  that  thou  sew. 
cTu  igli  dci-a,  that  he  sew. 


che  cuc-'idmo, 
che  cuc-'iate, 
che  cucl-ano, 


that  we  sew. 
that  you  sew. 
that  they  sew. 


IMPEEATIVE  MOOD. 


cuc'idmo-noi, 

let  us  sew. 

cAci  tu, 

sew  thou. 

cuc-ite  voi, 

sew  ye. 

cucia  dgli. 

let  him  sew 

cuciano  eglino, 

let  them  sew. 

REGULAR   VERBS. 


201 


Ahhorrire^  to  abhor. 


PARADIGM    OF    THOSE   VERBS    OF    THE   THIRD  CONJUGATION,    WHICH, 
IN   TELE  PRESENT   OF   THE  INDICATIVE,  END   BOTH 

IN   0   AND   ISCO. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


ahb6rr-0  orabborr-tsco,  I  abhor,  or  do  abhor. 
abbdrr-X  or  aborr-tsci,     thou  abhorrest. 
abbdrr-^  or  abborr-isc:E,  he  or  she  abhors. 


abborr-idmo,  we  abhor. 

abborr-'tte,  you  abhor. 

abbdrr-o:so  or  -ISCONO,  they  abhor. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


the  dbbdrr-A  or  -f  SCA,    that  I  abhor. 
eAea66(5n--A,-i,or-fscA,  that  thou  abhor. 
che  abborr-A  or  f  SOA,      that  he  abhor. 


che  abborr-idmo^ 
eke  abborr-idte, 
che  abborr-A^O  or  -f  S- 
CANO, 


that  we  abhor, 
that  you  abhor, 
that  they  abhor. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


abborr-l  or  abbdrr-tsci,  abhor  thou. 
abbdrr-A  or  -f  80A,  let  him  abhor. 


ahborr-idmo^  let  us  abhor. 

abborr-'ite,  abhor  ye. 

abbdrr-ANO  or  -f  SCANO,  let  them  abhor. 


202 


ITALIAN   GRAMIVIAR. 


%  Si)it0ptkal  ^aW^ 


OF  THE 

VARIATIONS  OF  THE  REGULAR  VERBS, 

Showing  their  different  Terininations  in  their  Simple  Tenses. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


[Am-]  dre. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  THIKD  CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

[Tem-]  ere.   [Cred-]  ere.  [Abborr-]  ire. 


GERUND. 

PRESENT. 

[Am-]  Indo. 

[Tem-]  endo. 
PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

[Abborr-]  endo. 

[Am-]  dnte. 

[Tem-]  ente. 
PAST. 

[Abborr-]  ente. 

[Am-]  dto,  -a, 
dti,  -€. 

[Tem-]  lito,  -a, 
liti,  -e. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

[Abborr-]  ito,  -a, 
iti,  -e. 

[Am-]  0, 

a; 

iimo, 

dte, 

ano. 

[Tem-]  0, 

e; 

idmo, 

ete, 

ono. 

IMPERFECT. 

[Abborr-]  o,  isco, 
i,  isci, 
e,  isce ; . 
idmo, 
ite, 
ono,  iscono. 

[Am-]  dva, 
dvi, 
dva; 
avdmo, 
avdte, 
dvano. 

[Tem]  eva,  ea  (ia), 
evi, 

cTa,  ea; 
evdmo, 
evdte, 
evano,  eano. 

PERFECT  DEFINITE. 

[Abborr-]  iva,  ia, 

iva,  ia; 
ivamo, 
ivate, 
ivano,  iano 

[Am-]  di,                              [Tem-]  ei,  etti, 
dsti,                                         esti, 
6  ;                                          e,  ette  (eo) ; 
Ammo,                                    emmo, 
dste,                                      este, 
drono  (dro,  dr).                   erono,  ettero  (ero). 

[Abborr-]  ii, 
isti, 
i  (io); 
immo, 
iste, 
irono. 

VARIATIONS  OF  THE  REGULAR  VERBS. 


203 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION. 
FUTUHE  INDEFINITE. 


TUIKD  CONJUGATION. 


[Am-]  eroj 
erii, 

eremo, 

erete, 

erinno. 


[Tern-]  ero, 

[Abborr-]  iro. 

er&i, 

irdi, 

eri; 

iri; 

eremo, 

iremo, 

erete, 

irete. 

era.nno. 

ir^nno. 

COKDITIONAL  MOOD. 


lAm-]  erei        (eria), 
eresti, 

erebbe    (eria) ; 
eremmo, 
ereste, 
erebbero  (eriano) 


PRESENT. 

[Tern-]  erei       (eria), 
eresti, 

erebbe  (eria) ; 
eremmo, 
ereste, 
erebbero  (eriano). 


[Abborr-]  irei        (iria), 
iresti, 

irebbe  (iria) ; 
iremmo, 
ireste, 
irebbero  (iriano) 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


[Am-]  a, 

iimo, 

^te, 

inc. 


[Tem-]  i. 

[Abborr-]  i,        isci. 

a; 

a,        isca ; 

iumo, 

idmo, 

ete, 

ite. 

ano. 

ano,    iscano 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


..Am-]  i  (e), 

i'(e); 
idmo, 
lite, 
Inc. 


[Tem-]  a, 

a,  i, 

a; 

iSxQO, 

iite, 

ano. 


[Abborr 

-]a,. 
a,  1, 
a, 

isca, 

isca,  ischi, 
isca  ; 

i&vao, 
idte, 

ano, 

iscano. 

IMPERFECT. 


[AiJ-]  4ssi, 
Assi, 
4sso; 
dssinlo, 
dste, 
^issero. 


[Tem-]  essi, 
essi, 
esse ; 
essimo, 
este, 
4ssero. 


[Abborr-]  issi, 
issi, 
isse; 
issimo, 
istc, 
issero. 


204 


ITALIAN    GRAJtIMAR. 


VARIATION   OF   PASSIVE  VERBS. 

Passive  verbs  are  formed  by  joining  the  verb  essere,  to  be,  to 
the  past  participle  of  active  verbs.  They  are,  therefore,  through 
all  their  tenses,  varied  with  the  auxiliary  verb  essere. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Essere  amato. 

PARADIGM      OF      THE      PASSIVE      VERBS. 

INPINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
issere  amdto  (m.  s.),  amdti  (p.),  to  be  loved. 
essere  anictta  (f.    s.),  amdte  (p.),  to  be  loved. 

Past. 
4ssere  stato  amdto  (m.  s.),  stdti  amdti  *  (p.),  to  have  been  loved. 
essere  stdta  a7ndta  ({.  8.),   stdte  amdte    (p.),  to  have  been  loved. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present, 
esscndo  amdto  (m.  s.),  amdti  (p.),  being  loved. 
esscndo  amdta  (f.  s.),    atndte  (p.),  being  loved. 

Past, 
essendo  stdto  amdto  (m.  s.),  stdti  amdti  (p.),  having  been  loved. 
essendo  stdta  amdta  (f.  s.),    stdte  amdte  (p  ),  having  been  loved. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
SBIPLE  TENSES. 


Present. 


5os(5noamdfo(m.),-a{f.),  I  am  loved. 
tei  amdto,  -a,  thou  art  loved, 

e  oTndto,  -a,  he  is  loved. 


to  era  amdto,  -a, 
eri  amdto,  -a, 
era  amdto,  -a, 


fid  amdto,  -a, 
fosti  amdto,  -a, 
fu  amdto,  -a, 


sard  amdto,  -a, 
sardi  amdto,  -a, 
sard  a7?idto,  -a, 


sidmo amdti (m.),-e {f.),vfe  are  loved. 
sicte  amdti,  -e,  you  are  loved. 

cgliiio  sono  amdti,         they  are  loved. 


Imperfect. 


I  was  loved, 
thou  -wast  loved, 
he  was  loved. 


eravdmo  amdti,  -e, 
eravdte  a^ndti,  -e, 
erano  amdti,  -e, 


Perfect. 


I  was  loved, 
thou  wast  loved 
he  was  loved. 


fdmmo  amdti,  -e, 
foste  amdti,  -e, 
fiirono  amdti,  -e. 

Future. 


I  shall  be  loved, 
thou  wilt  be  loved, 
he  will  be  loved. 


saremo  ayndti,  -e, 
sarcte  amdti,  -e, 
sardnno  amdti,  -e, 


we  were  loved, 
you  were  loved, 
they  were  loved 


we  were  loved, 
you  were  loved, 
they  were  loved. 


we  shall  be  loved. 
3'ou  will  be  loved, 
they  will  be  loved. 


*  The  past  participle  of  passive  verbs,  like  that  of  essere,  agrees  with  the  subject  of  the 
verb  in  gender  and  number. 


PASSIVE    VERBS. 


205 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Second  Perfect. 

to  s6no  stato  amato,  stdta  amdta,  I  have  been  loved. 
sidmo  stdti  amdti,  stdte  amdte,       we  have  been  loved. 

Pluiierfect. 
10  era  stdto  atnato,  stdta  anidta,  I  had  been  loved. 

Future  Anterior, 
sard  stdto  amdtOy  stdta  amdta,  I  shall  or  will  have  been  loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 


Present. 


io  sm  amato,  -a, 
tu  s'la  amuto,  -a, 
egli  s'la  a?ndto,  -a, 


iofossi  amdto,  -a, 
tufossi  amdto ^  -a, 
fdsse  amdto,  -a, 


that  I  be  loved, 
that  thou  be  loved, 
that  he  be  loved. 


sidmo  amdti,  -e, 
sidte  anidti,  -e, 
s'lano  amdti,  -e. 


Imperfect. 


if  I  were  loved, 
if  ■'■jhou  wert  loved. 
if  he  were  loved. 


fossimo  amdti,  -e, 
foste  amdti,  -e, 
fossero  amdti,  -e, 


that  we  be  loved, 
that  you  be  loved, 
that  they  be  loved. 


if  we  were  loved, 
if  you  were  loved, 
if  they  were  loved. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Perfect. 
10  *za  stdto  a?ndto,  stdta  amdta,  that  I  have  been  loved. 

Plui^erfect. 
iofdssi  stdto  amdto,  stdta  amdta,  if  I  had  been  loved. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 


SIMPLE  TENSE. 
Present. 


sarei  amdto,  -a, 
saresti  amdto,  -a, 
sarebbe  ajndto,  -a, 


I  should  be  loved, 
thou  wouldst  be  loved. 
he  would  be  loved. 


saremmo  amdti,  -e, 
sarcste  amdti,  -e, 
sarebbero  amdti,  -e, 


we  should  be  loved, 
you  would  beloved, 
they  would  be  loved 


COMPOUND   TENSE. 

Past, 
sarii  stdto  amdto,  stdta  amdta,  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  been  loved. 


sii  amato,  amata, 
s'la  amdto,  egli. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


be  thou  loved, 
let  him  be  loved. 


sidmo  amdti,  amdte, 
sidte  am,dti,  amdte, 
s'lano  amdti  eglino, 


let  us  be  loved. 

be  ye  loved. 

let  them  be  loved. 


Many  active  verbs  become  passive  by  taking  the  particle  si , 
as,  Domanddr?>i,  to  be  asked :  but  then  they  are  used  in  the 
tliird  person  only ;  as,  Si  domdndA,  it  is  asked :  si  e  domanddto 
it  has  been  asked ;  etc. 

18 


206 


ITALIAN    GRAJyOIAR. 


VARIATION  OF  NEUTER  VERBS. 


Neuter  verbs  are  generally  varied  with  the  auxiliary  verb 
essere,  to  be,  according  to  the  conjugation  to  which  they  belong. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Partire. 

PARADIGM  OF  THE  NEUTER  VERBS. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
partire,  to  depart. 

Past, 
issere  partita  (m.  s.),  partiti  (p.),  partita  (f  s.),  partite  (p.),*  to  hare  departed 


Present, 
partendo, 

departing. 

GERUND. 

essendo  partite 

Past. 
),        having  departed 

PARTICIPLE. 

partdnie  (m.  s.), 

departing. 

Present. 

1    partenti{T^.), 

departing. 

partito  (m.  s.), 
partita  (f.  s.), 

departed, 
departed. 

Pi 

ISt. 

partiti  (p.), 
partite  (p.), 

departed, 
departed. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

pdrto, 
partti. 

Present. 

I  depart. 

Perfect. 

I  departed. 

SIMPT<-R 

TENSES. 
10  partiva, 

partird, 

Impel  feet. 
I  departed. 

Future. 

I  shall  or  will  depart 

*  The  past  participle  of  the  neuter  verbs  that  are  varied  with  essere,  agrees  with  tb« 
subject  of  the  verb  in  gender  and  number. 


NEUTER    VERBS.  207 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Second  Perfect.  |  Pluperfect. 

io  sdno  partita,  -a,      I  haye  departed.  |     io  era  partita,  -a,     I  had  departed. 


Second  Pluperfect. 
fHi  partita,  -a,  I  had  departed. 


Future  Anterior, 
sard  partita,  -a,       I  shall  have  departed 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


SIMPLE  TENSES. 


Present, 
che  io  p&rta^  that  I  depart. 


Imperfect, 
che  io  partissi,  if  I  departed. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Perfect.  I  Pluperfect, 

the  io  sia  partita,  -a,   that  I  have  departed.   |     che  iafdssi  partita,  -a,    if  I  had  departed 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD., 

SIMPLE  TENSE. 

Past. 

pcurtirH,  I  should,  would,  or  could  depart,  or  might  depart. 

COMPOUND   TENSE. 

Present. 

sarii  partita,  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  departed,  or  might  hare  departed. 


IMPEEATIVE  MOOD. 
p&rti  tu,  depart  then. 


208  ITALIAN    GRAMaiAR. 


VARIATION  OF   PRONOMINAL  VERBS. 

Pronominal  verbs  are  varied  with  the  auxiliary  essere,  to  be, 
according  to  the  conjugation  to  which  their  termination  belongs. 


Variation  of  the  Reflective  Verb  Pentirsi. 

PAKADIGM  OF  THE  PRONOMINAL  VERBS. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Present, 
pentirsi,  to  repent  one's  self. 


Past. 


isser-si  pent'itOf         to  have  repented  one's 
self. 


GERUND. 


Present, 
pentdndo-si,  repenting  one's  self. 


Past. 


essendo-si  pent'ito,   having  repented  one's 
self. 


PARTICIPLE. 

Present, 
pentcnte-si  (s.),  repenting  one's  self. 

Past. 

pent'ito-si  (m.  s.),  pentiti-si  (p.),  having  repented  one's  self. 
pent'ita-si  (f.  s.),   pentite-si  (p.),  having  repented  one's  self. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 
Present. 


io  mi  pdnto,  I  repent  myself. 

ti  penti,  thou  repentest  thyself. 

si  pente,  he  repents  himself. 


noi  cipentidmo,      we  repent  ourselves. 
vipent'ite,  you  repent  yourselves. 

si  pentono,  they  repent  themselves. 


Imperfect, 
mi  pentiva,  I  repented  myself. 


Perfect, 
mi  pen  tii,  I  repented  myself. 


Future. 
mi  pentird,  I  shall  repent  myself. 


PRONOMINAL    VERBS.  209 


COMPOUND   TENSES. 


Second  Perfect. 


mivdno  pent'Uo,  -a,      I  have  repented  my- 
self. 

Second  Pluperfect, 
mifiiipent'ito,  -a,        I  had  repented  myself. 


Pluperfect, 
mi  era  pent'ito^  -a,    I  had  repented  myself. 

Future  Anterior. 

mi  sard  pentito,  -a,  I  shall  or  will  have  re- 
pented myself. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

SBIPLE  TENSES. 
Present.  Imperfect. 

che  mi  penta,  that  I  repent  myself.        che  mi  pentissi,         if  I  repented  myselt 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Perfect. 

ehe  mi  s'lapent'ito^  -a,  that  I  have  repented 

myself. 


Pluperfect. 


che  mi  fossi  pent'i-   if  I  had  repented  my 
io,  -a,  self. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSE. 

Present. 

mi  pentirei,  I  should,  would,  or  could  repent  myself. 

COMPOUND  TENSE. 

Past. 

mi  sarei  pentito,  -a,  I  should,  would,  or  could  have  repented  myself. 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


penti-tt,  repent  thyself. 

sipenta  or  penta-si,  let  him  repent  himself. 


pentidm.o-ci^  let  us  repent  ourselves. 

pent'ite-vi,  repent  yourselves. 

St  pentano,  or  let  them  repent  them- 
pcntan-si,  selves. 


A  great  number  of  active  and  neuter  verbs  may  become  pro- 
nominal by  the  addition  of  the  conjunctive  pronouns  mi,  ti,  si, 
&c.,  either  in  the  objective  or  in  the  relation  of  attribution :  and 
then  these  verbs  are  varied  with  the  auxiliary  essere,  to  be ;  as, 
Loddre,  to  praise  ;  dare,  to  give  ;  tacere,  to  keep  silent :  — 

mi  sdno  data  un  cdlpo,  I  have  given  [to]  myself  a  blow. 

ti  sei  ddto  per  vinto,  thou  hast  given  thyself  up  as  conquered. 

si  e  loddto,  he  has  praised  himself. 

ci  sidmo  taciuti,  we  have  kept  ourselves  silent. 

Usage,  however,  in  some  instances,  allows  us  also  to  employ 
the  auxiliary  avere,  to  have  :  but  then  the  conjunctive  pronouns 
mi,  ti,  si,  are  always  in  the  relation  of  attribution ;  as,  — 

m^/o  sdno  or  ?»e/'  ho  goduio,  I  have  enjoyed  it. 

telo  se'i  or  tel'  hai  creduto,  thou  hast  believed  it. 

set'  e  or  seV  ha  bevuto,  he  has  drunk  it. 

18* 


210 


IT^iLIAN    GRAMMAR. 


VAEIATION   OF  UNIPERSONAL  VERBS. 

Unipersonal  verbs  are   generally  varied  with   the   auxiliaij' 
avere,  to  have,  according  to' the  conjugation  to  which  they  belong. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Pi6vere. 


PARADIGM   OF    THE    UNIPERSONAL   VERBS. 


pidvere^ 


INEINITIVE   MOOD. 

Present.  I  Past. 

to  rain.  1     av6re  piovuto,  to  have  Huned. 


GERUND. 

piovindo, 

Present. 
raining. 

Past, 
avindo  ptoviito,      having  rained. 

• 

PARTICIPLE. 

Past, 
piovuto,  rained. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 

fidve, 

Present. 
it  raina. 

piov^vOf 

Imperfect. 
it  rained. 

piovi^  jnovette^ 

Perfect. 
it  rained. 

pioverd, 

Future. 

it  will  rain. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 

.  Second  Perfect.  I  Pluperfect. 

ha  piovuto,  it  has  rained.    .  |     avcva  piovuto,         it  had  rained. 


Second  Pluperfect. 
Abe  piovuto,  it  had  rained. 


Future  Anterior, 
avrd  piovuto,  it  will  have  rained 


UNIPERSONAL   VERBS. 


211 


ehe  pi6  va^ 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

SEVIPLE  TENSES. 


Present. 

that  it  rains. 


Imperfect, 
che  piovisse^  if  it  rained. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Perfect. 


the  abbla  piovuto,         that  it  has  rained.  che  avesse  piovuto,   if  it  had  rained. 


Plujierfect. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SIMPLE   TENSE. 

Present. 

pioverebbe  (piover'ia),  it  woiild  or  could  rain,  or  might  rain. 

COMPOUND   TENSE. 

Past, 
avrebbe  piovuto,  it  would  or  could  have  rained,  or  might  have  rained. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

pidva,  let  it  rain.  . 


The  following  are  the  uniperscnal  verbs  most  in  use :  — 


aycjiornare^ 

annottdre^ 

balendre, 

lampeggidre, 

tuondre, 

nenicdre, 

gramlindre, 

tempestdre, 

piovere, 

diluvidrej 


to  be  day. 

geldre, 

to  freeze. 

to  grow  night. 

ghiaccidre, 

»»     11 

to  lighten. 

dighiaccidre, 

to  thaw. 

»     »? 

farfrklxk)^ 

to  be  cold. 

to  thunder. 

far  chidro, 

to  be  light. 

to  snow. 

far  buio, 

to  be  dark. 

to  hail. 

far  cdldo, 

to  be  hot. 

??     9? 

far  vento, 

to  be  windy. 

to  rain. 

far  huon  tempo, 

to  be  good  weather 

to  rain  very  hard, 

far  cattivo  tempo, 

to  be  bad  weather. 

to  deluge. 

jEssere,  to  be,  is  also  used  unipersonally,  both  in  the  singular  and 
plural,  when  it  is  joined  to  the  particles  ci  or  vi ;  as,  JEsserci  or 
esservi,  to  be  here,  or  to  be  there.     It  is  varied  as  follows :  — 


212  ITALIAN   GRA^EVIAR. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Essere,  unipersonally  used. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
isser-ci  or  ^sser-vi,  to  be  here,  or  to  be  there. 

Past, 
isser-ci  or  esser-vi  stato  (m.  s.),  (stati  (p.),  stdta  (f.  s.),  state  (p.),  to  have  been  there 

GERUND. 

Present, 
essendo-ci,  or  essendo-vi,  there  being. 

Past, 
essdndo-ci  or  ess&ndo-vi  stato  (m.  s.),  stati  (p.),  stata  (f.  s.),  state  (p.),  there  having  been. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 
Present. 
s'  i  or  V'  if  here  is,  or  there  is.       |    ci  sdno  or  vi  sdno,  there  are. 

Imperfect. 
c'  ^o  or  ■»'  ^a,  there  was.  |     c'  erano  or  v^  erano,  there  were. 

Perfect. 
eifuotvifUf  there  was.  |    ci  furono  or  vi  ft'irono,     there  were. 

Future. 
d  sard  or  vi  sard,         there  shall  be.  |     ci  saranno  or  vi  sardnno,  there  shall  be. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Second  Perfect. 

c'  e  or  «'  ^  s«d<o  (m.),  -a  (f.),  there  has  been. 

ci  s6no  or  vi  sdno,  stdti  (m.),  -e  (f.),  there  have  been. 

Pluperfect. 
c'  era  or  ^•'  era  sJdZo,  -a,  there  had  been. 

c^drano  or  v^  erano  stdti  -e,  there  had  been. 

Future  Anterior. 
ei  sard  or  vi  sard  state,  -a,  there  will  have  been. 

ci  sard7ino  or  vi  sardnno  stdti,  -e,  there  will  have  been. 


UNIPERSONAL    VERBS.  213 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

SIMPLE   TENSES. 
Present. 

the  ci  sia  or  vi  sm,  that  there  be  or  may  be. 

che  ci  siano,  vi  s'lano  or  ci  s'leno,  vi  s'teno,        that  there  he  or  may  be. 

Iinperfect. 

ci  fdsse  or  vi  fosse,  if  there  were  or  should  be. 

ci  fdssero  or  vi  fdssero,  if  there  were  or  should  be. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
FerJ'ect. 

ci  s'la  or  vi  s'la  stdto,  -a,  that  there  has  been. 

ci  s'lano  or  vi  s'lano  stdti,  -e,  that  there  have  been  or  may  have  been. 

Plu])erfect. 

ci  fdsse  or  vi  fdsse  stdto,  -a,  if  there  had  been. 

ci  fdssero  or  vi  fdssero  stdti,  -e,  if  there  had  been. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

SDIPLE  TENSE. 
Present. 

ci  sarcbbe  or  vi  sarclbe,  there  should,  would,  or  could  be,  or  might  be 

ci  sarebbero  or  vi  sarcbbero,  there  should,  would,  or  could  be,  or  might  be 

COMPOUND  TENSE. 
Past. 

ci  sarebbe  or  vi  sarcbbe  stdto,  -a,  there  should,  would,  or  could  have  been. 

d  sarebbero  or  vi  sarebbero  sldti,  -e,  there  should,  would,  or  could  have  been. 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

ci  s'la,  vi  s'la,  or  s'm-ci,  s'la-vi,  let  there  be. 

ci  siano,  vi  s'leno,  or  s'lan-ci,  s'len-vi,  let  there  be. 


The  verb  avere,  to  have,  is  often  substituted  for  the  verb  essere 
when  unipersonally  used,  and  then  it  is  varied  after  the  same 
manner  ;  as,  Averci  or  avervi,  to  be  here  or  to  be  there  ;  ci  ha  or 
vi  ha,  here  is  or  there  is  ;  ci  hdnno  or  vi  hcmno,  there  are ;  etc. 

The  verb  avere  not  only  may  be  used  with  propriety  for  the 
verb  essere,  but  it  is  also  elegantly  used  in  the  singular,  although 
the  noun  to  which  it  is  joined  is  in  the  plural ;  as,  Qiiante  mujlia 
ci  HA?  how  many  miles  is  it?  ebbkvi  molti  uomini,  there  were 
a  great  many  men  there ;  etc. 

To  express  in  Italian  "  here  or  there  is  some  of  it,"  "  here  or 
there  are  some  of  them,"  we  join  the  particle  ne,  of  it,  of  them, 
to  ci  or  vi,  and  say,  essercene  or  esservene. 


214 


ITALIAN   GRAjNOIAE. 


f rr^gxtlar    B txh^. 


The  irregularities  of  Italian  Verbs  are  chiefly  confined  to  the 
perfect  tense  of  the  indicative  mood,  and  to  the  past  participle. 

Some  verbs,  however,  are  also  irregular  in  the  present  of  the 
indicative ;  and  then  they  are  irregular  likewise  in  the  present  of 
the  subjunctive  and  in  the  imperative. 

When  verbs  are  contracted  in  the  infinitive  mood,  they  are 
contracted  also  in  the  future  tense  and  in  the  conditional  mood. 

In  those  tenses  in  which  verbs  are  irregular,  the  irregularity, 
generally,  does  not  extend  to  all  the  persons.  Thus,  with  very 
few  exceptions,  in  the  perfect  of  the  indicative,  the  second  person 
singular,  and  the  first  and  second  persons  plural ;  and  in  the 
present  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  imperative, 
the  first  and  second  persons  plural,  —  are  regular. 

In  the  variation  of  these  verbs,  we  will  give  only  those  tenses 
in  which  they  depart  from  the  paradigms  already  given,  to  which 
we  must  refer  for  the  formation  of  the  other  tenses.  The  per- 
sons which  are  irregular  are  here  printed  in  small  capitals. 

For  the  assistance  of  learners,  we  have  added  to  each  verb 
the  auxiliary  with  which  it  is  varied  in  its  compound  tenses. 


VARIATION    OF    THE    IRREGULAR    VERBS    OF 
THE    FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

There  are  but  four  simple  verbs  in  the  first  conjugation,  which 
are  not  varied  like  amare  ;  viz. :  — 


anddre, 

to  go. 

fare, 

to  do,  or  to  make. 

dare, 

to  give 

stare. 

to  be,  to  dwell,  to 
stand,  or  to  stay. 

ERKEGULAR   VERBS. 


215 


Anddre  (varied  with  Essere). 
IKFINITIVE  MOOD. 

anddre,  to  go. 

GERUM). 

anddndo,  going. 

PARTICIPLE. 
anddto,  gone. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


vo  or  VlDO,* 

I  go  or  am  going. 

andidmo, 

we  go. 

vAi, 

thou  goest. 

anddte, 

you  go. 

VA. 

he  goes. 

vAnno, 

they  go 

Future, 
andro  (by  contraction  for  andero)^  I  shall  or  will  go. 


lo  vAda, 

tu  vAt)A  (t'drft), 

egli  vAda, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  go  or  may  go. 
that  thou  go. 
that  he  go. 


andidmo, 

andiute, 

vAdano, 


that  we  go. 
that  you  go. 
that  they  go. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 
andrdi  {andria),  by  contraction  for  anderei  (anderm),  I  should,  would,  or  could  go. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


VA  (rd')  tu, 
vAda  egli, 


go  thou, 
let  him  go. 


andidino  ndi, 
atiddte  vdi, 
vAdano  cglino, 


let  us  go. 

go  ye. 

let  them  go. 


Anddre  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  conjunctive  pronouns 
mi,  ti,  St.,  ci,  vi,  and  the  particle  ne ;  thus,  me  ne  vo,  I  go  hence ; 
TE  NE  vdi,  thou  goest  hence ;  etc.  Me,  te,  etc.,  are  then  mere 
expletives. 

JRianddre,  signifying  to  examine,  or  to  go  over  again ;  and 
trasanddre,  to  go  beyond,  —  are  regular  and  varied  like  amdre. 


*  Ajiddre  is  also  a  defective  verb,  and  borrows  these  forms  from  the  Latin  verb  vddere. 


216 


ITALIAN   GRA3HMAR. 


Ddre  (varied  with  Avere), 
IKFINITIVE  MOOD. 

dare,  to  give. 

GERUND. 

ddndo,  giving. 

PARTICIPLE. 

ddto,  given. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


do, 

DAI, 

dd. 

I  give  or  am  giving, 
thou  givest. 
he  gives. 

didmo, 

date, 

dAnno, 

we  give, 
you  give, 
they  give. 

DisTTi  or  di:6di, 

DlfcSTI, 

d:&tte  or  de&de, 

Per 

I  gave  or  did  give, 
thou  gavest. 
he  gave. 

fed. 

d:emmo,                           we  gave. 
DESTE,                              you  gave. 
DETTERO  or  Di^DERO,  they  gave. 

Future. 

DARd,  I  shall  or  -will  give 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 

io  Df  A, 

tu  Df  A  or  Df  I, 

igli  Df  A, 

that  I  give, 
that  thou  give, 
that  he  give. 

diamo^ 

diate, 

Df  ANO  or  Df  ENO, 

that  we  give, 
that  you  give, 
that  they  give 

ImjJerfect. 
io  d£ssi,  if  I  gave  or  should  give. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 
•nA-R-fcT  [daria),  I  should,  woiild,  or  could  give,  or  might  give. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


dd  (da'>)  tu, 
Df  A  egli, 


give  thou, 
let  him  give. 


diamo  ndi, 
date  v6i, 
DfANO, 


let  us  give. 

give  ye. 

let  them  give. 


The  compounds  of  ddre  —  as,  riddre,  to  give  again ;  adddrsi, 
to  devote  one's  self ;  etc.  —  have  the  same  irregularities. 


IKKEGULAR    VEKBS. 


217 


fo  (fdccio), 
fAi  ifdci), 
fa  {face), 


Vkci  ifei), 
PACESTI  (jcsti), 
FJ&CE  {fe\fco), 


to  fAcoia, 
tu  fIccia, 
egli  fAccIA, 


Fare  (^varied  with  Avdre). 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 
fAke  {fdcere)^*  to  do,  or  to  make. 

GERUND. 

facendo,  doing. 

PARTICIPLE. 

fAtto,  done. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


I  do  or  am  doing, 
thou  doest. 
he  does. 


facciAmo, 

fate, 

fAnno  {fan), 


Imperfect, 
io  faccva  or  facca  {fea),  I  did  or  was  doing 

Perfect. 

T  did.  '  facemmo  {feinmo), 

thou  didst.  faceste  (feste), 

he  did.  fecero  {ferono), 

Future. 
FARo,  I  shall  or  will  do. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  T  do  or  may  do. 
that  thou  do. 
that  he  do. 


facciAmo, 
facciAte, 
fAcciano, 


Imperfect. 
10  facessi  {fcssi),  if  I  did  or  should  do. 


we  do, 
you  do. 
they  do. 


we  did. 
you  did. 
they  did 


that  we  do. 
that  you  do. 
that  they  do. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 
FAR:6i  {faria,fare''),  I  should,  would,  or  could  do,  or  might  do. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


fa  {fa?)  tu, 
fAccia  pigli, 


do  thou, 
let  him  do. 


facciAmo, 

fate, 

fAcciano, 


let  us  do 

do  ye. 

let  them  do. 


The  compounds  of  fare  —  as,  assuefdre,  to  accustom  ;  confdre, 
to  suit,  to  agree  ;  coritrajfdre,  to  mimic,  to  imitate  ;  disfdre,  to 
undo  ;  misfdre,  to  do  wrong ;  etc.  —  have  the  same  irregularities. 
Sodisfdre,  or  soddisfdre.  to  satisfy,  is  both  regular  and  irregular. 

*  This  verb  belongs  properly  to  the  second  conjugation  ;  it  being  but  a  contraction  of 
fdcere,  now  become  obsolete,  of  which  it  retains  many  of  the  forms. 

19 


218 


ITALIAN    GRAMIMAK. 


Stdre  {varied  with  Essere). 

INriNITIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
Stdre,  to  stand,  to  stay,  to  dwell,  or  to  be. 


GEKIIND. 

stando,  standing'. 

PARTICIPLE. 

stdto,  stood. 

IKDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 

sto, 
btAi, 

StUf 

I  stand, 
thou  standest. 
he  stands. 

stidmo. 
state, 
ST  Anno, 

■we  stand, 
you  stand, 
they  stand 

Perfect. 

BTfiTTI  (Stdi), 
BTJ&STI, 
BTJETTE  {Sti), 

I  stood, 
thou  stoodst. 
he  stood. 

STIJMMO, 
STi:STE, 
STETTERO  (s«<*ro). 

■we  stood, 
you  stood, 
they  stood. 

Future. 

STAKo,  I  shall 

or  -will  stand. 

to  STf  A, 

tu  STf  A  or  STf  I, 

4gH  STf  A, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  stand, 
that  thou  stand, 
that  he  stand. 


stidmo,  that  we  stand 

stidte,  that  you  stand 

STf  AND  or  STf  END,     that  they  stand 


Imperfect. 
h.0  BT^SSI,  if  I  stood  or  should  stand. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 
BTAKfel  {star\a),  I  should,  -would,  or  could  stand,  or  might  stand. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


vta  (5fd')  <M, 
BTf  A  cgli. 


stand  thou, 
let  him  stand. 


stiamo,  let  us  stand. 

state,  stand  ye. 

STf  AND  or  STf  END  egUno,  let  them  stand. 


jr 


X 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


219 


Stare  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  conjunctive  pronouns,  mi, 
ti,  SI,  etc.,  and  the  particle  ne :  thus,  me  ne  sto,  I  remain  here  ; 
TE  NE  stdi,  thou  remainest  here ;  etc.  Me,  te,  etc.,  are  then  mere 
expletives. 

Gontrastare,  signifying  to  deny,  to  dispute  ;  soprastdre  or  so- 
i^rastdre,  signifying  to  stand  over,  to  threaten  ;  ostdre,  to  oppose  ; 
r( sfr-re.,  to  remain,  —  are  regular^  and  are  varied  hke  amdre. 

The  foregoing  verbs,  anddre,  dare,  fdre,  and  stdre,  in  all  those 
forms  in  wliich,  when  they  are  simple,  they  make  but  one  sylla- 
ble, have,  in  their  compounds,  the  grave  accent  on  the  last 
by  liable  ;  as,  vo,  da,  fe\  sta  :  Rivo,  I  go  again  ;  rida,  he  gives 
back  again  ;    disfe\  he  destroyed ;   itistd,  entreat  thou ;   etc. 


VARIATION  OF  THE   IRREGULAR  VERBS   OF  THE 
SECOND   CONJUGATION. 

Var{atio7i  of  the  Irregulai^  Verbs  hi  ere  (long). 
The  simple  irregular  verbs  in  ere  (long)  are  the  following, 


VIZ. : 


cad&e, 

dissuad&e, 

dol^re, 

dov&e, 

giac&e, 

par&e, 

persnad^re, 

piac&e, 

pot&e, 


to  fall. 

rimanere, 

to  remain. 

to  dissuade. 

sap€re, 

to  know. 

to  grieve. 

sed&e, 

to  sit  down. 

to  owe. 

tac€re, 

to  be  or  keep  silent. 

to  lie  down. 

tenere, 

to  hold. 

to  seem. 

val€re, 

to  be  worth. 

to  persuade. 

vedere, 

to  see. 

to  please. 

voUrCy 

to  wish,  to  will,  or 

to  be  able . 

to  be  wilhng. 

220 


ITALIA:^    GRAJUMAil. 


tado  (cag^io), 

tadi^ 

tdde, 


Cadere  {yai^ied  with  Essere). 
INFmiTIVE  MOOD. 


I  fall. 

thou  faUest 
he  falls. 


cAddi  {cadci,cad^tti),  I  fell. 
cadesti,  thou  fellest 

cAdde  {cadeo),  he  fell. 


cadere,  to  fall. 

PARTICIPLE. 

cadiito,  fallen. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 

cadiamo  [caggidmv), 

cadcte, 

cddono  {cdggiono). 

Perfect. 

cadcmmo, 

cadcste, 

cAdder©  {cadero,  cader),  they  fell. 

Futwe. 
cadero  {cadro),  I  shall  or  will  fall. 


we  fall, 
you  faU 
they  ML 


we  fell, 
you  fell. 


lo  cdda, 
tu  cdda, 
4sli  cdda, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  fall  or  may  fall, 
that  thou  fall, 
that  he  fall. 


cadiamo  {caggidmo), 
cadidte  (caggidte), 
cddano  {cdggiano), 


that  we  fall, 
that  you  fall, 
that  they  fall. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

^     Present. 
caderei  {cadrdi,  cader'ia,  cadr'ia),  T  should,  would,  or  could  fall,  or  exiight  fJEill. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 
.  cadi  tu,  fall  thou. 


Dissuaddre  (varied  with  either  Av^re  or  Essere). 


DissuAsi, 

dissiindcsti, 

dissttAse, 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

dissuadere,  to  dissuade 

PARTICIPLE. 

DISSTjAso,  dissuaded. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Perfect. 

dissuadcmmo, 


I  dissuaded, 
thou  dissuadest 
he  dissuaded. 


dissundcstei 
DISSUASERO, 


we  dissuaded, 
you  dissuaded, 
they  dissuaded. 


Dissuad'^re,  properly  speaking,  is  a  compound  of  the  Latin  verb  suad^re,  as 
well  as  persuadere,  to  persuade,  which  has  the  same  irregularities. 


IllREGULAli    VERBS. 


221 


Dol^re  {varied  ^vith  Essere,  mid  the  Conjunctive  Pro- 

nouns,  mi,  ti,  si,  etc.). 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

(loler-si,  to  grieve. 

PARTICIPLE. 

doluto-sif  grieved. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


mi  D(5lgo  {ddglio)^     I  grieve. 

ti  DU(3li,  thou  grievest. 

si  DU(3le  {ddle),  he  grieves. 


ci  doqliAmo  {dolemo),    we  grieve. 
vi  delete,  you  grieve. 

si  D(5lgono  {ddgliono),    they  grieve. 


mi  d6lsi, 
ti  dolesti, 
si  D(3l.S£, 


Perfect. 


I  grieved, 
thou  grievedst. 
he  grieved. 


ci  dolcmmo, 
vi  doleste, 
si  d6lsero, 


we  grieved, 
you  grieved, 
they  grieved. 


Future, 
dorrd  (by  contraction  for  dolerd  *),  I  shall  or  will  grieve. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


mi  d6lga  {ddgUa),    that  I  grieve. 
ti  D(5lga  (doglia),       that  thou  grieve. 
si  DCiLGA  {ddglia),      that  he  grieve. 


ci  dogliAmo,  that  we  grieve. 

vi  dogliAte,  that  you  grieve 

si  D(5lgako  (ddgliano),    that  they  grieve. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 
dorrH  (dorr'ia),  by  contraction  for  dolerei  (dolena),f  I  should,  would,  or  could  grieve. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


Dv6l,l-ti,  grieve  thou. 

si  D(5lgA  (ddglia),      let  him  grieve. 


dogliAmg-ci,  let  us  grieve. 

dolcte-vi,  grieve  ye. 

si  DOLGANO  (ddgliano),     let  them  grieve 


The  compounds  of  doUre  —  as,  condoUre,  to  condole,  etc.  — 


have  the  same  irregularities. 


*  To  distinguish  it  from  dolerd,  future  of  the  verb  doldre,  to  defraud, 
t  To  distin,!,niish  thum  from  dokrci  (dolerm),  forms  of  the  couditioual  of  the  verb 
dolare^  to  defraud. 


222 


IT.VLIAN    GRAMMAR. 


Dov^re  (varied  with  Avere). 


INEINITIVE   MOOD. 

dovere  {devere  *),  to  owe. 

PARTICIPLE 
dovutOf  owed. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


aevo  or  D^BBO  {dcggio),   I  owe. 
dcvi  {del),  thou  owest. 

deve  or  DBBBE  {dee  de'),   he  owes. 


dobbiAmo  {debbidmo),      we  owe. 
dovcte,  you  owe. 

dcvono  or  debbono,         they  owe. 


Perfect, 
dovei  or  dovetti,  I  owed. 

Future, 
doverd  or  dovrd^  I  shall  or  will  owe. 


io  d:6bba  {deggia), 
tu  DEBBA  (deggia), 
egli  D£BBA  {deggia), 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


that  I  owe. 
that  thou  owe. 
that  he  owe. 


PreseHi. 

dobbiAmo  (deggiumo),  that  we  owe. 

dobbiAte  {deggidte),  that  you  owe. 

debbano  (deggiano),  that  they  owe. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present, 
doverei  or  dovrei  {doveria  or  dovria),  I  should,  would,  or  could  owe,  or  might  owe. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD    (wanting). 


*  The  Latin  debere,  from  which  dovere  derives  some  of  its  forms. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


223 


Giac^re  (varied  with  either  Avere  or  Essere). 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

giacere,  to  lie  down. 

PARTICIPLE. 


giaciuto,  lain  down. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present. 


GI.^OCIO, 

I  lie  down. 

giacciAmo, 

we  lie  douTi. 

giaci, 
glare, 

thou  liest  down, 
he  lies  down. 

giaccte, 
GIACCIONO, 

you  lie  down, 
they  lie  down. 

Perfect. 

GlACQUI, 

giaccsti, 

GlACQUE, 

I  laj'  down, 
thou  layest  down 
he  lay  down. 

giachnmo, 

giaccste, 

GlACQUERO, 

we  lay  down, 
you  lay  down, 
they  lay  down 

10  GlACCIA, 
tu  GIACCIA, 
egli  GlAcciA, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


that  I  lie  down, 
that  thou  lie  down, 
that  he  he  down. 


giacciAmo, 

giacctdte, 
GlACCIANO, 


that  we  lie  down, 
that  you  lie  down, 
that  they  he  down. 


giaci  tu, 
GiAcciA  ^gli, 


IMPEEATIVE  MOOD. 


He  thon  down, 
let  him  lie  down. 


giacciAmo  ndi, 
giacete  voi, 
GlAcciANO  eglino, 


let  us  lie  down. 

lie  ye  down. 

let  them  he  down. 


The  compounds  of  giacere  (as,  soggiacere,  to  be  subject,  etc.), 
as  well  as  piacere  and  its  compounds  {compiacere^  to  please  ; 
dispiacere^  to  displease  ;  etc.),  have  the  same  irregularities. 

Piacere^  and  its  compounds  compiacere,  etc.,  in  the  second  per- 
son plural  of  the  t)resent  of  the  subjunctive,  and  in  the  second 
person  plural  of  the  imperative  mood,  make  PiACCiiTt:,  etc. 


224 


1T.\XIAK    GliAJil^lAE. 


pAio, 

pan, 
pare  {par). 


tAkvi  (pdrsi)f 
paresti, 
pAkve  {parse), 


Parere  (varied  with  Essere). 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

parere,  to  seem. 

PARTICIPLE. 

paruto  {pa  so),  seemed. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


I  seem, 
thou  seemest. 
he  seems. 


I  seemed, 
thou  seemedst. 
he  seemed. 


pariamo, 

parete, 

pdrono,  or  pAiONO, 


Perfect. 


parcmmo, 

pareste, 

pArvero  {pdrsero), 


Tve  seem, 
you  seem, 
they  seem. 


we  seemed, 
you  seemed, 
they  seemed. 


Future. 


parrd  (by  contraction  for  parero  *),  I  shall  or  will  seem. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


io  pAia, 

that  I  seem. 

pariamo, 

that  we  seem. 

tu  pAia, 

that  thou  seem 

jmridte. 

that  you  seem. 

^li  pAia, 

that  he  seem. 

pAiano, 

that  they  seem. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present, 
parrdi  {parr'ia),  by  contraction  for  parerei  {parerta\),  I  should,  would,  or  could  seem. 


pari  tu, 
pAia  egli. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


seem  thou, 
let  him  seem. 


paridmo  n6i, 
parcte  voi, 
pAiano  eglino, 


Persuad^re. 

{See  "  Dissuadere,"  p.  220.) 

Piacere. 

(See  "Giacere,"  p.  223.) 


let  us  seem. 

seem  je. 

let  them  seem. 


*  To  distinguish  it  from  parero,  future  of  the  verb  pardre,  to  parrj^,  to  adorn. 
t  To  distinguish  them  from  parerei  {parer'ia),  corresponding  forms  of  the  verb  pardro 
to  parry,- etc. 


IRREGULAPw    VERBS.  225 


Pot^re  (varied  with  either  Av^re  or  Essere) 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

PoterCf  to  be  able. 

PARTICIPLE. 

potiito,  been  able. 

.    INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present. 

P(5fSO.  I  am  able.  I    possiAmo,  we  are  able. 

PTJ(5l  (piid''),  thou  art  able.  potcte,  you  are  able. 

-pvo  {pu6te,pdte),       he  is  able.  |     P(3ssoxo  (p(5nno),  they  are  able 

Future, 
potro  (by  contraction  for  poterd\*  I  shall  or  will  be  able. 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present. 
p6ssa,  that  I  be  able,  or  may  be  able. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 


potrH  (potr'ia)^  by  contraction  for  poterei 
{poter'ia,^  poria), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  be  able,  or  might 
be  able. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD    (wanting). 


*  To  disting\iish  it  from  poterd,  future  of  the  verb  potdre,  to  prune, 
t  To  distinguish  them  from  poterei  {poter'ia),  corresponding  forms  of  the  verb  potare^ 
to  prune. 


22Q 


IT^yLIAN    GRAMMAR. 


Riinan^re  (^varied  with  Essere). 


INEINITIVE  MOOD. 

rimanere,  to  remain. 

PARTICIPLE. 

KImAsto  (ri7ndso),  remained. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present. 


rimAngo  (rimdgno),     I  remain. 
rimdni^  thou  remainest. 

rinidne,  he  remains. 


rijnanidmo^ 

rimancte, 

kimAagono, 


Perfect. 


rimAsi, 

rimancsti^ 

rimAse. 


I  remained, 
thou  remainedst. 
ho  remained. 


nmancmmo^ 

rimaiicste^ 

rimAseko, 


we  remain, 
you  remain, 
they  remain. 


we  remained, 
you  remained, 
they  remained 


Future, 
rimarro  (by  contraction  for  rimanerd)^  I  shall  or  will  remain. 


SUEJUNCTIYE  MOOD 


Present. 


to  rimAnga  {rimagna),  that  T  remain. 
tu  rimAnga  (rhndgna),  that  thou  remain. 
egli  rimAnga,  that  he  remain. 


rttnaniamo, 

rlmanidte. 

rimAkgano, 


that  we  remain, 
that  you  remain, 
that  they  remain. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 


Present. 


nniarrei  {rimama),  by  contraction  for  ri- 
manerei  [nmanena), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  remain,  or  might 
remain. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


rimdni  tu, 
rimAnga  cgliy 


remain  thou, 
let  him  remain. 


rhnanidmo  nOt,  let  us  remain 

rhnanrte  v6i,  remain  ye. 

rijiAngano  c'g-Zmo,  let  them  remain 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


227 


so, 

sAi, 

SA  (sape), 


sapesttf 


Sap^re  (^varied  with  Av^re). 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

sapdre,  to  know. 

PARTICIPLE. 

saputo,  known. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


I  know, 
thou  knowest. 
he  knows. 


I  knew, 
thou  knewest 
he  knew. 


8APP1AMO, 
saj/cle, 
6  An  NO, 


Perfect. 


sapcmmo, 

sapcste, 

8:£PPERO, 


we  know, 
you  know, 
they  know. 


we  knew, 
you  knew, 
they  knew. 


Ftiture. 
sapro  (by  contraction  for  sapero),  I  shall  or  will  know. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
to  sAppia,  that  I  know,  or  may  know. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 


saprei  (sapria),  by  contraction  for  saperci 
(saperia), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  know,  or  miffht 
know. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


pAppi  tu, 
bAppia  egli, 


know  thou 
let  him  know. 


SAPPiA.'Nro  nd/,        let  us  know. 
SAPPiAte  voi,         know  ye. 
sappiAno  cglinoj    let  them  know. 


The  compounds  of  sapere  —  as  risapere,  to  learn,  or  to  come 
to  know  —  follo^it'  the  same  irrejxiilarities. 


228 


ITALIAN    GKAMINLIR. 


Seddre  (^varied  with  Avere). 
INEINITIVE  MOOD. 

sedere  {seggere  *),  to  sit  down. 

GERUND. 

%edendo  (seggcndo),  sitting. 


PARTICIPLE. 

seduto,  seated. 

INDICATI\'E   MOOD. 

Present. 

BIEDO  or  8i:GGO, 

8IEDI, 

BIEDE  {sede), 

I  sit. 

thou  sittest. 

he  sits. 

sedidmo^ 

sedcte, 

SIEDONO, 

we  sit. 
you  sit. 
they  sit. 

Peiifect. 
sedei  or  sedctti,  I  sat. 

Future. 

sedero  {sedro),  I  shall  or  will  sit. 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present. 


io  SIEDA  or  si&GGA,    that  I  sit,  or  may  sit. 
tu  8IEDA  or  SEGGA,    that  thou  sit. 
^gli  siEDAor  sI:gga,  that  he  sit. 


sediamo  or  seggiAmo,      that  we  sit. 
sediute  {seggidte),  that  you  sit. 

siEDAJfO  or  8EGGANO,      that  they  sit 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present, 
sederei  {sedrei,  seder'ia),  I  should,  would,  or  could  sit,  or  might  sit. 

BIPERATIVE  MOOD. 


SIEDI  tu,  sit  thou. 

SIEDA  or  8EGGA  egli,  let  him  sit. 


sediamo  or  (seggidmo)  noi,  let  us  sit. 
sedcte  vol,  sit  ye. 

SIEDAXO  cglino,  let  them  sit. 


Sedere  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  pronouns  mi,  ti,  si,  etc., 
and  then  it  requires  the  auxiliary  essere  ;  as,  mi  siedo,  I  sit  (my- 
self) ;   ti  set  seduto,  thou  hast  sat  (thyself)  ;  etc. 

The  compounds  of  sedere  —  as,  possedere,  to  possess  ;  risedere, 
to  reside  ;  soprassedere,  to  supersede  —  have  the  same  irregulari- 
ties. 


*  This  verb,  now  become  obsolete,  is  still  used  in  many*of  the  forms  of  the  modem 
verb  sedere. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


229 


Tac^re  {vanned  with  Av^re). 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

tacere^  to  be  or  keep  silent. 

PAETICIPLE. 

taciuto,  been  silent. 


rACQTJi, 

tacesti, 

tAcque, 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pj^esent. 
tacio  (tdccio),  I  am  silent. 


Perfect. 


I  was  silent, 
thou  wast  silent, 
he  was  silent. 


taccmmo, 

taccste, 

tAcquero, 


we  were  silent, 
you  were  silent, 
they  were  silent. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
io  tac'ia  (tdccia),  that  I  be  silent  or  may  be  silent. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

tacereii  I  should,  would,  or  could  be  silent. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

tad  tu,  be  thou  silent. 


Tacere  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  pronouns,  mi,  ti,  si,  etc., 
and  then  it  requires  the  auxiliary  essere :  mi  tdcio,  I  keep  silent ; 
si  e  taciuto,  he  has  kept  silent ;  &c. 

The  compound  of  tacere  —  ritacere,  to  become  once  more  silent 


—  follows  the  same  irregularities. 

20 


230 


IT.iLIAN    GRAMMAR. 


TfiNGO  (tcgno)j 
TXENi  (tegni), 


TIKNE 


t:6nni, 
tenesti, 
t:6nne, 


Tenure  (^varied  with  Avere). 

INEINITIVE  MOOD. 

tenere,  to  hold. 

PARTICIPLE. 

tenuto,  holden. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


I  hold, 
thou  boldest. 
he  holds. 


I  held, 
thou  heldest. 
he  held. 


tenidmo  (tegndmo), 
tencte, 

TEKGONO, 


Perfect. 


tenemmOj 

tencste^ 

TEKNERO, 


we  hold, 
you  hold, 
they  hold. 


•we  held, 
you  held, 
they  held. 


FutU7'e. 
tend  (by  contraction  for  tenero)^  I  shall  or  will  hold. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


\o  TifiNGA  (tigna),       that  I  hold. 
tu  TENGA,  that  thou  hold. 

^li  TEKGA  (tegna)^    that  he  hold. 


tenidmo  {tegndmo),        that  we  hold. 
tenidie  {tegndte),  that  you  hold. 

t:&ngano  {tegnano),      that  they  hold. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 

terr&i  (tenia),  by  contraction  for  tenerei     I     I  should,  would,  or  could  hold,  or  might 
(teneria),  \  hold. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


TIi&Nl  (fe')  tu.  hold  thou. 

TENGA  {tegna)  cgU,    let  him  hold. 


tenidmo  (tegndmo)  ndi,  let  us  hold. 
tenete  v6i,  hold  ye. 

T:feNGANO  cglino,  let  them  hold. 


Tenere  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  pronouns  mi,  ti,  si,  etc., 
and  then  it  requires  the  auxiliary  essere  ;  as,  mi  sono  teniito,  I 
have  holden  or  restrained  myself;  etc. 


IIIREGULAR   VERBS. 


231 


Val^re  (varied  icith  either  Avere  or  Essere). 


vAlgo  {vaglio), 

vdli, 

vale  (vdl)f 


vAlsi, 

valesti^ 
vAlse, 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

valere,  to  be  worth  or  to  avail. 

PAETICIPLE. 

valuta  {vdlso),  been  worth. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pj-esent 


I  am  worth, 
thou  art  worth. 
he  is  worth. 


I  was  worth, 
thou  wast  worth, 
he  was  worth. 


validrno^ 

valcte, 

vAlgono, 


Perfect. 


valemmo, 

valeste, 

vAlsero, 


we  are  worth, 
you  are  worth, 
they  are  worth 


we  were  worth, 
you  were  worth, 
they  were  worth 


Futwe. 
varrd  (by  contraction  for  valero),  I  shall  or  will  be  worth. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


to  vAlga  or  vIglia,   that  T  be  worth. 
tu  vAlga  or  vAglia,   that  thou  be  worth. 
egli  vALGAor  vAglia,  that  he  be  worth. 


validmo, 

validte. 

vAlgano. 


that  we  be  worth, 
that  you  be  worth, 
that  they  be  worth. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 


Present. 


varrdi  {varria),  by  contraction  for  valerci 
{Valeria). 


I  should,  would,  or  could  be  worth,  or 
might  be  worth. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


vdli  tu,  be  thou  worth. 

vAlga  {vdglia)  cgli,  let  him  be  worth. 


validmo  ndi,  let  us  be  worth 

valcte  voi,  be  ye  worth. 

vAlgano  eglino,    let  them  be  worth. 


232  ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


Ved^re  (varied  with  Av^re). 

INEINITIVE  MOOD. 

vedere,  to  see. 

GERUND. 

vedindo  or  VEGG:fiNDO,  seeing. 

PABTICIPLE. 

veduto  (v'lsto),  seen. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 

sest. 
vcde,        '  he  sees 


vMo,  VJ&GOO,  I  see. 

vedi  (t»e'),  thou  seest. 


vediamo  or  VEGGlAiro,    we  see. 
vedete,  you  see. 

vcdono  or  v:fiGGONO,         they  see. 


Vf  DI,  I  saw. 

vedesti,  thou  sawest. 


Perfect. 

vedemmOy  we  saw. 

vedeste,  you  saw. 

vf  DERO,  (vider),  they  saw. 


VfDE,  he  saw 

Future, 
vedrd  (by  contraction  for  vederd),  I  shall  or  will  see 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


to  v^da  or  v:feGOA,      that  I  see  or  may  see. 
tu  veda  or  V^GGA,      that  thou  see. 
6gli  veda  or  vilGGA,  that  he  see. 


Present. 

vediamo  or  veggiAmo,  that  we  see. 

vediate  or  veggiAte,  that  you  see. 

vcdano  or  VEGGANO,  that  they  see. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 


Present. 


vedrdi  {vedrm),  by  contraction  for  vederei 
{vederia), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  see,  or  might 
see. 


t)6di  («e')  tu,  see  thou. 

vida  01  y^GGA  egli,  let  him  see 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

vediamo  ndi, 

vedcte  vol, 

vcdano  cglino,  let  them  soo. 


vediamo  ndi,  let  us  see. 

vedcte  t'oi,  see  ye. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS.  233 


Voldre  {varied  with  Avdre). 

INTINITIVE  MOOD. 

voUre^  to  wish,  to  will,  or  to  be  willing. 

PARTICIPLE. 

voluto,  been  willing. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 

V(5glio  or  y(5',  I  am  willing.  I    vogliAmo  {volemo),  we  are  willing. 

VUOi  (vu6U,  vud^),       thou  art  willing.  volete,  you  are  willing. 

VU(5le  (vdle),  he  is  willing.  |    v(5gliono  (vdnno),    they  are  wilhng. 

Peiifect. 

V(5lli,  I  was  willing.  j     volemmo,  we  were  willing. 

volesti,  thou  wast  willing.         I     voleste,  you  were  willing. 

VCJllb,  •  he  was  willing.  |     ydLLEKO,  they  were  willing. 

Futur^e. 
vorrd  (by  contraction  for  volero  *),  I  shall  or  will  be  willing 

SUBJinSTCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
to  V(5glia,  that  I  be  willing  or  may  be  willing. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 


vorrii  [vorrta),  by  contraction  for  volerei 
{Valeria  t), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  be  willing,  or 
might  be  willing. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD   (wanting). 


The  compounds  of  volere  —  as,  disvolere,  to  desire  the  contrary 
of  what  one  has  wished  ;  rivolere,  to  wish  again,  or  to  be  once 
more  wilhng  —  have  the  same  irregularities. 

*  To  distinguish  it  from  the  future  of  the  verb  voldre,  to  fly. 

t  To  distinguish  them  from  the  corresponding  forms  of  voldre,  to  fly. 


234 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


VAEIATIO:^r    OF  THE    IRREGULAR  VERBS   OF  THE 
THIED   CONJUGATION. 


The  following  are  the  simple   irregular  verbs  of  the   third 
conjugation ;   viz.,  — 


dire, 
mortre, 
salire, 
gcguire. 


to  say  or  to  tell, 
to  die. 
to  ascend, 
to  follow. 

udire, 
uscire, 
venire 

to  hear, 
to  go  out. 
to  come. 


Dire  {varied  with  Avdre), 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Df  RE,  to  say. 

GERUND. 

dicdndo,  saying. 

PARTICIPLE. 
d:6tto  (ditto),  said. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


rfico, 

did  or  Df ,' 

rfice, 

I  say. 

thou  sayest. 
he  says. 

dicidmo, 

DfTK, 

dicono, 

•we  say. 
you  say. 
they  say. 

Imperfect. 

io  diccva  or  dicea,  I  said. 

Perfect. 

BfSSI, 

dicestif 

DfSSE, 

I  said, 
thou  saidst. 
he  said. 

dicemmo, 

diceste, 

DfSSERO, 

•we  said, 
you  said, 
they  said. 

Future. 
DiBo  (by  contraction  for  dicero),  I  shall  or  ■will  say. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


235 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
io  dica^  that  I  say  or  may  say. 

Imperfect, 
io  dicessi,  if  I  said  or  should  say. 


CONDITIONAI.  MOOD. 

Present. 


DIRiil  (dirm), 
(diceria)^ 

by 

contraction   for  dicer di 

I  should,  would, 
say, 

or  could  say;   or  might 

IMPEEATIVE  MOOD. 

dica  igli. 

Bay  thou, 
let  him  say. 

diciamo  n6i, 
Df  TE  v6i, 
dicano  cglino, 

let  us  say. 

say  ye. 

let  them  say. 

The  compounds  of  dtre  —  as,  ridire,  to  say  again ;  contradire 
or  contraddire^  to  contradict ;  interdire^  to  forbid ;  hendire,  to  speak 
well  of;  maldire,  to  speak  ill  of  —  have  the  same  irregulari- 
ties. 

Benedire,  to  bless,  and  maledire,  to  curse,  in  the  perfect,  are 
both  regular  and  irregular,  and  make  henedii  or  benedissi,  I 
blessed;   maledii  or  maledissi,  I  cursed. 


236 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAK. 


mu6ro  (m(5to), 
m:u(5ri, 
m;u(5ke  (wM<Jr), 


Morire  {varied  with  Essere).' 


IKFINITIVE  MOOD. 

monre^  to  die. 

PARTICIPLE. 

M(3kto,  dead. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD 

Present. 

morictmo. 


I  die. 

thou  diest. 
he  dies. 


•we  die. 

mor'He,  you  die. 

mu(5koko  (mudiono),  they  die. 


Fviiire. 
morird  or  mono,  I  shall  or  will  die 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


io  MU6rA  [mdia),       that  I  die  or  may  die. 
tu  mu<5ra  {vi6ra),       that  thou  die. 
egli  mu(3ra  (wdm),    that  he  die. 


moriamo. 


that  we  die. 
moridte,  that  you  die. 

mu6rano  {mdrano),    that  they  die. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present, 
morird  or  morrH  [moriria  or  viorna),  I  should,  would,  or  could  die,  or  might  die. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Mu(5ri  tu,  die  thou. 

MU(5ra  {m6ra)  egli^    let  him  die. 


moriamo  n6i. 
mor'ite  v6i, 
MU(5rano  eglino, 


let  us  die. 

die  ye. 

let  them  die. 


The  compounds  of  morire  —  as,  premorire,  to  die  before,  etc. 
have  the  same  irregularities. 


*  Morire  may  be  varied  also  with  avcre ;   but  it  then  takes  the  nature  of  an  actiw 
verb,  and  signifies  "  to  kill,"  and  not  "  to  die. " 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


237 


Salire  (varied  ivith  either  Avere  or  Essere). 


INEmiTIVE  MOOD. 

sal'ire  {sagl'ire  *),  to  ascend. 

PARTICIPLE. 

salilo^  ascended. 
INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present. 


sAlgO  [saglio]^  I  ascend. 

sctli  or  saVisci  {sdgli),    thou  ascendest. 

sale  or  sal'isce  (^sciglie),  he  ascends. 


saliamo  or  sagliAmo,   vie  ascend. 
sal'ite,  you  ascend. 

sAlgono  {sdgliono),       they  ascend. 


sal'ii  (salsi), 

salisti, 

sail  {sdlse,  sal'to), 


Perfect. 


I  ascended, 
thou  ascendedst. 
he  ascended. 


sal'immo, 

snlistp^ 

salirotio  (saliro,  salir), 


we  ascended, 
you  ascended, 
they  ascended. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


to  sAlga  {saglia),        that  T  ascend, 
tu  sAlga  (sdlghi).       that  thou  ascend. 
cgli  sAlqaot sal'isca,  that  he  ascend. 


snlirhno  or  SAG  LI  A  MO,   that  we  ascend 
salldte  or  sagliAte,       that  j'ou  ascen* 
sAlgano  (sdgliano),      that  they  ascea 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


sdli  or  salisci  tu,  ascend  thou. 

bAlga  or  sal'isca  egli,  let  him  ascend. 


salidmo  ?i6i\ 
sal'ite  vol, 
sAlgano  eglino, 


let  us  ascend. 

ascend  ye. 

let  them  ascend. 


The  compounds  of  scdire  —  a?,  risaltre,  to  re-ascend ;  assalire^ 
to  assail;  etc.  —  have  tlie  same  irregularities. 


*  From  this  verb,  now  become  obsolete,  are  derived  many  of  the  forms  of  the  mjdern 
verb  sal'ire 


238 


ITALIAJ^    GRAI^OIAK. 


Seguire  (varied  with  either  Avere  or  Essere) 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

seguire,  to  follow. 

PARTICIPLE. 

seguito,  followed. 


srguo  or  SlfeGUO, 
scgifi  or  SIKGUI, 
segue  or  siegue, 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


I  follow, 
thou  followest. 
he  follows. 


seguidmo,  we  follow. 

sf^nite,  you  follow. 

scguono  or  SIEGUONO,'    they  follow. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


io  scgua  or  si:&GUA,      that  1  follow. 

tu  scgua  or  sikgua,     that  thou  followest. 

igli  segua  or  si^GUA,  that  he  follow. 


seguid}no, 

seguidte, 

scguano  or  siEGUANO, 


that  we  follow, 
that  you  follow, 
that  they  follow. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


sigui  or  SIEGUI  iw,       follow  thou. 
aegua  or  sii:GUA  cgU,  let  him  follow. 


seguiamo  ndi, 
segu'ite  vdi, 
seguano  eglino 


let  us  follow. 

follow  ye. 

let  them  follo'jr. 


The  compounds  of  seguire  have  the  same  irregularities. 


mKEGULAR   VERBS.  239 


Udire  {varied  ivith  Avere). 

LNEINITIVE  MOOD, 

ud'ire  {od'ire),  to  hear. 

PARTICIPLE. 

zid'iio,  heard. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


6do, 

I  hear. 

udidmo, 

■we  hear. 

<5di, 

thou  hearesfc. 

udite, 

you  hear. 

6VE. 

he  hears. 

6dono, 

they  hear. 

Future. 
udird  or  udro^  I  shall  or  will  hear. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present 


to  <5da,  that  I  hear  or  may  hear. 

tu  6da  {6di)^  that  thou  hear. 

^gli  <5da,  that  he  hear. 


udiamo^  that  we  hear. 

udidte,  that  you  hear. 

<5dano,  that  they  hear. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 
udrlHoTMrei  {udir'ia  or  udria),  I  should,  would,  or  could  hear,  or  might  hea» 


«5di  tu,  hear  thou. 

(Sda  ^gli,  let  him  hear. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

udiamo  n6i, 

ud'ite  v6i, 

6dano  dglino^         let  them  hear. 


udiamo  wdt,  let  us  hear. 

itd'ile  v6i,  hear  ye. 


The  compounds  of  vcf^re  —  as,  riudire,  to  hear  again,  etc.  — 
have  the  same  irregularities. 

Esaudire,  to  grant,  is  regular,  and  varied  like  esihire. 


240 


ITALIAN   GR.i]VIMAK. 


Uscire  {varied  with  Essere). 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

uscire  {esc'ire),  to  go  out. 

PAETICIPLE. 

uscito^  gone  out. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD 

Present. 


fisoo, 

I  go  out. 

uscidmo, 

■we  go  out. 

£sci, 

thou  goest  out. 

usc'ite, 

you  go  out. 

JSSOB, 

he  goes  out. 

liSCONO, 

they  go  out. 

io  l&SOA, 

tu  i;scA, 
6gli  :&80A, 


fisoi  tu, 
ll^SOA  dgli, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  go  out  or  may  go  out. 
that  thou  go  out. 
that  he  go  out. 


usciamo, 

uscidte, 

ilSCANO, 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


go  thou  out. 
let  hun  go  out. 


uscidmo  ndi, 
usc'ite  vdi, 
:&soANO  4glino, 


that  we  go  out. 
that  you  go  out. 
that  they  go  out. 


let  us  go  out. 

go  ye  out. 

let  them  go  out. 


The  compound  of  uscire  —  riuscire,  to  succeed  —  has  the 
same  irregularities. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


241 


Venire  (^varied  with  Essere) . 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


venire,  to  come. 


PARTICIPLE. 

VENtlTOj  come. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


VSlNGO  (I'cg'Ho),    I  come. 

VIKNI, 


VIENE 


VENN!, 

ven'isti, 

VENNE, 


thou  comest. 
he  comes. 


I  came, 
thou  camest, 
he  came. 


venimno  {vegnamo\ 

vtn'ile, 

VENGONO  (vegnono), 


Perfect. 


venimmo. 


ven'isle, 
VENNERO  {veniro), 


we  come, 
you  come, 
they  come. 


we  came, 
you  came, 
they  came. 


Future. 
verrd  (by  contraction  for  i^enird],  I  shall  or  will  come. 


io  V:fcNGA, 
tU  VENGA," 
egli  VENGA, 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  come  or  may  come. 
that  thou  come, 
that  he  come. 


venidmo  [vegndmo),       that  we  come. 
venidte  (vegndte).  that  you  come. 

VENGANO  (^•cg'»^a?io),     that  they  come. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present. 


verrei  [verr'ia),  by  contraction  for  venirei 
(veniria), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  come,  or  might 
come. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


VliiNI  tU, 
TfiNGA  Cgli, 


come  thou, 
let  him  come. 


■veniamo  not, 
ven'ite  v6i, 
viiNGANO  eglino, 


let  us  come. 

come  ye. 

let  them  come. 


Ventre  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  conjunctive  pronouns  mi, 
ti,  si,  etc.,  and  tlio  particle  ne :  thus,  me  ne  vengo,  I  am  coming 
thence ;  te  ne  vieni,  thou  art  coming  thence,  etc.  Me,  te,  etc., 
are  then  mere  expletives. 

The  compounds  of  ven-ire  —  as,  convenire,  to  agree  ;    divenire^ 
to  become  ;  etc.  —  have  the  same  irregularities. 

21 


242 


ITALIAN    GEAJMjNIAR. 


TABLE   OF   IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


IITPIIOTIVE. 

Accendere.  to  light 
Accorgersi,  to  perceive 
Addiirre,  to  allege 
(Addiicere),  to  allege 
Affliggere,  to  afflict 
Aucidere,  to  kill 
An  dire,  to  go 
Apparire,  to  appear 
(Apparere),  to  appear 

Appartenere,  to  belong 

Applaudire,  to  applaud 
(Applaiidere),  to  applaud 
Aprire,  to  open 
Ardere,  to  burn 
Ascendere,  to  ascend 


Ascondere,  to  conceal 
Aspergere,  to  sprinkle 
Assidere,     \  .       ,  , 
(Assedere),  f  '°  ^''  ^°""^ 
Assistere,  to  assist 
Assolvere,  to  absolve 
Assorbire,  to  absorb 
(Assorbere),  to  absorb 
Assiimere,  to  assume 
Astriugere,  to  compel 
(Astrignere),  to  compel 
Altendere,  to  icait 
Avere,  to  have 
Avvellere,  to  root  up 
Bevere,  to  drink 
(Bere),  to  drink 
Bollire,  to  boil 
Cadere,  to  fall 
Calere,  to  care  for 
Capere,  to  comprehend 
(Capire),  to  co7nprehend 
Cedere,  to  submit 
Chiedere,  to  ask 
Chiiidere,  to  shut 
Cignere,  to  gird 
(Cingere),  to  gird 
Cogliere,  ) 
(Corre),    | 
Compiere,  to  accomplish 
(Compirej,  to  accojnplish 
Concepire,  to  conceive 
"oncepere),  to  conceive 
i!nnettere,  to  connect 


to  gather 


^Xidscere,  to  know 

Consumire,*  ?  . 
(Con?umere),  S   " 
Coprire,  to  cover 


consume 


PRESENT. 

PERFECT. 

rUTURE. 

PAETICrPLB. 

accendo 

accesi 

accendero 

acc6so 

m'  accorgo 

m'  accorsi 

m'  accorgero 

accorto 

adduco 

addiissi 

addurro 

addotto 

(adducero) 

(addiitto) 

affliggo 

afaissi 

affliggero 

afflitto 

ancido 

ancisi 

anciderd 

anciso 

vado (vo) 

andai 

andro 

andAto 

apparisco 

apparii 

appariro 

apparito 

(appiro) 

appirvi 

apparero 

app4i-so 

(appajo) 

(apparsi) 

(appariito) 

appartengo 

appartermi 

apparterro 

apparteniito 

(apparteaetti) 

apparteuero 

applaudisco 

applaudii 

applaudiro 

applaudito 

applaudo 

(applaiisi) 

applaudero 

(applaiiso) 

4pro 

aprii,  apersi 

apriro 

aperto 

4rdo 

Arsi 

ardero 

cirso 

ascendo 

ascesi 

asceadei 

ascendetti 

ascenderd 

asceso 

ascondo 

ascosi 

ascondero 

ascoso,  asc6sto 

asp ergo 

aspersi 

aspergero 

asperso 

assido 

aR,sisi 

assidero 

assise 

assisto 

assistei 

assisterft 

assistito 

assolvo 

assolvei 

assolvero 

assoluto 

assorbisco 

assorbii 

assorbero 

assorbito 

(assorbo) 

(assorsi?) 

* 

assume 

assiinsi 

assumero 

assiinto 

astringo 

astrinsi 

astriugei-6 

astretto 

(astriguo) 

(astrignei-6) 

atteudo 

attesi 

attendero 

attento 

ho 

ebbi 

avro 

avuto 

avvello 

avvelsi 

avvellero 

avrelto 

bero 

bevvi,  bevei 

bevero.  bevro 

bevuto,  beuto 

(bibo),  beo 

(bebbi) 

(bero) ' 

bollo 

belli 

boliro 

bolito 

cado  (ciiggio) 

caddi,  cadei 

cadero,  cadro 

cadiito 

Cale 

calse 

caleri  (carr.V) 

caliito 

capo 

capei  (capetti) 

capero,  capiro 

cap  u  to,  capito 

(capisco) 

capii 

codo 

cedei,  cessi 

cedero 

ceduto,  cesso 

chiedo 

chiesi 

cliiedero 

chiesto 

chiiido 

chiusi 

chiudero 

chiiiso 

cingo 

cinsi 

cingero 

cinto 

(ciguo) 

coglio,  colgo 

colsi 

cogliero,  corro 

colto 

compio 

compiei 
compii 

compiero 

compiiito 

concepisco 

concepii 

concepero 

concepito 

(concipio) 

(concepetti) 

(concepero) 

conceputo 

counetto 

connettei 

conuettero 

connesso 

(connessi) 

(connettuto) 

conosco 

conobbi 
(conoscetti) 

conoscero 

conosciiito 

consumo 

consiinsi 

consumero 

consunto 

copro 

coprii,copersi 

copriro 

coperto 

♦  This  verb  is  regular. 


TABLE    OF    IllllEGULAK    VEllBS. 


243 


I^'F^^'ITIVK. 

Correre,  to  riai 

Costringei'e,  to  constrain 
(Costrignere),  to  constrahi 
Crescere,  to  grow 

Cuocere,  to  cook 
Dai'e,  to  give 
Dccidcre,  to  decide 
Duliidcre,  to  delude 
Deprimere.  to  depress 
Dil'endere,  to  defend 
Dire,  to  say 
Itirigere,  to  direct 
Discendere,  to  descend 
Dispergere,  to  disperse 
Distiuguere,  to  distinguish 

Divedere,  to 

Divellerc,  to  root  out 

Dolere,  to  grieve 
Dovere,  lo  owe 
(Devere),  to  owe 
Eiuergere,  to  emerge 
Erigere,  ergere,  to  erect 
P^sigere,  to  exact 
Espellere,  to  expel 
Esponere,  to  expose 
(Esporre),  to  expose 
Esprimere,  to  express 
Essere,  to  be 
Estendere,  to  extend 

Estinguere,  to  extinguish 
Facere  or  fire,  to  do 
Eendere,  to  cleave 
Figero  or  figgcre,  tojix 
Fiugere  o?-fignero,  to  feign 
Fondere,  to  melt 
FrAugere,       I    ^    7       , 
(Fragnere),    }    '°  ^''^^^ 
Friggere,  to  fry 
Gonuflettere.  to  kneel 
Giaccre,  to  lie  down 

Giro,  to  go 
Gii'ingcrc,  to  arrive 
Giugiiere,  to  arrive 
Godere  (gaudere),  to  enjoy 
Illudei-e,  to  delude 
Inimergefe,  to  iminerge 
Impellere,  to  impel 
linprimere,  I o  print 
lucidere,  to  grave 
Incorrere,  to  incur 
Tncrescere,  to  be  sorry 

Intendere,  to  understand 
Intessere,  to  iveave 
Tntridere,  to  temper 
Intrudere,  to  intrude 
Inv.'idere,  to  invade 
Involgerc,  to  wrap  up 
Jnvolvere,  to  wrap  up 
fre,  to  go 
Trridcrc,  to  deride 


PKESEKT. 

corro 
co.stringo 
costrigno 
cresco 

cuoco 

do 

decide 

deludo 

deprimo 

difendo 

dico 

dirigo 

disfeudo 

dlspergo 

distinguo 

divedo 

divello 

dolgo,  doglio 

diibbo,  devo 

(deo) 

em  ergo 

erigo,  ergo 

esigo 

espello 

espongo 

(espouo) 

esprimo 

souo 

esteudo 

estinguo 
fo  (ficcio) 
fendo 
figo,  figgo 
fingo  (figuo) 
fondo 

fringo 

friggo 

geuufletto 

giaccio 


giungo 

godo 

11  111  so 

iuimergo 

impello 

imprimo 

incido 

incorro 

incresco 

intendo 

intesso 

intrido 

intTLido 

invado 

involgo 

involve 

irrido 


TERFECT. 

corsi 
costrinsi 

crebbi 

(ci'escetti) 

cossl  (cocei) 

diedl,  diei 

decisl  (?) 

del  lis! 

depress! 

dlfesi 

dissi 

diressi 

disccsi 

dispersi 

distills! 

(distlnguett!) 

divid! 

(divide!) 

dlvels! 

dols! 

dovei,  dovett! 

(devei) 

euiersi 

eressi,  ers! 

esige! 

espulsi 

espos! 

(espuos!) 

es  press! 

estes! 

(estendett!) 

estins! 

feci  (fei) 

fendei  (fess!) 

fiss!  (fisi) 

fins! 

fi'isi  (fonde!) 

frans! 

friss! 

genuflessi 

giacciu! 

(giacett!) 

gii 

giiins! 

godettl,  gode! 

illusi 

immers! 

impiils! 

impress! 

incis! 

incorsi 

increbb! 

(increscetti) 

intes! 

intessei 

intris! 

iiitn'is! 

invas! 

ill  vols! 


irnsi 


FUTURE. 

correro 
costringero 
(costriguei'o) 
crescero 

cocero 

daro 

decidero 

deliidero 

deprimoro 

difendero 

diro 

dirigero 

discendero 

dispergero 

distinguero 

divedro 

divellero 

(diverro) 

dorro 

dovro 

(dovero) 

emergero 

erigero,  ergero 

esigero 

espellero 

esporro 

(esponero) 

esprlmero 

saro 

estendero 

cstingnero 

faro 

fendero 

figero,  figgero 

fingero 

foudero 

fi-aiigero 

friggero 

geuuflettero 

giacero 

giro 
giungero 

godero 

illudero 

immergero 

impeilero 

imprimero 

incidero 

incorrero 

increscero 

intcndero 

intcssero 

Intridero 

iiitrudero 

invadcro 

involgcro 

involvero 

in') 

irridero 


PARTICIPLE. 

corso 

costretto 


crescinto 

cotto 

duto 

deciso 

deluso 

depresso 

dlfesso 

detto 

diretto 

disceso 

disperse 

distinto 

diveduto 

(diviso) 

divelto 

doluto  (dolto) 
doviito 

emerso 

eretto  (erto) 

esatto 

espiilso 

esposto 

(esposito) 

espresso 

stAto 

esteso 

estinto 
fatto 

feSSO 

fitto,  flSSO,  fiso 
finto  (fitto) 
fiiso,  fondiito 

franto 

fritto 

genuflesso 

giaciuto 

(gito) 
giiinto 

god u to 

illiiso 

immerso 

Impi'ilso 

impresso 

Inciso 

incorso 

increscliito 

inteso,  Intento 

intcssuto 

intriso 

intn'iso 

invaso 

involiito 

ito 
irrisft 


244 


rNFINlTlVE. 

Iscrivere,  to  inscribe 
Istruire,  to  instruct 
Ledere,  to  offend 
Leggere,  to  read 

Maledicere,  \ 
Maledire,     |  to  curse 
(Maladire),  ) 
Mergere,  to  dive 
Mesceie,  to  mix 
Mettere,  to  put 

Molcere^  to  assuage 

Mordere,  to  bite 

Morire.  to  die 


to  7nilk 


Mugnere,  ) 
Wungere,  j 
Muovere,  to  move 
Niscere,  to  be  born 
Nascondere,  to  conceal 
Negligere,  to  Jieglect 
Nuocere    j        / 
(^ocere),  j 
Oifendere,  to  offend 
Offerire,  to  offer 
Offrirc,  to  offer 
(Offerere),  to  offer 
Opprimere,  to  oppress 
Parere,  to  appear 
Pascere,  to  feed 
Percuotere,  to  strike 
Perdere,  to  lose 
Persuadere,  to  persuade 

Piai^ere,  to  please 

Piangere,  )  . 

•n-     "      '  }  to  toeep 

Piagnere,  )  ^ 

Pingere,  pignere,  to  paint 

Piovere,  to  rain 

(Pouere)  or  porre,  to  put 

Porgere,  to  offer 

Potere,  to  be  able 

Precidere,  to  shorten 
Preinere,  to  press 
Prendei-e,  to  take 
Presiiniere,  to  presume 
Proteggere,  to  protect 
Piingere,  pugnere,  toprick 
R4dere,  to  shave 
Recidere,  to  retrench 
Redimere,  to  redeem. 
Reggere,  to  govern 
Rendere,  to  render 
Repellere,  to  repel 
Reprimere,  to  repress 
Ridere.  to  laugh 
Riliicere,  to  shine 
Riuianere.  to  remain 
Pv^olvere,  to  resolve 
Rispondere,  to  answer 
RistAre,  to  desist 

Ristrignere;  }  ^°  ''^^^'"'^'^ 
Rodere,  to  gnaw 


italia:x 

GRA^IMVr 

L.    • 

PEESEKT. 

PERFECT. 

FUTURE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

iscrivo 

iscrissi 

iscrivero 

iscritto 

istruisco 

istruii 

istruiro 

istriitto 

ledo 

(lesi)  (ledei) 

ledero 

leso 

leggo 

lessi  (leggei) 

leggero 

letto 

lice,  lece 

(licito)  lecito 

maledico 

maledessi 

malediro 

maledetto 

mergo 

rD6rsi 

mergero 

merso 

mesco 

mescei 

mescero 

(mesciuto) 

metto 

misi,  (messi) 

mettero 

messo  (misso^ 

2d  pers.  molci 

(mulse) 

3d  pers.  moke 

mordo 

morsi 

mordero 

morso 

(  muoro,  moro 
( muojo,  mojo 

morii 

moriro,  morrj 

morto 

muDgo 

munsi 

mugnero 

munto 

muovo 

mossi  (movei) 

movero 

mosso 

nisco 

nacqui 

nascero 

nito 

na^coudo 

nasco^i 

nascondero 

nascoso 

negligo 

uegligei 

negligero 

negletto 

nuoce,  noccio 

nocqui 

nocero 

nosciiito 

ofifendo 

offessi 

offendero 

offeso 

offerisco 

offerii 

offeriro.offriro 

offero 

oEfersi 

(olTerro) 

offerto 

offro 

opprimo 

oppressi 

opprimero 

oppresso 

pajo  (piro) 

parvi  (p.'irsi) 

par  r6(  pare  ro) 

paruto(p4r80) 

pisco 

pa?cei 

pascero 

pasciuto 

percuoto 

percossi 

percuotero 

percosso 

perdo 

perdei 

perdero 

perduto 

persuado 

persuAsi 

pei-suadero 

persuaso 

(persuadei) 

(persuadiito) 

piiccio,  piacio 

piicqui 

pLaccro 

piaciuto 

piango,  piagno 

piansi 

piangero 

pi4nto 

piugo 

pinsi 

pingero 

pinto  (pitto) 

piovo 

pioTvi,  piovei 

piovero 

piovuto 

pongo  (pono) 

posi  (puosi) 

porro 

posto 

porgo 

porsi 

porgero 

porto 

posso 

potei,  potetti 

potro  (potero) 

potiito 

( posse  tti) 

(poro) 

precido 

precisi 

precidero 

precise 

premo 

premei 

preniero 

premiito 

preudo 

presi 

prendero 

preso 

presiimo 

presunsi 

presumero 

presiinto 

proteggo 

protessi(?) 

proteggero 

protetto 

pungo 

piinsi 

pungero 

punto 

rAdo 

rasi  (radei) 

radero 

raso* 

recido 

recisi 

recidero 

reciso 

redimo 

redimei 

redimero 

redento 

reggio 

res  si 

reggero 

retto 

rendo 

rendei 

reudero 

renduto  (resoj 

repello 

repiilsi 

repellero 

repulso 

reprimo 

repress! 

reprimero 

represso 

rido 

risi  (ridei) 

ridero 

riso 

riliico 

riliissi 

rilucero 

rimuDgo 

iim4si 

riniarro 

rim&so 

risolvo 

risolsi,  risolvei 

risolvero 

risolto 

rispondo 

lisposi 

rispondero 

risposto 

risto 

ristetti 

ristaro 

ristito 

ristringo 

ristrinsi 

ristringero 

ristretto 

rodo 

rosi 

rodero 

roso 

I 


TABLE    OF    IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


245 


INFINITIVE. 

PPvKSENT. 

PERFECT. 

FUTURE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Romperc,  to  break 

rompo 

riippi  (roppi) 

rompcro 

rotto 

Salire,  to  ascend 

sAlgo,  salisco 

salii  (salsi) 

saliro  (sarro) 

salito 

Sapere,  to  know 

so  (8ippo) 

seppi  (sapei) 

sapro  (sapero) 

saputo 

Scegliei-e(seerre),  to  choose 

scelgo,  sceglio 

sceisi 

seegliei'6 

seel  to 

Scundere,  to  descend 

scendo 

scesi  (scendei) 

scendero 

sceso 

Scindere,  to  cleave 

sciudo 

scinsi 

scindero 

scisso 

^^Sk]"""'^'" 

scigno,  scingo 

scinsi 

scignero 

scinto 

sciS'r  !""""'■" 

scioglio 

sciolsi   . 

scioglero 

sciolto 

Scoi-gere,  to  perceive 

sciirgo 

scorsi 

scorgero 

scorto 

Scorrere,  to  lay  waste 

scorro 

scorsi 

scorrero 

scorto 

Scrjvere,  to  write 

scrivo  (.«cribo) 

scrissi 

scrivero 

scritto 

Scuotere,  to  shake 

scuoto  (scoto) 

sccjssi  (scotei) 

scotero 

seosso 

Sedere,  to  sit  down 

siedo,  seggo 

sedei,  sedetti 

sedero  (sedro) 

sediito 

Seguire,  to  follow 

seguo,  sieguo 

seguii 

seguiro 

seguito 

Scrpere,  to  creep 

stirpo 

Serpeva 

serpeute 

Soffrire,       J  ,         ^ 
(Sofferi^-e),  } '"  '"ff'' 

sofifro 

sofErii 

soffriro 

sofiferto 

Solere,  to  be  ivont 

S()glio 

sono,  solito 

solito 

iSdlvere,  t.o  solve 

solvo 

solvei 

solvere 

soliito 

Soi-gere  (siirgere),  to  arise 

sorgo  (surgo). 

sorsi  (siirsi) 

sorgero 

sorto  (surtt ) 

Sospeudere,  to  suspend 

sospendo 

sospesi 

sospendero 

sospeso 

Spindere.  to  pour  out 

span do 

spandei 

spandero 

spanduto 

Spirgere,  to  spread 

spargo 

spirsi 

spargero 

sparso 

i^g":r«;  }'»«•»=-"* 

speugo 

spensi 

spegnero 

spento 

Spendere,  to  spend 

spendo 

spesi 

spendero 

speso 

Spergei-e,  to  disperse 

spergo 

spersi 

spergero 

sperso 

Spingere,     )             , 
(Spignere),r°^'"^ 

spingo 

spinsi 

spingero 

spinto 

Stiire,  to  stand 

sto 

stetti  (stei) 

star 6  (stero) 

state 

Stendere,  to  extend 

stendo 

stesi  (stendei) 

stendero 

steso 

Stridere,  to  cry  out 

strido 

stride! 

stridero 

Stigaere,  1             • 
Stiugere,  )  ^°  ^^'^'^ 

stingo  (stigno) 

stinsi 

(stignero) 

stinto 

Stringere,  |  .    l-   .1  ^    . 
Striguere,  r'' *"^^/«^^ 

stringo 

strinsi 

stringero 

stretto 

.Struggere,  to  dissolve 

straggo, 

striissi 

struggero 

striitto 

Svelli'.re,    )  , 

Q„.    ,.    '    >  to  root  up 

svello,  svelgo 

svelsi 

svellero 

svelto 

Saggere,  to  suck 

SliggO 

Piiggei  (sussi) 

suggero 

Tacere,  to  je  silent 

tacio  (taccio) 

tacqui  (tacei) 

tacero 

taciiito 

Tendere,  to  tend 

teudo 

tesi  (tendiii) 

tendero 

teso 

Teuere,  to  hold 

teugo  (tegno) 

tenui  (tenei) 

terro  (tenero) 

tenia  to 

Tessere,  to  xveave 

tesso 

tessei 

tessero 

tessuto 

Tignere,  tingere,  to  dye 

tingo  (tigno) 

tinsi 

tignero 

tinto 

Togliere,  )  ,    .   7 

toglio,  tolgo 

tolsi 

torro 

tolto 

Tondere,  to  shear 

toudo 

toudei 

toudero 

tondiito 

Torcere,  to  tioist 

torco 

torsi 

torcero 

tdrto 

Torpere,  to  6?  benumbed 

torpo 

torpento 

Trarre,         \ 

(TrAere),      [  to  draw 

traggo  (trao) 

trlssi 

trarro 

tratto 

(TrAggore), ) 

Uocid«re,  to  kill 

uccido 

uccisi 

uccidero 

ucciso 

Udire,  to  hear 

odo 

udii 

udiro  (udro) 

udito 

Ugnere,  lingere,  to  anoint 

ungo  (ligno) 

linsi 

ungero 

linto 

Use  ire,  to  go  out 

esco 

uscii  (eseii) 

usciro 

uscito  (escito) 

Valere,  to  be  loorth 

ValgO  (vilglio) 

valsi  (valoi) 

varro  (valero) 

valato  (Viilso) 

Vedere,  to  see 

vedo,  veggo 

vidi  (vuddi) 

vcdro 

veduto  (visto) 

Venire,  to  com.e 

Tengo 

Tenni  (vcuii) 

verro  (veniro) 

venuto (vcnto) 

Vinecre,  to  conquer 

vinco 

vinsi 

vincero 

vinto  (vitto) 

V.vere,  to  live 

vivo 

vissi  (vivei) 

vivero 

vivuto 

Volcre,  to  ivill 

voglio,  v6' 

volli  (volsi) 

vorro 

volli  to 

V61vere,_«o  turn 

volgo 

volsi 

volgero 

volto 

Volgere,' to  turn 

volvo 

volvero 

21* 


24.6 


ITALIAN   GRAMMAK. 


i^ii^tixbt    ©'-erirs* 


Defective  Verbs  ending  in  ere  (long),  accented. 


calere, 

co/ere  or  cdlere, 
lece're  and  licere,  1 
lecere  and  licere,  ) 


to  care  for. 
to  adore. 

to  be  lawful. 


pavere, 
silere, 
sole're, 
stupe're, 


to  fear. 

to  be  or  keep  silent 

to  be  wont. 

to  be  astonished. 


Defective  Vei'hs  ending  in  ere  {sliort). 


dlgere, 

to  be  chill. 

rie'dere, 

to  return. 

dngere, 

to  afflict. 

scrj>ere, 

to  creep. 

arrdgere, 
cdpere, 

to  add. 
to  contain. 

soffdlcere,  ) 
soffdlgere,  ) 

to  support. 

cherere. 

to  ask. 

tdnqere. 

to  touch. 

coiwe'Here, 

to  convulse. 

tdllere, 

to  take  away. 

fie'dere, 

to  wound. 

tdrpere, 

to  be  benumbed 

Incere, 

to  shine. 

lirgere, 

to  urge. 

mdlcere, 

to  assuage. 

vigere. 

to  be  vigorous. 

I 


Defective  Ver'bs  eliding  in  ire. 


ire,  to  go. 

gire,  to  go._ 

o/tre,         to  smell. 


DEFECTIVE   VERBS.  247 


VARIATION   OF  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

(These  verbs  are  used  only  in  the  tenses  and  persons  which  are  here  given.) 

Calere. 
INFESriTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 
ealire,  to  care  for. 


Past, 
essere  caluto,  to  have  cared  for. 


GERUND. 

calaido,  caring  for. 

PARTICIPLE. 

cah'Uo,  cared  for. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD 

Present, 
edle  or  cdl,  he  cares  for. 


Imjjerfect. 
caleva  or  calea,        he  cared  for. 


Pe7]fect. 
cAlse,  he  cared  for. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


Present. 
cXglia,  that  he  care  for. 


Imperfect. 
caMsse,  if  he  cared  for. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

cAglia  dglii  let  him  care  for. 


Calere  is  generally  used  with  the  conjunctive  pronouns  mi,  tiy 
ct,  VI,  gli :  thus,  tni  cak,  I  care  for ;  ci  caleva,  we  cared  for ; 
etc. 


248  ITALIAN    GRAIUMAR. 


Colere  or  Colere. 

INEINITIVE   MOOD. 

colere  or  colere^  to  adore. 

INDICATR^   MOOD. 

Present. 


!e6lo\  I  adore. 

cdle),  he  adores. 


Lec^re  and  Lic^re,  or  Lecere  and  Licere. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

leeere  and  licere^  to  be  lawful.        |        essere  lecito  or  I'lcito*    to  be  lawfoL 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
Icce  or  lice,  it  is  lawful. 


Pav^re. 

INEINITIVE  MOOD. 

pavere,  to  fear. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
pave,  he  fears. 


Silere. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

silere,  to  be  or  keep  silent. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


$Ui,  thou  art  or  keepest  silent.- 

sile,  he  is  or  keeps  silent. 


•         •         • 


*  From  this  form  are  derived  e  Irdto,  it  is  lawful ;  era  or  fit  lecito,  it  was  lawful ; 
sard  lecito,  it  will  be  lawful ;  etc.,  which  are  used  to  supply  the  tenses  in  which  lecere  Ls 
defective. 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


249 


$ol6re, 


BdGLIO, 

bu(5li, 
bu(3le  (idle), 


Soldre. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

to  be  wont.  |     essere  solito^ 

GERUND. 

solendo,  being  wont. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


I  am  wont, 
thou  art  wont. 
he  is  wont. 


sogliAmo  (soldmo), 

solete, 

S(5gliono, 


Imperfect. 
\o  soleva  or  solea,  I  was  wont. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
io  S(5glia,  that  I  am  wont  or  may  be  wont. 

Imperfect. 
ko  solessi,  if  I  were  wont  or  should  be  wont. 


Stupdre. 

INEmiTIVE  MOOD. 

stupere,  to  be  astonished. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
stupe,  he  is  astonished. 


Algere. 


to  be  wont. 


we  are  wont, 
you  are  wont, 
they  are  wont. 


dlsi, 

eUgdsttf 

dlsCf 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

algere,  to  be  chill. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Perfect. 


I  was  chill. 

algemmo, 

thou  wast  chill. 

algcste, 

he  was  chill. 

dlsero, 

we  were  chill, 
you  were  chill, 
they  were  chill. 


250 


ITALIiVN    GEAjM]V£4R. 


Angere. 


IKFINITIVE   MOOD. 

angere,  to  afflict. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present.  j  Imperfect, 

ingCf  it  afflicts.  j  angeva,  it  afflicted. 


Arrogere. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

arrogere,  to  add. 


arrdge. 


ARU681, 
arrogesti, 
AIlli6SE, 


GERUND. 

arr agendo,  adding. 

PARTICIPLE. 
AEr6to  or  arr6so,  added. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


he  adds. 


arrogiamo, 
arrogono, 


Imperfect. 


to  arrogeva  or  arrogca,  I  added 


Perfect. 


I  added, 
thou  addedst. 
he  added. 


arrogemtno, 

arrogeste, 

AJiR(5SEKO, 


we  add. 
they  add. 


we  added, 
you  added, 
they  added. 


Capere. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

capere,  to  contain. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present.  I  Iniperfect. 

cape,  it  contains.  |  capcva,  it  contained 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 


251 


Chdrere. 


chero, 
chere. 


rNTINITIVE  MOOD. 

chererey  to  ask, 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


I  ask. 
he  asks. 


Conv^llere. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

convcllere,  to  convulse. 

GEKUND. 

convellendo,  convulsing. 

PARTICIPLE. 

CONVtrLSO,  convulsed. 


conveUe. 

eonveUcva  or  -/e'a, 
eonvellerdy 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
he  convulses.  |  convcllono,  they  convulse. 

Imperfect. 
he  convulsed.  ]  convellevano  or  -Icano,  they  convulsed- 

Future. 
he  shall  convulse.         |  convellerdnno,  they  shall  convulse 


convellesse. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Imperfect. 

I  convelldsserOf 


if  he  convulsed. 


if  they  convulsed. 


eonveUerebbe, 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

P^'esent. 
he  should  convulse.      |  convellercbbero, 


they  should  convulse. 


252 


ITALIAI^    GRAMMAS. 


Jiedi, 
fiide^ 


Fi^dere. 
INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Jicdere^  to  wound. 

GERUND. 

Jiedendo^  wounding. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 


I  wound, 
thou  woundest. 
he  wounds. 


fiedono, 


Imperfect. 
to  fiedeva  or  fiedea^  I  wounded. 

Perfect, 
fied&i^  I  wounded. 


they  wound. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Preient. 


\o  fiida  ifi^ggia)^         that  I  wound. 
iglijiedia  ifeggia),    that  he  wound. 


Jiddano, 


Imperfect. 
io  fedessi,  If  I  wounded. 


that  they  wound. 


DEFECTIVE    VEEBS. 


253 


Lucere. 

INEINITIVE  MOOD 

lucere^  to  shine. 


GEEIIND. 

lucendo,  shining. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 

•     • 

•    •    •    • 

lucidme. 

•we  shine. 

w«, 

thou  shinest. 

Incite, 

you  shine. 

Uiu, 

he  shines. 

«         •         • 

•        •        •        • 

Imperfect. 

io  luceva,  I  shone. 

Perfect. 

•       •       • 

lucemmoy 

we  shone. 

luUsti^ 

thou  shinest.                     luceste, 
Future. 

you  shone 

lucerd,  I  shal 

[  or  will  shtne. 

igH  (/tfca), 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  he  shine. 


luc'idmo, 

luc'idte, 
(lucano), 


that  we  shine, 
that  you  shine, 
that  they  shine. 


Imperfect. 
io  lucissi,  if  I  shone  or  should  shine. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

Present 
lueer&i  {J,ucer\,a\  if  I  should,  would,  or  could  shine,  or  might  shine. 


M6lcere. 
IKFINITIVE  MOOD. 

mdlcere,  to  assuage. 


mdlci, 
tndlce. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


thou  assuagest. 
he  assuages. 


Imperfect. 

io  molcdva,  I  assuaged. 

molcevi,  thou  assuagedst. 

dgli  molcdva^  ho  assuaged. 


22 


254 


ITALIAN   GEAJyilHAIl. 


Kinder  e. 
ESTFINITIVE  MOOD. 

riedere,  to  return. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

P?'esen<. 

riedo, 
riedi, 
riede. 

I  return, 
thou  retumest. 
he  returns. 

•         «         • 

riedono. 

Imperfect. 

io  riedeva  or  nedia^ 

riedevi, 

egli  riedevaj 

I  returned, 
thou  returnedst. 
he  returned. 

•  •         «         • 

•  ■         •         • 

riedevano, 

io  riida, 
tu  rieda, 
igli  rieda^ 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Preserit. 


that  I  return, 
that  thou  return, 
that  he  return. 


riedano, 


they  return. 


they  returned. 


•         • 


that  they  return. 


S^rpere. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

sirpere,  to  creep. 


GERUND. 

serpendo,  creeping. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present. 

serpo, 
Scrpi, 
serpe, 

I  creep, 
thou  creepest. 
he  creeps. 

•  •       • 

•  •       • 

serpono^ 

m        • 
•        • 

they  ci 

Imperfect. 

to  serp6va, 
serpevi, 
egli  serpiva, 

I  crept, 
thou  creptest. 
he  crept. 

•  •     •    • 

•  «     •    • 
serpevano, 

•    •    • 

•    • 
they  01 

U>  serpa, 
tu  sirpa, 
igli  serpa, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


that  I  creep, 
that  thou  creep, 
that  he  creep. 


serpano, 


that  they  creep. 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS.  255 


SofFolcere  or  Soffolgere. 
IKFINITIVE  MOOD. 

soffdlcere  or  soffolgere-,  to  support. 

PARTICIPLE. 

soffolto,  supported. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present.  .  Perfect, 

toffdlce  or  soffdlge^         he  supports.  1        soffdlse,  he  supported. 


Tdngere. 


INPINITIVE  MOOD. 

tdngere,  to  touch. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
tange,  he  touches. 


T6Uere. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

tdllere,  to  take  away. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


tdUi,  thou  takest  away. 

tdllcy  he  takes  away. 


•    • 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 

tu  tdlla,  that  thou  take  away.   I        •    •     •     .    • 

igli  tdlla.  that  he  take  away.       |        ....•  ••!.• 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

tdlla  egli,  let  him  take  away. 

Estdlhre  (to  lift),  compound  of  tdllere,  is  defective  only  in  the  participle, 
and  in  all  the  persons  of  the  perfect  of  the  indicative. 


256  ITAI.IAN   GRAMMAE. 


T(5rpere. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

t6rpere,  to  become  numb. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present, 

tdrpo,  I  become  numb.  ' 

tdrpcj  he  becomes  numb. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 


to  tdrpa,  that  I  become  numb. 

tu  tdrpa,  that  thou  become  numb. 

igli  tdrpa^  that  he  become  numb. 


IJrgere. 

INEINITIVE  MOOD. 

^rgere,  to  urge. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
urge,  he  urges. 
Imperfect. 

igli  urgiva  or  urgia,  he  urged.  |    urg&vano,  they  urged. 


Vlgere. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Vlgere,  to  be  vigorous. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
v'tge,  he  is  vigorous. 

Future, 
vtgerd,  it  will  be  vigorouB. 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS.  257 


Gire. 
rNTINITIVE  MOOD. 

g-irg,  to  go. 

PARTICIPLE. 

gito,  gone. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


'.'.'.'.'. 

giamo, 
gitey 

•         •         • 

we  go. 
you  go.  * 

•        *        « 

Imperfect.  • 

giva  or  gia,  I  went. 

Perfect. 

io  git,  I  went. 

Future. 

giro,  I  shall  or  will  go. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

• 

Present. 

•       •        •        • 

•  «        • 

•  •        • 

g'iamOj 
gidte, 

•        •        m 

that  we  go  or  may  go. 

that  you  go. 

Imperfect. 
io  gissi,  if  I  went  or  should  go. 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 

girdt,  gtria,  I  should,  would,  or  could  go,  or  might  go. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


g'iamOj  let  us  go. 

gite,  go  ye. 


22* 


258 


ITALIAN    GRAMaiAR. 


Ire. 


INTINITIVE  MOOD. 

ire,  to  go. 

PARTICIPLE. 

ito,  gone. 


to  im^ 
igli  ivUf 


isiif 


I  went 
he  went. 


thou  wentest. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present, 
ite,  you  go. 

Imperfect. 

ivano, 


Perfect. 


(iro,  Ir), 


Future. 


tremo, 

ircte, 

ircino. 


we  went 


they  went. 


we  shall  or  will  go 
you  will  go. 
they  will  go. 


CONDITIONAL  MOOD, 
(triano),  they  should,  would,  or  oould  go,  or  might  go. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

tte,  go  ye. 


Olfre. 


io  oViva, 

I  smelled. 

olivi, 

thou  smelledst 

igli  oliva, 

he  smelled. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

olire,  to  smell. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
Imperfect. 


ol'ivano, 


th«y  smelled. 


PROVERBS. 


259 


PEOYERBS. 


A  word  to  the  wise  is  enough, 

All  tliat  is  fair  must  fade, 

A  ragged  coat  finds  little  credit. 


good 


Any  thing  for  a  quiet  life, 
A  great  liar  has  need   of  a 

memory, 
An  old  horse  for  a  young  soldier, 
A  buttered  Tuoutli  cannot  say  no, 
A  good  appetite  needs  no  sauce, 
A  good  beginning  makes   a  good 

ending, 
A  barking  dog  does  not  bite, 
A  vokmtaiy  burden  is  no  burden, 
A  gold  key  opens  every  door, 
A  fat  kitclien,  a  lean  testament, 
A  new  broom  sweeps  clean, 
Aught  is  better  than  naught. 
All  is  not  gold  that  glitters, 
A  sin  confessed  is  half  forgiven, 

A  little  spark  kindles  a  great  fire, 
A  rolling  stone  gathers  no  moss, 
A  little  gall  makes  a  great  deal  of 

honey  bitter. 
As  you  would  have  a  daughter, 

choose  a  wife, 
Anger  increases  love, 
All's  well  that  ends  well, 
A  married  man  is  a  caged  bird, 
An  ounce   of  discretion   is   worth 

more  than  a  pound   of  knowl- 
edge, 
A  lasting  stomach  has  no  ears, 
After  the  horse  is  stolen,  shut  the 

barn-door, 
A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in 

the  bush, 
T5end  the  tree  while  it  is  young. 
Better  late  than  never, 
Better  a  happy  heart  than  a  full 

purse. 
Better  bend  than  break. 
Better  give  the  wool  than  the  sheep, 
Big  head  and  little  wit, 


A  buon  intenditdr  pdche  parole. 

Bella  cdsa  tdsto  e  rapita. 

A  veste  logorata  pdca  fdde  vien  pres- 

tata. 
Alia  pace  si  puo  sacrificar  tiitto. 
A  un  gran  bugiardo  ci  vudl  budna 

memuria. 
A  gidvane  soldato  ve'cchio  cavallo. 
Bocca  unta  non  puo  dir  di  no. 
Budn  appetito  non  vudl  salsa. 
Budn  principio  fa  buon  fine. 

Can  che  abbaia  non  mdrde. 
Carica  volontiiria  non  carica. 
Chiave  d'dro  apre  ogni  porta. 
Grassa  cucina,  magro  testamento. 
Granata  nudva  spazza  ben  la  casa. 
Meglio  e  pdco  che  nie'nte. 
Oro  non  e  tutto  quel  che  risplende. 
Peccato  confessato  e  mezzo  perdo- 

nato. 
Piccdla  favilla  accende  gran  fudco. 
Pietra  mdssa  non  fa  mvischio. 
Pdco  fiele  fa  amaro  mdlto  miele. 

Qual  figlia  viioi,  tal  mdglie  piglia. 

Sdegno  aumenta  amdre. 
Tutto  e  bene  die  riesce  bene. 
Udmo  ammogliato,  uccello  in  gabbia. 
Val  pill  un'  dncia  di  discrezidne  che 
una  libbra  di  sapere, 

Ventre  digiiino  non  ode  nessiino. 
Ddpo  die  i  cavalli  sdno  presi,  serrar 

la  stalla. 
E  meglio  un  uccello  in  gabbia  die 

ce'nto  fudri. 
Picga  I'albero  quando  e  gidvane. 
Meglio  tardi  che  mai. 
E  meglio  il  cudr  fehce  che  la  bdrsa 

plena, 
E  meglio  piegare  che  rdmpere. 
E  meglio  dar  la  lana  che  la  pecora. 
Capo  grasso,  cervello  magro. 


260 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


Bad  news  travels  fast, 
Counsel  is  nothing  against  love, 
Comparisons  are  odious, 
Christmas    comes   but  once    in    a 

year, 
Do  what  you  ought,   come  what 

may. 
Do  not  count  your  chickens  before 

they  are  hatched, 
Delays  are  dangerous. 
Different  times,  different  manners. 
Drop  by  drop  wears  away  a  stone, 
Do  not  look  a  gift  horse  in  the 

mouth, 
Every  thing  is  good  in  its  season. 
Every  dog  is  a  lion  at  home, 
Every  truth  is  not  good  to  be  told. 
Every  body  knows  where  his  shoe 

pinches. 
Every  one  for  himself,  and  God  for 

us  all, 
Every  body  praises  his  own  saint. 
Every  body 's  friend,  nobody 's  friend. 
Every  one  thinks  his  own  cross  the 

heaviest, 
Extreme  ills,  extreme  remedies, 
Friends  in  need  are  friends  indeed. 
For  a  web  begun,  God  sends  thread. 
Fair  words,  but  look  to  your  purse, 
Four  eyes  see  more  than  two, 
Fortune  comes  to  him  who  seeks 

her. 
Forbidden  fruit  is  sweet. 
Father  Modest  never  was  a  prior, 
From  those  I  trust,  God  guard  me  ; 

from    those    I   mistrust,   I  will 

guard  myself, 
God  helps  him  who  helps  himself, 
Give  to  him  that  has. 
Give  time,  time, 
God  sends  meat,  and  the  devil  sends 

cooks, 
Great  griefs  are  mute. 
Great  smoke,  little  fire. 
Gold  does  not  buy  every  thing, 
Good  wine  makes  good  blood. 
He  who  succeeds  is  reputed  wise, 

He    who    knows    nothing,    knows 
enough  if  he  knows  how  to  be 
silent. 
He  is  blind  who  cannot  see  the  sun. 
He  who  sings  drives  away  sorrow, 


Le  cattive  nuove  volano. 

Cdntro  amore  non  e  consiglio. 

I  paragdni  son  tiltti  odidsi. 

Natale  non  viene  die  una  vdlta  I'an- 

no. 
Fa  quel  che  devi,  n'  arrivi  cib  che 

potra. 
Non  far  cdnto  dell'  udvo  non  ancdr 

nato. 
L'  indugiare  e  pericdloso. 
Altri  tempi,  alti'i  costumi. 
A  g(jccia  a  gdccia  si  trafdra  la  pietra. 
A  caval  donato,  non  guardar  in  bdc- 

ca. 
Da  stagidne  tiitto  e  budno. 
6gni  cane  e  ledne  a  casa  sua. 
6gni  vero  non  e  budno  a  dire. 
Ognuno  sa  dove  la  scarpa  lo  stringe. 

Ognun  per  se,  e  Dio  per  tiitti. 

Ognuno  Idda  il  prdprio  santo. 
Amico  d'  ognuno,  amico  di  nessiino. 
Ad  ognuno  par  piii  grave  la  crdv.'e 

siia. 
Ai  mali  estremi,  estremi  rimedi. 
A  bisdgni  si  condscon  gli  amici. 
A  tela  ordita  Dio  raanda  il  filo. 
Belle  pardle,  ma  guarda  la  bdrsa. 
Veddn  pill  quattr'  dcchi  che  due. 
Vien  la  fortiina  a  chi  la  procura. 

I  frutti  proibiti  sdno  ddlci. 
Fra  modesto  non  fu  mai  pridre. 
Da  chi  mi  f  ido,  mi  guardi  Iddio ;  da 
chi  non  mi  f  ido  mi  guardero  io. 

Chi  s'aiiita,  Dio  I'aiuta. 

Da  del  tiio  a  chi  ha  del  siio. 

Da  te'mpo  al  te'mpo. 

Dio  ci  manda  la  carne,  ma  il  diavolo 

1  cudclii. 
I  gran  doldri  sdno  muti. 
Gran  fumo,  pdco  arrdsto. 
L'dro  non  cdmpra  tiitto. 
Budn  vino  fa  budn  sangue. 
A  chi  la  riesce  bene,  e  teniito  pe* 

savio. 
Assai  sa,  chi  non  sa,  se  tacer  sa. 


Ben  e  cieco  chi  non  vede  il  sdle 
Chi  canta,  i  sudi  mali  spaventa 


PROVERBS. 


261 


He  who  buys  in  time,  buys  cheap, 

He  lauglis  well  who  laughs  last. 
Hear,  see,  and  say  nothing,  if  you 

would  live  in  peace, 
He  is  master  of  another  man's  hfe 

who  is  indifterent  to  his  own. 
He  gives  twice  who  gives  in  a  trice. 
He  who  stands  may  tali, 
He  that  reckons  without  his  host 

must  reckon  again. 
Hell  is  full  of  good  intentions, 
Habit  is  a  second  nature. 
In  at  one  ear,  and  out  at  the  other, 

HI  weeds  grow  apace. 

Look  before  you  leap. 

Like  master,  like  man, 

Live,  and  let  live. 

Love  me,  love  my  dog. 

Love  rules  without  law, 

Love  me  little,  and  love  me  long, 

Love  knows  not  labor. 

Let  him  who  is  well  oflf  stay  where 

he  is. 
Long  tongue,  short  hand. 
Marry  in  haste,  repent  at  leisure. 
Many  a  true  word  spoken  in  jest, 

Much  smoke  and  little  fire. 

Make  me  a  prophet,  and  I  will  make 

you  rich. 
Nothing  venture,  nothing  have. 
Nothing  is  difficult  to  a  willing  mind, 
Near  the  church,  far  from  God. 
Old  reckonings,  new  disputes, 
One  enemy  is  too  many,  and  a  hun- 
dred friends  are  too  few, 
One   hand  waslies  the  other,  and 

both  hands  wash  the  face. 
One  word  brings  another, 
One  swallow  does  not  make  a  sum- 
mer. 
One  man  warned  is  as  good  as  two, 
Out  of  sight,  out  of  mind, 

Poor  as  a  church  mouse. 

Poverty  has  no  kin. 

Physician,  heal  th^^self, 

Pluck  tlie  rose  and  leave  the  thorns, 

Rather  hat  in  liand  than  hand  in 

purse, 
Roses  grow  among  thorns, 


Chi  cdmpra  a  tempo,  cdmpra  a  budn 

mercato. 
Ride  bene  chi  ride  I'ultimo. 
6di,  ve'di   e   taci  se  vudi  viver  in 

pace. 
E  padrone  della  vita  altriii  chi  la  sua 

sprezza. 
Chi  da  presto,  del  il  ddppio. 
Chi  e  ritto  puo  cadere. 
Chi  fa  il  cdnto  senza  I'dste,  gli  con- 

vie'n  farlo  due  vdlte. 
Di  budna  volonta  e  pieno  I'inferno. 
L'  abito  e  lina  secdnda  natura. 
De'ntro  da  un  orecchio  e  fudri  dall' 

altro. 
La  mal  erba  cresce  presto. 
Guarda  innanzi  che  tu  salti. 
Tal  padrone,  tal  servitdre. 
Vivi,  e  lascia  vivere. 
Chi  ama  me,  ama  il  mio  cane. 
Amdr  re'gge  senza  legge. 
Amami  pdco,  ma  continua. 
Amdr  non  condsce  travaglio. 
Chi  sta  bene  non  si  mudva. 

Lunga  lingua,  cdrta  mano. 

Chi  si  marita  in  fre'tta,  stenta  adagio. 

Quel  che  pare  burla,  ben  sovente  h 

vero. 
Mdlto  fumo  e  pdco  fudco. 
Fammi  indovino,  e  ti  faro  ricco. 

Chi  non  s'arrischi  non  guadagna. 
A  chi  vudle,  non  e  cdsa  difficile. 
Vicino  alia  chie'sa  lontan  di  Di'o. 
A  cdnti  vecchi,  contese  nudve. 
E  trdppo  un  nemico,  e  cento  amici 

non  bastano. 
tJna  mano  lava  I'altra  e  tutt'  e  due 

lavano  il  viso. 
Una  pardla  tira  I'altra. 
Un  fidre  non  fa  Primavera. 

Un  avvertito  ne  val  due. 

Lontano   dagli   dcchi,   lontano    del 

cudre. 
Povero  cdme  un  tdpo  in  chiesa. 
Poverta  non  ha  parenti. 
Medico,  ciira  te  stesso. 
Cdgli  la  rdsa,  e  lascia  le  spine. 
Piutt()sto    cappello    in    mano,    che 

mano  alia  bdrsa. 
Anco  tra  le  spine  nascono  le  rdse. 


2G2 


ITALIAN   GEAMMAE. 


Saying  is  one  thing,  and  doing  is 

another, 
Silence  gives  consent, 
Strike  wliile  the  iron  is  hot, 
See  Naples,  and  then  die. 
Savings  are  the  first  gain, 
Seeing  is  beheving, 
Second  thoughts  are  best. 
The  full  belly  does  not  believe  in 

hunger, 
To  pay  one  in  his  own  coin. 
Think  much,  speak  little,  and  write 

less, 
Translators,  traitors. 
The  weakest  goes  to  the  wall, 
They  say,  is  a  liar. 
The  people's  voice,  God's  voice, 
To  fall  out  of  the  frying-pan  into 

the  fire, 
The  biter  is  sometimes  bit. 
The  world  is  governed  with  little 

brains, 
True  love  never  grows  old. 
The  liar  is  not  believed  when  he 

speaks  the  truth, 
The    workman   is    known   by   his 

work. 
There  is  always  a  calm  before  a 

storm. 
The  beard  does  not  make  the  phi- 
losopher, 
There  is  no  love  without  jealousy. 
There  is  no  smoke  without  fire. 
The  steed   is   starving  whilst  the 

grass  is  growing, 
The  devil  is  not  so  ugly  as  he  is 

painted. 

The  best  is  the  cheapest, 

Teacliing  we  learn. 

To  cast  pearls  before  swine. 

The  earth  covers  the  errors  of  the 

physician, 
There  is  no  disputing  about  tastes, 
The  doctor  seldom  takes  medicine, 
The  world  was  not  made  in  one  day, 
'J  ell  me  the  company  you  keep,  and 

I  will  tell  you  what  you  are, 
Whoever  brings,  finds  the  door  open 

for  him, 
Where  there  is  a  will,  there's  a 

way. 
Well  begun  is  half  done, 


Altra  cdsa  e  il  dire,  altra  il  fare. 

Chi  face,  acconsente. 

Batti  il  ferro  quand'  e  caldo. 

Vedi  Napoli  e  poi  muori. 

Lo  sparagno  e  il  prirao  guadagno. 

Chi  con  I'dcchio  vede,  di  cudr  credo. 

II  secdndo  pensie'ro  e  il  miglidre. 

Cdrpo  satdllo  uon  crede  al  digiiino. 

Pagar  uno  della  sua  prdpria  moneta. 
Pensa  mdlto,  parla  pdco,  scrivi  meno. 

Traduttdri,  traditdri. 
Se'mpre  ha  tdrto  il  piu  debole. 
Si  dice,  e  mentitdre. 
Vdce  di  pdpolo,  voce  di  Die. 
Cader  della  padella  nelle  bragie. 

Chi  burla,  vien  burlato. 

Con  pdco   cervello   si   governa  il 

mdndo. 
Amdr  vero  non  diventa  canuto. 
Al  bugiardo  non  si  crede  la  verita. 

All  dpera  si  condsce  il  maestro. 

La  bonaccia  burrasca  minaccia. 

La  barba  non  fa  il  fildsofo. 

Non  c'e  amdr  senza  gelosiia. 

Non  c'e  f urn o  senza  fudco. 

Me'ntre  I'e'rba  cre'sce  il  cavallo  mucJre 

di  fame. 
II  diavolo  non  e  cdsi  brutto  come  si 

dipinge. 

II  miglidre  e  men  caro. 

Lisegnando  s'impara. 

Gettar  le  margherite  ai  pdrci. 

Gli  errdri  del  me'dico  gli  cdpre  la 

terra. 
Dei  giisti  non  se  ne  disputa. 
Di  rado  il  medico  piglia  medicina. 
In  un  gidrno  non  si  fe'  Rdma. 
Dimmi  con  chi  tratti,  e  ti  dir6  chi  seL 

Aperta  ha  la  pdrta  chiunque  appdrta. 

A  chi  vudle,  non  mancano  mddi. 

Budn  principio  e  la  meta  dell'  dpra. 


IDIOMS. 


263 


Wlio  does  too  much  often  does  little, 
Who  knows  most  believes  least, 
Who  comes  seldom  is  welcome. 
While  there  is  lite,  there  is  hope, 
Who  knows  nothing  never  doubts, 
What's  done  can't  be  undone, 
What  costs  little  is  little  valued. 
Who  judges  others  condemns  him- 
self, 


Spesso  chi  trdppo  fa,  pdco  fa. 
Chi  pill  sa,  mena  crede. 
Chi  raro  viene,  vien  bene. 
Finche  v'e  fisito,  v'e  speranza. 
Chi  niente  sa,  di  niente  dubita. 
Quel  che  e  fatto  non  si  pub  disfare. 
Que'llo  che  cdsta  pdco,  si  stima  pdco. 
Chi  altri  giildica  se  condanna. 


IDIOMS. 


Non  vale  un  dcca, 

A  beir  agio, 

Mangiar  carne  d'  allddola, 

Fare  alto  e  basso, 

Amico  da  bonaccia, 

E  air  articolo  di  mdrte, 

Dar  la  bdia, 

Da  bdsto  e  sella, 

In  un  batter  d'  dcchio, 

Dirizzare  il  becco  agli  sparvieri, 

Andare  di  bene  in  raeglio, 

Un  udmo  da  bene, 

Dir  del  be'ne, 

Mi  convien  berla, 

Teller  1'  anima  co'  denti, 

Dal  de'tto  al  fatto  v'  e  un  gran  tratto, 

Chi  ddrme  non  pi'glia  pe'sci, 
Questa  cdsa  non  m'  e'ntra, 
Non  e  e'rba  del  vdstro  drto, 
Mangiarsi  1'  e'rba  sdtto, 
Ascdnder  1'  amo  nell'  ^sca, 

Le  cdse  sdno  in  budn  essere, 

Kssere  all'  estremo  della  vita, 

Stare  all'  erta, 

Esser  di  budna  bocca, 

Favellare  con  le  inani, 

Non  nverjieie, 

Yax  fildre  lino, 

Pagar  '\\fio, 

Dare  ad  uno  carta  bianca. 

Fia  tre  gidrni. 


It  is  not  worth  a  pin. 

Leisurely. 

To  take  pleasure  in  being  praised. 

To  do  as  one  pleases. 

A  table  friend. 

He  is  at  the  point  of  death. 

To  laugh  at. 

Fit  for  any  thing. 

In  an  instant. 

To  attempt  impossibilities. 

To  grow  better  and  better. 

A  good  honest  man. 

To  speak  well  of  a  person. 

I  must  bear  it. 

To  be  almost  dead. 

To  say  and  to  do  are  two  diflferent 

things. 
Idleness  begets  poverty. 
I  do  not  comprehend  this. 
This  is  not  of  your  own  making. 
To  spend  what  one  has. 
To  deceive  one  under  the  color  of 

friendship. 
Things  are  in  a  good  way.  * 

To  be  at  the  point  of  death. 
To  be  upon  one's  guard. 
To  be  a  great  eater. 
To  strike. 

To  be  good-natured. 
To  make  one  do  what  you  please. 
To  pay  dear  for. 
To  give  one  full  power. 
In  three  days. 


264 


ITALIAN   GKAMMAR. 


Dolersi  di  gdmha  sana, 
Darla  a  gdmbe, 
Vincere  ta  gdra, 
Con  bel  gdrbo, 
Fare  la  gdtta  morta, 
Come  m^glio  vi  aggrdda, 
Imbarcdrsi  senza  biscdtto, 

i!i  impost  at  0  di  vizj, 
Vendere  all'  incdnto, 
Dar  r  incenso  a'  mdrti, 
11  tiio  inchidstro  ndn  tigne, 
Mostrare  altrui  lucciole  per  lanteme, 

In  casa  sua  v'  e  il  Idtte  di  gaUina, 

Uno  mano  Idva  V  altra, 

Legdrsela  al  dito, 

Tenere  in  Zt&ra, 

Dare  in  luce, 

Venire  mdnco, 

Uscir  del  mdnico, 

Far  un  viarrdne, 

Mettere  alia  vela, 

Mirdre  con  la  coda  ^ell'  dcchio, 

Ti  faro  mdrdere  le  unghie, 

Mutdr  verso, 

Dar  r  ultima  mano, 

Fudr  di  mano, 

Essere  alia  mano, 

Avere  la  mano, 

]\Ietter  mano  ad  una  cdsa, 

Imbottar  nd)bia, 

Testa  di  pollastra. 

Fare  il  becco  all'  dca, 

(5cchio  mio. 

In  un  batter  d'  dcchio, 

A  quattr'  dcchi, 

Va  in  budn  dra, 

Far  orecchie  di  mercante, 

Tutto'  1  mdndo  e  jm^se, 

Col  tempo  e  cdlla  pdglia  maturano 
le  nespole, 

Star  si  ne'  prdpii  pdnni, 

Cavar  le  penne  maestre, 

La  vdstra  opinidne  non  mi  quddra, 

Qiidsto  e  il  qudnto, 

Di  qudndo  in  quando, 

Dar  nella  ragnatela, 

Menar  tutti  a  rastrdllo, 

Render  I'anima, 

Ridere  agli  angeli. 

Ha  pdco  sdle  in  zucca, 


:  f-c  u 


To  complain  without  reason. 

To  run  away. 

To  carry  the  prize. 

In  a  civil  manner. 

To  dissemble. 

As  you  think  fit. 

To   undertake   a  thing  without 
means. 

He  is  very  vicious. 

To  sell  by  auction. 

To  make  almanacs  for  the  last  year. 

Your  credit  is  not  good. 

To  make  one  believe  that  the  moon 
is  made  of  green  cheese. 

In  his  house  they  always  eat  of  the 
best. 

To  help  one  another. 

To  owe  one  a  spite. 

To  keep  in  suspense. 

To  pubUsh. 

To  faint. 

To  be  extravagant. 

To  make  a  mistake. 

To  set  sail.  n  f    A 

To  cast  sheeps'  eyes.  6c^/<:»J,«^<'^r**^ 

I'U  make  you  repent  it.  ^^a-^A" 

To  alter  the  course  of  one's  life.   9^^ ' 

To  finish.  ^ 

Out  of  the  way. 

To  be  ready. 

To  have  the  advantage. 

To  begin  a  thing. 

To  lose  time. 

Giddy  brained. 

To  finish  any  work. 

My  darling. 

In  an  instant. 

Face  to  face. 

God  speed  you. 

To  give  no  ear. 

One  may  live  everywhere. 

Time  brings  every  thing  to  matu- 
rity. 

To  be  contented  with  what  one  has. 

To  take  away  the  best  one  has. 

I  am  not  of  your  opinion. 

This  is  the  point. 

Now  and  then. 

To  fall  into  a  snare. 

To  use  all  ahke. 

To  give  up  the  ghost. 

To  laugh  at  nothing. 

He  has  not  a  great  deal  of  judgment. 


IDIOMS. 


265 


J  a  gallina  che  canta  e  quella  che  ha 

fatto  I'udvo, 
Venir  la  schhima  alia  bocca, 
Levarsi  all'  alba  de'  tafani, 
Chi  tdrdi  arriva  male  allijggia, 

Ten&e  il  piede  in  due  stafFe, 

Piglidr  gli  ucceUiui, 

Ucc€l  da  valle, 

Ugner  le  mani, 

Far  venir  I'acqua  all'  ugola, 

Vedere  il  pel  nell'  u6vo, 

Dar  le  vele  a'  venti, 

A  vela  e  remo, 

Venflemmia  mentra  hai  tempo, 

La  candela  e  al  v&de, 

La  verita  sta  sempre  a  gala, 

I   miei   afFari   hanno  preso   budna 

piega, 
Nascer  vestito, 
Zdra  a  chi  tdcca, 
Far  d'una  lancia  un  zipolo, 
Cantare  ad  lino  la  zdlfa, 


The  man  who  is  too  earnest  in  jus- 
tifying himself  is  guilty. 

To  be  in  a  great  passion. 

To  rise  late. 

Those  who  come  too  late  must  kiss 
the  cook. 

To  have  two  strings  to  one's  bow. 

To  play  the  fool. 

A  sly  man. 

To  bribe  one  with  money. 

To  make  the  mouth  water. 

To  be  clear-sighted. 

To  set  sail. 

With  all  speed. 

Get  money  while  you  can.  « 

The  candle  is  almost  out. 

Truth  always  prevails  at  last. 

My  affairs  are  going  on  successfully. 

To  be  born  lucky. 

Let  every  one  care  for  himself. 

To  make  a  little  out  of  a  great  deal 

To  chide. 


266 


ITALIAN   GRAMMAK. 


I 


ITALIAN   AND   ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


Ahhdglio,  mistake. 
accdnto,  aside. 
dcqua,  water. 
adddsso,  on,  upon. 
off  anno,  grief. 
affdtto,  entirely. 
afft'lto,  good-will,  kind- 
~~"  ness. 
dgo,  needle. 
alba,  dawn. 
dlhero,  tree. 
alldra,  then. 
alldro,  laurel. 
dlma,  soul. 
nJmdno,  at  least. 
al  par,  equal,  alike. 
alte'ro,  proud. 
ditro,  other. 
amardzza,  bitterness. 
diaho,  both. 
amicizia,  friendship. 
amico,  friend. 
amistdde,  friendship. 
dmo,  fish-hook. 
amdre,  iove. 
ancdlla,  waiting-maid. 
andlito,  panting. 
anello,  a  ring. 
dnima,  soul. 
dnimo,  courage,  mind. 
aiimnti,  panting. 
antico,  ancient. 
apertvra,  hole,  gap. 
dqidla,  eagle. 
ardtro,  plough. 
arcdno,  secret. 
ardente,  hot,  burning. 
arena,  sand,  gravel. 
arc/enfo,  silver. 
ascdso,  hidden. 
aspetto,  aspect. 
assenndto,  sensible. 
astdnte,  by-stander. 
astro,  star. 
augeJIetto,  small  bird. 


dura,  gale,  breeze. 
aveilo,  grave,  tomb. 
avvendnza,  comeliness. 
avvemre,  future. 
avvertenza,  precaution. 
avviso,  advice. 

Bdcio,  a  kiss. 
halena,  whale. 
bdllo,  ball. 

bambino,  child,  infant. 
bandito,  an  outlaw. 
beUezza,  beauty. 
belta,  beauty. 
benche,  although. 
5/ccA/^/'e,drinking-glass. 
bde,  anger,  passion. 
bidndo,  fair,  light. 
birbdnte,  vagabond. 
bisdgno,  need,  want. 
bizzdrro,  whimsical. 
bdrgo,  suburb. 
bdrsa,  a  purse,  bag. 
bdsco,  a  wood. 
bottdga,  shop. 
brdccio,  an  arm. 
brdndo,  sword. 
brezza,  cold,  breeze. 
brina,  frost. 
bruno,  brown,  dark. 
brutto,  ugly. 
bugia,  a  lie. 
budi,  oxen. 
burrdsca,  tempest. 
burro,  butter. 

Cdccia,  hunting. 
cdgna,  dog. 
cdlca,  confusion. 
calvezza,  baldness. 
cdlvo,  bald. 
cdlza,  stocking. 
cambiavalute,  broker. 
cammino,  way,  road. 
cdinpo,  field 


canto,  song. 
canzdne,  song. 
capdnna,  cottage. 
capelli,  pan. 
cdro,  dear. 
cdrne,  meat. 
carabina,  carbine. 
carezza,  caress. 
carnejice,  executioner, 
cdrta,  paper. 
cascdta,  cascade. 
cdso,  case. 
catena,  chain. 
cdttedrale,  cathedral. 
caftivo,  bad. 
cdido,  wary,  cautious. 
cdvo,  hollow. 
ce'na,  supper. 
cdnere,  ashes,  cinders. 
ce'ppo,  stump,  log. 
cdra,  wax. 
ce'rto,  certain,  sure. 
cetra,  cithem. 
cervdlo,  brain. 
c.he'io,  quiet,  still. 
chidro,  clear,  fair. 
chidve,  key. 
chiardre,     brightness, 

clearness. 
china,  declivity. 
chiddo,  nail. 
chitdn-a,  guitar. 
ciabbaftmo,  cobbler. 
cibo,  food. 
cieco,  blind, 
cie1o,  sky,  heaven. 
cima,  top,  summit. 
cinghidle,  a  wild  boar. 
cittadino,  citizen. 
cdda,  tail. 

cognizidne,  knowledge. 
cogndto,  brother  in-law. 
colazidne,  br(iakfast. 
cdJle,  hill. 
cd/lera,  anger. 


ITALIAN   iVND    ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


267 


Tohivatdre,  farmer. 

cuucorre'nza,  competi- 
tion. 

coniadino,  peasant. 

(•onto,  account. 

contrdda,  country. 

roncito,  banquet,  feast. 

ccippa,  cup. 

vartuui,  curtain. 

ajstilme,  custom,  man- 
ner. 

cniccio,  anguish. 

cHcina,  kitchen. 

culla,  cradle. 

cadre,  lieart. 

citpidigia,  covetousness. 

ciipo,  deep. 

Dahbene,  good,  honest. 
ddndro,  money. 
dditto,  crime. 
dc'l'ole,  weak. 
defto,  word. 
iti,  day. 
dife'tto,  fault. 
disgrdzia,  misfortune. 
ddrjlia,  grief,  pain. 
dSlce,  sweet. 
dolcezza,  sweetness. 
ddno,  gift. 
donzkda,  damsel. 
ddtto,  skilful,  learned. 
droghiere,  druggist. 
dnfto,  right,  straight. 
diio/o,  grief,  pain. 

Ehbre'zza,  drunkenness. 

e'lmo,  helmet. 

e'lsa,  the  hilt  of  a  sword. 

entrduihi,  both. 

erdrio,  the  treasury. 

erba,  grass. 

erbdso,  grassy. 

e7-('de,  the  heir. 

e7-de,  hero. 

etrdnte,  wandering. 

e'lio,  steep,  ascent. 

estdte,  summer  season. 

eta,  age. 

etdde,  age. 

ct&ee,  ethereal. 

Fdccia,  face. 


/dice,  scythe. 

fdilo,  fault. 

fdme,  hunger. 

farfdlla,  butterfly. 

fata,  fairy. 

fatica,  fatigue. 

fato,  fate,  destiny. 

Javella,       discourse, 
speech. 

f<fde,  faith. 

ferro,  iron. 

Jidinma,  flame. 

Jidnco,  side. 

Jidto,  breath. 

fico,  fig. 

Jiddnza,  trust,  hope, 

ficjura,  figure,  shape. 

Jiyliuolo,  son. 

Jie'ro,  cruel,  savage. 

Jieuole,  feeble,  weak. 

Jidre,  flower. 

Jidcco,  tassel,  flake   of 
snow. 

JiscJu'dta,  whistling. 

Jidrido,  flowery. 

fdlla,  crowd. 

fdrte,  strong. 

frettoldso,  hasty. 

fuhjido,  bright. 

fumo,  smoke. 

fune,  a  rope. 

ftidco,  fire. 

faribdndo,  like  a  mad- 
man. 

GdlJo,  a  cock. 
(jelo,  ice. 
geiido,  frozen. 
geiiu'to,  groan. 
gemcbdndo,  groaning, 
genere,  gender,  kind. 
genitdre,  father. 
g€nte,  people. 
gindcchio,  a  knee. 
gidja,  joy,  a  jewel. 
gidvno,  day. 
gidvane,  young, 
gioventu,  youth. 
giuhilo,  rejoicing. 
giitbild/tte,  merry-mak- 
ing. 
giiidfzio,  judgment. 
giurame'nto,  oath. 


giustizia,  justice. 
gdbbo,  hunch-backed. 
gdla,  the  throat. 
gdta,  clieek. 
graddsso,  a  boaster. 
gragnudki,  hail. 
grdsso,  fat. 
gi-dta,    grate,    an    iron 

grate. 
grido,  cry. 
grifdgno,  rapacious. 
gudi,  woe. 
gudncia,  cheek. 
gudrdo,  look,  sight. 
gudsto,  spoiled,  havoc. 
gueiriero,  warrior. 
guiderddne,  reward. 

Igndto,  unknown. 
imbandigidne,  setting  of 

dishes  on  the  table 

at  a  feast. 
ingdiiuo,  deceit,  fraud. 
indovina,  fortune-teller. 
inge'gno,  wit,  art,  skill. 
intdrno,  about. 
inverno,  winter. 
invidia,  envy. 

La,  there. 
Idbbro,  lip, 
Idcrima,  a  tear. 
Iddro,  thief. 
laggiu,  below. 
larva,  ghost. 
Idto,  side. 
lavdro,  work. 
li'gge,  law. 
legume,  pulse. 
le'nto,  slow. 
lettdre,  reader. 
le've,  light. 
libbra,  pound. 
lido,  bank,  shore. 
lie'to,  merry,  cheerful. 
Ue've,  lightly. 
lingua,    tongue,     lan- 
guage. 
lite,  strife. 
Idgoro,  worn  out. 
Idrdo,  dirty. 
luccnte,  shining. 
lume,  light. 


268 


ITALIAN   GRA3IMAR. 


liingo,  long. 
ludgo,  place. 
lusinyhiero,  flattering. 
liistro,  lustre. 

Macilente,  tliin. 

magia,  magic. 

vidglia,  mail,  armor,  a 

net. 
mdgro,  lean. 
male,  ill. 

vialattia,  sickness. 
tnalo'ri,  ills. 
vialdra,  ruin. 
mdnto,  cloak. 
vwre,  sea. 
marito,  husband. 
viariudlo,  a  clieat. 
masceUa,  jaw-bone. 
7nasndda,   a    crowd   of 

soldiers. 
mciio,  less. 
me'nte,  mind. 
ine'nsa,  table. 
mentre,  whilst. 
mercanzia,  goods. 
merlettl,  lace. 
viesdiinello,  poor. 
mestizia,  melancholy. 
mdsto,  sad. 
vieta,  moiety. 
mezzo,  middle,  midst. 
miglidia,  thousands. 
mlnestra,  soup. 
viiserki,  misery. 
mddo,  manner. 
mdglie,  wife. 
mdlle,  tender. 
mone'ta,  money. 
mdndo,  world. 
mdrso,  bit. 

monidgna,  mountain. 
md7ie,  death. 
77tdlo,  motion. 
motteggiatdre,  a  jester. 
mulino,  mill. 

Ndno,  a  dwarf. 
ndso,  nose. 
nutdle,  nativity. 
ndto,  son,  child. 
nave,  ship. 
ne,  of  it,  of  them. 


iiebhia,  mist,  fog. 
nemico,  enemy. 
nequizia,  wickedness. 
ndve,  snow. 
niente,  nothing. 
ndja,  weariness. 
ndce,  walnut-tree. 
ndtte,  night. 
ndzze,  marriage. 
niibe,  cloud. 
nuvda,  cloud. 

Occulto,  hidden. 

olezzo,  odor. 

dltre,  besides. 

dmbra,  shadow. 

diida,  wave. 

dra,  an   hour,  now,  at 

present. 
orgdglio,  haughtiness. 
drdine,  order. 
orie'ide,  east. 
dnna,  track,  trace. 
oriudlo,  watch. 
dro,  gold. 
drso,  bear. 

oscuro,  obscure,  dark. 
dsso,  bone. 
ostello,  tavern. 

Pace,  peace. 
jxtese,  country. 
paldgio,  palace. 
pdhna,  palm. 
palude,  marsh. 
pd7ica.  bench. 
paragdne,  comparison, 
pnre're,  opinion. 
pd7'i,  equal. 
pardla,  word. 
pdrroco,  pastor. 
pdsco,  pasture. 
pdsqxia,    easter,    pass- 
over. 
passcggio,  a  walk. 
pdsto,  food. 
pdtto,  bargain. 
pazzia,  folly. 
pdzzo,  mad. 
peggio,  worse. 
pd>m,  punishment. 
pendso,  painful. 
pensie'ro,  thought. 


pe'ntola,  pot. 
perche,  why,  because. 
pericolo,  danger. 
perdnne,  perennial. 
pesce,  fish. 
pe'ssimo,  worst. 
petto,  breast. 
pezzo,  piece. 
pio,  pious. 
piano,  plain. 
pidnto,  tears. 
piazza,  square. 
piccino,  little  one. 
pie'tra,  stone. 
pigidne,  house-rent. 
pidggia,  rain. 
pittdi'e,  painter. 
piihnn,  down,  feathers. 
pdco,  little. 
podagra,  the  gout. 
podere,  farm,  power. 
podesta,  power,  domin- 
ion. 
pdggio,  hill. 
pdi,  then. 
poiche,  since. 
pdlvere,  dust. 

po7iierididne,  post-meri* 
dian. 

pdrco,  hog. 

pdrpora,  purple. 

portame'/ito,  carriage. 

pote'nza,  power. 

pote're,  power. 

poltrd7ie,  poltroon. 

pdzzo,  a  well. 

prdto,  meadow. 

pre'dica,  sermon. 

premio,  recompense. 

pre7)mra,  importance. 

p7-esciutto,  ham. 

pi^esso,  near. 

p7'e7ice,  prince. 

pri7naveia,  spring. 

progetto,  project. 

prodezza,ipTowess,ya.\oT 

p7'dp7-io,  proper. 

piigTidle,  poniard. 

pTire,  yet. 

Qua,  here. 
quaggiu,  down  here. 
qudlche,  some. 


ITALIAN   AND    ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


269 


qualunqne,  whoever. 
qiiaresinia,  lent. 
quasi,  almost. 
quassu,  here  above. 

Rddo,  rare,  scarce. 
rd(/t/io,  beam,  ray. 
ra(//dne,  reason,  faculty. 
rumo,  branch. 
rdme,  copper. 
7'e,  king. 
red/lie,  kingdom. 
r^dina,  rein  of  a  bridle. 
regdlo,  present,  gift. 
regina,  queen. 
re'gola,  rule,  regimen. 
ricchezza,  riches. 
ride''}te,  smiling. 
rii,r  inbrdnza,   remem- 

i)  ranee. 
rfij,  crook,  wicked. 
ripieno,  full. 
riso,  laughter. 
ritrdfto,  portrait. 
riva,  shore. 
r6zzo,  rough. 
romita,  hermitess. 
rugidda,  dew. 
ruggine,  rust. 

Sdggio,  sage,  wise. 
sd!a,  a  hall. 
sal  dine,  sftusage. 
sdlice,  willow-tree. 
sdngae,  blood. 
saj)u'nte,  learned. 
sdsso,  stone. 
scd'c,  stairs. 
scdpolo,  not  married. 
scdr/ia,  a  shoe. 
scdrso,  rare. 
sceinpio,  simple. 
sche'nio,  raillery. 
schidffo,  a  box  or  cutf 

on  the  ear. 
schicra,  a  troop. 
sconfitta,  defeat. 
scop^rta,  discovery. 
sciido,  a  sliield. 
scuro,  dark. 
sdegno,  anger. 
$h,  himself,  herself. 
se'colo,  a  century. 


secco,  dry. 
sega,  saw. 
segno,  sign. 
segrAo,  secret. 
selva,  wood. 
seinbidnza,  face,  look. 
seinprc,  always. 
se'iino,  judgment. 
senso,  sense. 
sentiero,  path. 
seta,  silk. 
simile,  equal. 
sito,  situ;ition,  seat. 
scdve,  sweet,  agreeable. 
sdgno,  a  dream. 
sdlito,  accustomed. 
sdmmo,  top,  height. 
sdnno,  sleep. 
sdrcio,  a  mouse. 
sorriso,  smile. 
sdrte,  destiny. 
sospiro,  a  sigh. 
sdtto,  under. 
spdda,  a  sword. 
spdsso,  amusement. 
specie,  sort. 
spe'ine,  hope. 
sperdnza,  hope. 
spe'sso,  often. 
spina,  a  thorn. 
sp&jlia,  clothes. 
spdnda,  shore. 
spdrco,  dirty. 
squall dre,  paleness. 
stancltezza,  weariness. 
Stella,  star. 
stivdie,  boot. 
strep ito,  noise. 
Strega,  witch. 
subito,  quick. 
succo,  juice,  sap. 
sudlo,  earth,  grovmd. 
sudno,  sound,  noise. 

Tale,  such,  like. 
tdrdi,  late. 
tdzza,  a  cup. 
tedffsco,  a  German. 
te'nia,  fear. 
te'nebre,  darkness. 
terra,  earth. 
te'sta,  the  head. 
tdro,  bull. 

23* 


tdrtora,  a  turtle-dove. 
tdsto,  quick. 
tra,  between. 
tr^cce,  tress  of  hair. 
tribolo,  sorrow,  a  tliistle. 
trdno,  throne. 
tutto,  all. 

Uccdlo,  bird. 
uffizio,  office. 
udmini,  men. 
usdo,  passage. 

Vdcca,  cow. 
vdgo,  fine,  handsome. 
vdmpo,  a  flame,  flush. 
vdno,  vain,  empty. 
vdso,  vessel,  pot. 
v^cchio,  an  old  man. 
ve'ce,  (in),  instead. 
vdo,  veil. 

veitro,  a  grayhound. 
ve'nto,  wind. 
Ventura,  fortune,  luck. 
vergdgna,  shame. 
ve'rno,  winter. 
ve'ro,  truth. 

verdne,  gallery,  balcony. 
vestito,  clothes. 
vezzo,  pastime,  pleasure 
via,  way,  road. 
vicino,  near. 
villdggio,  village. 
vilta,  cowardice. 
vinte,  vanquished,  per- 
suaded. 
vista,  sight. 
viso,  face. 
vita,  life. 
vittdria,  victory. 
vivdnda,  victuals. 
vdglia,  mind,  desire. 
vdio,  flight. 
vdlpe,  fox. 
volpino,  cunning. 
vdlta,  turn,  revolution, 
vdlto,  face. 

Zingara,  gypsy. 
zimbeilo,  allurement. 
zifto,  hush,  silence. 
zdlla,  clod,  lump. 
zdppo,  lame. 


270 


ITALIAN   GKA3IMAR. 


ENGLISH   AND   ITALIAN   VOCABULARY. 


Accident,  accid^nte. 
acquaintance,  conosc^- 

za. 
fict  (action),  dtto. 
ai  nil  irable,  ammirdbile. 
ailvantage,  vantdggio. 
adversity,  avversita. 
advocate,  avvocdto. 
age,  eta,  secolo. 
ago,  a  while  ago,  long 

ago,  qxidlche  tempo  fa, 

iiidlto  tempo  fa. 
agreeable,  piace'vole. 
ainiiglity,  onnipot^nte. 
aioud,  fdrte. 
although,  benche. 
always,  sempre. 
ambition,  ambizidne. 
ancient,  anzidno. 
anger,  sd^gno. 
answer,  rispdsta. 
apjiearance,  appar€nza, 

fdccia. 
apple,  pdmo  or  inela. 
architect,  archite'tto. 
army,  ese'rcito. 
art,  arte. 

assiduous,  assiduo. 
astonishment,  stiipdre. 
auditors,  ascoltatdri. 
author,  autdre. 
away,  via. 

Back,  ddsso. 
baker,  forndio- 
lialdness,  calvdzza. 
\ mWooxi,  palldne. 
!  anker,  banchiere. 
bargain,  contrdtto. 
base,  vile. 
battle,  battdglia. 
beard,  bdrba. 
beautiful,  bdlo. 
beauty,  belta. 
because,  perche. 


bed,  iMo. 

beggar,  mendicdnte. 

behind,  per  di  die'tro. 

behold,  dcco. 

bell,  campdna. 

benefit,  beneficio. 

better,  miglidi'e. 

birth,  nativita. 

bishop,  vdscovo. 

black,  7i(fro. 

body,  cdrpo. 

bold,  ardito. 

bouquet,  mdzso  di  fidri. 

breakfast,  coluzidne. 

broth,  brddo. 

burst    (of    laughter), 

scoppidre  d^le  risa. 
business,  affdre. 

Cabbage,  cdvolo. 
cabinet-maker,  ebanista. 
calm,  cdhna. 
candle,  candela. 
caricature,  caricatura. 
carriage,  carrdzza. 
cause,  cdusa. 
certainly,  ce'rto. 
chance,  ventiirn. 
change,  matazidne. 
charming,  ajfafscindnte. 
chimney,  cammino. 
chair,  se'dia. 
character,  cardttere. 
charitable,  cnritatdvole. 
child,  fanciuUo. 
chin,  me'nto. 
circle,  circolo. 
civil,  civile. 
clear,  chid.ro. 
clever,  dbile. 
climate,  clima. 
cloak,  manteilo. 
coast,  cdsta. 
coat,  vestito. 
conducive,  profttevole. 


confessor,  confessdre. 
consequence,  consegu^- 

za. 
contrary,  contrdrio. 
conquest,  conquista. 
copper,  rdme. 
correct,  corretto. 
country,  pae'se  or  pdtric. 
coward,  poltrdne. 
crazy,  pdzzo. 
crime,  delitto. 
crowd,  turba. 
cruel,  crudeie. 
cup,  cdppa,  tdzza. 
cupidity,  cupidigia. 
custom,  costume. 

Dangerous,  pericoldsa 
day,  gidrno. 
debt,  debito. 
decay,  declinazidne. 
decent,  decdnte. 
defeat,  sconfitta. 
defiance,  disfida. 
desire,  desiddrio. 
despite,  di^spe'tto. 
despotic,  dispdtico. 
diflerence,  differe'nza. 
difficult,  difficile. 
discovery,  scope'rta 
disease,  malattia. 
distance,  distdnza. 
doctor,  dottdre. 
dress,  gdnna. 
dry,  secco. 

Early,  mattutino. 
eclipse,  ecclissi. 
effect,  effe'tto. 
eloquence,  eloqudnza. 
employment,  iinpiego. 
empire,  impe'ro. 
end,  fine. 

endurance,  sofferdnza. 
enemy,  nemico. 


ENGLISH   AND   IT^y:.IAN    VOCABULAEY. 


271 


ensuing,  segu€nte. 
enterprise,  intraprisa. 
entirely,  inieraviente. 
envy,  invidia. 
a-ternal,  ete'rno. 
ev  idently ,  palpahilmente. 
ever,  senipre,  tuttdvia. 
executioner,  carnefice. 
eye,  dcchio. 
eyebrows,  ciglia. 
eyelids,  palpebre. 

Face,  fdccia. 
tiilse,  fd/so. 
falsehood,  menzdgna. 
tiincy,  fantasia. 
farmer,  fattdre. 
tat,  (jrdsso. 
tault,  fdllo. 
favor,  favdre. 
fear,  timdre. 
feather,  piuma. 
feature,  faUezza. 
tellow,  ugudle,  compdgno. 
fellow-citizen,  concitta- 

dino. 
few,  pdco. 
fine,  fino, 
finger,  dito, 
fire,  fudco. 
firebrand,  tizzdne. 
fleet,  fldtta. 
flock,  gregge. 
flower,  Jidre. 
fog,  nehbia. 
hhA,  motto. 
forehead,  frdnte. 
foreigner,  forestiero. 
folk,  fdrca. 
tox,  vdlpe. 
fruit,  frutto. 
fury,  fur  [a. 

Oeneral,  generdle. 
genius,  g^nio. 
j^entle,  gentile. 
•.'entleman,  gentiludmo. 
girl,  fanciuUa. 
glass,  vetro. 
glory,  gldria. 
gloves,  gudnti. 
goodness,  JKntta 
grandchild,  nipotino. 


grandfather,     ivo    or 

ndnno. 
grandmother,   dva  or 

ndnna. 
grain,  grdno. 
grateful,  grdto. 
grief,  doldre. 
grocer,  droghi&e,  botte- 

gdjo. 
gross,  grdsso. 
guide,  guida. 
guilty,  colpe'vole. 
guinea,  ghinea. 

Hail,  gragnudla. 
hair,  cope'Uo. 
happiness,  felicita. 
hare,  lep-e. 
haste,  premura. 
head,  te'sta,  capo. 
heaven,  cie'lo. 
health,  salute. 
heart,  cudre  or  cdre. 
heavy,  pesdnte. 
heel,  calcdgno. 
here,  qua,  qui. 
hero,  erde. 
high,  dlto. 
hip,  dnca. 
historian,  istdrico  or 

star  ICO. 
hither,  qui  o  qua. 
\\oxne,  dimdra. 
homely,  rdzzo. 
hope,  sperdnza. 
how,  cdme. 
human,  xandno. 
humble,  livnle. 
hunger,  fame. 

Idea,  idea. 
idle,  pigro. 
ill,  mule. 

immediate,  immcdidto. 
indolence,  indolenza. 
infinite,  infinita. 
influence,  influenza. 
ingenious,  ingegndso. 
inhabitant,  abitdnte. 
inheritor,  ere'de. 
injury,  tdrto. 
inn,  a  I  her  go. 
inquisitive,  curidso. 


instrument,  istrum€nto. 

Joke,  burla. 
journey,  vidggio. 
joy,  gidia. 
judge,  giudice. 
judgment,  giudizio. 
just,  giiisto. 

Key,  chidve. 
kingdom,  r^gno. 
kitchen,  cucina. 
knife,  colte'llo. 
knowledge,  cognizidne. 

Labor,  lavdro. 

lace,  merletto. 

lame,  zdppo. 

language,  lingua. 

large,  grdnde* 

laughter,  riso. 

law,  legge. 

lawyer,  legista. 

leaf,  fdglia. 

least,  minimo. 

leg,  gdmba. 

lie,  menzdgna. 

life,  vita. 

hght,  lume. 

lightning,  Idmpo. 

lion,  ledrie. 

lip,  Idbbro. 

lock-maker,  chiavajudlo 

loss,  perdita. 

loud,  dlto. 

love,  amdre. 

Maid,  fanciulla. 
majesty,  maesta. 
manner,  maniera. 
marriage,  sposalizio. 
marvelous,   maravigli- 

oso. 
mask,  mdschera. 
master,  maestro. 
meal,  farina. 
meat,  cdme. 
medicine,  medicina. 
merriment,  allegria. 
midst,  viezzo. 
mind,  spirito,  m€nte. 
mindful,  diligente. 
minister,  ministro. 


272 


ITALIAN    GRAM^VIAR. 


miserable,  miserdbile. 
miser,  avdro. 
misery,  vus€ria. 
misfortune,  sventura. 
mistake,  en'dre. 
money,  dendro. 
motion,  mdto. 
mouthful,  una  boccdta. 
moon,  lu)ia. 
much,  mdlto. 

Nail,  chiddo. 
name,  7idine. 
napkin,  salvi€tta. 
natural,  naturdle. 
naughty,  cattiveilo. 
navigator,  navigatdre. 
near,  vicino. 
necessary,  necessdrio. 
neck,  cdllo. 
need,  hisdgno. 
neighbor,  vicino. 
neither,  ne. 
new,  nudvo. 
next,  seguente, 
night,  ndtte. 
no,  no,  non. 
noble,  nobile. 
north,  settentridne. 
nose,  ndso. 
notice,  notizia. 

Oats,  av€na. 
object,  ogg€lto. 
obstinate,  ostindto. 
occupation,  occupazidne. 
odd,  impdri. 
often,  spe'sso. 
opinion,  opinidne. 
order,  drdine. 
ostrich,  struzzo. 


overseer,     soprainten- 
de'nte. 

Page,  pdggio. 
panegyric,  panegirico. 
painter,  pittdre. 
patriarch,  patridrca. 
paper,  carta. 
paradox,  paraddsso. 
parrot,  pappagdllo. 
peace,  pdce. 
perfidious,  p^rjido. 
perhaps,  fdrse. 
person,  persdna. 
picture,  pittura. 
piece,  pe'zzo. 
pike,  picca. 
pity,  piefa. 
plate,  pidtto. 
pleasure,  piacere. 
plenty,  abbonddnte. 
portrait,  ritrdtto. 
poverty,  poverta. 
power,  potenza. 
precipitately,  precipita- 

tatnente. 
pretty,  leggiddro. 
price,  valdre. 
pride,  orgdglio. 
prisoner,  prigioni&o. 
prompt,  prdnto. 
promise,  promessa. 
purple,  pdrpora.  • 
purse,  bdrsa. 

Quarrel,  quer€la. 
queer,  strdno. 
quick,  VIVO. 
quite,  tutt'  affdtto. 

Eemembrance,  memd- 
ria* 


rich,  ricco. 

Secret,  segrdo, 
signal,  s^gno. 
sink,  sentina. 
sleeve,  mdnica. 
sleepiness,  9<fnno. 
smile,  riso. 
soil,  sudlo. 
soldier,  solddto. 
solidity,  solidezza. 
spectacles,  occhidli. 
step,  pdsso. 
strife,  lite. 
superstitious,   supersti' 

zidso. 
surprise,  maraviglia. 

Tear,  Idgrima, 
thief,  lddi-o. 
thirst,  sde. 
title,  titolo. 
treasury,  erdrio. 
truth,  verita. 
tyrant,  tirdnno. 

Umbrella,  ombrdlo. 

Vase,  vdso. 
vice,  vizio. 
victory,  vittdria. 

Walk,  pass^ggio. 
weariness,  stanch€zza. 
wit,  ingegiio. 
witness,  testimdnio,    mo- 

numento. 
work,  dpera. 
word,  pardla,  d^o. 
wound,  cicatrice 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


THS   NUMBERB    REFEK  TO   THB   FAGBS. 


A,  22,  4k\  44,  91,  123,  163. 

Accent,  t^rave,  3,  2\),  219. 

Active  verbs,  188 ;  variation  of,  188  ;  agree- 
ment of  participles  of,  188  ;  change  in 
tenses  of,  188 ;  become  passive,  20-3 ;  be- 
come pronominal,  209.     (See  *'  Verbs.") 

Ndjectives,  61 ;  remarks  on,  64 ;  agreement 
of,  32,  64,  69,  84 ;  termination  of,  61 ; 
plural  of,  32,  61  ;  number,  gender, 
etc.,  of,  32,  61 ;  used  a.s  nouns,  19,  62  ; 
nouns  used  as,  62 ;  invariable,  62,  70 ; 
signification  of,  altered,  (M  ;  suppression 
of  syllables  in,  63 ;  elision  of,  64  :  place  of, 
64  ;  comparatives  of,  67 ;  superlatives 
of,  73  ;  formation  of  superlatives,  73 ;  of 
quantity,  62;  numeral,  82;  possessive 
pronouns,  97  ;  demonstrative  pronouns, 
103;  indefinite  pronouns,  109,  115; 
past  participles  and.  73:  adverbs  and 
(see  "Adverbs'")  interjections  and.  183. 

Wverbs,  171 ;  formation  of,  123,  172 ;  the 
comparisons  of,  172  ;  termination  in 
mcnt"^  73 ;  of  time,  172  ;  place,  173 ; 
order,  quantity,  quality,  affirmation, 
negation,  doubt,  174;  compaiist.n,  in- 
terrogation, choice,  demonstration,  175; 
adjectives  and,  172.  175  ;  adjectives  ussd 
as.  175  ;  article  and,  20  ;  elision  of,  172. 

Adverbial  phrases,  12o,  321,  176. 

"All,'-  111,  112;  ur-^  -.i.s  adverb,  112. 

Alphabet,  Italian.  1. 

Alqnanto^  63. 

AUrn,  110,  111 ;    allrai^  116 ; 


noun,  116. 


altri^   as  a 
its    passive 


AmiiTt^  conjugation   of,   188 ; 
form,  204.     (See  "  Verbs.") 

Aii'ldre,  IGO,  166;  its  compounds.  166; 
Italianisms  with,  167  ;  conjugation  of. 
215 ;  conjunctive  pronouns  and,  215. 
(See  "Verbs.") 

Apostrophe,  3. 

Article,  16 ;  agreement  of.  18 ;  indefinite, 
16,  43,  83 ;  definite,  17 ;  variations  of 
definite,  17  ;  use  of,  18,  19,  20  ;  omission 
of,  18,  19 ;  elision  of,  17,  18 ;  exercise 
upon,  20;  union  with  i>r('i)ositions,  '21, 
41,  126;   suppression  of,  74;   partitive, 


41-43  ;  numerals  and,  83,  86 ;  possessive 

pronouns  and,  20,  98,  99  ;  transposition 

of,  106 ;  preposition  in  and,  131 ;  verbs 

and,  20  :  adverbs  and,  20. 
As  .  .  .  a5,  69,  175. 
Augmentatives,  76,  81 ;   formation  of,  76 ; 

double,  79 ;  irregular  79 ;  frequent  use 

of,  81. 
Auxiliary  verbs,  141,  186.    (See  "  Verbs.") 
Ai-cre,  98,  141,  161,  209,  213;   conjugation 

of,  186;   used  idiomatically,  143.    (See 

"  Verbs.") 


B. 

"  Be,"  auxiliary  verb.     (See  "  J&sserc") 

Bcllo,  63. 

"  Better,"  as  adjective  and  adverb,  67. 

Bisoandrey  148. 

"  Both,"  85,  86. 

Buojio,  63. 

c. 

Cardinal  numbers,  82. 

Cases,  15,  16  ;  of  nouns,  40  ;  governed  by 
prepositions,  121. 

Cnr.  68,  90-93.  110.  162;  interrogative,  91, 
92;  the  subj-.mctive  and,  93,  155;  con- 
nection with  other  words,  93 ;  the  present 
particijile  and,  162. 

Chi.  90-93,  110,  116. 

a,  r/,  etc.,  48,  61,  56,  100,  118,  142,  148, 
149,  162,  211,  213,  215,  247. 

Od,  104. 

Cd?)ifi,  69,  70. 

Ccmparison  of  adjectives,  67 ;  of  adverba, 
172. 

Compound  sounds,  3. 

Con  (with  article,  22.  24).  129,  "l-SO,  1(>4. 

Conjugation  of  verbs.     (See  "Verbs.") 

Conjunctions,  179;  in  common  u.'^e,  180; 
phrases,  181 ;  the  subjunctive  mood  aad, 
156. 

Conjunctive  pronouns,  48,  55,  57,  97,  209; 
with  fuidare,  215  ;  Stdre^  219 ;  ifolcre, 
221  •  scdrre,  228  ;  taccre,  229 ;  te77iere 
230^;   calcre.  247. 


[2761 


276 


INDEX. 


Consonants,  sounds  of,  2 ;  double,  4  ;  when 

doubled,  58. 
Contraction  of  lo,  gli,  etc.,  22  (see  "  Union 

of  Articles  and  Prepositions,"  22)  ;    of 

participles,  161- 
Conversazione,  21,  26,  31,  39,  46,  54,  60, 

66,  71,  76,  81,  88,  95,  103,  l08,  114, 120, 

128,  134,  140,  145,  151,  158,  165,  170, 

178,  185.  _ 
Costiii,  cohii,  106. 
Cosi,  69,  70. 
Cotdle.    (See  "TdZe.") 
Cotdnto.    (See 'Tdnio.") 
Cotcsto,  104. 
Oil,  90,  91, 162 ;  the  article  and,  92 


D. 

Da,  22,  40-44, 121-126, 136, 147. 

Dare,  166;  conjugation  of,  216;  its  com- 
pounds, 166,  216.    (See  "  Verbs.") 

Days  of  the  week,  39. 

Declension,  15  ;  of  articles,  22-24  ;  of 
nouns,  22-24,  41  ;  of  possessive  pro- 
nouns, 98. 

Defective  verbs,  246 ;  list  of,  246 ;  variation 
of,  247.    (See  "  Verbs.") 

Definite  article.    (See  "Article."  ) 

Demonstrative  adjective  pronouns,  103 ; 
added  to  possessive,  105. 

Di,  22,  40-44,  121-126,  163;  when  used 
for  "  than,"  68.     DU  28. 

Diminutives,  76 ;  formation  of,  77  ;  irregu- 
lar, 79;  added  to  verbs,  79;  frequent 
use  of,  81. 

Diphthongs,  8. 

Disjunctive  possessive  pronouns,  97. 

Dovere,  148,  149,  222. 


E. 

E,  sounds  of,  2. 

Elision,  3 ;  of  articles,  17,  18,  22,  23,  85 ; 
of  pronouns.  52,  56  ;  of  adjectives,  64  ; 
of  adverbs,  172  ;  of  verbs,  189,  195. 

£Ua,  use  of,  56 ;  its  inflections,  11,  56- 

Elliptical  phrases,  42. 

Epochs,  86. 

EquaUty,  comparative  of,  69. 

P^ssere,  141,  142,  161 ;  conjugation  of,  187  ; 
its  own  auxiliary,  142 ;  its  formation  of 
the  passive,  142,  204 ;  past  participle, 
187 ;  used  impersonally,  142,  147,  212 ; 
infinitive  and,  161 ;  neuter  verbs  and, 
206;  pronominal  verbs  and,  208.  (See 
"Verbs.") 

Etymology,  1,  15. 

Euphonv,  17,  26,  33,  43,  49,  52,  55,  57,  64, 
118, 125. 

Exercises,  mnemonic,  16,  21,  26,  32,  40, 
46.  47,  48,  55,  61,  67,  72,  79,  82.  89,  96, 
103, 109,  115, 121, 129, 135, 141, 146, 153, 
159, 166,  171,  179 

Exercise  in  pronunciation,  4,  5-15. 


Exercises  for  translation,  20,  25.  31,  38,  45, 
53,  59,  65,  71,  75,  87,,  94, 102, 107, 113, 
119,  127,  133,  139,  144,  151,  157,  164, 
169,  178,  184. 

Expletives,  149. 

F. 

Fare,  166;  conjugation  of,  217;  its  com- 
pounds, 217 ;  Italianisms  with,  168. 
(See  "yerbs.") 

Filo,  34. 

First  conjugation,  147,  166, 188 ;  irregular 
verbs,  166,  214.     (See  "  Verbs.") 

Future  tense,  155, 188 ;  contraction  of,  214. 


G. 

Gender,  15, 18 ;  of  nouns,  27,  of  adjectives, 
32,  61;  of  augmentatives,  etc.,  76;  of 
possessive  pronouns,  97 ;  of  demonstra- 
tive pronouns,  104  ;  participles,  161. 

Gerund,  159,  162.     (See  "Verbs  "). 

G/?,  as  article,  17 ;  elision  of,  18 ;  contrac- 
tion of,  22  ;  as  pronoun,  48,  51,  55, 100, 
162,  247 ;  joined  to  lo,  etc.,  56. 

Gli,  adverb.  173. 

Gliclo,  etc.,  56. 

Grammar,  Italian,  1.     ^ 

H. 

H  used  with  c  before  e  and  i,  2,  73,  150 ; 

in  the  formation  of  plurals,  33,  34. 
"  Have,"  auxiliary  verb.    (See  ".k-uere.") 


I  (the  sign  of  plural),  28,  32 ;  exceptions, 
33  ;  elision  of,  18,  189,  195  ;  addition  of, 
200.     (See  "  JL") 

Idioms,  Italian,  263. 

II,  i,  17 ;  contraction  of,  23 ;  as  pronouns, 
55,  98,  162 ;  suppression  of,  74 ;  used  for 
prepositions,  42. 

Imperative  mood,  160,  214  ;  pronouns  after, 
51 ;  irregular  verbs  and,  214. 

Imperfect  tense,  150.  156. 

Impersonal  verbs,  147,  155,  210,  212 ;  how 
varied,  210  ;  list  of,  l47,  211 ;  essere  and, 
147,  212  ;  pronouns  and,  49,  148.  (See 
"Verbs.") 

In,  129, 136, 163 ;  where  placed,  130 ;  union 
with  article,  22,  131 ;  becomes  we,  22. 

Indefinite  adjective  pronouns,  109,  115. 
(See  "Pronouns.") 

Indefinite  article.     (See  "Article.") 

Indicative  mood,  154,  156,  162,  196,  198, 
201 ;   irregular  verbs  and,  214. 

Inferiority,  comparative  of.  68. 

Infinitive  mood,  1.59 ;  article  and,  20,  147  ; 
pronouns  and,  57  ;  terminations  of,  147 ; 
used  as  a  noun,  147,  160 ;  as  third  per- 
son, 160;  present  participle  and,  163; 
essere  and,  161 ;  lui,  Ui,  and,  160 ;  ira« 
perative  and,  160 ;  contraction  of,  214. 


INDEX. 


277 


Interjections,  182 ;    in  common  use,  182 ; 

derivation  of  some,  183 ;  agreement  of, 

183. 
Interrogative  pronouns,  50,  91 ;   phrases, 

50,91. 
Irregular  plurals,  36. 
Irregular  verbs,  166,  214 ;  how  varied,  214 ; 

jfirst  conjugation,  214 ;  second,  219-233  ; 

third,   234-241;    table   of,    242.     (See 

"  Verbs.") 
Issimo,   73,  74. 
Italian  alphabet,  1 ;   grammar,  1 ;  idioms, 

263;  proverbs,  259. 
Italianisms,  with  possessive  pronouns,  100  ; 

with  tutto,  etc.,  112  ;  with  anddre,  dare, 

167  ;  stare,  fare,  168. 


L. 

JLa,  17 ;  its  plural,  17 ;  contraction  of,  23 ; 
as  pronoun,  55,  162 ;  as  inflection  of 
ilia,  11,  56 ;  before  verbs,  56 ;  its  place, 
57 ;  before  numerals,  83 ;  elision  of,  18, 
56,     Ld,  adverb,  173. 

Le,  17,  18;  contraction  of,  23;  as  pronoun, 
48,  51,  55,  162;  before  verbs,  56;  its 
place,  57 ;  before  numerals,  83 ;  eUsion 
of,  18. 

Letters,  1 ;  sounds  of,  1. 

Li,  article,  17 ;  as  pronoun,  55 ;  before 
verbs,  56;  its  place,  57.  Li,  adverb, 
173. 

Lo,  17  ;  its  plural,  17 ;  contraction  of,  22 
as  pronoun,  55,  162  ;  before  verbs,  56 
its  place,  57 ;  used  for  preposition,  42 
elision  of,  17,  22,  56. 

Ldro,  48,  52,  97. 

M. 

Mdno,  125. 

Meco,  teco,  scco,  etc.,  51. 

Mcno  or  mdnco,  17,  68,  70,  74, 172, 174. 

Mezzo,  63. 

Monosyllables,  union  of,  55,  57. 

Months  of  the  year,  39. 


N. 

Names,  proper,  19,  35,  41,  65. 

Ne,  51,  55,  118, 142, 149, 162,  213,  215,219. 
(See  "Jn.") 

Neuter  verbs,  206 ;  how  varied,  208 ;  be- 
come pronominal,  209.    (See  "Verbs.") 

Non,  56,  58, 117. 149, 160. 171. 

"  Nothing,"  93,  110, 116, 117, 174. 

Kouns,  26;  general  remarks  on,  29;  gen- 
der of,  27 ;  plural  of,  32 ;  double  plu- 
rals, 37 ;  irregular  plurals,  36  ;  cases  of, 
40  ;  terminations  of,  27-36 ;  proper,  19, 
35,  41,  65  ;  abstract,  19  ;  invariable,  33 ; 
relation  expressed  by  di,  a,  da,  40 ;  vari- 
ation of  nouns,  41 ;  words  used  as,  19  ; 
possessive  pronouns  used  as,  98 ;  infini- 
tive used  as,  20,  147,  160  ;  numeral 
adjectives  and,  83;  nouns  used  as  ad- 


jectives, 62;    suppression  of  the  noun 

after  imo,  85  ;  exercise  upon  the  noun, 

38. 
Number,  15  ;  of  articles,  17  ;  of  nouns,  32; 

of  adjectives,  32,  61 ;  pronouns,  36,  97. 
Numeral  adjectives,  82 ;   how  divided,  82 ; 

cardinal    numbers,    82  ;     ordinal,    84 ; 

fractional  and  collective,  84. 

0. 

O,  sounds  of,  2. 
Objective,  repetition  of,  66. 
"Of,"  rendered  by  il  or  lo,  42. 
Ogni,  109-111 ;  og7iidi,  109. 
Onde,  93 ;  donde,  173,  175. 
Ora.  83,  172  ;  ogndra,  109, 172. 
Ordinal  numbers,  84. 
Orthoepy,  1. 
Orthography,  1. 
0550,  34. 

P. 

Paradigms  of  verbs.    (See  "  Verbs.") 

Pari,  62. 

Participles,  161 ;  agreement  of,  161 ;  place 
of  64.  Present,  162  ;  how  expressed, 
162  ;  of  active  verbs,  188 ;  prepositions 
and,  163;  infinitive  and,  163;  che  and, 
162.  Past,  161;  of  active  verbs,  188; 
of  passive,  204  ;  of  neuter,  206 ;  avere, 
161;  cssere,  142,  161,  187.  Pronouns 
and,  58,  162 ;  irregular  verbs  and,  214 ; 
as  qualificative  adjectives,  73 ;  contrac- 
tion of,  161. 

Particles,  41,  43,  211 ;  expletive,  149. 

Parts  of  speech,  15. 

Passive  verbs,  147,  204 ;  much  used,  147 ; 
formation  of,  142,  204  ;  how  active  verbs 
become  passive,  147, 205 ;  past  participle 
of,  204. 

Per,  with  the  article,  24;  contraction  of, 
24  ;  as  preposition,  122,  129,  131. 

PercM,  175,  181. 

Perfect  definite,  150,  192, 194,  214. 

Personal  pronouns.     (See  "  Pronouns.") 

Phrases,  adverbial,  123,  124,  176;  con- 
junctive, 181 ;  idiomatical,  143,  263 ;  in- 
terrogative, 50,  91. 

Pin,  17,  67,  70,  74, 172, 174. 

Plural  of  articles,  17 ;  nouns  and  adjec- 
tives, 32,  61 ;  pronouns,  36,  97 ;  irregu- 
lar, 36. 

Poetical  pieces,  176, 183. 

Possessive  pronouns.    (See  "  Pronouns.") 

Prepositions,  121,  129,  135 ;  in  commoD 
use,  122 ;  union  of  articles  and,  22,  41, 
125  ;  use  of  various,  137  ;  after  persona/ 
pronouns,  137  ;  present  participles  and, 
163 ;  repetition  of  prepositions,  85. 

Pronominal  verbs,  208 ;  variation  of,  208 
(see  "  Verbs  ") ;  pronouns  and,  51. 

Pronouns,  46;    place  of,  49,  57;  suppres- 
sion of,  49  ;  transposition  of,  58 ;  appo- 
sition of,  49 ;  elision  of,  52,  .56 ;  imper 
sonal  verbs  and,  49 ;  pronominal  verbs 
and,  61;  infinitive  and,  57;  past  parti 


24 


278 


INDEX. 


ciples  and,  58  ;  euphonic  rules,  57 ; 
doubling  of  consonants,  58.  Personal 
pronouns  in  the  nominative,  46,  49 ;  in 
the  objective,  47,  50,  55 ;  verbs  and, 
148 ;  past  participles  and,  162  ;  preposi- 
tions and,  137.  Possessive  adjective,  20, 
97;  plural  of,  36,  97;  division  of,  97; 
Tariation  of,  98  ;  agreement  of,  98 ;  per- 
sonal pronouns  and,  99  ;  as  nouns,  98 ; 
as  Italianisms,  100  ;  as  expletives,  149 ; 
use  of,  with  article,  20,  98,  99 ;  demon- 
stratives added  to,  105.  Indefinite,  109, 
115 ;  used  in  singular,  109 ,  in  plural, 
110.  Relative,  89,  97.  Demonstrative, 
103 ;  added  to  possijssive,  105.  Interrog- 
ative, 50,  91.  Conjunctive,  48,  55,  97, 
209,  215,  219.  Disjunctive,  97.  Reflec- 
tive, 51. 

Pronunciation,  1 ;  exercise  in,  4  ;  reading- 
exercise  in,  5-15. 

Proprio,  98. 

Prosody,  1. 

Proverbs,  Italian,  259. 

Ptire,  181. 

Q. 

Quale,  36,  90, 116, 155,  162  ;  use  of,  91. 

Qudnto,  62,  69,  70. 
Quello,  104. 
Questo,  104-106. 


E. 

Reading-lessons,  5,  20,  25,  30,  87,  44,  52, 
59,  65,  70,  74,  86,  94,  100,  106,  113, 118, 
126,  132,  138,  143,  150,  156,  164,  169, 
176,  183. 

Reflective  verbs,  208.  (See  "  Pronominal 
Verbs.") 

Regular  verbs,  188  ;  synoptical  table  of  the 
variations  of,  202.    (See  "  Verbs.") 

Relative  pronouns,  89,  97. 


s. 

Se*  47,  50,  51, 118. 

Second  conjugation,  192  ;  division  of,  192  ; 
first  class,  192  ;  second  class,  194 ;  irreg- 
ular verbs,  219-233.     (See  "  Verbs.") 

"  Self,"  49. 

Si,  51,  57. 100, 117. 147, 149. 162,  205,  209, 
219,  221,  228,  229.  230,  247. 

Signdre,  Signdra,  etc.  y  19 ,  56,  99;  elision 
of,  19. 

"  Some."  43, 110,  112. 

Sdmyno,  73. 

Sopra,  used  for  su,  24. 

Sounds  of  vowels,  2  ;  of  consonants,  2 ;  of 
e,  2  ;  of  0,  2  ;  compound,  3. 

Speech,  parts  of,  15. 

Sia,  abbreviation  of  questa,  105. 


Stare,  160,  166;   conjugation  of,  218;   its 

compounds,  166,  219  ;  Italianisms  with, 

167  ;  conjunctive  pronouns  and,  219. 
Stra,  as  particle,  73. 
Su,  with  article,  22,  24  ;  contraction  of,  24 ; 

preposition,  122  ;  sopra  used  for,  24. 
Subjunctive  mood,  153 ;  when  used,  154 ; 

tenses  of,  156 ;  irregular  verbs  and,  214 ; 

conjunctions  and,  156. 
Substantives.    (See  "Nouns.") 
'•  Such,"  62, 106,  110, 112. 
Superiority,  comparative  of,  67. 
Superlatives  of  adjectives,  73 ;  of  adverbs, 

172  ;  of  interjections,  183. 
Syllables,  4  ;  termination  of,  4 ;  exceptions, 

4 ;  union  of,  55,  57  ;  suppression  of,  63. 
Synoptical  table  of  regular  verbs,  202. 
Syntax,  1 ;  of  verbs,  146. 


Table,  synoptical,  of  regular  verbs,  202; 

of  irregular  verbs,  242.    (See  "  Verbs  ") 
Tale,  36,  62,  106,  110,  112. 
Tdnto,  69,  110. 
Tenses  of  dependent  verbs  in  a  compound 

sentence,  155. 
"  Than,"  rendered  by  di  and  che,  etc.,  68; 

by  come  and  cosi,  69. 
Third  conjugation,  196 ;  division  into  three 

classes,  196 ;    first  class,   196 ;    second, 

198;    third,  201;    irregular  verbs,  234- 

241 ;  list  of,  234. 
Titles,  19,  56,  99. 

"  To  be  hungry,"  "  thirsty,"  etc.,  143. 
Tt'ttlo.  110,  149 ;   its  agreement  with  the 

noun.  111 ;   as  an  Italianism,  112. 


u. 

Uomini,  36. 

TJnipersonal  verbs,  210.  (See  "  Impersonal 
Verbs.") 

tino,  un,  una,  16,  43,  85, 110;  when  sup- 
pressed, 85 ;   elision  of,  85. 

Usc'ire,  42,  125  ;  conjugation  of,  240 

V. 

Variations  of  regular  verbs,  202. 

Venire,  125,  142, 148,  160 ;  conjugation  of, 
241. 

Verbs,  141 ;  syntax  of,  146 ;  general  rules, 
147 ;  irregularities  of,  214 ;  moods  of 
(sec  "Infinitive,"  "Indicative,"  "Im- 
perative," and  " Subjunctive  Moods"); 
tenses  of  (see  "Imperfect,"  "Perfect 
Definite,"  and  "  Future  Tenses  ");  par- 
ticiples of  (  see  "  Participles  "  ).  Place 
of  the  verb,  149,  160 ;  terminations  of, 
147     Article  and  verbs,  20, 147.    Noun<» 


*  Se  (himself)  was  formerly  written  with  an  accent,  —  se. 


INDEX. 


279 


and  verbs,  20,  147,  159,  160.  Pro- 
nouns and  verbs,  49,  51,  57,  91,  148. 
Union  with  diminutives,  79.  Auxiliary 
verbs,  141,  186  ;  conjugation  of  avcre, 
186  (see  "^rere");  of  cssere,  187  (see 
JEssere  "  ).  Regular  verbs.  188.  Active 
verbs,  188  (see  "  Active  Verbs  "  ).  First 
conjugation,  188  ;  conjugation  of  amdre, 
188  ;  of  cercdrey  190  ;  of  prepare,  191. 
Second  conjugation,  192  ;  conjugation  of 
temere,  192  ;  of  tdssere,  194.  Third  con- 
jugation, 196  ;  conjugation  of  .sent'tre, 
196;  of  esib'ire,  198;  of  cudre,  200;  of 
abborr'ire,  201.  Synopsis  of  the  varia- 
tions of  regular  verbs,  202.  Passive 
verbs,  204  (see  *'  Passive  Verbs  ") ;  con- 
jugation of  essere  amdto,  204.  Neuter 
verbs,  206  (see  "Neuter  Verbs");  con- 
jugation of  partire,  206.  Pronominal  or 
rellective  verbs,  208  (see  "  Pronominal 
Verbs)  ;  conjugation  of  pent'irsi,  208. 
Unipersonal  verbs,  210  (see  "  Imperson- 
al Verbs) ;  conjugation  of  pidvere,  210  ; 
of  essere  (unipersonally  used),  212.  Ir- 
regular verbs,  214  (see  "  Irregular 
Verbs  ").  First  conjugation,  214  ;  con- 
jugation of  anddrCy  215 ;  of  dare,  216  ; 
of  fare,  217;  otstdre,  218  (see  "ylnf/dre," 
^'Ddre,^^  "Fare,"  "<S/dre").  Second  con- 
jugation, 219 ;  conjugation  of  cadth-e,  220; 
of  cZwswade're,  220 ;  of  c/o^cre,  221;  ofdo- 
vere,  222  (see  '■^Dovcre^'');  of  giacrre, 
223 ;  oiparere,  persuadcre,  piacere,  224  ; 
of  potere,  225 ;  of  rimancre,  226  ;  of 
sapere,  227 ;  of  sedere,  228 ;  of  taccre, 
229 ;  of  fen^e,  230 ;  of  valere,  231 ;  of 


vedire,  232 ;  of  voUre  ( see  "  Yolere  "  ), 
233.  Third  conjugation,  234;  conjuga- 
tion of  dtre,  234;  of  mor'ire,  236;  of 
salire,  237  ;  of  segmre,  238  ;  of  ud'ire. 
239 ;  of  uscire  (see  "  Vscirs  "),  240  ;  of 
venire  (see  "  Venire  "),  241.  Table  of 
irregular  verbs,  242.  Defective  verbs, 
246  ;  conjugation  of  calcre,  2A7 ;  of 
colere  or  colere^  leccre  and  licere  or  Iccere 
and  licere^  pavcre,  silere,  248 ;  of  soicrCy 
Stupere,  dlgere,  249  ;  of  anger e,  arrogere, 
capers,  250;  of  cherere,  conrellcre,  251; 
of  Jicdere,  252;  of  Ulcere ,  molcere,  253; 
of  ricdere,  serpere,  254 ;  of  snffdlcere  or 
soffolgerey  tdngere,  toller e,  255 ;  of  tor- 
perey  urgerCy  v'lgere,  256 ;  of  g'lre,  257 ; 
of  ire  and  ol'ire,  258. 

"Very,"  before  participles,  73. 

Vi,ci.     (See"yi-.") 

Via,  85,  147,  149. 

Vocabulary,  Italian-English,  266 ;  English- 
Italian,  270 ;  of  exercises,  45,  54,  60,  66, 
71,  75,  88,  95,  102,  108,  114,  120,  128, 
131,  139,  144,  151,  157,  165,  170,  178, 
185. 

Yolere,  148;  with  ci  and  vi,  148;  conjuga- 
gation  of,  233. 

Vosigndria,  56. 

Vowels,  1,  4 ;  sounds  of,  2. 


w. 

"Who."  "  which,"  "  what,"  etc.,  90,  91 
Words,  union  of,  21,  65,  67. 


EXERCISES 


ADAPTED   TO 


CUORE'S    ITALIAN    COURSE, 


AND   OTHER  GRAMMARS. 


BOSTON: 

S.  R.  URBINO,  14  BRGMFIELD  STREET. 

NEW  YORK: 
LEYPOLDT   &   HOLT  ;   F.  W.  CHRISTERN. 

1870. 


\ 


EXERCISES   FOR  TRANSLATION. 


Exercise  I. 

T}ie  Article. 

The  father  and  mother.     The  uncle  and  his  son.      The  brother 

has  the  pens.     I  have  the  books.     Who  has  the  house  ?     What 

has  he  ?     He  has  the  wine.     She  has  not  the  book.    The  servant 

has  the  apples.    What  has  the  shoemaker  ?     The  shoemaker  has 

the  shoes.     Hast  thou    the   penknife?     Which   seal   has   she? 

Who  has  the  peach  ?     I  have  not  the  peach.     I  have  the  bread 

and  the  meat.     He  has  the  herbs.     The  man  has  a  fio".     The 

scholar  has  a  book.     Thou  hast  a  pear.     Have  I   a   mirror  ? 

Who  has  a  house  ?    Has  he  a  record  ?     She  has  a  guide.     The 

tailor  has  money.     What  has  the  domestic  ?     The  domestic  has 

the  linen.     Who  has  a  friend  ?     My  uncle  has  a  friend.     The 

mistress  has  no  time. 

1.  There  are  seven  primitive  colors,  —  red,  orange,  yellow, 

green,  blue,  indigo,  and  violet.     2.  See  the  churches,  the  palaces, 

the  amphitheatres,  and  the  arches,  which  have  outlived  so  many 

generations  of  men !     3.  Annina  looked  at  her  weeping  sister,  at 

her  dear  old  father,  and  then  expired.     4.  Vasco  di  Gama  pre- 

S(;nted  to  the  King  of  Malabar  the  gifts,  and  the  letters  written, 

one  in  Arabic,  and  the  other  in  Portuguese.     5.  The  ant  is  the 

emblem  of  industry.     6.  Exercise  and  temperance  strengthen 

the  constitution.     7.  Iron  and  steel  are  more  useful  than  gold 

and   silver.     8.  Secrecy  is    the   key  of  prudence.     9.  Avarice 

is    despicable.      10.  The   end   crowns    the  work.     11.  Walking 

1*  [5] 


6  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

increases  the  appetite.  12.  The  gentle  answer  appeases  ^nger. 
13.  Errors  and  wickednesses  draw  ridicule  upon  us.  14.  Na- 
tions ought  to  love  peace,  and  avoid  war.  15.  Employ  your 
time  well ;  cultivate  your  mind  ;  love  order.  1 6.  Reading  forms 
the  heart,  and  enlightens  the  mind.  17.  Health  is  the  first 
condition  of  a  happy  life.  18.  Gratitude  produces  all  the  other 
virtues.  19.  At  the  age  of  eighteen,  Romulus  laid  the  founda- 
tion of  a  city  which  gave  laws  to  the  world. 

Exercise  XL 
Union  of  the  Articles  and  Prepositions. 

The  gardens  of  the  brother.  We  are  in  the  room.  The  knife 
is  upon  the  table.  The  friends  are  in  the  garden.  I  have  the 
handkerchiefs  in  ray  pocket.  You  are  his  friend.  The  voice  of 
the  man.  The  shoes  are  in  the  room.  The  wine  is  upon  the 
table.  I  am  not  in  the  house.  They  are  not  in  the  city.  The 
girl  has  no  spectacles.  She  has  no  gold.  Who  is  in  the  street? 
Has  he  the  neighbor's  book  (the  book  of  the  neighbor)  ?  Who 
has  the  father's  stick  ?  Is  she  in  the  house  ?  No  ;  she  is  in  the 
garden,  under  a  tree.  Has  the  tailor  my  brother's  horse?  Who 
has  your  mother's  pocket-handkerchief?  I  have  it  in  the  packet 
of  my  coat.  Is  the  key  in  the  door,  or  under  the  table  ?  Tlie 
man  has  bread  and  wine  for  his  dinner.  In  the  streets  of 
the  city.  He  has  the  roses  from  his  friend.  He  writes  with 
a  pen. 

1.  Give  me  some  bread,  wine,  butter,  cheese,  boiled  meat, 
mutton,  veal,  pie,  mustard,  and  salt.  2.  The  power  of  speech  is 
a  faculty  peculiar  to  man.  3.  The  bird  is  known  by  his  song. 
4.  Flowers  are  the  ornament  of  gardens.  5.  Riches  are  oft(?n 
the  tarifF  of  esteem.  6.  They  say  that  our  honor  is  in  the  opin- 
ion of  others.  7.  The  eyes  are  the  mirror  of  the  soul.  8.  The 
value  of  things  is  founded  upon  wants.  9.  Climate  influences 
the  character  of  men.  10.  We  prove  gold  and  silver  with  the 
touchstone,  and  the  heart  of  men  with  gold  and  silver.     11.  The 


EXEKCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION.  7 

law  of  necessity  is  always  the  first  law.  12.  The  miser  allows 
himself  to  die  of  hunger  in  the  lap  of  plenty.  13.  Poverty  and 
misfortune  bring  about  equality.  14.  Best  is  the  enemy  of 
good.  15.  Fortune  has  the  first  place  in  the  things  of  the  world. 
16.  Abundance  of  words  is  not  always  an  (the)  indication  of  the 
perfection  of  language.  17.  History  is  the  picture  of  times  and 
of  men.  18.  The  lamb  and  the  dove  are  the  emblems  of  meek- 
ness and  humility.  19.  True  merit  is  always  accompanied  by 
modesty.  20.  Clouds  and  fogs  are  formed  by  the  vapors  which 
come  out  of  the  earth.  21.  He  who  opens  his  heart  to  ambition 
shuts  it  to  repose.  22.  The  wise  man  prefers  the  useful  to  the 
agreeable,  and  the  necessary  to  the  useful.  23.  Poverty  and 
ignorance  are  the  followers  of  negligence  and  slotli.  24.  The 
road  from  virtue  to  vice  is  much  shorter  than  from  vice  to  virtue. 
25.  Health  is  the  daughter  of  exercise  and  temperance.  26.  A 
salutation,  a  word  of  love  to  the  unhappy,  is  a  great  kindness. 

Exercise  III. 

TJie  Noun. 

My  brother  is  a  dentist.  Your  father  is  my  neighbor.  My 
mother  is  your  neighbor.  We  have  a  horse  and  a  mare.  They 
have  a  peach-tree  and  an  apple-tree  in  their  garden.  This 
woman  has  flowers  in  her  garden.  Have  you  seen  the  king? 
Is  the  soup  cold  ?  This  is  a  hare.  Is  study  a  pleasure  ?  They 
have  seen  the  Pope  of  Rome.  I  have  an  apple  in  my  hand. 
Have  you  a  fig  and  an  orange  ?  Give  some  fruit  to  my  brother. 
The  man  has  a  cow  and  an  ox.  Iron  is  a  metal.  Silver  is 
also  a  metal.  We  are  in  the  path.  My  uncle  has  a  crane. 
Is  this  your  daughter  ?  Am  I  your  friend  (f)  ?  Who  is  a 
philosopher?  Is  your  neighbor  poor  or  rich?  Who  has  gold? 
This  man  has  gold ;  but  he  has  no  heart.  The  cathedral  of  this 
city  is  rich ;  but  the  people  are  poor.  I  am  a  neighbor  to  a  poor 
woman.  The  frog  is  in  the  hedge.  In  the  morning.  The 
basket  of  fruit  is  on  the  table.     Eggs  are  good  for  breakfast. 


8  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

Give  me  some  bread  and  butter  with  my  good  eggs.  M^ 
brother  has  a  basket  of  good  fruit.  The  cat  is  in  the  yard. 
Is  the  meat  in  the  kitchen?  The  child  has  a  dove.  This 
woman  has  some  currants. 

1.  Paper,  pencils,  inkstand,  ink,  slate,  chalk,  sand,  &c.,  are 
used  in  school.  2.  The  bench,  chair,  desk,  stool,  cupboard,  and 
sofa,  are  articles  of  furniture.  3.  Among  instruments,  we  have 
the  hammer,  the  awl,  the  axe,  the  mallet,  the  saw,  the  needle, 
the  file,  and  the  gimlet.  4.  For  table-ware,  there  are  the  table- 
cloth, the  napkin,  the  carving-knife,  the  plate,  the  salt-cellar,  the 
porringer,  the  knife,  the  fork,  the  fruit-dish,  &c.  5.  The  mason, 
the  smith,  the  tailor,  the  shoemaker,  the  weaver,  the  baker,  the 
carpenter,  the  farrier,  the  knife-grinder,  the  barber,  the  butcher, 
the  hatter,  are  all  artisans.  6.  Affected  behavior  is  the  mask 
of  ignorance.  7.  We  should  never  judge  of  the  good  or  bad 
character  of  persons  by  the  expression  of  their  face.  8.  The  rose 
without  thorns  only  grows  on  the  highest  Alps.  9.  Tobacco  is  an 
American    plant.     10.  A  good    conscience    is    a    good    pillow. 

11.  The  moth  which  flies  about  the  lamp  finally  burns  his  wings. 

12.  We   obtain  love    and  friendship    by  modesty  and    humility. 

13.  The  eye  delights  in  the  verdure  of  the  earth  and  the  beauty 
of  the  sky.  14.  In  that  valley,  I  saw  a  little  village,  an  old 
castle  in  ruins,  and  a  convent. 

Exercise.  IV. 

The  Plural  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives. 

The  good  sisters.  Celebrated  men.  Gray  coats.  The  men 
are  good,  and  the  women  are  good.  The  girl  has  handsome 
hands.  My  shoes  are  narrow.  The  kings  are  in  the  city. 
You  are  not  unhappy.  The  tailor  has  a  pair  of  boots.  Her 
sleeves  are  narrow.  This  baker  has  good  bread.  Give  me  some 
of  his  bread  and  cheese.  Is  the  king  in  his  palace.  I  have  a 
cow  and  two  oxen.  The  physicians  are  in  a  hotel.  We  have 
asparagus  upon  the  table.     I  have  seen  mice  upon  the  tabh\ 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  9 

She  has  rings  on  her  fingers.  Give  me  two  bushels  of  oranges. 
Who  has  two  wives  ?  The  Romans  have  good  oxen.  We  have 
good  horses  and  cows.  Children  are  not  fools.  Your  sisters 
have  no  sweetmeats  for  supper.  I  have  seen  the  bones  and  the 
claws  of  the  crane.  Has  your  sister  seen  the  beautiful  houses 
of  the  rich  ladies  ?  No ;  but  she  has  seen  their  beautiful  lakes 
and  woods. 

1.  The  merchants  sell  tea  and  chocolate.  2.  The  shoemaker 
makes  boots  and  shoes.  3.  There  are  many  ancient  temples  in 
Italy.  4.  The  scholars  have  neither  ink,  writing-paper,  nor 
pens.     5.  The   stone   urns   in  the   garden   came  from   Naples. 

6.  I  have   sent   a   dozen   handkerchiefs    to    the  w^asherwoman. 

7.  The  tailor  makes  cloaks  and  overcoats.  8.  Oxen  and  horses 
are  useful  animals.  9.  There  are  birds  upon  the  flowers  and 
upon  the  trees.  10.  The  strangers  have  bought  coats.  11.  There 
are  diamonds,  pearls,  emeralds,  and  other  precious  stones. 
12.  The  streets  of  B.  are  narrow.  13.  The  country  bakers  are 
not  friends  of  the  city  bakers.  14.  All  workmen  and  work- 
women are  employed  at  this  season.  15.  God  is  the  father  of 
man,  and  the  preserver  of  all  creatures.  16.  The  inhabitants 
of  Gadara  honored  poverty  with  a  peculiar  worship  ;  they  consid- 
ered it  as  the  mother  of  industry  and  the  arts.  17.  The  man 
who  does  not  see  good  in  others  is  not  good  himself.  18.  Misers 
resemble  the  horses  who  carry  wine  and  drink  water,  and  the 
asses  who  carry  gold  and  eat  thistles.  19.  The  rivers  of 
Nigrizia  and  Guinea  do  not  flow  through  plains  and  valleys,  but 
rush  from  cataract  to  cataract.  20.  It  has  been  said,  that  a  fine 
city  without  monuments  is  like  a  beautiful  woman  without  a 
soul.  21.  Ribbons,  flowers,  and  lights  make  incredible  meta- 
morphosis. 22.  The  variety  of  trees  and  precious  shrubs  of 
landscape  gardening  were  things  unknown  to  the  ancients. 
23.  The  verdant,  rich,  and  luxurious  plains  which  are  found  in 
Piedmont  are  the  best-cultivated  lands  of  all  Europe.  24.  The 
order  and  beauty  of  the  world  are  manifest  proofs  of  the  exist- 
ence of  a  Supreme  Being.     25.  We  know  good  fountains  in  dry 


^ 


10  EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION. 

weather,  and  friends  in  adversity.  26.  The  gi^ss  grows  to  the 
height  of  twelve  feet  in  the  vast  plains  of  Africa ;  and,  under  this 
gigantic  grass,  wander  panthers,  lions,  and  the  enormous  reptile 
boa.  27.  When  Orpheus  was  playing  on  the  lyre,  tigers,  bears, 
and  lions  came  to  fawn  upon  him  and  lick  his  feet.  28.  The 
muses  were  goddesses  of  science  and  art.  29.  Men  kill  oxen, 
sheep,  deer,  and  even  birds  and  fish,  to  feed  upon  them. 

Exercise.  V. 
Cases  of  Nouns. 

I  have  no  good  letter-paper.  I  wish  to  write  letters  to  Pans. 
Have  you  a  pocket-dictionary  ?  Is  it  not  time  to  dine  ?  Give 
me  the  silver  spoons.  My  brother  has  a  cask  of  good  wine. 
The  children  are  in  the  yard.  Have  you  not  seen  the  flowers 
on  the  walls  ?  Here  are  your  father's  books.  We  see  with 
our  eyes,  and  hear  with  our  ears.  The  cows  are  in  the  water. 
The  eggs  are  in  the  nests  of  the  birds.  My  father  has  a  saddle- 
horse  and  two  hunting-dogs.  Have  you  my  brother's  pens? 
Who  gave  me  this  book?  Have  you  seen  the  gunpowder? 
Have  you  dined  to-day  ?  Yes ;  I  have  dined  with  some  rela- 
tions. What  have  you  for  breakfast  ?  I  have  bread  alone  for 
breakfast.  What  does  he  sell?  He  sells  tobacco  and  gun- 
powder. Let  us  go  to  buy  some  ink.  Send  Luigi  to  the  post. 
Whose  hat  is  this  ?  It  is  not  my  friend's  hat.  To  whom  do 
you  write  ?  Write  to  your  sister.  I  write  to  my  friends. 
Whom  do  you  see  ?  I  see  some  girls  in  the  street.  Have  you 
money  ?     No  ;  but  I  have  good  friends.     Is  this  a  hunting-dog  ? 

1.  In  the  city,  there  are  tailors  for  men  and  women,  and  shoe- 
makers for  men  and  women.  2.  The  sun  shines  by  day,  and  the 
moon  by  night.  3.  No  one  is  sheltered  from  calumny.  4.  The 
language  of  a  modest  man  gives  lustre  to  truth.  5.  A  babbler 
is  troublesome  to  society.  6.  A  foolish  man  doubts  nothing. 
7.  Abundance  of  riches  do  not  make  us  happy.  8.  Adonis  was 
a  youth  of  extreme  beauty.     9.  Hope  leads  us  by  an  agreeable 


EXEliCISES    FOR    TKANSLATIOX.  11 

road  to  the  end  of  life.  10.  The  goods  which  the  merchant 
consif>:ned  to  his  sons  have  arrived.  11.  The  soldiers  have 
come  from  Georgia.  12.  The  rules  of  this  Grammar  are  easy. 
13.  Patriarchs  are  monarchs  of  the  Church.  14.  Mr.  A.  has 
received  the  catalogues  from  the  bookseller.  15.  Success  is  for 
him  who  seizes  upon  it.  16.  Fanaticism  is,  to  superstition, 
what  excitement  is  to  fever;  what  rage  is  to  anger.  17.  Woe 
to  the  man  whose  only  ambition  is  to  please  mean  men !  18.  The 
religious  fanaticism  of  the  Puritans  was  the  promoter  and  the 
support  of  the  revolution  in  England. 

Exercise  VI  and  VII. 
Pronoims. 

Who  are  you  ?  I  am  your  friend.  What  do  you  wish  of  me  ? 
Have  you  money  ?  I  have  need  of  money.  He  has  written  a 
letter.  What  have  you  said  to  me?  A  daughter  is  born  to 
him.  Does  it  rain  ?  No ;  it  snows.  They  are  with  her  in  my 
father's  house.  Tell  him  and  her  that  I  love  them.  I  wrote  a 
letter  to  her.  They  are  'writing  to  you.  I  shall  go  to  the  post 
myself.  Do  you  think  of  me  ?  I  think  of  you.  Give  me  a 
good  stick.  Think  no  more  of  them.  What  has  he  said  to  you 
of  them?  Let  him  do  it.  I  do  not  wish  to  do  as  you  do. 
Wlio  is  there  ?  It  is  I.  It  is  he.  He  speaks  of  us.  I  give 
you  this  ring  because  I  love  you.  Will  you  send  this  letter 
to  him  ?  He  loves  his  friend.  I  love  you,  and  you  love 
me.  I  will  go  with  you.  She  speaks  of  you.  Think  no  more 
of  him.  Go  with  them.  I  wish  to  see  you.  She  can  speak  to 
him  of  it.  Do  not  ask  it  of  her.  Behold  him.  Behold  her. 
Behold  us.  He  gives  it  to  us.  We  lend  them  to  you.  He  will 
give  the  flowers  to  her.  I  will  give  them  to  him.  She  does 
not  deny  it.  Give  it  to  her.  She  gives  it  to  her  neighbor. 
I  do  not  wish  to  see  them.     Tell  them  so   (it). 

1.  Silvio  Pellico  says,  "  We  read,  or  meditate  in  silence,  a  great 
part  of  the  day."     2.  "  I  wrote  the  tragedy  of  *  Leoniero   da 


12  EXERCISES    FOR   TEANSLATIOK. 

Dertona/  and  many  other  things."  3.  "  From  my  heart,  1  pardon 
my  enemies."  4.  "  Although  Mr.  M.  was  in  a  deplorable  state, 
he  sang,  he  conversed,  and  did  every  thing  to  conceal  a  part  of 
his  sufferings  from  me."  5.  If  you  do  not  embrace  fortune  when 
she  presents  herself,  you  may  hope  for  her  in  vain  when  she  has 
turned  her  shoulders  upon  you.  6.  Do  not  disturb  opinions 
which  render  a  man  happy,  unless  you  can  give  him  better  ones. 
7.  If  we  wish  to  know  what  any  one  says  of  us  when  we  are 
absent,  let  us  only  observe  what  they  say  of  others  in  our  pres- 
ence. 8.  Some  one  asked  Diogenes  what  was  the  best  method 
of  revenging  himself  on  his  enemy.  "  You  will  succeed,"  .-^aid 
Diogenes,  "  by  showing  yourself  an  honest  man."  9.  A  vag- 
abond dog  went  into  a  forest,  and,  finding  a  lion,  he  said  to  him, 
''  You  go  wandering  through  the  woods ;  you  suffer  from  hunger 
and  the  inclemencies  of  the  season.  See  me :  I  live,  and  enjoy 
much,  without  any  trouble.  Does  my  life  please  you  ?  Will  you 
come  with  me  ?  You  know  it  will  be  for  your  good."  The 
proud  and  generous  lion  answered,  "  You  eat ;  you  are  sheltered ; 
you  take  pleasure,  and  have  no  trouble,  it  is  true :  but  you  are  a 
servant,  and  I  am  free,  and  will  never  serve  upon  any  terms." 
10.  It  is  not  the  abundance  of  riches  we  possess  which  can 
make  us  happy,  but  the  use  we  make  of  them.  1 1 .  Behold !  it 
is  Rome  which  presents  herself  to  your  view ;  it  is  Rome,  the 
eternal  city,  the  city  of  wonders.  12.  Misfortunes  shake  hands; 
they  seldom  come  alone.  13.  The  joys  of  friendship  make  us 
almost  forget  our  misfortunes.  14.  The  prisoner  said  to  the 
chief  keeper,  "What  is  your  name?"  To  which  he  answered. 
"  Fortune,  sir,  made  fun  of  me,  giving  me  the  name  of  a  greaJ 
man.  My  name  is  Schiller."  15.  All  the  most  amiable  gifts  oi 
mind  and  heart  are  united  in  Raphael  to  render  him  dear  to  me 
16.  Every  one  complains  of  his  memory,  and  no  one  of  his 
judgment.  17.  The  soul  of  Bice  was  worthy  of  the  heaven 
which  now  possesses  it ;  and  her  example  sustains  me  in  the 
fear  which  often  oppresses  me  since  her  death.  18.  I  heard 
Ellen  praying ;   and,  kneeling  down  without  interrupting  her,  I 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION.  13 

followed  her  words,  with  my  eyes  filled  with  tears.  19.  A  bad 
poet  had  a  satire  printed  against  Benedict  XIV.  The  pontiff 
examined,  corrected,  and  returned  it  to  the  author ;  assuring 
him,  that  it  would  sell  better  thus  corrected.  20.  Great  men 
recognize,  fraternize,  and  embrace  each  other,  through  the  lapse 
of  ages.  21.  A  crow  dressed  himself  with  the  fallen  feathers  of 
a  peacock,  and,  despising  his  companions,  went  among  the  pea- 
cocks, who,  recognizing  him,  stripped  him  of  his  false  plumes,  and 
drove  him  away.  Then  he  returned  in  confusion  to  his  com- 
panions, seeking  to  unite  with  them  again ;  but  they  made  fun  of 
and  refused  to  receive  him.  Let  the  misfortune  of  the  crow  be 
a  lesson  to  us. 

Exercise  VIII. 

Adjectives. 

The  honest  man.  The  diligent  scholar.  A  sweet  apple. 
Good  books.  Are  you  idle  ?  She  is  generous.  They  are  obe- 
dient. We  are  merry.  Who  are  weak?  He  is  not  strong. 
I  am  tired.  Life  is  short.  Who  is  ready  ?  That  boy  is  a  good 
scholar.  The  little  girl  has  a  new  dress.  We  are  poor.  Mrs. 
S.  is  modest  and  amiable.  Your  friend  (f )  is  generous.  I  am 
not  strong.  Give  him  half  a  bottle  of  good  wine.  Have  you 
seen  the  beautiful  flowers  in  the  king's  garden  ?  Those  strangers 
are  not  innocent  of  the  great  crime.  We  are  in  a  small  house. 
There  are  beautiful  trees  in  this  garden.  Tiiat  lady  has  fine 
eyes.  I  have  many  apples  and  few  pears.  Have  you  many 
friends  ?  Is  he  deaf,  or  is  he  dumb  ?  My  dog  is  faithful. 
Tlie  poor  woman  was  lame.  Your  coat  is  not  blue  ;  it  is  black. 
Her  hat  is  white,  and  mine  is  yellow.  That  girl  is  not  ill ;  she 
is  obstinate  and  ungrateful.  Who  is  that  proud  young  mtin? 
The  lady  is  very  polite.  The  streets  of  Boston  are  not  large. 
What  useless  work!  Is  she  inquisitive?  This  writing-paper  is 
not  good.  They  are  imprudent.  The  men  who  are  in  that 
large  white  house  are  honest  and  wise. 

2 


11  EXERCISES   rOK    TRANSLATION. 

1.  Milton's  "Paradise  Lost"  is  a  fine  poem.  2.  The  Queen 
of  England  is  a  kind  lady ;  she  loves  the  good  and  industrious. 
3.  The  German  lady  is  very  generous ;  she  always  thinks  of  the 
poor,  and  takes  care  of  many  orphans.  4.  There  are  large 
forests  in  France  and  Germany.  5.  A  constant,  sincere,  and 
disinterested  friend  is  rare.  6.  The  short  dress,  the  close  black- 
velvet  waist,  and  the  coarse  red  handkerchief  which  partly  covered 
her  face,  clearly  showed  her  to  be  an  Alpine  girl  (to  have  come 
from,  the  Alps).  7.  Doctor  S.  had  great  love  for  justice,  great 
tolerance,  great  faith  in  human  virtue  and  in  the  help  of  Provi- 
dence, and  a  vivid  sentiment  of  the  beautiful  in  art.  8.  All 
social  posts  can  be  occupied  by  honest  men.  9.  The  moral  and 
political  vicissitudes  of  nations  transform  a  people  of  heroes  into 
a  horde  of  slaves.  10.  Why  are  there  upon  the  earth  so  much 
beauty  and  so  many  imperfections  ?  why,  in  man,  so  much  gran- 
deur and  so  much  misery?  11.  Aosta,  a  Roman  city,  is  full  of 
beautiful  ruins  of  the  time  of  Augustus.  12.  Columbus  said, 
"  My  thoughts  are  such  as  please  few  (persons)  :  they  are,  as  I 
think,  wise,  certain,  reasonable,  meditative ;  but  yet,  to  most 
men,  they  would  appear  vain,  foolish,  adventufous,  and  frivo- 
lous." 13.  I  love  Torino :  I  love  its  beautiful  squares,  its  large 
and  clean  streets ;  and  I  love,  more  than  all,  its  slow,  but  indus- 
trious, silent,  and  progressive  life.  14.  Crescenzio,  of  illustrious 
birth  and  fine  person,  was  rich,  and  brave  in  arms.  15.  The 
Dutch  are  generally  a  patient,  laborious,  neat,  sober,  frugal,  and 
industrious  people.  16.  Death  spares  neither  rich  nor  poor. 
17.  The  diligent  hand  conquers  want ;  and  prosperity  and  suc- 
cess accompany  the  industrious.  18.  The  tongue  is  a  little 
member;  but  it  says  great  things.  19.  A  mild,  polite,  and 
affable  person  is  esteemed  by  everybody. 


EXEUCISES    FOll    TRANSLATION.  15 


Exercise  IX. 
Adjectives  in  the   Comparative. 

Charles  is  more  inquisitive  than  his  sister.  Maria  is  hand- 
somer than  her  mother.  These  pears  are  sweet ;  but  the  plums 
are  sweeter.  The  dog  is  more  faithful  than  the  cat.  We  are 
more  tired  than  unhappy.  He  is  happier  than  his  brothers. 
You  are  more  wicked  than  I.  He  is  as  dexterous  as  generous. 
You  are  happy ;  but  we  are  happier.  Mr.  L.  is  richer  than  his 
neighbor.  In  summer  the  days  are  longer  than  in  winter.  Gold 
is  more  valuable  than  silver.  Tlie  girls  are  more  discreet  than 
the  boys.  Rafaello  is  handsomer  than  his  brothers.  Her 
cheeks  are  red  as  roses.     White  as  milk. 

1.  The  richer  man  is,  the  more  avaricious  he  is.  2.  The 
more    Napoleon    conquered,  the   more    he  wished    to   conquer. 

3.  The  term  of  life   is  short;   that  of  beauty  is  still  shorter. 

4.  The  stork  has  a  longer  neck  than  the  goose.  5.  In  summer 
the  days  are  longer  than  they  are  in  winter.  6.  Brass  is  more 
useful  than  lead.  7.  The  General  was  less  successful  than 
skilful.  8.  Charles  fell  into  an  indifference,  which  was  worse  than 
doubt.  9.  There  is  more  true  glory  in  forgiveness  than  in  re- 
venge. 10.  Antonio  was  perhaps  as  great  a  man  as  Augustus ; 
but  he  was  less  fortunate.  11.  The  Savoyards  have  more  active 
blood  than  we  have :  they  have  more  of  the  impetuous  temper 
of  the  French  ;  we,  more  of  the  blessed  "  far  niente  "  of  the  Ital- 
ians. 12.  Nothing  is  so  contagious  as  example.  13.  Generally, 
the  ,more  populous  a  country,  the  richer  it  is.  14.  Few  peo- 
ple liave  a  more  celebrated,  and,  at  the  same  time,  a  more  mis- 
erable country.  15.  It  is  in  thy  own  power,  O  man!  to  be  less 
unhappy.  Arm  thyself  with  firmness  against  present  ills,  and 
forget  the  happier  days  which  are  passed.  16.  Women  ])roduce 
much  stronger  sentiments  in  the  heart  of  man  by  their  wit  than 
by  their  beauty.  17.  A  philosopher  said,  that  it  was  better  to 
consult  women  than  learned  men  in  doubts  concerning  language ; 


IG  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

because  the  latter  do  not  speak  so  well  or  so  easily  as  the 
former,  who  study  less.  18.  There  are  as  many  kinds  of  hypoc- 
risy as  there  are  virtues.  19.  Alphonso,  King  of  Spain,  said, 
"  I  am  more  afraid  of  the  tears  of  my  people,  than  the  strength 
of  my  enemies." 

Exercise  X. 

Adjectives :  their  Superlatives. 

How  do  you  feel  to-day  ?  I  feel  very  well ;  I  have  no  pain 
m  my  head  ;  I  am  very  strong.  They  have  little  bread,  and  less 
meat.  Your  liouse  is  convenient,  ours  is  more  so ;  but  that  of 
Mrs.  S.  is  the  most  convenient  of  all.  That  is  the  finest  tree  in 
the  country.  We  have  the  best  water  in  town.  Your  well  is 
the  deepest  I  ever  saw.  Her  hat  is  more  fashionable  than  hand- 
some, and  very  large.  It  is  better  to  have  too  much  than  too  little. 
Maria  is  more  industrious  than  Sarah  ;  she  is  the  most  industrious 
person  in  the  house. 

1.  The  Campidoglio  was  the  most  celebrated  edifice  of  Rome. 
2.  Nestor  was  the  oldest  and  the  wisest  of  all  the  Greeks  who 
were  at  the  siege  of  Troy.  3.  It  is  a  most  bitter  thing  to  be 
forever  separated  from  our  friends.  4.  There  are  very  valiant 
men  upon  the  American  battle-field.  5.  Princes  are  often  more 
unhappy  than  the  greatest  part  of  their  subjects.  6.  Self-love 
is  the  most  cunning  of  all  flatterers.  7.  The  most  pernicious  of  all 
sins  is  calumny :  it  very  often  ruins  the  reputation  of  the  most 
honest  people,  makes  discord  among  the  most  intimate  friends ; 
in  fact,  it  is  the  most  abominable  sin  in  the  world.  8.  The  most 
ngreeable  quality  that  a  man  can  have,  is  to  be  civil  and  courteous. 
0.  He  who  is  difficult  in  selectins^,  often  chooses  the  worst. 
10.  A  philosopher  says,  that  the  grandest  object  in  the  world  is 
a  good  man  struggling  against  adversity.  11.  Intemperance 
and  idleness  are  our  most  dangerous  enemies.  12.  It  is  said 
that  there  was  a  very  happy  and  a  very  rare  exuberance  of  loy- 
alty in  C.  Balbo,  Avhich  commanded  love  and  respect.  13.  "  The 
Life  of  Dante"  is  a  work  about  which  history  and  literai^u^e 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRxVNSLATION.  17 

dispute,  as  to  which  shall  enumerate  it  among  the  best  in  their 
respective  categories.  14.  Naples  and  Florence  are  among  the 
most  ancient  and  most  beautiful  cities.  15.  We  call  that  medium 
distance,  which  holds  the  middle  place  between  the  longest  and 
the  shortest.  16.  The  most  noted  States  are  not  those  which 
possess  the  most  fertile  country,  but  those  which  give  themselves 
up  with  the  greatest  activity  to  arts  and  trade.  17.  The  dis- 
covery by  Columbus  was  the  fruit  of  a  most  vivid  intellect, 
exalted  by  a  very  warm  imagination,  and  sustained  by  an  iron 
and  indomitable  nature.  18.  Fidelity,  which  comprehends  in 
itself  almost  all  virtues,  has  no  merit,  is  almost  no  virtue,  when 
it  can  be  inculcated  by  fear ;  but  it  is  one  of  the  sublimest  vir- 
tues when  it  is  inspired  by  love. 

Exercise  XL 

Numerals. 

My  sister  has  five  books,  and  I  have  but  two.  Your  brother 
has  a  new  cane.  The  farmer  has  54  apple  and  10  pear-trees  in 
his  little  orchard.  I  have  two  horses,  three  cows,  one  dog,  and 
50  hens.  There  are  four  weeks  in  a  month.  February  has  28 
days.  A  year  has  12  months,  52  weeks,  or  365  days.  He  is  25 
years  old ;  he  was  born  in  the  year  1840.  Is  your  father  60  years 
old?  No,  he  was  born  in  1810.  I  have  bought  three  bottles  of 
wine,  and  six  bottles  of  cider.  Give  me  22  rolls  for  20  cents. 
In  Boston  there  are  104  churches,  19,500  houses,  and  nearly 
185,000  inhabitants.  How  much  is  5  times  25?  9  times  72? 
40  and  50  make  90.  65  and  70  make  135.  We  sailed  for 
Europe  on  1st  of  June,  1820,  and  returned  Oct.  17,  1827. 
The  first  day  of  the  week.  The  third  month  of  the  year. 
We  have  had  sixteen  bottles  of  wine,  and  this  is  the  seventeenth. 
My  son  is  three  years  and  a  half  old.  Lula  is  the  third  in  lier 
class.  Give  me  five  different  kinds  of  fruit.  We  are  in  the 
nineteenth  century.  This  is  the  sixth  bird  I  have  seen  to-day. 
He  has  spent  three  dollars  and  three-quarters  for  trifles.     Tell 

2* 


18  -EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

us  what  o'clock  it  is.  It  is  a  quarter  past  five,  And  almost 
time  for  supper.  Fifteen  gentlemen  and  ten  ladies.  Twenty 
boys  and  three  girls.  Twenty-one  dollars  and  seventy-five  cents. 
The  poor  old  woman  said  she  was  eighty-one  years  old. 

1.  In  our  times,  it  is  not  rare  to  see  decrepit  people  of  twenty- 
five  years.  2.  Caesar  conquered  more  than  eight  hundred  cities 
in  less  than  ten  years.  3.  Sophocles  and  Euripides,  two  famous 
tragedians,  were  both  Athenians.  4.  The  exhibition  which 
Titus  gave  to  the  Roman  people,  at  one  time,  cost  him  eighty 
millions.  5.  Lewis  Fourteenth  was  said  to  be  one  of  the  greatest 
kings  in  the  world.  6.  Where  do  we  see  men  of  the  stamp  of 
those  depicted  by  Dante  in  the  fifteenth  and  sixteenth  canto 
of  his  Paradise  ?  7.  Herodotus  relates  of  the  ancient  Persians, 
that,  from  the  age  of  five  years  to  twenty,  they  taught  their  chil- 
dren only  three  things,  —  to  manage  a  horse,  to  use  the  bow,  and 
to  tell  the  truth.  8.  About  the  year  one  thousand,  St.  Bernard, 
a  Savoyard,  founded  the  useful  and  famous  monastery  on  one  of 
the  highest  summits  of  the  Alps,  which  still  flourishes.  9.  A  fool- 
ish young  man  asked  an  old  lady  how  old  she  was.  "  I  do  not 
know  exactly,"  she  replied ;  "  but  I  have  always  heard,  that  an 
ass  is  older  at  twenty  years  than  a  woman  at  seventy."  10.  Ma- 
sinissa.  King  of  Numidia,  died  at  the  age  of  ninety-seven  years, 
leaving  forty -four  children ;  he  had  been  an  ally  of  Rome 
nearly  seventy  years.  11.  Hospitality  is  one  of  the  first  duties 
of  man.  12.  The  Venetians  imposed  a  singular  tribute  upon  the 
Patriarch  of  Aquila,  in  the  year  one  thousand  one  hundred  and 
seventy-three :  every  year,  on  Shrove-Tuesday,  he  was  obliged 
to  send  a  bull  and  a  dozen  pigs  to  Venice ;  they  represented  the 
Patriarch  and  his  twelve  canons.  They  were  led  through  the 
city  in  pomp,  and  then  killed.  13.  Henry  Dandolo,  whose  eyes 
had  been  put  out  by  order  of  the  Emperor  Manuel  Comnene, 
was,  however,  elected  Doge  of  Venice,  in  the  year  one  thousand 
one  hundred  ninety-two,  at  the  age  of  eighty-four  years.  Soon 
after,  he  took  command  of  the  Venetian  fleet  of  five  hundred 
vessels,  and  succeeded  in  taking  possession  of  Constantinople  in 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  19 

the  year  one  thousand  two  hundred  and  four.  After  this  con- 
quest, he  added  to  his  other  titles  that  of  Lord  of  the  Fourth  and 
Eighth  of  the  Roman  Empire.  14.  The  activity  of  the  Savoyards 
is  shown  on  both  sides  of  the  Alps :  it  not  only  sends  street- 
sweeps  and  servants  into  France,  but  soldiers  also,  fifteen  or 
eighteen  Savoyard  generals  having  been  in  the  French  army. 
15.  Count  Caesar  Balbo  expired  on  the  evening  of  the  third  of 
June,  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  fifty-three,  after  a  few 
days  of  acute  suffering. 

Exercise  XII. 

Relative  Pronouns. 

Who  are  you?  What  is  that?  Which  is  it?  What  have 
you  for  me  ?  To  whom  did  you  give  the  chocolate  ?  Whose 
coat  is  that  ?  What  does  he  say  ?  Whose  children  are  they  ? 
Which  of  these  oranges  is  the  sweetest  ?  A  man  eats  what  he 
likes.  He  will  give  this  book  to  her  whom  he  likes  best.  The 
shoes  which  you  bought  are  not  good.  Which  flowers  are  the 
handsomest?  Of  whom  have  you  bought  this  linen?  What 
have  you  given  for  it  ?  To  whom  does  she  write  ?  For  what 
do  you  study  ?  What  is  good  for  you  ?  What  have  you  seen  ? 
Tiiat  is  the  lady  of  whom  I  spoke.  He  who  is  rich  is  not  always 
happy.  Upon  what  does  he  live  ?  What  a  beautiful  tree ! 
What  beautiful  flowers !  He  who  is  speaking  is  the  teacher. 
The  lady  for  whom  she  works  has  much  business.  Which  of 
these  two  pears  do  you  wish?  What  is  the  (f)  domestic  doing? 
Who  is  going  with  you  ?  The  boy  whom  you  have  seen  with 
me.  Whose  horse  is  that?  It  is  mine;  I  bought  it  of  your 
father's  friend.  What  is  the  use  of  appetite  without  food  ? 
That  of  which  you  think  the  least  is  to  amuse  yourself. 

1.  Cleopatra  wore  two  pearls  in  her  ears,  each  of  which  cost 
more  than  a  million.  2.  Tell  me  whose  company  you  keep,  and 
I  will  tell  you  who  you  are.  3.  There  are  faces  in  which  the 
character  of  goodness  is  well  expressed.  4.  He  who  acts  con- 
scientiously may  err ;  but  he  is  pure  in  the  sight  of  God.    5.  What 


20  EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION. 

is  learned  in  youth  is  easily  impressed  upon  the  mind.  6.  Happy 
are  those  who  can  content  themselves  with  the  necessaries  of 
life.  7.  He  who  does  not  love  his  brother  does  not  deserve  to 
live.  8.  Modesty  is  to  merit  what  a  gauze  veil  is  to  beauty :  it 
diminishes  its  splendor,  but  augments  its  value.  9.  That  which 
is  most  delicate  in  a  work  is  lost  by  translating  it  into  another 
language.  10.  There  is  a  certain  art  in  conversation  whicli 
gives  grace  to  the  simplest  thing.  11.  Contact  with  other  men 
is  necessary  for  him  who  has  to  write  history.  12.  The  cocoa- 
nut-tree  is  of  medium  size ;  the  leaves  of  which  fall  and  shoot 
forth   alternately,   so    that   it   is   always   covered  with    foliage. 

13.  Venice  is  a  city  unique  in  the  world  by  its  situation;  it  is 
precisely  like  an  immense  ship,  which  tranquilly  reposes  upon  the 
water,  and  which  no  one    can  reach,  but  by  means    of  boats. 

14.  There  is  nothing,  however  mean  it  may  be,  that  is  not  useful 
for  something.  15.  Charles  Bonnet,  who  was  almost  perfect  in 
heart  and  mind,  tells  us  that  after  death  all  the  species  mount 
one  round  of  the  ladder  which  leads  to  perfection.  IG.  At  the 
commencement  of  a  feast,  the  Romans  used  to  present  a  list  of 
the  viands  which  were  to  appear  upon  the  table  to  the  guests, 
in  order  that  each  one  might  reserve  his  appetite  for  that  which 
most  pleased  him.  17.  A  preacher  had  annoyed  all  his  audience 
preaching  upon  the  beatitudes.  After  the  sermon,  a  lady  told 
him  that  he  had  forgotten  one.  "  Which  ?  "  asked  the  preacher. 
"  That,"  answered  the  lady,  "  blessed  is  he  who  did  not  hear 
your  sermon;"  18.  Listlessness  is  a  disease,  the  only  remedy 
for  which  is  labor.  19.  That  which  is  called  Eldorado  is  only 
a  sandy  desert,  which  will  not  offer  you  a  drop  of  water  if  you 
are  thirsty,  nor  the  shade  of  a  tree  if  you  are  weary. 

Exercise  XHI. 

Possessive  Adjective  Pronouns. 

Is  this  your  bi-other's  pen  ?     No,  it  is  mine.     All  that  I  have 
is  hers.     His  book  is  very  good.     Our  relations  are  not  poor. 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRAJS\SLATION.  21 

The  daughter  loves  her  father  and  mother.  The  son  loves  his 
mother  and  sister.  I  love  you  and  your  children.  Do  not  speak 
against  my  relations.  It  is  one  of  my  sisters.  She  is  in  the 
kitchen  with  her  aunt.  To-day  she  will  put  on  her  best  white 
hat,  and  her  new  shoes.  Go  in  her  stead.  He  spoke  continually 
of  his  father,  mother,  and  sister.  Their  female  friends  are  not 
in  the  city.  Is  that  your  glove?  No,  it  is  not  mine  ;  it  is  yours. 
Their  good  dog  is  not  in  our  yard.  Look  at  your  watch.  Give 
me  my  property.  Go  to  his  store.  These  are  your  apples,  his 
pears,  and  my  cherries.  Who  has  her  nice  ribbons  ?  Where  is 
my  lace  ?  Give  my  aunt  her  money.  My  dear  friend,  I  have 
nothing  to  give  him.  They  were  her  people.  Her  neighbor 
was  left  to  guard  her  house  and  her  cows.  She  and  her  mother. 
My  dear  children.  Put  it  in  your  pocket.  She  put  it  upon  her 
head.     He  did  it  with  his  hands. 

1.  England  owes  her  wealth  to  the  protection  which  she 
accords  to  her  commerce.  2.  Oh,  what  a  longing  a  prisoner 
has  to  see  his  fellow-creatures !  o.  There  is  no  doubt,  that 
every  human  condition  has  its  peculiar  duties.  4.  Nothing 
serves  better  to  confound  our  enemies,  than  not  to  notice  their 
offence.      5.   Every  condition   has   its   pleasures   and   its   pains. 

6.  The   great  wisdom   of  man   consists   in    knowing    his    folly. 

7.  Our  friends   foi'sake   us  when    fortune    ceases    to    favor    us. 

8.  A  wise  man  often  doubts :  a  foolish  man  never ;  he  knows 
every  thing  but  his  own  ignorance.  9.  Euripides  complained  to 
one  of  his  friends,  that  he  had  been  three  days  making  a  few 
verses.  10.  Conscience  is  a  just  judge  of  our  actions.  11.  A 
sick  man  almost  always  says  to  his  physician,  My  head  and  all 
my  body  pains  me.  12.  Hannibal  distinguished  himself  from  his 
equals  not  by  the  magnificence  of  his  dress,  but  by  the  beauty  of 
his  horse  and  his  arms.  13.  Self-love  is  our  prime  mover. 
14.  "And   he   also,  when   he   saw   me,  arose,  and,  throwing   his 

•arms  about  my  neck,  embraced  me."  15.  A  sim[)leton  joked  a 
man  of  wit  about  his  large  ears.  "  I  acknowledge  having  them 
too  large  for  a  man,"  he  answered ;  "  but  you  must  at  the  same 


22  EXERCISES    FOR   TRiVNSLATION. 

time  agree,  that  yours  are  too  small  for  an  ass."  16.  If  you  at- 
tempt to  enter  into  conversation  with  an  Englishman  who  does 
not  know  you,  he  will  certainly  take  you  for  a  knave.  He  will 
button  up  his  vest,  put  his  handkerchief  well  into  his  pocket,  see 
that  his  watch  is  safe,  and  look  crabbedly  at  you.  Notice  his 
face :  it  says  to  you,  "  Leave  me  alone."  Yet  this  same  person 
is  perhaps  the  most  friendly  of  mortals  ;  he  only  wishes  to  protect 
his  own  independence.  17.  A  fox  seeing  a  crow,  which  had  a 
piece  of  cheese  in  her  beak,  upon  a  tree,  began  to  praise  her 
very  much.  "  What  fine  feathers  ! "  he  said ;  "  what  a  beautiful 
body !  If  you  knew  how  to  sing,  upon  my  word  there  could  bo 
no  finer  bird."  The  foolish  bird,  to  allow  her  voice  to  be  heard, 
opened  her  beak,  and  let  the  cheese  fall ;  and  the  fox,  seizing  it, 
carried  it  away.  But  the  fox  soon  paid  for  his  fraud ;  for  the 
shepherd  came,  and  killed  him  for  his  skin. 

Exercise  XIV. 

Demonstrative  Adjective  Pronouns. 

This  is  my  penknife ;  that  is  yours.  These  are  her  pens. 
Is  that  ink  good  ?  Who  is  he  ?  Who  is  she  ?  Who  are  they  ? 
This  house  no  longer  belongs  to  me.  What  have  you  in  that 
trunk  ?  Who  are  those  men  ?  What  did  your  father  buy  to 
day  ?  AVho  has  given  me  this  beautiful  bouquet  ?  What  is  in 
that  closet  ?  She  will  do  what  the  master  tells  her.  We  shall 
go  and  take  a  little  walk  this  evening.  In  the  meantime  you 
can  go  to  our  neighbors.  Take  this  inkstand,  and  give  me  that. 
That  is  the  lady  of  whom  I  was  speaking.  This  rich  man  is 
sick.  Those  poor  women  are  well.  That  poor  child  is  hand- 
some and  good.  Give  those  gloves  to  that  man.  To  this  or  to 
that?  This  man  was  learned,  that  was  ignorant.  That  axe 
was  lost.  I  have  found  this  gold  axe.  Is  this  your  axe,  sir? 
This  morning  I  worked  in  the  garden.  He  planted  those  seeds 
which  you  gave  him.  This  book  is  incorrect.  That  grammar 
is  much  used.     He  loves  those  dear  children.     Where  have  1 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION.  23 

seen  those  faces?  To  whom  have  you  given  those  plums ^ 
Have  you  written  to  that  lady?  What  did  she  say  to  that 
news  ?  I  prefer  this  table  to  that.  This  hat  is  very  becoming 
to  your  daughter.  She  likes  these  red  ribbons,  not  those  yellow 
ones.     Give  me  that  small  piece  of  cheese. 

1.     Happy  are  those  who  love  to  read.     2.  We  love  those 
who  admire  us ;    but  we  do   not  always  love  those  whom  we 
admire.     3.  Those  who  believe  that  happiness  consists  in  riches 
deceive  themselves.     4.  We  often  forgive  those  who  annoy  us, 
but  rarely  those  whom  we  annoy.     5.  Ariosto  is  the  poet  of  the 
ima";ination,  Tasso  that  of  the  intellect.     6.  James  I.  was  one 
of  those  men  who  are  discontented  with  their  condition,  and 
envious    of  others'   glory.     7.    Plato    banished   music  from   his 
republic.     8.  All  the  works  of  nature  merit  our  admiration.     9. 
The  words  of  a  sincere  man  are  the  thoughts  of  his  heart.     10. 
"  His  eyes  were  closed  by  his  physician,  his  friend  from  infancy, 
and  a  man  all  religion  and  charity."     11.  "I  have  never  known 
a  more  noble  spirit  than  his,  and  few  similar  to  his."     12.  True 
grief  weeps  little  ;  the  tear  of  the  soul  is  much  more  bitter  than 
that  shed  from  the  eye.     13.  Those  who  flatter  the  great,  ruin 
them.     14.  We  must  do  what  God  sets  us  to  do,  and  take  what  he 
sends  us.     15.  There  are  human  beings  to  whom  nature  shows 
herself  a   real   step-mother  ;    poor   Joanne    was    one    of  these 
unhappy   creatures.       16.    The    hour   of    twilight   exercises    a 
mysterious  influence  upon  gentle  spirits ;   that  light  and  those 
shadows  which  seem  to  meet  only  to  take  leave  of  each  other 
(to  give  an  adieu)  awaken  a  thousand  delicate  and  affectionate 
thoughts.      17.    From   time    to    time,  conscience  wars    against 
pride,  and    attempts    to    conquer   its    bad    reasonings   (the  bad 
reasonings  of  this)   by  bearing  witness  to  the  truth.     18.  That 
sky,  that  country,  that  distant  motion  of  creatures  in  the  valley, 
those  voices  of  the  country  girls,  those  laughs,  those  songs,  ex- 
hilarated  us  very  much.     19.    The    wounds   of  the  body   are 
nothing  in  comparison  to  those  of  the  mind. 


24  EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION. 


Exercise  XV. 
Indefinite  Adjective  Pronouns. 

They  have  spoken  of  nobody.  She  gave  it  to  somebody.  I 
had  nothins:  for  dinner.  The  children  love  each  other.  One 
goes,  and  another  comes.  Both  are  in  the  city.  Give  him  all 
you  have.  Tell  me  all  you  know.  The  woman  knows  every- 
body. The  good  man  loves  everybody.  Has  any  one  been 
here  ?  It  is  said  that  Celia  will  go  to  France.  No  one  is  with- 
out faults.  Some  are  good,  others  are  bad.  I  hear  somebody's 
voice.  They  are  not  going  into  Washington  Street.  They  sny 
it  was  a  long  procession.     Is  there  any  thing  new  to-day  ? 

1.  Every  man  is  exposed  to  criticism.  2.  All  men  are 
subject  to  death.  3.  Every  one  has  his  faults.  4.  Take  those 
books,  and  put  them  each  in  its  place.  5.  Justice  includes  all 
other  virtues.  6.  Scipio  displayed  grandeur  in  all  his  actions. 
7.  All  nations  appear  to  desire  to  obtain  merit  from  the 
splendor  of  their  origin.  8.  We  must  have  patience,  and  every 
thing  will  come  right  in  time.  9.  People  judge  others'  things 
in  a  different  manner  from  that  in  which  they  would  judge  their 
own.  10.  People  drink  good  wine  in  France,  and  eat  good 
meat  in  England.  11.  Every  period  of  life  has  pleasures 
proper  and  natural  to  it.  12.  Whatever  reasons  one  may  have 
for  being  absent  from  his  country,  there  can  be  none  sufficiently 
strong  to  make  him  forget  it.  13.  Vice  disunites  men,  keeping 
them  on  guard,  one  against  the  other.  14.  That  which  thou 
desirest  others  to  keep  silent,  keep  thou  silent.  15.  Other 
times,  other  customs.  16.  It  is  foolish  not  to  wish  to  know 
any  thing.  17.  No  language  is  perfect  in  itself.  18.  It  is 
easier  to  be  wise  for  others  than  for  ourselves.  16.  Every 
body  seeks  happiness,  few  find  it.  20.  A  preacher,  who  had 
not  been  invited  to  dine  with  any  one  through  Lent,  said,  in  his 
last  sermon,,  that  he  had  preached  against  all  sins  except  that  of 
gluttony,  because  it  had  not  appeared  to  him  that  such  a  vice 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION.  2o 

ruled  in  the  country.  21.  Some  one  asked  an  American,  why 
there  had  not  been  a  monument  erected  to  Christopher  Colum- 
bus.    22.  Every  beginning  is  difficult. 

Exercise  XVI. 
Iridejinite  Adjective  Pronouns  Continued. 

What  is  the  best  news?  What  is  the  talk  about  town? 
Tliere  is  no  news.  I  have  read  no  paper  to-day.  Do  they  still 
speak  of  war?  No,  they  speak  only  of  peace.  Every  flower 
has  its  beauty.  Every  man  has  his  virtues.  Our  friends  will 
remain  in  France  some  weeks.  She  spends  her  time  in  some 
useful  occupation.  They  have  some  good  books.  One  sees  that 
he  is  only  a  child.  No  servant  was  ever  more  faithful.  We 
shall  remain  in  the  city  all  summer.  He  goes  somewhere  every 
season.  Every  one  is  her  friend,  because  she  is  good.  One  can 
do  much.  Every  little  helps.  It  is  not  well  to  do  nothing. 
Some  make  money,  others  lose  it.  The  girls  were  jealous  of 
j  one  another.  One  has  a  fine  face,  the  other  a  handsome  hand. 
Both  mother  and  child  were  here. 

1.  Any  loss  is  more  honorable  than  to  lie.  5.  All  the 
laws  and  the  prophets,  all  the  collection  of  sacred  books,  is 
reduced  to  the  precept  of  loving  God  and  man.  3.  The  pleas- 
ure derived  from  things,  in  appearance  almost  nothing,  when  we 
wish  well  to  some  one,  is  indescribable.  4.  Speaking  with  one 
and  another  is  a  pleasant  recreation  for  every  one.  5.  No 
friendship,  however  intimate  it  may  be,  can  authorize  the  vio- 
lation of  a  secret.  6.  God  knows  how  much  more  pleasant  the 
name  of  Naples,  the  city  of  my  fathers,  is  to  me  than  that  of  any 
other  name  of  Italian  country.  7.  Nothing  is  durable  here 
below.  8.  Every  thing  has  its  time;  and  the  usages  of  war, 
perhaps,  more  than  any  other  thing.  9.  In  plains  we  wish  for 
hills,  and  on  hills  we  naturally  wish  to  walk  on  plains.  10. 
There  is  almost  no  great  capital  in  Europe  where  they  do  not 


9(5  JiXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION. 

seek  servants  from  some  remote,  hidden  province,  and  for  the 
most  part  from  the  mountains. 

Exercise  XVII. 
Prepositions  di,  a,  da. 

Have  you  come  to  find  me  ?  Do  not  go  near  the  bed.  That 
boy  has  fallen  from  the  tree.  Give  the  boy  milk  to  drink,  and 
some  bread  to  eat.  Have  you  good  writing-paper  ?  My  sister 
ha>s  a  good  saddlehorse  to  sell.  They  say  that  our  enemy  is  out 
of  danger.  Whilst  the  child  is  starving  at  home,  the  mother 
goes  to  church  to  pray.  Give  that  man  something  to  do.  Do 
not  say  it  in  jest.  That  domestic  is  not  fit  for  many  things. 
The  little  boy  plays  the  teacher,  and  the  little  girl  the  mistress 
of  the  house.  He  lives  out  of  the  town,  and  keeps  arms  for 
defence  in  his  house.  Why  have  you  not  something  to  do  ?  I 
have  been  sick  since  last  year.  Those  girls  depend  upon  their 
aunt.     Have  you  learned  your  lesson  by  heart  ? 

1.  We  must  be  careful  not  to  expose  ourselves  to  danger.  2. 
Caesar  said  to  some  one  who  was  reading  in  his  presence,  "  Are 
you  reading,  or  are  you  singing  ?  If  you  are  singing,  you  sing 
very  badly."  3.  When  the  gods  love  princes,  says  an  ancient 
philosopher,  they  pour  a  mixture  of  good  and  evil  into  their  cup 
of  fate,  so  that  they  may  never  forget  that  they  are  men.  4. 
There  is  no  true  friendship  without  virtue.  5.  Riches  and 
poverty  have  great  influence  upon  men.  6.  The  city  of  Florence 
enjoyed  tranquillity  and  abundance  under  the  government  of  the 
Medici.  7.  Have  three  things  open  to  your  friend,  —  your  face, 
your  purse,  and  your  heart.  8.  Charlemagne  sealed  treaties 
with  the  hilt  of  his  sword.  9.  "  Dying,  we  find  an  asylum  against 
the  misfortunes  of  life,"  said  Seneca.  10.  We  ought  to  learn 
more  from  observation  than  from  books.  11.  "The  eternal  God 
has  poured  out  happiness  ;  and  I,  I  alone,  am  without  help,  with- 
out friends,  without  company."  12.  God  save  you  from  living 
alone,  by  force  (being  forced  to  live  alone)  !     13.  It  was  ordered 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  27 

by  Providence,  that,  when  man  is  struck  with  calamity,  woman 
shall  be  his  support  and  consolation.  14.  The  last  of  the  Vallesa 
was  one  of  the  best  and  most  noble  —  noble  in  actions  —  among 
the  ministers  of  our  good  and  popular  king.  15.  It  is  not  pos- 
sible not  to  find  some  enchantment  in  the  presence,  in  the  looks, 
and  in  the  conversation,  of  a  good,  vivacious,  and  affectionate  old 
lady.  16.  It  is  said  that  the  suffering  of  man  upon  earth  is  for 
the  good  of  mankind. 

Exercise  XVIII. 

Prepositions  in,  con,  per. 

From  this  time  forward.  From  that  time  forward.  My  house 
is  in  one  of  the  principal  streets  of  the  city.  Are  you  angry  ? 
Where  is  the  bunch  of  grapes  which  your  uncle  had  for  me? 
Go  to  the  tailor's  for  your  father's  coat.  With  whom  do  you  study 
music?  We  study  with  the  schoolmaster.  Are  you  going  to 
Mrs.  G.'s  to-day  ?  How  did  the  boys  go  into  the  church  ?  They 
went  four-by-four.  The  lady  saw  a  little  girl  pass  over  (through) 
the  meadow  with  a  faggot  of  wood  upon  her  head.  I  only  wish 
to  speak  with  you.  We  earn  our  bread  by  labor.  Money  is  to 
pay  the  house- rent.  What  do  you  do  to  earn  your  food  ?  Will 
you  come  with  me  ?  The  hostess  led  us  into  a  clean  room.  The 
father  returned  with  the  clothes  which  he  had  bought  in  the 
village.  A  dog  was  sleeping  at  his  ease  in  a  manger  full  of  hay. 
An  ox  came  to  the  manger  to  eat.  The  envious  dog  barked,  and 
would  not  allow  the  ox  to  approach  the  hay.  The  poor  hungry 
animal  was  angry  at  such  an  overbearing  act,  and  said  to  the 
ribald  dog,  "  May  God  reward  you  according  to  your  deserts, 
uncharitable  villain !  You  do  not  eat  the  hay  yourself,  nor  per- 
mit others  to  enjoy  it.  Make  use  of  the  good  things  given  you 
by  Heaven,  and  permit  others  to  enjoy  theirs." 


28  EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION. 


Exercise  XIX. 
Prepositions. 

She  will  be  here  in  ten  days.  It  is  said  there  is  nothing  new 
under  the  sun.  We  will  go  together  after  dinner.  They  praise 
her  to  the  skies.  Until  now  I  have  been  your  friend.  He  is 
beloved  even  by  his  enemies.  Do  not  hesitate.  I  shall  have 
finished  this  book  shortly.  He  has  been  in  France  nearly  three 
years.  There  are  nearly  one  thousand  souls  in  this  town.  I 
can  do  nothing  without  you.  Poor  w^omen  !  They  appear  to  be 
friendless.  The  good  man  cannot  see  my  husband  without 
speaking  to  him.  There  is  no  entrance  for  any  one.  Mary  set 
out  for  the  city  with  her  mamma.  She  had  a  little  bed  at  the 
side  of  the  lady's  bed. 

1.  Before  pubHshing  his  poem,  Tasso  wished  to  submit  it  to 
the  criticisms  of  the  bravest  men  of  his  times.  2.  The  poet  was 
presented  to  the  king  by  the  generous  duke.  3.  To  that  unfor- 
tunate woman,  Rome  alone  appeared  to  be  a  secure  asylum. 
4.  The  soldier  has  every  proof  of  esteem  from  the  most  cele- 
brated men  who  live  here.  5.  Mrs.  U.  presents  her  compli- 
ments to  Mr.  M.  She  cannot  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  him 
to-day,  and  begs  him  to  excuse  her.  6.  Mrs.  U.  presents  her 
compliments  to  Mrs.  M.,  and  requests  the  favor  of  her  company 
on  Tuesday  evening  next.  7.  If  you  do  not  call  upon  me  in  the 
morning,  I  shall  certainly  wait  on  you  in  the  evening.  8.  The 
country  is  submerged  from  time  to  time,  and  once  Charles  was 
up  to  his  head  in  water.  9.  Who  lives  according  to  the  laws  of 
nature,  in  this  city  ?  10.  Caroline  has  found  some  strawberries 
between  the  two  stones  at  the  side  of  the  wall.  11.  Mr.  L.  was 
silent ;  and  sadly  he  fixed  his  eyes  upon  Peter,  who  cast  his 
down  to  the  earth.  12.  Captain  S.  yields  to  civil  orders,  is  a 
sincere  lover  of  peace,  and  aspires  to  no  other  dignity  than  that 
of  being  able  to  be  useful  to  his  beloved  country.  13.  The  cap- 
tain was  named  Schiller ;  he  was  a  Swiss,  of  a  peasant  family ; 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION".  29 

he  had  served  asrainst  the  Turks  under  General  Landon  in  the 
times  of  Joseph  11. ;  then  in  all  the  wars  of  Austria  against 
France,  until  the  fall  of  Napoleon.  14.  The  hospitality  of  the 
French  is  the  most  complete  in  the  actual  state  of  society. 
15.  Among  the  Sybarites,  women  invited  to  feasts  and  public 
dinners  were  notified  a  year  previous,  that  they  might  have  time 
to  appear  with  all  the  pomp  of  beauty  and  dress. 

Exercise  XX. 
The  Verbs  essere  and  avere. 

We  are  poor  and  sick.  Are  you  not  rich  enough?  Were 
they  all  here  ?  Have  you  had  time  to  go  to  Rome  ?  I  shall  be 
at  home  next  week.  There  is  no  time  to  lose.  Why  are  you  in 
such  a  hurry  ?  Be  quiet,  and  you  shall  have  some  figs.  Be  so 
kind  as  to  to  give  that  old  man  a  glass  of  wine.  There  are 
many  people  who  do  not  love  to  work.  We  have  no  meat  for 
dinner.  I  am  ill,  and  have  no  appetite.  The  physician  is 
charmed  with  the  progress  of  his  patient.  They  have  a  cold. 
The  parents  of  those  children  have  been  too  indulgent.  He  has 
been  to  the  tailor's ;  but  the  coat  was  not  finished.  I  shall  be 
happy  to  see  her  in  my  new  house.  They  have  been  very  polite 
to  us.  She  is  about  to  marry.  I  will  come  to  your  house 
to-morrow.  It  may  be  that  I  shall  not  be  at  home.  Her  things 
are  all  in  a  good  way  now.  I  look  upon  thee  as  a  good  friend. 
There  is  no  hope  left.  Mr.  R.  is  a  rich  man,  or  a  man  of  great 
wealth.  The  rich  are  not  always  happy.  Good  health  is  bet- 
ter than  wealth.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  I  am  no 
longer  hungry.  That  would  be  useless.  Is  his  bird  tame? 
Have  they  green  worsted  ?     Give  her  needle,  thread,  and  cotton. 

1.  The  city  of  Briinn  is  the  capital  of  Moravia.     2.    To  be  a 

slave  to  the  judgment  of  others,  when  you  are  persuaded  that  it 

is  false  is  the  height  of  baseness.     3.    Happy  are  those  who  hate 

violent  pleasures,  and  know  how  to  be  contented  with  an  innocent 

life.     4.  Whoever  is  capable  of  lying,  is  unworthy  of  being  enu- 

3* 


30  EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION". 

merated  among  men.  5.  It  was  a  sweet  pleasure  to  hear  those 
songs  and  the  organ  which  accompanied  them.  6.  It  is  easy  to 
give  advice,  but  very  difficult  to  follow  it.  7.  Albert  R.  had 
changed  his  hope  of  being  one  of  the  great  of  Europe,  into  that 
of  being  one  of  the  first  of  his  own  little  province.  8.  Arduino, 
Marquis  of  Ivrea,  was  the  last  Italian  king  of  Italy.  9.  It  is 
curious  that  Piedmont,  one  of  the  most  picturesque  countries 
perhaps  in  the  world,  was  nevertheless  one  of  the  last  to  admit 
picturesque  gardening.  10.  The  city  of  Tyre  is  refreshed  by  the 
north  wind  which  comes  from  the  sea.  11.  The  greater  the 
number  of  men  there  are  in  a  country,  provided  they  are  indus- 
trious, the  more  abundance  they  enjoy.  12.  The  ambition  and 
avarice  of  men  are  the  sole  origin  of  all  their  misfortunes. 
13.  The  most  unhappy  of  all  men  is  he  who  believes  himself 
to  be  so.  14.  The  most  free  of  all  men,  is  he  who  can  be  free 
even  in  slavery.  15.  Misfortune  is  the  school  of  great  intellects. 
16.  Friendship  and  religion  are  two  inestimable  advantages 
(goods).  17.  Not  to  remember  happy  days  is  a  great  diminu- 
tion of  misery,  particularly  when  we  are  young.  18.  General 
B.  said,  "  I  have  always  believed  that  the  education  of  war  is  the 
best  education  that  a  man  can  have." 

Exercise  XXI. 

The    Verbs  aiid  their  ■  Syntax, 

Have  you  seen  the  violets  ?  There  are  beautiful  tulips  in 
your  cousin's  garden.  How  fresh  every  thing  looks  !  Every 
thing  looks  alive.  The  rain  has  done  a  great  deal  of  good. 
This  is  the  warmest  summer  I  can  remember.  I  think  we  shall 
have  more  rain.  I  have  a  little  business  to  do.  I  have  had  a 
very  pleasant  journey.  You  never  will  do  like  others.  You 
wait  for  nobody.  I  will  not  stay  a  moment  longer.  I  wish  for 
a  steel  pen  and  a  sheet  of  paper.  Tell  me  to  whom  you  write. 
I  write  to  the  dear  friend  whom  you  have  seen  at  my  house. 
What  noise  do  I  hear  ?     You  said  it.     I  thought  you  were  mis- 


EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.  31 

taken.  Come  home  before  it  grows  dark.  Take  away  those 
things.  Never  speak  without  thinking.  They  say  that  he  has 
never  enjoyed  a  moment's  happiness.  Do  not  go  out ;  it  rains. 
She  was  about  writing  a  letter  when  you  entered.  It  is  Henry's 
turn  to  go  to  the  city.  To-morrow  I  shall  play  the  cook :  will 
you  come  to  dine  with  me?  We  shall  have  maccaroni  with 
cheese  for  dinner.  Now  they  ring  the  bell  for  supper,  and  we 
are  not  all  ready  to  go.  Let  us  wait  a  little.  See,  my  suit  of 
clothes  is  finished.  How  well  he  plays  the  violin !  it  is  a  pleas- 
ure to  hear  him. 

1.  The  music  of  Bellini  says  sadly,  as  he  who  hopes  for  noth- 
ing here  below,  "  Weep  and  pray."  2.  Let  us  remember  that 
suffering  is  the  common  heritage  of  the  sons  of  man ;  that  earth 
without  heaven  would  be  too  hard  an  exile  ;  and  that  life  without 
God  is  an  insoluble  enigma !  3.  "  Heaven  be  thanked,  that  I 
can  remember  my  good  mother  without  the  least  remorse ! " 
said  R.  4.  The  will  of  God  be  done.  5.  It  is  a  shame  to  the 
human  race,  that  war  is  inevitable  at  certain  times,  or  on  certain 
occasions.  6.  Labor  and  cares  do  not  frighten  the  wise  man ; 
they  are  the  exercise  of  his  mind,  which  they  keep  in  vigor  and 
health.  7.  Those  disasters  which  cast  down,  discourage,  and 
mortify  the  spirits  of  a  man,  seem  to  rouse  up  the  energies  of 
the  softer  sex.  8.  We  should  foresee  danger,  and  fear  it ;  but, 
when  it  comes  upon  us,  we  have  only  to  despise  it.  9.  In  war, 
fortune  is  capricious  and  inconstant.  10.  Men  wish  to  have  every 
thing,  and  make  themselves  miserable  with  the  desire  for  super- 
fluity. 11.  Great  conquerors,  like  those  rivers  which  overflow 
their  banks,  appear  majestic,  but  lay  waste  all  those  fertile  coun- 
tries-which  they  should  only  water.  12.  Everybody  says  what 
comes  into  his  mind.  13.  When  the  heart  of  a  man  is  exercised 
and  strengthened  in  virtue,  he  ought  easily  to  console  himself  for 
the  wrinkles  which  come  upon  his  face.  14.  Justice,  modera- 
tion, and  good  faith  are  the  securest  defence  of  a  State.  15.  Mis- 
fortune fraternizes  souls,  stifles  bad  passions,  and  binds  around 
us  ties  of  love.     16.   St.  Cecilia  is  a  popular  institution  which 


32  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

appears  to  be  transmitted  from  the  middle  ages.  17.  Letters ! 
are  they  not  the  children  of  heaven,  descended  to  earth  to 
console  us  in  grief?  18.  Ah!  there  is  much  comfort  in  the 
alternations  of  care  and  hope  for  a  person  who  is  all  that  is  left 
to  us.  19.  Who,  in  the  noise  of  our  streets,  with  railways,  the 
smoke  of  the  engines,  and  the  monotonous  rolling  of  the  omni- 
buses, would  not  sometimes  sigh  for  the  quiet  of  a  country  life  ? 

Exercise  XXII. 

Subjunctive  Mood. 

The  mistress  of  the  house  ordered  her  to  go.  I  fear  that  you 
will  be  late  to  school.  Tell  her  that  she  cannot  do  as  she  likes. 
He  does  not  know  if  he  ought  to  buy  it  of  him.  If  he  knew  it, 
he  would  not  tell  it  to  me.  We  are  assured  that  your  friend  (f ) 
has  come.  If  you  had  studied,  you  would  be  more  learned.  It 
seems  that  she  will  not  give  the  cake  to  her  son.  It  is  possible 
that  she  may  give  it  to  him  to-morrow.  I  want  to  be  home  in 
good  time.  I  am  afraid  the  roads  are  very  dusty.  I  think  we 
shall  have  some  rain.  Do  you  not  think  that  it  is  very  warm 
for  the  season  ?  I  want  something  good  to  eat.  Here  is  a  piece 
of  toast,  which  I  think  will  please  you.  Make  yourself  at  home. 
What  fruit  do  you  like  best?  It  does  not  appear  to  me  that 
there  is  much  difference.  You  say  so,  that  you  may  not  blame 
me.  She  seems  to  be  growing  homelier.  The  master  asked  me 
who  I  was,  and  where  I  went  to  school.  What  does  he  think 
that  I  know  ?  I  wish  to  give  her  the  flowers  which  please  her. 
She  appeared  to  me  more  beautiful  than  ever.  More  beautiful 
than  any  other  lady  in  Boston.  If  I  had  such  a  house.  He 
wishes  to  know  who  she  is.  I  wish  that  yor  would  write  to  my 
mother.  Let  me  feel  your  pulse.  Is  there  any  thing  I  can  do 
for  you  ?  It  seems  to  me  to  be  very  late.  Now  I  must  see 
your  flower-garden  and  your  kitchen-garden.  Although  it  is 
difficult,  I  will  do  it.  If  he  knew  how  much  he  was  beloved ! 
I  must  go.     I  am  afraid  that  I  shall  not  be  able  to  go  tliere.     I 


EXERCISES    Foil    TRANSLATION.  33 

cannot  believe  any  such  thing.     What  is  it  to  you  if  he  comes 
or  not? 

1.  The  preacher  said  to  his  hearers,  "If  I  offered  you  only 
promises,  you  would  be  excused  for  not  believing  me ;  but  I 
offer  you  certain  and  present  things."  2  "  Let  us  see  if  you  now 
have  the  courage  to  do  better,  and  to  allow  yourself  to  be  humil- 
iated by  the  truth  which  condemns  your  weakness."  3.  Do  not 
say  things  which  are  not  true.  4.  Do  not  go  in  search  of  perils, 
when  necessity  does  not  require  it.  5.  We  must  found  public 
schools,  where  we  can  teach  our  youth  to  prefer  honor  to  pleas- 
ure. 6.  Very  soon  James  and  Charles  had  the  same  confidence 
as  if  they  had  passed  their  lives  together,  athough  they  had 
never  seen  each  other  before.  7.  People  generally  pray  that 
God  would  reward  them  for  every  good  action.  8.  If  we  do 
not  flatter  ourselves,  the  flattery  of  others  will  never  hurt  us. 
9.  "  Alas  !  "  cried  Mrs.  P.,  "  I  fear  that  my  son  is  dead  ;  and  I 
know  not  what  I  shall  do."  10.  Whatever  may  have  been 
Louisa's  intentions,  she   has   not   done   as  well   as    she   might. 

11.  The  larger  a  kingdom  is,  the  more  ofiicers  are  required  to 
do  what  the  chief  magistrate  could  not  accomplish  by  himself. 

12.  What  a  shame  it  is,  that  the  most  elevated  men  make  their 
grandeur  consist  in  their  money-bags.  13.  Who  has  not  need 
of  a  friend  who  loves  the  truth  only,  and  who  will  tell  you  the 
truth  in  spite  of  yourself?  14.  The  statue  of  Zenobia  was  in  so 
life  like  a  posture,  that  one  could  almost  believe  that  she  would 
walk.  15.  How  many  exiles  have  exclaimed,  "  Would  to  God 
that  I  had  never  left  my  country!"  16.  When  a  good  general 
is  killed,  all  the  camp  is  like  a  disconsolate  family  which  has 
lost  the  father,  who  was  the  cherished  hope  of  his  tender  little 
ones.  17.  It  was  only  with  the  good  parent,  that  the  discreet 
child  did  not  use  circumspection  in  manifesting  all  the  secrets  of 
his  heart. 


34  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 


Exercise  XXm. 
Infinitive  and  Participles. 

"We  are  beloved  by  all  our  friends.  I  have  been  out  of  town 
all  winter.  They  have  arrived  in  England.  "When  he  arrived 
at  the  church  door,  he  found  it  shut.  She  is  very  acute  at  rail- 
lery. They  have  not  found  the  dog  which  was  lost.  I  have 
seen  a  orreeu  worm  on  the  rose-bush.  It  is  not  all  in  commenc- 
ing.  The  fire  is  spread  throughout  the  city.  Do  not  fear  that 
I  go  away ;  your  manners  please  me  too  much.  She  has  had 
time  to  repent  of  it.  "Who  can  say  much  in  few  words  ?  Seeing 
her  going  away.  It  seemed  to  him  that  he  saw  his  lady.  "When 
I  had  said  thus.  "Who  can  have  done  that  ?  She  must  go  very 
soon.  I  have  always  loved  good  old  people.  He  has  been  very 
kind  to  us.  She  has  given  two  dresses  to  her  servant.  Having 
rested  his  weary  body,  he  got  up.  On  his  departure,  he  gave 
each  child  a  dollar.  I  believe  that  you  are  all  asleep.  "Who  has 
told  all  these  things  to  our  father  ?  Where  has  he  bought  that 
fine  horse  ?  I  have  paid  more  for  my  feathers  than  they  are 
worth.  If  I  could  have  some  pretty  ribbon  to  trim  my  dress. 
That  man  has  gained  much  money.  Your  son  has  spent  more 
than  you  can  ever  earn.  He  has  not  rendered  an  exact  ac- 
count of  every  thing.  Never  speak  at  random.  "When  the 
night  was  spent.  He  is  oppressed  by  cares.  To  be  master  of  a 
thing.  He  has  been  the  Lord  Mayor  of  London.  They  have 
spent  about  twenty  crowns.  I  walked  about  ten  miles.  To 
condemn  one  without  hearing.  My  friend  is  about  to  marry  a  rich 
woman.  Have  you  fed  that  little  white  dog  of  yours  ?  Mr.  S. 
has  brought  you  a  gold  ring  from  the  city.  I  have  eaten  so 
much  that  I  cannot  go.  "Who  would  have  believed  it?  How 
can  that  be  ?  It  looks  so  very  nice.  "Will  you  have  the  good- 
ness to  ring  the  bell  ?  My  brother  has  taken  three  cups  of  tea, 
and  asks  for  more. 

\.  The  providence  of  God  keeps  us  from  perishing ;  the  power 


EXERCISES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  35 

of  God  prevents  us  doing  those  things  which  displease  him ;  and 
the  goodness  of  God  preserves  us  from  auffering.  2.  There  are 
but  few  people  who  are  satisfied  with  their  lot.  3.  It  is  easy 
to  give  advice,  but  difficult  to  follow  it.  4.  Signor  Domenico, 
believing  himself  a  learned  and  wise  man,  but  not  knowing 
what  to  with  his  knowledge,  made  a  physician  of  himself, 
without  ever  having  studied  medicine.  5.  Even  in  prison,  there 
are  persons  afflicted  to  console,  sick  to  cure,  weak  to  comfort, 
and  strono-  to  confirm.  6.  We  are  oblio;ed  to  confess  that  our 
soul,  mind,  heart,  and  all  our  affections,  have  too  restricted  limits, 
7.  Many  cities  have  desired  to  become  the  capital  of  a  great 
empire.  8.  The  lack  of  maritime  power  is  a  great  injury  to  a 
nation.  9.  We  are  machines  moved  by  habit.  10.  Let  us  write 
from  the  dictation  of  our  heart,  provided  it  is  free  and  uncorrupt. 
11.  We  see  ruined  churches,  castles,  and  convents  of  the  middle 
ages  throughout  all  Europe ;  the  surface  of  Italy  is  covered  with 
them.  12.  "I  stood  at  that  window  palpitating,  shuddering,  and 
staring  about  until  morning,  when  I  descended  oppressed  with  a 
mortal  sadness,  and  imagining  myself  much  more  injured  than  I 
really  was."  13.  It  is  always  sad  to  be  obliged  to  leave  one's 
country  through  misfortune ;  but  to  leave  it  in  chains,  and  be 
carried  into  horrible  climates,  is  so  afflicting  that  no  terms  can 
express  it!  14.  Saint  Nilo,  moved  to  pity  by  the  cruel  treat- 
ment inflicted  on  his  countryman  Filigato,  went  to  the  young 
emperor  Otto,  and,  supplicating  and  weeping,  demanded  mercy 
for  the  prisoner.  15.  The  twins  Romulus  and  Remus,  being 
exposed  by  order  of  the  king,  were  found  and  secretly  educated 
by  a  shepherd  named  Faustolo. 

Exercise  XXIV. 

The  Verbs  andare,  fare,  stare,  and  dare. 

The  sun  sets.  I  have  much  to  do.  Three  months  ago.  I 
have  never  harmed  any  one.  He  will  go  at  daybreak.  He  did 
his  best.     He  will  set  sail  at  three  o'clock.     We  live  a  regular 


36  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

life.  He  did  not  know  how  to  wish  a  happy  new  year.  He  has 
just  published  my  new  work.  That  parrot  has  disturbed  me 
very  much.  She  pretended  not  to  hear  what  the  beggar  said. 
I  beg  you  to  come  to  live  with  us.  We  are  accustomed  to  take 
breakfast  at  seven  o'clock.  Can  you  not  keep  still  ?  Tell  her, 
that  I  say  she  may  do  as  she  likes.  How  she  stands  like  a 
marble  statue  !  How  is  it  that  this  man  is  your  husband  ?  Go 
for  the  doctor.  Mr.  Lewis  has  given  me  a  beautiful  white  hen. 
I  am  on  the  point  of  leaving  for  Europe.  Where  do  you  live  ? 
How  do  you  do  ?  How  is  your  mother  ?  Are  your  sisters  well  ? 
When  I  was  standing  at  the  window,  I  saw  the  soldiers  pass  by. 
Be  quiet,  child !  This  is  the  question.  Stay  as  long  as  you 
please.  Where  does  she  live  ?  This  city  stands  in  a  plain. 
He  is  obliofed  to  live  on  bread  and  water.  These  clothes  cost 
me  twenty  crowns.  Why  are  you  so  thoughtful  ?  I  am  read- 
ing. I  love  to  live  friendly  with  everybody.  When  the  worst 
comes  to  the  worst,  he  will  sell  the  house.  You  must  welcome 
him.  Give  me  good  fruit,  bread,  and  wine,  and  I  shall  be 
satisfied. 

1.  True  dignity  is  not  in  pride.  2.  So  goes  the  world. 
3.  Minerva  gave  the  olive,  fruit  of  a  tree  planted  by  her,  to  the 
inhabitants  of  proud  Athens.  4.  Wild  beasts  are  not  so  cruel  as 
men :  lions  do  not  wage  war  upon  lions,  nor  tigers  upon  tigers  : 
yet  man  alone,  despite  his  reason,  does  that  which  animals  without 
reason  never  do.  5.  Is  there  not  land  enough  to  give  to  all  men 
more  than  they  can  cultivate  ?  6.  If  we  eat  more  food  than  is 
necessary,  it  poisons  instead  of  nourishing  us.  7.  Hasten,  O 
young  man !  to  go  where  destiny  calls :  go  unhesitatingly  to  the 
field  of  battle.  8.  As  represented,  the  frightful  Pluto  was  seated 
upon  a  throne  of  ebony.  9.  Virtue  is  the  greatest  gift  which 
the  good  God  can  give  us.  10.  We  must  not  take  the  life  of  one 
man  into  account,  when  the  safety  of  the  nation  is   at  stake. 

11.  "  Go,  good   mother,  go   to   heaven,  and   find   your   child." 

12.  When  misfortunes  commence  in  a  house,  it  often  happens 
that  even  indifferent  people  fear  for  themselves.      13.  "  Then  I 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION.  37 

saw  how  things  came,  how  they  went,  and  how  they  would  go." 
14.  "This  silence  is  not  to  my  taste,"  said  the  captain;  "it  pre- 
sages no  good."  15.  The  country  of  Phcenecia  is  at  the  foot  of 
the  Lebanon  Mountains,  whose  tops  pierce  the  clouds,  and  go  to 
touch  the  stars.  ,  16.  The  unhappy  father  does  not  know  where 
he  is,  what  he  is  doing,  or  what  he  ought  to  do,  and  goes  calling 
his  lost  son.  17.  True  praise  is  that  which  is  given  in  the 
absence  of  the  person  praised.  18.  Whilst  we  are  in  the  midst 
of  delights,  we  do  not  wish  to  see  or  hear  any  thing  which  can 
interrupt  their  enjoyment. 

Exercise  XXV. 

Adverbs. 

Where  are  you  going?  Where  is  your  stick?  They  are 
often  unhappy.  My  aunt  is  seldom  satisfied.  Henceforth  I 
shall  do  nothing  for  that  family.  They  have  treated  me  most 
ungenerously.  Bravo  my  friend  !  you  have  spoken  very  well.  I 
am  afraid  it  will  be  too  late  to  do  good.  We  will  go  directly. 
Have  you  finished  already?  You  read  newspapers  continually. 
I  shall  finish  in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye.  The  young  man  came 
unexpectedly.  We  seldom  go  out.  I  am  always  in  a  hurry. 
How  quickly  he  moves !  They  must  go  very  soon.  I  heard  of 
it  a  short  time  ago.  They  were  seen  near  the  house.  The  men 
whom  you  wish  to  see  are  not  here.  The  good  general  is  wel- 
come everywhere.  I  am  better  to-day  than  I  was  yesterday. 
Now-a-days  she  is  seldom  at  home.  They  are  constantly  coming 
here.  I  am  almost  asleep.  I  have  waited  a  long  time,  and  she 
does  not  come.  In  general,  he  is  very  proud  to  his  inferiors. 
When  he  leaves,  I  shall  leave  also.  You  are  advised  to  go 
immediately.  At  what  o'clock  does  the  packet  start?  Let  us 
walk  faster.  Write  to  me  immediately.  Without  fail.  They 
can  sleep  here.  Your  rooms  are  ready.  How  much  are  we 
indebted  to  you  ?     It  is  very  disagreeable  to  travel  alone.      T 

4 


38  EXEKCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

have  travelled  this  way  several  times.     With  best  wishes,  yours 
truly.     Do  not  vrait  longer. 

1.  Sextus  v.,  when  he  was  cardinal,  pretended  to  be  extenu- 
ated by  years  and  infirmities,  and  went  very  stooping.  2.  It 
often  happens  that  men  reap  more  advantage  from  their  mistakes, 
than  from  the  good  deeds  they  have  done.  3.  Happy  are  those 
who  have  never  wandered  from  the  straight  road  of  virtue ! 
4.  People  are  continually  talking  of  virtue  and  of  merit,  without 
knowing  what  they  are.  5.  The  wise  man  loves  truth,  and  never 
tells  a  lie.  6.  We  seldom  repent  of  speaking  too  little,  but  often 
of  speaking  too  much.  7.  Cato  the  censor  never  ceased  to  repre- 
sent to  the  Senate  the  sad  consequences  of  luxury.  8.  Perhaps 
there  is  no  greater  absurdity  than  that  so  often  repeated,  of  the 
peace  of  mind  of  the  just.  9.  At  any  rate.  Napoleon  was  cer- 
tainly, in  a  military  point  of  view,  greater  than  Charlemagne,  or 
any  other ;  and  particularly  so  in  the  conception  of  the  wonderful 
campaign  of  1800.  10.  Good-luck,  like  ill-luck,  never  comes 
alone.  11.  Behold  me,  then,  in  a  sort  of  society,  when  1  was 
prepared  for  a  greater  soUtude  than  before.  12.  The  secretary 
was  very  humane,  and  spoke  of  religion  with  affection  and  dignity. 

13.  In  Germany,  priests  are  accustomed  to  dress  like  laymen. 

14.  True  dignity  consists  in  being  ashamed  only  of  mean  actions. 

Exercise  XXVI. 
Promiscuous  Exercises. 

Go !  what  nonsense  (childishness)  !  And  so !  What  is  it  ? 
Speak,  then.  The  man  is  never  satisfied.  Will  you  never  have 
done  ?  The  sky  is  as  fine  now  as  it  ever  was.  He  was  near  his 
end.  Oh,  how  happy  I  am !  He  is  so-so.  Such  like.  Whilst 
you  read,  I  write.  Come  with  me,  and  show  me  where  I  may 
go.  He  goes  so  well.  I  am  very  well.  It  would  go  ill  with 
me  if  I  had  nothing  else  to  live  upon. 

1.  Alas,  how  full  of  contradictions  is  man !  2.  Oh,  how 
pleasant  is  the  sympathy  of  our  fellow-creatures  !     3.    Oh,  how 


EXEKCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION.    .  39 

unjust  are  men,  judging  by  appearances,  and  according  to  their 
owu  superb  prejudices !  4.  O  Italy,  Italy !  when  shall  I  have 
the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again  ?  5.  Oh !  if  I  could  do  it, 
I  would  do  it  willingly.  6.  He  loves  me  because  I  merit  it. 
7.  Oh,  so  !  let  us  speak  of  something  else.  8.  There  is  no  honor- 
able retreat  for  a  gotH|;id  wise  man,  except  in  company  of  the 
Muses.  9.  We  should  never  be  prejudiced  against  a  man 
because  he  has  a  fierce  aspect.  10.  The  rich,  who  have  never 
experienced  want  nor  the  necessity  of  considering  or  paying  for 
the  comforts  of  life,  know  nothing  of  the  pleasure  of  economy. 

11.  Have  you  made  all  your  preparations  for  departure? 
12.  Every  thing  is  ready.  13.  Send  for  a  porter  to  carry  my 
luggage.  14.  I  shall  take  the  railway  omnibus,  and  start  in  five 
minutes.  15.  It  seems  to  me  to  be  very  late.  16.  How  soon 
shall  we  be  at  the  terminus?  17.  I  am  afraid  of  being  too  late 
for  the  nine  o'clock  train.  18.  Here  we  are  at  the  terminus  :  we 
are  never  too  late.  19.  The  train  will  start  in  five  minutes. 
20.  Make  haste  and  take  your  ticket.  21.  What  luggage  have 
you  ?  22.  I  have  two  trunks,  three  carpet-bags,  and  one  hat-box. 
23.  Here  is  the  locomotive  engine  that  is  to  draw  us.  24.  Have 
we  two  engines  ?  25.  It  requires  a  very  great  force  to  draw  a 
train  of  twenty-five  carriages.  26.  What  is  the  power  of  those 
engines  ?  27.  They  are  each  of  twenty-horse  power.  28.  Are 
you  going  by  the  express  train?  29.  No,  this  is  the  accommo- 
dation train.  30.  At  what  o'clock  does  the  baorsrao-e  train  start  ? 
3 1 .  There  are  two  a  day :  one  starts  at  ten  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing, and  the  other  at  three  in  the  afternoon.  32.  Does  your 
father  come  with  us?  33.  No:  he  goes  in  the  express  train. 
34.  Make  haste  :  the  train  is  just  going  to  start.  35.  That  is  the 
signal  for  starting.  We  are  off.  36.  We  are  already  far  from 
the  terminus.  37.  We  have  already  gone  four  or  five  leagues. 
38.  We  have  gone  just  six  miles.  39.  We  went  the  last  mile 
in  two  minutes.  40.  We  go  a  mile  and  a  half  in  a  minute. 
41.  This  is  quick  travelling.  42.  But  for  your  assistance,  I 
Bliould  have  lost  all.     43.  Should  you  have  undertaken  it,  if  you 


40  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

had  thought  it  so  difficult  ?  44.  Persevere,  and  you  will  succeed. 
45.  I  heard  them  firinf]j  all  the  mornino;.  46.  I  felt  her  hand 
trembling  in  mine.  47.  He  saw  his  dog  torn  in  pieces  at  his 
feet.  48.  It  would  be  necessary  for  him  to  see  her.  49.  I 
want  some  sealing-wax.  50.  Do  you  want  any  thing  else? 
51.  We  often  lose  more  time  in  idly  J(|?etting  an  evil  than 
would  be  necessary  to  remedy  it.  52.  I  would  certainly  do  it, 
if  it  were  necessary.      53.  You  might  have  broken  your  neck. 

54.  You    might    have   forwarded   your   letter   by   his    servant. 

55.  He  would  answer  though  he  had  been  advised  not  to  speak. 

56.  It  must  not  be  told  to  any  one.  57.  I  would  not  liave  acted 
thus.    58.  They  would  have  neither  roast  beef  nor  pie.     59.  His 

sister  is  ill :  he  must  go  and  see  her.  60.  The  fact  must 
have  taken  place  an  hour  after  nightfall.  61.  He  owes  me 
now  a  thousand  pounds ;  last  year  he  owed  me  twelve  hundred. 
62.  Always  carry  an  umbrella  when  it  is  fine.  63.  Is  not 
friendship  the  greatest  of  earthly  blessings?  64.  Have  you 
not  been  to  see  the  crater  of  Mount  Vesuvius  ?  65.  Did  you 
not  go  as  far  as  Turin  by  the  railroad  ?  QQ.  Is  your  uncle's 
agent  yet  arrived  ?  67.  Should  you  be  displeased,  if  I  gave  you 
any  more  examples  ?      68.  Do  you  write  to  her  sister  to-day  ? 

69.  He  is   so  silly  and  so  tiresome   that   I   cannot   bear   him. 

70.  He  has  so  much  wealth  that  he  does  not  know  what  to  do 
with  it.  71.  I  like  neither  his  person,  his  family,  nor  his 
fortune.  72.  In  the  sweat  of  thy  brow  shalt  thou  eat  bread  till 
thou  return  to  the  ground  from  whence  thou  wast  taken ;  for 
dust  thou  art,  and  to  dust  thou  shalt  return.  73.  You  shall  not 
speak  English :  you  shall  speak  Italian,  nothing  but  Italian,  with 
your  teacher.  74.  Do  not  go  into  the  current :  you  will  be 
drowned,  as  you  cannot  swim.  75.  I  shall  die  in  a  land  of 
strangers,  and  not  a  tear  will  be  shed  upon  my  grave.  76.  Yes ; 
and  your  death  will  be  just  as  much  felt  in  the  world  as  that  of 
a  worm  or  a  fly.  77.  True  ;  but  it  will  not  be  the  less  a  matter 
of  infinite  moment  to  me.  78.  Speak  well  of  your  friend;  of 
your  enemy,  neither  well  nor  ill.     79.  The  truly  virtuous  man 


EXERCISES    FOR   TRANSLATION.  41 

fears  neither  poverty,  afflictions,  nor  death.  80.  The  poor  man 
has  neither  relatives,  acquaintances,  nor  friends.  81.  Either  say 
nothing  of  the  absent,  or  speak  like  a  friend.  82.  The  good  man 
possesses  a  happiness  which  the  world  can  neither  give  nor  take 
away.  83.  On  the  fifteenth  of  next  month,  when  I  have  won 
tlie  capital  prize.  84.  Chaucer,  the  father  of  English  poetry,  was 
horn  in  thirteen  hundred  and  twenty-eight,  and  died  in  fourteen 
hundred,  in  the  seventy-second  year  of  his  age.  He  had  thus 
lived  in  the  reigns  of  Edward  the  Third,  Richard  the  Second, 
and  Henry  the  Fourth.  85.  Swans  are  an  ornament  to  lakes 
and  rivers.  The  swans  of  Australia  are  black.  86.  Knowledge 
is  the  eye  of  youth,  and  the  staff  of  age.  87.  I  flatter  my- 
self you  will  be  satisfied  with  your  daughter's  pronunciation. 
88.  One  should  avail  one's  self  of  every  opportunity  to  acquire 
knowledge.  89.  Mr.  B.  thinks  himself  a  great  man ;  but  he 
deceives  himself  90.  The  horseman  and  horse  that  fell  down 
the  precipice  are  both  dead.  91.  Is  this  the  lady  from  whom 
you  received  the  letter  which  you  mentioned?  92.  That  is  the 
goldsmith  by  whom  this  ring  was  made.  93.  The  fruit  of  that 
forbidden  tree,  whose  mortal  taste  brought  death  into  the  world. 
94.  The  lishtnina:  has  blasted  that  beautiful  tree,  the  fruit  of 
which  was  so  delicious.  95.  Never  defer  till  to-morrow  what 
you  can  do  to-day.  96.  Shun  poverty:  whatever  be  your  in- 
come, spend  less.  97.  This  is  bad ;  that  is  worse  :  these  are  so-so ; 
those  are  the  worst  of  all.  98.  There  is  but  one  lasting  afflic- 
tion, —  that  which  is  caused  by  the  loss  of  self-esteem.  99.  Share 
this  melon  with  your  play-fellows;  give  each  of  them  a  slice. 
1 00,  My  brothers  are  both  returned  from  college;  each  has 
obtained  a  prize.  101.  All  fools  are  not  knaves ;  but  all  knaves 
are  fools.  102.  Mr.  A.  has  failed:  shall  you  lose  the  money  he 
owes  you?  103.  I  shall  have  published  the  second  edition  of 
my  Dictionary  before  the  end  of  the  year.  104.  When  you  have 
studied  Italian  two  years,  you  will  understand  what  you  read. 
105.  He  will  have  spent  half  his  fortune  before  inheriting  it. 
lOG.    He  who  listens  through  a  hole  may  hear  what  will  not 


42  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

please  him.  107.  "  Doctor,  may  ma  eat  oysters  for. supper?" 
"  Yes :  she  may  eat  shells  and  all,  if  she  likes."  108.  My  brother 
might  have  made  a  fortune  by  his  trade.  109.  Before  you  say 
or  do  any  thing,  reflect  what  the  consequences  may  be.  110.  If 
I  went  by  the  steamer,  I  should  be  sea-sick.  111.  You  would 
arrive  sooner  if  you  went  by  the  mail.  112.  While  you  are 
passing  through  the  Tunnel  under  the  Thames,  hundreds  of  large 
ships  are  sailing  over  your  head.  113.  Since  habit  is  a  second 
nature,  let  us  early  form  good  ones.  114.  The  universe  is  com- 
posed of  two  things  only,  —  mind  and  matter.  115.  In  educating 
the  mind,  we  should  not  forget  to  educate  the  heart.  116.  In 
Italy  the  eye  sees  much,  but  the  memory  more.  117.  Victoria 
the  First,  Queen  of  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and 
Ireland,  is  the  grand-daughter  of  George  the  Third,  and  the 
neice  of  King  William  the  Fourth.  118.  The  Arabs  call  the 
camel  the  ship  of  the  desert.  119.  Egypt  was  the  cradle  of 
arts  and  sciences.  120.  There  are,  in  your  exercise,  as  many 
errors  as  words.  121.  The  prospect  brightens  as  you  ascend. 
122.  Beauty  is  potent,  but  money  is  omnipotent.  123.  Though 
I  had  written  the  letter,  I  had  not  forwarded  it.  124.  He  is  still 
rich,  notwithstanding  his  losses.  125.  He  has  acted  an  unworthy 
part:  nevertheless  I  will  assist  him.  126.  I  forgive  him,  on  con- 
dition that  I  never  see  him  more.  127.  Tell  the  truth:  other- 
wise you  will  be  despised  by  every  one.  128.  She  was  both 
young  and  lovely,  and  rich  also.  129.  The  earth  is  divided  into 
five  parts;  namely,  Europe,  Asia,  etc.  130.  You  might  learn  a 
great  many  things:  as,  for  instance,  music,  painting,  etc.  131.  It 
has  happened  just  as  I  expected.  132.  Whence  comes  it  that 
you  are  so  melancholy?  133.  You  are  young  and  inexperi- 
enced :  therefore  you  ought  to  be  guided  by  the  advice  of  your 
elders.  134.  You  have  promised:  then  you  must  perform. 
135.  Since  she  has  written  to  you,  you  must  reply. 


i 


EXERCISES   FOR    TRANSLATION.  43 

The  pagan  gods  chose  various  trees.  The  oak  pleased  Jupiter ; 
the  ash,  IMars ;  the  pine,  Cybele ;  the  poplar-tree,  Hercules ;  and 
the  laurel,  Apollo.  Minerva  and  Pallas  asked  why  they  took 
unfruitful  trees.  Jupiter  replied,  "  On  account  of  the  honor." 
"  Say  what  you  will,"  added  Pallas,  ''  I  like  the  olive  on  account 
of  its  fruit."  "  You  are  right,  dear  daughter,"  replied  Jupiter ; 
and  immediately  they  all  called  her  the  Goddess  of  Wisdom, 
because,  if  what  we  do  is  useless,  the  honor  is  vain. 


The  celebrated  Venetian  painter,  Titian,  let  his  pencil  fall 
whilst  painting  the  Emperor  Charles  V.  The  emperor  picked 
it  up  immediately,  saying,  "  A  Titian  merits  to  be  served  by  an 
emperor."  There  are  few  fine  galleries  where  pictures  of 
Titian   and    CoiTeggio   are   not   to   be   found. 


Aspasia  of  Miletus  was  celebrated  in  Athens  for  her  wit  and 
her  beauty.  She  was  so  skilful  in  eloquence  and  politics,  that 
Socrates  himself  took  lessons  of  her.  She  was  the  teacher  and 
wife  of  Pericles,  and  lived  428  years  before  the  Christian  era. 


Count  Mansfield,  one  of  the  greatest  captains  of  the  age,  had 
certain  proofs  that  an  apothecary  had  received  a  considerable 
sum  to  poison  him.  He  sent  for  him ;  and,  when  he  appeared 
before  him,  he  said,  "  My  friend,  I  cannot  believe  that  a  person 
whom  I  have  never  injured  should  wish  to  take  my  life.  If 
necessity  induces  you  to  commit  such  a  crime,  here  is  money :  be 
honest." 

Whilst  a  countryman  was  sowing  his  field,  a  young  man 
passed  by,  who,  trying  to  be  witty,  said  with  rather  an  insolent 
air,  "  Good  man,  you  have  to  sow,  and  ive  reap  the  fruits  of  your 
labors."  To  which  the  countryman  replied,  "  It  is  very  prob- 
able, sir;  for  I  am  sowing  hemp." 


44  EXERCISES   FOR   TRANSLATION. 

A  young  man  of  distinction,  having  just  returned  from  mak- 
ing the  tour  of  Europe,  and  using  the  privilege  of  travellers 
to  embellish  things  with  the  flowers  of  invention,  was  telling  an 
officer,  one  day,  of  the  magnificent  presents  which  he  had 
received  from  different  reigning  princes  ;  among  others,  he  men- 
tioned a  very  superb  bridle,  which  had  been  given  to  him  by  the 
King  of  France.  "  It  is  so  elegantly  ornamented  with  gold  and 
precious  stones,"  said  he,  "  that  I  cannot  persuade  myself  to  put 
it  into  my  horse's  mouth ;  what  can  I  do  with  it  ?  "  —  "  Put  it  into 
your  own  "  (mouth),  replied  the  officer  with  whom  the  traveller 
was  speaking. 


Printed  by  John  Wilson  &  Son. 


I 


TESTIMONIALS. 


New  York,  February,  J  866. 

I  have  used  "  Otto's  French  Grammar  "  since  its  publication,  and 
consider  it  the  best  book  on  the  subject.  It  is  based  on  the  most 
modern  grammars  pubHshed  in  Paris ;  it  is  thorough,  and  full  of 
idiomatical  expressions  that  can  be  found  in  no  other  work. 

LUCIEN  OUDIN,  A.M. 
Instructor  of  the  French  Langitage,  N.  Y,  Free  Academy. 


I  have  used  "  Otto's  German  Grammar."  I  consider  it  a  very 
good  book ;  its  abundant  vocabularies,  and  its  fulness  in  idioms, 
are  especially  useful.  The  appendix,  also,  is  very  valuable,  con- 
taining, as  it  does,  some  of  the  most  popular  and  characteristic 
German  poems,  which  may  be  turned  to  many  uses. 
Feb.  1,  1865.  ADOLPH  WERNER, 

Professor  of  German,  New -York  Free  Acade7ny. 


Washington  University    St.  Louis,  Jan.  2,  1865. 

Mr.  S.  R.  Urbino, 

Dear  Sir,  —  It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  inform  you  that  I 
have  introduced  your  edition  of  "Otto's  German  Grammar"  in 
my  classes  in  this  University,  and  that  I  regard  it  as  the  very  best 
German  grammar,  for  school  purposes,  that  has  thus  far  come  to 
my  notice.  Your  Grerman  editions  of  the  "Immensee,"  "  Vergiss- 
meinnicht,"  and  "  Irrlichter,"  are  great  favorites  among  my  pupils  ; 
»nd  your  "  College  Series  of  Modern  French  Plays,"  edited  by 
Mr.  Ferdinand  Bocher  of  Harvard  College,  I  regard  as  very  useful 
for  the  recitation-room,  and  for  private  reading. 

Yours  very  truly, 

B.  L.  TAFEL,  Ph.  D. 
*rofe$sor  of  Modern  Languages  and    Comparative    Philology  in    Washingtom 
University. 


I  use  "  Otto's  French  and  German  Grammar "  at  our  College 
and  the  Collegiate  School,  and  can  confidently  recommend  it  to  all 
similar  institutions. 

October,  1864.  H.  STIEFELHAGEN, 

Frofessor  Modern  Languages  at  Eing^s  College,  Windsor^  Nova  Scotia. 

1  have  examined  many  works  designed  for  pupils  studying  the 
French  Language,  and  among  them  consider  "  Otto's  French  Con- 
Tersation  Grammar,"  revised  by  Bocher,  superior  to  any  other. 
I  use  it  in  my  classes,  and  take  pleasure  in  recommending  it  as 
admirably  adapted  for  the  purpose. 

A.  WERTHEIM, 
Fro/essor  of  Modern  Languages  at  the  University ^  Louisville,  Kentucky. 

Among  many  works  designed  for  pupils  studying  the  German 
language,  I  consider  "  Otto's  German  Conversation  Grammar " 
superior  to  any  other.  I  use  it  in  my  classes,  and  take  great 
pleasure  in  recommending  it  as  the  best  work  which  has  yet  been 
pubHshed  for  the  use  of  schools. 

A.  WERTHEIM, 
I^o/essor  of  Modem  Languages,  Louisville,  Ky. 

Boston,  March,  1865. 
Mr.  Uebino,  Boston. 

My  dear  Sir,  —  "  Otto's  French  Grammar  "  revised  by  Prof. 
F.  Bocher,  is  the  best  Instructor  ever  pubUshed ;  at  present,  it  sur- 
passes Fasquelle  and  the  Ollendorf  System,  by  its  simphcity.  It 
has  the  advantage  of  teUing,  in  one  page,  what  the  others  require 
three  or  four  to  express.  The  rules  for  the  pronunciation  do  honor 
to  the  reviser ;  besides,  the  lessons  are  so  well  placed,  and  so  pro- 
gressive, that  they  bring  the  student  into  the  difficulties  of  our 
language  with  very  little  exertion.  At  last,  permit  me  to  thank 
you  for  taking,  by  this  pubhcation,  the  most  tedious  part  of  our 
labor  as  teacher.  It  is  so  clear,  tliat  any  one  could  teach  the 
Vrench  Language  without  difficulty. 

I  remain,  Sir,  yours, 

P.  J.  BORIS, 

Professor  of  French  Language, 

ld«  Boylston  Place,  Boston. 


Marlbobo',  Mass  ,  April  9,  1866 
S.  R.   Urbino,  Esq. 

Dear  Sir,  —  I  used  Otto's  Grammar  in  two  classes  at  Edgar- 
town  High  School,  —  one  class  quite  advanced.  The  testimonial 
of  Mr.  Hunt  and  others  expresses  my  sentiments,  and  you  may 
use  my  name  if  you  choose. 

Yours  truly, 

A.   H.   WENZEL, 
I^rincipal  qf  Marlboro''  High  School,  late  Principal  of 
Edgarlovm  High  School. 


WoBURN,  April  12,  1866. 
Mr.  Uebino. 

Dear  Sir,  —  The  opinion  of  Messrs.  Hunt  and  others  with 

respect  to  the  merits  of  Otto's  French  Grammar,  I  indorse  in 

fiiU. 

Yours  truly, 

THOMAS  EMERSON. 

Master  of  Woburn  High  School. 


^.  R.  Urbino,  Esq. 

My  Dear  Sir,  —  I  am  now  using  Otto's  French  Grammar, 
revised  by  Prof.  Bocher ;  and,  so  far  as  we  have  advanced,  I  am 
better  pleased  with  it  than  with  any  other  work  of  the  kind  which 
I  have  previously  used. 

Yours  truly, 

GEORGE  N.  BIGELOW, 

Principat. 
State  Nor>iAl  School,  Framinoham, 

April  16,  1866. 

Boston,  April  16. 
Mr.  Urbino. 

Dear  Sir,  —  I  have  used  Otto's  French  Grammar  for  several 

years  in  all  my  schools, -and  find  it  much  superior  to  all  those  which 

I  have  as  yet  seen,  for  the  simplicity  and  clearness  with  wliich  the 

rules  are  explained. 

I  am  happy  to  say,  also,  that  your  series  of  French  Comedies 

and  your  other  French  books  can  be  highly  recommended  for  school 

and  private  reading  :  they  are  well  selected. 

Yours  truly, 

O.  BESSAU. 


Kew  Haven,  Conn.,  April,  1866 

S.  R.  Urbino,  Esq. 

Dear  Sir,  —  I  thank  yotl  for  the  specimens  of  your  French 
and  German  series,  which  you  have  been  kind  enougli  to  send  me 
from  time  to  time.  You  are  doing,  as  it  appears  to  me,  a  leal 
service  to  the  study  of  these  two  languages,  especially  of  thp 
German,  in  our  country,  by  putting  at  reasonable  prices  so  excel- 
lent editions  of  classical  and  unexceptionable  texts  witliin  the  easy 
reach  of  teachers  and  scholars.  I  have  used  several  of  them  in 
my  classes,  and  can  heartily  recommend  them  to  instructors  of 
pupils  of  every  grade. 

I  am,  sir,  very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 

WILLIAM  D.  WHITNEY, 
Prqf,  of  Sanscrit  and  Instructor  in  Modern  Languages  at  Yale  College. 


Otto's  French  Conversation  Grammar.     Revised  by  Ferdi- 
nand Bocher.    Boston :  S.  R.  Urbino. 

It  is  with  great  pleasure  that  we  direct  the  attention  of  all  lovers 
of  the  French  language  to  this  pubUcation.  ...  It  is  particularly 
fit  for  a  text-book  in  our  schools,  for  the  following  reasons  :  1,  It 
is  short,  without  being  superficial.  2,  It  is  logically  arranged. 
3,  Its  course  of  instruction  is  a  progress,  in  a  natural  gradation, 
from  the  easy  to  the  diflBcult.  4,  Theory  and  practice  go  hand  in 
hand.  5,  Its  outside  appearance  does  credit  to  the  publishers.  — 
Michigan  Teacher,  May,  1866. 


Bates  College,  June  9,  1866. 
S.  R.  Urbino,  Esq. 

Dear  Sir, — Will  you  allow  me  to  thank  you  for  calling  my 

attention  to   Otto's  French   Grammar,  edited  by  Prof  Boclier'? 

We  have  used  it  thus  far  this  year  with  entire  satisfaction.    It 

will  be  but  simple  justice  to  award  it  the  first  place  as  a  text-book 

for  mature  students,  at  least  among  all  with  which  I  am  acquainted, 

whether  published  in  this  country  or  in  Europe.    Its  chapter  on 

Pronunciation  is  surpassingly  complete  and  practical. 

Gratefully  yours, 

B.  F.  HAYES. 


Enolish  High  School, 

Boston,  March  31,  1866. 
Mr.  Ubbino. 

Dear  Sir, — After  a  six  months*  trial,  we  conclude  that  Otto's 

French  Grammar,  revised  by  Bocher,  is  superior  in  all  respects 

to  any  other  of  which  we  have  knowledge. 

Very  respectfully  yours, 

E.    HUNT, 

WILLIAM  NICHOLS,  Jr., 
ROBERT   EDWARD   BABSON, 
THOMAS   SHERWIN,  Jr., 

Teachers  in  Enylish  High  School. 

I  fully  and  emphatically  indorse  the  above  opinion  respecting 

Otto's  Erench  Grammar. 

JOHN  D.   PHILBRICK, 

Superintendent  of  Public  Schools 


State  Normal  School. 

Salem,  Mass,  April  3,  1866. 
S.  R.   Urbino,  Esq. 

My  Dear  Sir,  —  We  are  using  in  our  school  several  of  your 

publications  with  much  satisfaction.     This  is  especially  the  case 

with  Otto's  French  Grammar.     As  a  class  text-book,  this  grammar 

is,  in  my  opinion,  the  best  in  the  market. 

For  the  excellence  of  your  school-books,  both  as  to  matter  and 

typographical  beauty,  you  richly  merit  the  gratitude  of  teachers 

and  pupils. 

Yours  truly, 

D.  B.  HAGAR. 


Cambridge,  April  6, 1866. 
Mr.  S.  R.   Urbino. 

Dear  Sir,  —  Otto's  French  Grammar,  revised  by  Bocher,  which 
we  have  been  trying  with  a  class  in  our  "shorter  course  of  study," 
has  been  adopted  for  all  our  French  classes,  in  place  of  Fasquelle's 
book.  We  can  heartily  indorse  the  testimonial  from  the  teachers 
in  t^e  Boston  High  School. 

Yours  truly, 

W.  J.  ROLFE, 
Mailer  of  iMmbridtje  High  SchooL 


Vassar  Female  College, 
PouGHKEEPSiE,  N.Y.,  April  19,  1866. 
Mr   Urrino. 

Dear  Sir,  —  I  am  now  using  many  of  your  publications  in 
this  college,  of  which  I  am  particulariy  pleased  with  the  German 
and  Italian  Grammars,  and  with  Bocher's  College  Series  of  French 
Plays.  Otto's  German  Grammar,  I  regard  as  a  model  of  scholarly 
thoroughness  and  practical  utility  ;  and  the  other  works  of  your 
list,  as  far  as  I  have  examined  them,  recommend  themselves,  not 
only  by  the  beauty  of  their  mechanical  execution,  but  also  by  the 
intrinsic  merit  of  their  redaction. 

Very  truly  yours, 

W.  I.  KNAPP, 
Professor  of  Ancient  and  Modern  Languages  and  Literature. 


State  University  of  Michigaw, 

April  20,  1866. 

I  have  adopted  Otto's  German  Conversation  Grammar  as  a  text- 
book in  this  University,  and  have  no  hesitation  in  recommending  it 
as  by  far  the  best  grammar  of  the  German  language  published  in 
this  country.  No  other  work  with  which  I  am  acquainted  pre- 
sents such  a  happy  combination  of  what  are  called  the  Analytic 
and  Synthetic  methods  of  instruction.  The  statement  of  princi- 
ples is  clear  and  philosophical ;  and  the  examples  which  illustrate 
the  niceties  of  their  application  are  all  that  could  be  desired. 
The  French  Grammar,  by  the  same  author,  is  similar  in  plan,  and 
possesses  equal  excellences. 

I  have  examined  the  standard  educational  works  for  the  study  of 
foreign  languages,  published  by  S.  R.  Urbino,  and  take  pleasure  in 
recommending  them  to  all  students  of  the  languages  and  litera- 
tures of  Europe.  They  are  well  selected,  amply  elucidated  by 
English  notes,  and,  in  convenience  of  form  and  excellence  of 

typographTj  are  all  that  could  be  desired. 

E.  P.  EVAl^S, 

Professor  of  Modern  Languages  and  Literature. 


S.  R.  URBINO,  Publisher, 

14  Bromfidd  Street,  Boston- 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 

University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richnnond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
5"/ 6^^642-6753 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days 

prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


nCT  1  5  1992 


I 


YB  41889 


U.  C.  BERK 


EL 


EY 


LIBRARIES 


CDbim3DDM 


r 


7  7  V^/-^ 


/ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


% 


